Ed3053g622 Chartpilot 1100 New Performance [PDF]

Zitiervorschau

Operating Instructions

CHARTPILOT Software Version 6.1x

Item No.:ED 3053 G 622

Revision: 01 (2009-06)

Order No.:390005725

This document is our property for which we reserve all rights, including those relating to patents or registered designs. It must not be reproduced or used otherwise or made available to any third party without our prior permission in writing. Alterations due to technical progress are reserved. SAM Electronics GmbH D - 22763 Hamburg Service Customer Support Center Telephone:+ 49 (0) 18 03 00 85 53 Telefax:+ 49 (0) 18 03 00 85 54 e-mail:[email protected]

b_cp_eti.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

General Safety Precautions

General Safety Precautions when Using the CHARTPILOT The CHARTPILOT combines nautical data from the planning stage right up to voyage monitoring and, if necessary, automatic track control, and displays these data in context at various workplaces. This increases the safety of ship-handling and reduces the workload of the bridge personnel. However, the use of the CHARTPILOT does not release the operator from the obligation to handle the ship in accordance with the rules of good seamanship, i.e. to monitor the course, speed and position of the ship regularly with all other available aids too and to check that the navigation system is working properly.

Even when this modern navigation equipment is being used, nonobservance of the safety precautions can lead to unnoticed deviation from the planned track, thus causing danger to shipping.

When the CHARTPILOT is being used, the following points must be observed: 1. 2. 3. 4.

5. 6.

The CHARTPILOT may be used and operated only by qualified personnel who have been trained to operate the system. Correct interpretation of indicated data requires knowledge about the implemented Consistent Common Reference System (CCRS) See 1.2 for more information. Operators must continually keep themselves informed about the nautical situation of the ship and about the status of the system. Alarms (visual alarms, acoustic alarms, messages) provide information that is relevant to safety. The Alarms displayed on the CHARTPILOT relating to the nautical situation and to faults in the system and in the sensors and/or actuators connected to it must be observed. When alarms occur, the operator must immediately obtain a clear overview of their causes, the system status and possible reactions of the system, and - if necessary - must immediately take all of the necessary actions for avoidance of possible danger. Only then may alarms be cancelled. Before electronic charts fed into the CHARTPILOT are used, they must be checked by the operator to make certain that they are in agreement with the official charts. The courses planned or displayed by means of the CHARTPILOT must be continuously checked by the operator with regard to traffic safety and taking account of the official charts.

Notes about system functions (for further details, see individual documents of the connected items of equipment): • • •

Position data are dependent on the accuracy and proper functioning of the selected position sensor. Connected position sensors must fulfil the standard IEC 61162-1. ARPA target data received from a connected radar are directly dependent upon the accuracy and proper functioning of the selected speed sensor and the gyro compass.

•

Drift compensation by a TRACKPILOT (if there is one connected) takes place in particular modes only.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_esh.fm / 12.08.09

3

CHARTPILOT General Safety Precautions

4

Operating Instructions

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_esh.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

List of Contents

List of Contents General Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 List of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 List of Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 List of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Part I Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5

2 2.1 2.2 2.3

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 The Functions of the CHARTPILOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 The Consistent Common Reference System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 The Components of the CHARTPILOT and its Variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Current IHO standards / Regulatory Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Switching the CHARTPILOT On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Switching the CHARTPILOT On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Switch-Over of the Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Switching the CHARTPILOT Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Part II CHARTPILOT as ECDIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.3.1 3.3.3.2 3.3.4 3.3.5 3.4 3.5 3.5.1 3.5.2 3.5.3 3.5.4 3.5.4.1 3.5.4.2 3.5.4.3 3.5.4.4 3.5.4.5 3.5.4.6 3.5.4.7 3.5.4.8 3.5.4.9 3.5.4.10 3.5.4.11 3.5.4.12 3.5.4.13 3.5.4.14 3.5.4.15

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Operating Unit; Trackball and Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 The Operating Elements on the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Individual Elements and their Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Operating Procedure using the Keyboard instead of the Trackball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Hierarchical Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Context Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 The Function Overview (Tree) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Inputting Numerical Values and Editing Texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 The Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Division of the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 The Basic Menu Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 The Navigation Data Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 The Chart Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Division, Individual Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Overview of Graphic Elements and their Setting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Cursor and Digitizer Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Range Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Bearing Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Scale Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Event Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Position Fix Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Own Ship Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 ARPA Targets and AIS Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Pre-planned Tracks with their Waypoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Waypoints from Waypoint Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 User Chart Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_eiv.fm / 12.08.09

5

CHARTPILOT List of Contents

3.5.4.16 3.5.5 3.5.6 3.5.7 3.6 3.7 3.8

4 4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.1.4 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 4.2.4.1 4.2.4.2 4.2.5 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 4.4 4.4.1 4.4.2 4.4.2.1 4.4.2.2 4.4.3 4.4.4 4.4.5 4.5 4.6 4.6.1 4.6.2 4.6.3 4.6.4 4.6.5 4.6.6 4.7 4.7.1 4.7.2 4.7.3 4.7.4 4.8 4.9 4.10 4.11 4.12 4.12.1 4.12.2

6

Operating Instructions

Aids-to-Navigation and Base Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Displays and Pilot Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Alarm List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Info Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Removable Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

63 64 69 70 73 73 77

Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 General Information about Electronic Charts and User Chart Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Switching On the Display of the Chart and Selecting the Chart Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Chart Types: Legal Aspects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Vector Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Raster Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Basic Setting for the Situation Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Adapting the Display and Illumination to Suit the Room Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Adjusting the Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Selection and Setting of the Raster Chart to be Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Display Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Monitoring Display Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Planning Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Setting the Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Settings of the Electronic Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Defining the Objects to be Displayed in the Vector Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Defining the Depth Contours to be Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Switching the display of the User Chart Objects on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 ECDIS Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Track Monitoring: Own Ship against the System Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Chart Monitoring: Own Ship against Vector Chart and User Chart Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Monitoring on the Basis of a Vector Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Monitoring against User Chart Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Chart Monitoring: System Track against Vector Chart and User Chart Objects . . . . . . . . . 110 Track Monitoring: Depth Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Anchor Watch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Determination of Positions, Bearings and Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Automatic Identification System (AIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Treatment of the AIS Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Specifying / Viewing Own AIS Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Long-Range Interrogation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 AIS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Navigational Information from Telex (NAVTEX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 NAVTEX Summarised Briefly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 NAVTEX on CHARTPILOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Displaying received NAVTEX messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Extracting Geographical Data from NAVTEX Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Trial Manoeuvres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Marking an Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 The Marking of Position Fixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Using Lines of Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Selection and Setting of the Navigation Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Course Transfer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Selection of the Speed Sensor; Input of Own Speed and Drift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_eiv.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

4.12.3 4.12.4 4.12.5 4.13 4.13.1 4.13.2

5 5.1 5.1.1 5.1.2 5.1.3 5.1.4 5.1.5 5.1.6 5.1.6.1 5.1.6.2 5.1.7 5.1.8 5.1.9 5.1.9.1 5.1.9.2 5.1.9.3 5.1.10 5.1.11 5.1.12 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 5.2.4.1 5.2.4.2 5.2.5 5.3 5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.4.4 5.5 5.5.1 5.5.2 5.5.3 5.5.3.1 5.5.3.2 5.5.4 5.5.4.1 5.5.4.2 5.5.5 5.5.6 5.5.7 5.5.8

6

List of Contents

Selection of the Position Sensor; Settings to Determine the Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Manual Correction of the Position (Position Adjust) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Setting the Time Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Chartpilot with Local Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Local Sensors Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Switchover between System Sensors and Local Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Voyage Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 General Information about Pre-planned Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Generation, Handling and Administration of the Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Preparing the Generation or Modification of the Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Setting Up the Digitizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Generating Waypoints by Means of the Electronic Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Generating Waypoints Alphanumerically in Text Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Generation of Waypoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Generating Waypoints with the Digitizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Editing Waypoint Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Checking of Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Geometrical Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Check against the Electronic Chart and the User Chart Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Computation of Sailing Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Completing the Generation of the Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Printing Out Track Data in List Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Generating Waypoint Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Editing of User Chart Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Editing of Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Editing of Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Editing of Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Editing Danger Highlights and Feature Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Editing Anchor Watch Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Editing of Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Editing of Manual Updates of the ENC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Editing Cells of Own Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Characteristics of Own Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Preparation for Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Editing of Own Chart Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Ending the Editing Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Generation of Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 General Information about Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Generation, Handling and Administration of Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Generating Map Lines and Symbols by Means of the Electronic Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Map Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Generating Map Lines and Symbols with the Digitizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Map Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Generating Map Lines Alphanumerically in Text Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Generating Symbols Alphanumerically in Text Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Completing the Generation of the Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Printing Out Map Data in List Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Voyage Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_eiv.fm / 12.08.09

7

CHARTPILOT List of Contents

6.1 6.1.1 6.1.2 6.1.3 6.1.4 6.1.5 6.2

7 7.1 7.1.1 7.1.2 7.1.3 7.2 7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.3 7.2.4 7.2.5 7.2.6 7.2.6.1 7.2.6.2 7.2.6.3 7.2.7 7.2.8 7.2.9 7.2.10 7.3 7.3.1 7.3.2 7.3.3 7.3.4 7.3.5 7.3.6 7.3.7 7.3.8 7.3.9 7.3.10 7.3.11 7.3.12 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.6.1 7.6.2 7.6.3 7.6.4 7.6.5 7.6.6 7.6.7 7.7 7.7.1 7.7.1.1 7.7.1.2 7.7.1.3

8

Operating Instructions

Voyage Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining the System Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning and Achieving the Voyage Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generating the Passage Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing Out Time Schedule Planning Data in List Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activating the Passage Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changes in the Voyage Planning and in the Track during the Voyage . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

229 229 232 235 239 240 240

Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting, Background Operation and Ending the Chart Maintenance Subroutine . . . . . . . . The World Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switching Over to Planning Display Mode at a Marked Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common Aspects of the Various Chart Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procuring the Subscription, Permits and Licences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transferring and Updating the Charts or Cell Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting the Charts or Cell Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting the Product List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the Charts or Cell Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection according to Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection according to Navigational Purposes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection according to Agency Codes and to Cell Names / Chart Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying Information about a Cell / Chart / Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the Available Hard-Disk Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Errors Caused by Dirty CDs/DVDs, CD/DVD Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Maintenance of the ENC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Permits for Licensed ENC cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Removable Device to Local Database Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Local to Other Databases . . . . . . . . . . Update Function: Update of IHO ENC Cells on All Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Real Time Update (RTU) for C-MAP ENC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Update Function: Update of the C-MAP ENC Cells on All Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Divergent Procedures for Transfer and Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting ENC Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Later Update of an Individual Equipment Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Check of the ENC Cells Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other Useful Information about the Data Maintenance of the IHO ENC Cells . . . . . . . . . . . Other Useful Information about the Data Maintenance of C-MAP ENC Cells . . . . . . . . . . . Data Maintenance of the Manual ENC Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Maintenance of Own Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Maintenance of the ARCS Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Licence and Permits for ARCS Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Function: Transferring All ARCS Charts from CD to Local Database . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Function: Transferring All ARCS Charts from Local to Other Databases . . . . . . . Update Function: Update of the ARCS Charts on All Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Divergent Procedures for Transfer and Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting ARCS Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Later Update of an Individual Equipment Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Maintenance of the CM-93/3Pro Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Licences for CM-93/3Pro Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . First Procurement of Subscription Licences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . First Procurement of Purchase Licences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Subsequent Procurement of Further Licences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

243 244 245 247 247 247 248 249 251 252 252 253 254 254 257 257 259 259 259 261 266 267 268 270 271 272 275 276 276 277 286 287 288 288 288 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 302 302

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_eiv.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

7.7.1.4 7.7.1.5 7.7.2 7.7.3 7.7.4 7.7.5 7.7.6 7.7.7 7.7.8 7.7.9 7.8 7.8.1 7.8.2 7.8.3 7.8.4 7.8.5

8 8.1 8.1.1 8.1.1.1 8.1.1.2 8.1.2 8.1.3 8.1.4 8.1.5 8.1.6 8.2 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.3 8.3.1 8.3.2 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7

9 9.1 9.2 9.2.1 9.2.2

List of Contents

Installing the Licences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Useful Information about Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Transfer Function: Transferring All CM-93/3Pro Cells from Medium to Local Database . . . 306 Transfer Function: Transferring All CM-93/3Pro Cells from Local to Other Databases . . . . 307 Real Time Update (RTU) for Jeppesen Marine ENC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Update Function: Update of the CM-93/3Pro Cells on All Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Divergent Procedures for Transfer and Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Deleting CM-93/3Pro Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Check of the CM-93/3Pro Cells Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Other Useful Information about the Data Maintenance of Jeppesen Marine CM-93/3Pro Cells 311 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/2 Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Taking Out a Subscription for CM-93/2 Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Transferring Cells of the CM-93/2 Chart from CD to Local Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Transferring All CM-93/2 Cells from Local to Other Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Divergent Procedures for Transfer and Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Deleting Cells of the CM-93/2 Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Management of the Track, Waypoint, Map and User Chart Objects Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Maintaining Order in the Catalogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Track, Map and Waypoint Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Files of the User Chart Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Data Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Restoring Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Transfer of Track and Waypoint Files by E-Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Reception of Track Files from a Connected Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Converting Objects of the Map into User Chart Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Text Pages; Lists and Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Generating and Using the Text Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Management of the Text Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Voyage Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Performing of Voyage Recording, Management of Recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Replay of a Voyage Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Protocol Prints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Determination and Back-Up of the System Parameterisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Determining the System Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Making System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Alarm Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 List of Alarms, Warnings and Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 AIS Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 NAVTEX Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

Part III CHARTPILOT as Conning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 10

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

11

The Displays of the Conning Display and their Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4

12 12.1

The Navigation Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 The Docking Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 The Keel Clearance Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 The Data Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

Auxiliary Functions, Conning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 Performing Nautical Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_eiv.fm / 12.08.09

9

CHARTPILOT List of Contents

12.1.1 12.1.2 12.1.3 12.1.4 12.1.5 12.1.6 12.2

Operating Instructions

Performing a Position-Reckoning Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculating the Rendezvous Point of Two Ships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solving Current-Sailing Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Support for the Measured Mile Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Determining the Data of Sunrises and Sunsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Determination of the Data of Fixed Stars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generating the Pilot Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

384 385 386 387 388 390 391

Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 A

B C D E F G H

Care and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....................................... ....................................... ....................................... ....................................... Alarm Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Recorded during Voyage Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conversion of the Map Objects into User Chart Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays of the UPS, Model DLP100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays of the UPS, Model DLP150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays of the UPS, Model Series DLG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keyboard Templates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

A1 A2 A3 A4

Cleaning/Exchanging the Filter Pads . . . . . . . . . . Checking the Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Check of the Monitor Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning the CDs and the Optics of the CD Drive .

397 397 397 397 399 401 403 405 407 409 411 413

Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

10

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_eiv.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

List of Figures

List of Figures Fig. 3-1 Fig. 3-2 Fig. 3-3 Fig. 3-4 Fig. 3-5 Fig. 3-6 Fig. 3-7 Fig. 3-8 Fig. 3-9 Fig. 3-10 Fig. 3-11 Fig. 3-12 Fig. 3-13 Fig. 3-14 Fig. 3-15 Fig. 3-16 Fig. 3-17 Fig. 3-18 Fig. 3-19 Fig. 3-20 Fig. 3-21 Fig. 3-22 Fig. 3-23 Fig. 3-24 Fig. 3-25 Fig. 3-26 Fig. 3-27 Fig. 4-1 Fig. 4-2 Fig. 4-3 Fig. 4-4 Fig. 4-5 Fig. 4-6 Fig. 4-7 Fig. 4-8 Fig. 4-9 Fig. 4-10 Fig. 4-11 Fig. 4-12 Fig. 4-13 Fig. 4-14 Fig. 4-15 Fig. 4-16 Fig. 4-17 Fig. 4-18 Fig. 4-19 Fig. 4-20 Fig. 4-21 Fig. 4-22 Fig. 4-23 Fig. 4-24 Fig. 4-25

The various operating devices for cursor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 The top menu appearing in the right-hand side strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Basic structure of a menu from the menu hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Example of a context menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 The tree in Chart Mode (CHARTPILOT in the NACOS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 The Tree in Chart Mode (CHARTPILOT without TRACKPILOT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Screen division in Chart Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 The basic menu line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 The navigation data line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 The Presentation > Display Settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 The chart area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 The Presentation menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 The menus Radar/AIS and Radar/AIS > Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Recognition of collision course by means of relative vector presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Symbols on a map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 The Track/Control Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Next Leg Data in the Track/Control Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 The Track/Schedule Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 The Conning Data Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 The Docking Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 The Pilot > TRACKPILOT and Pilot > SPEEDPILOT menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 The alarm list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 The info box and the data box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Device Selection (selecting removable media) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Navigation dialog box (store/save/backup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Navigation dialog box (restore/load) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 The dialog box Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 The Brightness menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 The Range field with Range List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Marking of different and excessively small cell-scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Scale field with chart selection menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 The Chart > Raster Chart Options menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Overview display of a raster chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Display in the modes True Motion and Centered Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Display in the modes North-Up RM, Course-Up RM and Head-Up RM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 The Presentation > Display Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 The Presentation > Coordinate System menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 The Chart menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 The menus Chart > Visibility Groups and ... > Visibility Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Diagram of the depth contour system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 The menu Chart > Depth Contour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 The Alarm Settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Generating the Chart Alarm with the Guard Sector (example: SAFETY CONTOUR Alarm) . 108 The Alarm Settings > Chart Alarms menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 The elements for determination of position, bearing and range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Button and display field of the EBL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Button and display field of the VRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Context menu of the chart area and measurement line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 The Waypoint Zoom-Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 The menu Radar/AIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 The menu Radar/AIS > Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 AIS targets displayed in True Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_eav.fm / 12.08.09

11

CHARTPILOT List of Figures

Fig. 4-26 Fig. 4-27 Fig. 4-28 Fig. 4-29 Fig. 4-30 Fig. 4-31 Fig. 4-32 Fig. 4-33 Fig. 4-34 Fig. 4-35 Fig. 4-36 Fig. 4-37 Fig. 4-38 Fig. 4-39 Fig. 4-40 Fig. 4-41 Fig. 5-1 Fig. 5-2 Fig. 5-3 Fig. 5-4 Fig. 5-5 Fig. 5-6 Fig. 5-7 Fig. 5-8 Fig. 5-9 Fig. 5-10 Fig. 5-11 Fig. 5-12 Fig. 5-13 Fig. 5-14 Fig. 5-15 Fig. 5-16 Fig. 5-17 Fig. 5-18 Fig. 5-19 Fig. 5-20 Fig. 5-21 Fig. 5-22 Fig. 5-23 Fig. 5-24 Fig. 5-25 Fig. 5-26 Fig. 5-27 Fig. 5-28 Fig. 5-29 Fig. 5-30 Fig. 5-31 Fig. 5-32 Fig. 5-33 Fig. 5-34 Fig. 6-1 Fig. 6-2 Fig. 6-3 Fig. 6-4 Fig. 6-5

12

Operating Instructions

The menu Radar/AIS > Voyage Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The menu Radar/AIS > Read Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The menu Radar/AIS > Send Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The menu Radar/AIS > Interrogation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The menu Radar/AIS > Channel Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Radar/AIS > Trial Manoeuvre menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of a Trial Manoeuvre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Chart > Events menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Drop Event menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The menus Chart > Position Fixes and ... > Drop Position Fix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Sensor Settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Sensor Settings > Set Gyro menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Sensor Settings > Speed Sensor menu (systems with radar 1000 series) . . . . . . . . . . . The Sensor Settings > Position Sensor and ... > 2nd Position Sensor menus . . . . . . . . . . . . The Sensor Settings > Date/Time menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Local Sensors menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shape of the track in the case of course changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The menu Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The CHARTPILOT display for the editing of tracks in Text Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Tracks > Edit menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dialog Box for Calibration of the Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Peripheral Devices > Digitizer menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grids of the digitizable projections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The waypoint list in the Text Mode menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Tracks > Edit > Text Mode > Columns menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Tracks > Edit > Text Mode > Compose menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The input area in the Text Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Tracks > Edit > Text Mode > Edit Several Waypoints menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Check Track dialog box and the Extreme Values dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Tracks > Edit > Store menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Tracks > Edit > Text Mode > Print menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Tracks > Waypoint File > Edit menu with the Text Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The menu Chart > Edit User Chart Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The menu Chart > Edit User Chart Objects after pressing the button Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . The menu Charts > Edit User Chart Objects > Select Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Examples of the Object Feature Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The menu Chart > Edit Manual ENC Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Select Manual Update Chart Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The menu Chart > Edit Manual ENC Update > Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Own Chart Editor menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Load (New) Cell box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The menu Own Chart Editor > Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The menu Own Chart Editor > Edit > Skin of the Earth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Maps menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Maps > Edit menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The CHARTPILOT Display for the editing of maps in Text Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The line point list in the Text Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The input area of the line point data in the Text Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The symbol list in the Text Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The input area of the symbol data in the Text Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Tracks > Set System Track menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Tracks > Select menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of a Passage Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Tracks > Time Schedule > Print menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Time Schedule menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

121 122 123 124 126 131 132 134 134 136 144 145 147 149 153 154 158 161 162 166 168 169 170 174 175 178 181 182 186 190 191 193 196 197 198 198 201 202 204 207 208 210 212 215 216 217 222 223 225 225 231 232 234 236 237

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_eav.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

Fig. 6-6 Fig. 7-1 Fig. 7-2 Fig. 7-3 Fig. 7-4 Fig. 7-5 Fig. 7-6 Fig. 7-7 Fig. 7-8 Fig. 7-9 Fig. 7-10 Fig. 7-11 Fig. 7-12 Fig. 7-13 Fig. 7-14 Fig. 7-15 Fig. 7-16 Fig. 7-17 Fig. 7-18 Fig. 7-19 Fig. 7-20 Fig. 7-21 Fig. 8-1 Fig. 8-2 Fig. 8-3 Fig. 8-4 Fig. 8-5 Fig. 8-6 Fig. 8-7 Fig. 8-8 Fig. 8-9 Fig. 8-10 Fig. 8-11 Fig. 8-12 Fig. 8-13 Fig. 9-1 Fig. 10-1 Fig. 11-1 Fig. 11-2 Fig. 11-3 Fig. 11-4 Fig. 11-5 Fig. 11-6 Fig. 11-7 Fig. 11-8 Fig. 11-9 Fig. 11-10 Fig. 11-11 Fig. 11-12 Fig. 11-13 Fig. 11-14 Fig. 11-15 Fig. 11-16 Fig. 11-17 Fig. 11-18

List of Figures

Beginning of a Passage List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 The Chart Maintenance display with the world chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 The selection menu in the Chart Maintenance display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Dialog box for displaying the progress and errors/warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Selection according to navigational purposes in a Transfer menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Selection menus for the selection by cell / chart numbers and agency codes . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 The Info box of the Chart Maintenance subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Other Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 The Product List Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Deletion a Product list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 The product list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 The dialog box ENC Cell Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 The dialog box ENC Conversion Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 The dialog box with detailed information about an ENC cell file of the ENC database . . . . . . 286 The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ARCS Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/3Pro Licensing > Subscription Licence . . 301 The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/3Pro Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 The menu ... > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/3Pro Licensing > Install Licences Manually . . . 304 The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/3Pro Other Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/2 Subscription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 The Utilities > Backup/Restore menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 The Data Selection menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 The menu Utilities > Backup/Restore > Maps to User Chart Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 The CHARTPILOT Display for the Text Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 The Utilities > Text Page menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 The Voyage Recording menu and its submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 The Voyage Recording menu (replay functions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Example of a Protocol Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 The Peripheral Devices > Printer menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 The Peripheral Devices > Printer > Protocol Print > Config. Cyclic Protocol menu . . . . . . . . . 340 The Utilities > System Maintenance menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 The Utilities > System Maintenance > Configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 The Status Log Page and the ... > System Maintenance > Configuration > View menu . . . . . 343 The alarm list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 The Tree in Conning mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 The Navigation Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Navigation Page, conventional propulsion, middle part, Open Sea Display Mode . . . . . . . . . 365 Navigation Page, conventional propulsion, middle part in Harbour Display Mode . . . . . . . . . 366 Navigation Page, Azimuth Thruster, middle part in Open Sea Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Navigation Page, Azimuth Thruster, middle part in Harbour Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Navigation Page, example of a different propulsion combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Navigation Page, individual displays, Figure 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Navigation Page, individual displays, Figure 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Navigation Page, individual displays, Figure 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Navigation Page, individual displays, Figure 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 The Docking Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 The Docking Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 Keel Clearance Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 The Keel Clearance menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 The Track/Schedule Display in the Conning Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 The Track/Control Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 The NACOS Status Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Example of an External Alarm Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_eav.fm / 12.08.09

13

CHARTPILOT List of Figures

Fig. 12-1 Fig. 12-2 Fig. 12-3 Fig. 12-4 Fig. 12-5 Fig. 12-6 Fig. 12-7 Fig. 12-8 Fig. 12-9 Fig. 12-10 Fig. E-1 Fig. F-1 Fig. G-1

14

Operating Instructions

The Calculator menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Calculator > Reckoning menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Calculator > Rendezvous menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Calculator > Current Sailing menu (problem 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Calculator > Measured Mile menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Calculator > Sunrise & Sunset menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Calculator > Altitude & Azimuth menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHARTPILOT Display for generating the Pilot Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Pilot Card > Nautical Checklist menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of a pilot card generated on the CHARTPILOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display elements and operating elements of the UPS (model DLP100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display elements and operating elements of the UPS (model DLP150) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays and controls of the UPS (model series DLG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

383 384 385 386 387 389 390 391 392 393 408 410 412

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_eav.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

List of Abbreviations

List of Abbreviations = In this area, a context menu can be opened. 1) A AFC AIS A/N keyboard ARCS ArSp

automatic frequency control Universal Shipborne Automatic Identification System alphanumeric keyboard Admiralty Raster Chart Service Arrival Speed

B BAS BSH BT

Bridge Alarm System Bundesamt für Seeschifffahrt und Hydrographie bottom track

C CD CEN CIRM CM CMG CCRP CCRS COG CP CPA CrsL CSE C-UP

centered display centered Comité International Radio-Maritime (Track) Control mode course made good Consistent Common Reference Point Consistent Common Reference System course over ground CHARTPILOT closest point of approach course limit course Course-Up

D deg DGPS Dist DistR DNV DNV NAUT-AW DTG DTG R

degree Differential GPS distance distance radius Det Norske Veritas DNV nautical safety all waters distance to go DTG radius

E EBL Ec ECDIS ENC ETA ETA P ETD

electronic bearing line Economy electronic chart display and information system electronic navigational chart estimated time of arrival ETA profile estimated time of departure

F

1)

To be opened with the MORE key; for context menu, see page 40

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e01.fm / 12.08.09

15

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

List of Abbreviations

16

FIX ABS FIX REL fm ft

fixed absolute fixed relative fathom feet

G GC GEO GK GPS

great circle geographic coordinate Gauss-Krüger global positioning system

H HDG H-UP

heading heading up

I ID IHO Interf. INV

identification International Hydrographic Organization interference rejection invalid

K kn

knot, knots

L Lat Lon

latitude longitude

M m mism. MMSI

meter mismatched Maritime Mobile Service Identity

N NGO N-UP

Norges Geografiske Oppmåling North-Up

O OSD

on screen display

P PC PCI PD PIN PlSp PrSp

paper chart Processor Controlled Interswitch pilot data personal identification number Planned Speed Profile Speed

R RAD, Rad RADAR/STBY RCDS REL, Rel RL RM

radius radar / standby raster chart display systems relative rhumb line relative motion

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e01.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

List of Abbreviations

RNC ROT ROT Pl RPM RTU

raster navigation chart rate of turn rate of turn at Planned Speed revolution per minute real time updating

S SENC SM SMG SOG SP Src SRNC STBD STD DISP, Std Disp

system electronic navigational chart sailing mode speed made good speed over ground SPEEDPILOT source system raster navigational chart database starboard standard display

T T TCPA TM To WPT TP T&P NMs TRDSTR TRK TrkDst TRKL TTG TTG P

track (file) time to closest point of approach true motion to waypoint TRACKPILOT temporary and preliminary notices to mariners track distance radius track track distance track limit time to go TTG profile

U UKHO UPS UTC UTM

United Kingdom Hydrographic Office uninterruptible power supply universal time coordinated universal transversal mercatorprojection

V VDR VRM

voyage data recorder variable range marker

W W WAS WOP WP WPB WPD WT

waypoint (file) Watch Alarm System wheel over point waypoint waypoint bearing waypoint distance water track

X XTD

cross track distance

Z ZT

zone time

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e01.fm / 12.08.09

17

CHARTPILOT List of Abbreviations

18

Operating Instructions

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e01.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

Part I Basics

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e1.fm / 12.08.09

19

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

20

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e1.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

1

Overview

1.1

The Functions of the CHARTPILOT

1 Overview 1.1 The Functions of the CHARTPILOT

The CHARTPILOT is an item of navigation equipment for the planning, control and monitoring of nautical ship-handling on the basis of an electronic chart. It is designed as a central unit in the integrated navigation system NACOS (i.e. in conjunction with the track control system TRACKPILOT), but is also used without the TRACKPILOT but together with the radars of the. If the CHARTPILOT is used in the NACOS, it is possible to select by simple switch-over whether it is to act as an ECDIS or as a conning display; when used without a TRACKPILOT, it is used only as an ECDIS: ECDIS In Chart mode, the CHARTPILOT is the display medium of the ECDIS, i.e. the electronic chart can be displayed on its monitor, together with present data of own ship (position, course etc.), the targets acquired by an ARPA radar and an AIS system, a safety contour, and other parameters which serve to improve safety. In Chart mode, the CHARTPILOT meets the „Performance Standards for ECDIS“ defined by the IMO/IHO and IHO S-52 („Specification for Chart Contents and Display Aspects of ECDIS“) if it is operated with official electronic charts according to IHO S-57. The CHARTPILOT is compatible to and approved according to Edition 2 of IEC 61174. Conning-Display (in the NACOS only) In Conning mode, the necessary navigation data can be displayed in the form of a conning display for normal sailing (Navigation), for docking manoeuvres (Docking) or for sailing in shallow water (Keel Clearance). Note for the reader in a hurry: If you wish to get into the functional details immediately, begin at page 25 or for Chart mode: with Section 3.3.5 at page 41, for Conning mode: at page 359.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e11.fm / 12.08.09

21

1 Overview 1.1 The Functions of the CHARTPILOT

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

In Chart mode, the CHARTPILOT is also an ECDIS-based nautical planning and consulting station. With it, you can conveniently and very precisely generate the planned voyage routes on the basis of sequences of waypoints and store them as the pre-planned track 1). For the pre-planned track, you can input the actual time schedule into the CHARTPILOT. Then, when the ship is travelling along the preplanned track, the CHARTPILOT computes the speed (Arrival Speed) with which the ship must sail in order to arrive at the planned time. The chart maintenance for the entire system is also performed at the CHARTPILOT. In addition, individual chart objects can be edited (known as “User Chart Objects”). In this way, raster charts can be used for the ECDIS monitoring. Furthermore, with the aid of the optionally installed Own Chart editor, the CHARTPILOT enables the operator to generate own vector charts. If there is an AIS system connected, it can be operated fully from the CHARTPILOT and the AIS displays are shown on the CHARTPILOT. 2) In Conning mode 3), the CHARTPILOT also offers consulting functions: with the CHARTPILOT, you can perform position-reckoning calculations, solve water-current tasks, determine data of sunrises and sunsets or of the fixed stars, or obtain advice in other nautical matters. For example, you can also generate the pilot card in a simple manner or - in the form of the Text Page - create lists or make notes which you can at any time display again and print. The CHARTPILOT also represents the central database of the system (e.g. for tracks, charts, User Chart Objects, Text Pages etc.). It makes these data available to those system components that need but cannot store the data themselves (radar units, TRACKPILOT, SPEEDPILOT). If several CHARTPILOTs are installed, the data are automatically stored redundantly on the CHARTPILOTs. The automatic redundant storage also takes place on MULTIPILOTs 4), if any are installed.

1) 2) 3) 4)

22

For this term, which has now been standardised, the term Programmed Track is used on older NACOS documents. An AIS system can also be connected in such a way that it can be operated only on the radar indicators of the system or by its own display electronic units. In this case, only the display of the AIS targets and of the Aids-to-Navigation takes place on the CHARTPILOT. When used without a TRACKPILOT, these functions are available in Chart mode. A MULTIPILOT is a system combining the properties of a radar unit with those of an approved ECDIS.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e11.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

1 Overview

Operating Instructions

1.2

1.2 The Consistent Common Reference System

The Consistent Common Reference System General The radar system with its sensors and connected equipment is implemented in form of a Consistent Common Reference System (CCRS). Thereby it is possible to have a central function for acquisition, processing, storage and distribution of data and information, providing identical and obligatory reference to subsystems within the integrated system. The CCRS is the means to ensure that all parts of the system use the same source and values for a specific type of system data, for example own ship position, speed, heading, time, etc. The CCRS allows to define the Consistent Common Reference Point (CCRP), a reference location in a ship to which all measurements such as own ship position, target range and bearing, rel. course and speed etc. are referenced. Typically this is the conning position on the bridge, but may also be the origin of the reference axes of the ship or the radar antenna. The details of the CCRS and CCRP implementation on the CHARTPILOT are documented in the respective chapters of this manual.

HL Cursor

Search light area (REF=SYS)

COG / SOG SYS Chart object

REF = SYS COG / SOG CONN EBL

REF = CON

VRM AIS target

Chart object

Measurements relative to the Conning Position (REF = CON)

Implementation on the CHARTPILOT For a CHARTPILOT in a NACOS system with integrated Track Control System (TRACKPILOT1100) it is important to use the same reference position for the track control and for the monitoring process. For both purposes the so-called System Position, located in the bow of the ship, is used system-wide. For own-ship relative measurements (EBL, VRM, Cursor, target data) on the CHARTPILOT the Conning Position is used. In contrast to the radar system, where the reference may also be the position of the radar antenna, no alternative reference position can be selected by the operator on the Chartpilot.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e11.fm / 12.08.09

23

CHARTPILOT

1 Overview

Operating Instructions

1.3 The Components of the CHARTPILOT and its Variants

1.3

The Components of the CHARTPILOT and its Variants The CHARTPILOT station consists of an industrial-quality computer electronics unit (= CHARTPILOT electronics unit) and a colour monitor, both approved for use on ships, and an operating unit. The CHARTPILOT electronics unit is equipped with a CD drive and a Floppy. Each CHARTPILOT should be supplied with electric power by means of an uninterruptible power supply (UPS), which keeps the CHARTPILOT running in the event of a ship's mains failure of limited duration and - in the case of a longer failure of the ship's mains - ensures that the CHARTPILOT is shut down in the proper way. The CHARTPILOT can be equipped with a printer for the output of voyage records, waypoint lists, screenshots of the CHARTPILOT or a connected radar, and with a digitizer for the input of coordinates from a (paper) chart. The CHARTPILOT needs various items of navigation data. Operation of the CHARTPILOT requires the connection of a position sensor which supplies the ship's position in the form of geographical coordinates in the chart datum WGS 84, as well as the as well as Course Made Good(CMG) and Speed Made Good (SMG); a gyro compass must be connected too. Some of the data needed for the conning displays of the system pass into the system through the route described above, but most of them enter via the TRACKPILOT. For this reason, many conning displays are only available at the CHARTPILOT when there is a TRACKPILOT in the system.

1.4

Current IHO standards / Regulatory Approvals For an up-to-date overview regarding the IHO standards which are currently in effect for ECDIS, ECDIS application software versions, compliance status and regulatory approvals for CHARTPILOT and its surrounding equipment, please contact SAM Electronics´ website: http://www.sam-electronics.de/dateien/navigation/chartpil.html

1.5

Using this Manual These Operating Instructions refer to CHARTPILOTs which are approved under the software version stated on the title page. 1) These Operating Instructions describe the operating sequences of the CHARTPILOT 1100 when it is installed together with units of the radar 1100 series. They also cover use in a NACOS xx-5 system, i.e. in conjunction with the track control system TRACKPILOT 1100. They cover all possible operating and display functions. Because of the various possibilities of use, not all of the functions described are available on all ships. This can be recognized in any given case from the fact that the required operating and display elements are absent. For information about the operating procedures and maintenance functions that are necessary on the optional printer and the settings on the monitors, please see the manufacturer's documents which are also supplied. For operating of the UPS, see page 27.

1)

24

On page 344, there is a description of how to display the software version currently installed in the CHARTPILOT.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e11.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

2 Switching the CHARTPILOT On and Off

Operating Instructions

2.1 Switching the CHARTPILOT On

2

Switching the CHARTPILOT On and Off

2.1

Switching the CHARTPILOT On Regarding the power ON/OFF switching, the console versions and the desktop versions are different. For the console versions, the following is applicable: If you wish to switch the CHARTPILOT on, first check on the monitor of the CHARTPILOT with the aid of the POWER or ON/OFF switch setting and the POWER lamp (if this exists) to see whether the CHARTPILOT is already switched on and the screen has simply been set to the dark state. If the CHARTPILOT is already switched on, you must adapt the screen display to suit the brightness of the room (see below). However, you must never operate the POWER or ON/OFF switch for the purpose of „trial and error“. NOTICE: When the POWER or ON/OFF switch on the on the monitor of the console version of the CHARTPILOT is operated, the CHARTPILOT is switched off again. However, this should only be done after shutting down the operating system in the proper manner (see Section 2.3). Otherwise, in a few cases, renewed installation of the program and of the data might be necessary. For the desktop versions, the following is applicable: Depending on the particular installation, switching the CHARTPILOT on is done by operating the mains power switch on the monitor and/or on the computer, or by switching the supply voltage on in the ship's electrical supply system. In this case too, once a computer has been switched on it must not be switched off again until the operating system has been shut down - see the above warning. When the Log-On display appears after starting of the operating system press the Enter key. 1) The main program of the CHARTPILOT starts up, and the electronic chart that is suitable for the present position appears in the chart area (see Figure 3-11 on page 50). Switching the other components on: Slave monitors, printer and digitizer can be switched on at any time independently of the CHARTPILOT. USEFUL INFORMATION Adaptation to Room Brightness The basic brightness and, if applicable, the contrast of the screen display can be adjusted directly on the monitor. An additional differentiated adaptation, including the switch-over of day and night colours, is described on page 83. Colour Faults in the Display on Monitors with Cathode Ray Tubes; Degaussing Function As are result of changes in the magnetic field at the location of the monitor, colour faults might occur in some areas of the display. To correct them, the Degauss key should be pressed on the monitor. If this does not lead to success, the reason might be that there are magnetic components or magnetised casings nearby, which will have to be removed from the vicinity or demagnetised. Depending on the version of the monitor, an automatic time-controlled degaussing function is also provided.

1)

The CHARTPILOT can also be configured in such a way that its main program starts up without any further inputs.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e12.fm / 12.08.09

25

CHARTPILOT

2 Switching the CHARTPILOT On and Off

Operating Instructions

2.2 Switch-Over of the Modes

Colour Distortions on Monitors with Flat Screens (TFT Monitors) If the display on a TFT monitor has remained unchanged for a long period of time and is then replaced by a different display, an effect can occur which is known as "ion spotting" in the case of cathode ray tubes: the previous display is still faintly visible in the form of discoloration. In the case of TFT monitors, in contrast to monitors with cathode ray tubes, this effect is reversible and therefore cannot be regarded as a defect. If the monitor is operated for a long time (several hours or days) with a different display, the discoloration disappears.

2.2

Switch-Over of the Modes Switching Over to Chart Mode When Conning mode is switched on, it is possible to switch over to Chart mode at any time by pressing the function key F1. 1) Switching Over to Conning Mode Switching over to Conning mode is done by pressing the function key F2.

1)

In the case of switch-over, the settings of the mode that is not switched on remain stored in the background. They are available in unchanged form when the mode is called up again. In the case of use without a TRACKPILOT, the CHARTPILOT can be operated in Chart mode only, and so a switch-over function is unnecessary and is omitted.

2.3

Switching the CHARTPILOT Off Usually, it is not necessary to switch the CHARTPILOT off. If the CHARTPILOT is going to remain unused for a long time, it is advisable to protect the monitor by reducing the brightness and contrast on the monitor. If the CHARTPILOT has to be switched off completely, e.g. because the relevant part of the ship's electrical supply system is going to be switched off, the operating system of the CHARTPILOT computer must be shut down properly. NOTICE: If the CHARTPILOT is switched off without first shutting down the operating system, the program or data might be destroyed. In such cases, it might be necessary to re-install the program. Furthermore, the CHARTPILOT must not be switched off while track or waypoint files are being copied or while files of the electronic chart are being transferred. Shutting down the operating system: Press Tree button or function key F10; in the display which then appears, click the button POWER DOWN. A dialog box appears, containing the question Are you sure you want to shut down the system? If you really do want to switch off the CHARTPILOT, you now have to press the OK button. As a result, the program of the CHARTPILOT is stopped and the operating system is shut down. The computer must not be switched off until the message System halted is shown in the bottom line at bottom left. If you do not want to end the program after all, you must press the Cancel button instead of OK.

1)

26

Alternatively, the switch-over is performed by means of the function overview (Tree); see page 41.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e12.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

2 Switching the CHARTPILOT On and Off 2.3 Switching the CHARTPILOT Off

Switching the CHARTPILOT off: When the message System halted is shown, switch off the monitor of the CHARTPILOT by operating the POWER or ON/OFF switch on the CHARTPILOT monitor 1). In the case of the console version, this also causes switch-off of the computer; in the case of the desktop version, the computer has to be switched off separately, using the computer’s power switch. If slave terminals are installed: The above description applies for the CHARTPILOT station. Slave terminals can be switched off at any time independently of the CHARTPILOT station. Switching off the uninterruptible power supply: If the uninterruptible power supply (UPS) is to be switched off too (which can really only be necessary in the case of service work), the UPS must not be switched off until the CHARTPILOT has been switched off. Switching the other components off: Slave monitors, printer and digitizer can be switched off at any time independently of the CHARTPILOT. USEFUL INFORMATION Behaviour in the Event of Ship's Mains Failure If power failure occurs in the ship's mains, the most important components of the CHARTPILOT System are supplied with power by the UPS. If the type recommended by SAM Electronics is installed, the operating system of the CHARTPILOT computer is automatically shut down in the proper way before the voltage of the UPS collapses (in the case of a ship's mains failure lasting for at least five minutes). The UPS is switched on continuously, and normally needs no operating actions. Appendix E describe which displays appear on the UPS types DPL 100, DPL150 during proper operation, and which displays appear there in the case of a fault. For other UPS types delivered by SAM Electronics, this is described in the corresponding Technical Manuals. Newer types of UPS are connected via an interconnection box; this has a change-over switch with which the UPS can be bypassed. If UPS should develop a fault, this change-over possibility can be used to power the CHARTPILOT directly from the ship’s mains, by setting the switch to position I. Behaviour in the Case of a Malfunction in the Chart or Conning Mode If a malfunction occurs in the CHARTPILOT in the modes mentioned, and if this malfunction cannot be corrected by means of the operating actions described in this document, an attempt can be made to correct the fault by aborting and restarting the CHARTPILOT program: If you press the Tree button 2), click the EXIT button in the display which then appears, and answer the question which then appears by clicking the OK button, the main program of the CHARTPILOT and all running programs are stopped, the log-on display appears after a short time and the program has to be restarted - see page 25, 3) after the start program has started up completely, the standard display appears in Chart mode.

1) 2) 3)

With some types of monitor which are switched on and off by means of a pushbutton switch, this pushbutton has to be pressed for slightly longer in order to switch the monitor off. Operating of the buttons see page 34 The program is restarted automatically after a waiting time of 30 seconds if the configuration is appropriate for that purpose.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e12.fm / 12.08.09

27

2 Switching the CHARTPILOT On and Off 2.3 Switching the CHARTPILOT Off

28

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e12.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

Part II CHARTPILOT as ECDIS

In this part, the functions offered by the CHARTPILOT in Chart mode are described.

In the following instructions for the operating procedure of these functions, it is assumed that the CHARTPILOT is switched to Chart mode.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e3.fm / 12.08.09

29

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

30

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e3.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

3

General

3.1

Overview

3 General 3.1 Overview

When the CHARTPILOT is switched to Chart mode, it performs the functions of an ECDIS. If it is being operated with an official electronic chart as per IHO S-57, it fulfils the „Performance Standards for ECDIS“ defined by IMO/IHO, as well as „IHO S-52 (Specifications for Chart Contents and Display Aspects of ECDIS)“. In addition to the functions stipulated for an ECDIS by these documents, namely: Transfer and conversion of the files of the Electronic Navigational Chart (ENC) to the databases 1) of the system Display of the ENC data 2) contained in the database as an electronic chart, including display and monitoring of the safety contour. Input of the official updates of the electronic charts Editing of update files for the existing ENC files (manual ENC update) Editing of objects which supplement the electronic charts (User Chart Objects) Display of own ship's position Voyage planning (generation of pre-planned tracks) Voyage monitoring Recording of voyage data (voyage recording) incl. management and replay of recorded data Alarm messages The setting of event markers and position fixes the following functions too are available in Chart mode 3): Transfer and conversion of the files of the ARCS charts 4), issued by the UKHO / Admiralty Raster Chart Service to the databases 1) of the system Transfer and conversion of the files of other vector chart types to the databases 1) of the system Alternative display of the ARCS charts and the other vector chart types Anchor watch incl. monitoring function Display of the targets of a connected ARPA radar Operating procedure for the connected AIS system and display of the AIS information Trial manoeuvres on the basis of the own ship symbol and of the targets Selection and setting of the navigation sensors Voyage planning (generation of the passage plan) Management of the files created in the voyage planning process Generation, display and management of lists and notes (Text Pages) Making print-outs for different purposes Display and print of TRACKPILOT and SPEEDPILOT parameterisation Determination and saving of system parameterisations and display of installed software versions

1)

2) 3) 4)

In the relevant standards and regulations, the database of the ENC is also called SENC (System Electronic Navigational Chart), and the database of the ARCS charts is called SRNC (System Raster Navigational Chart Database). Throughout these Operating Instructions, the entire set of data contained in a hard disk drive and relating to a chart type is called a database. A local database means the database of the equipment that is being operated. The electronic chart formed by these files is a vector chart (see Section 4.1 from page 79 onwards). In the following, this vector chart is also included under the term vector chart together with the other vector chart types. In the case of use without a TRACKPILOT, only Chart mode exists, in which a number of the functions described in Sections 11 and 12 are then available additionally - see page 361. The electronic chart formed by the ARCS charts is a raster chart (see Section 4.1 from page 79 onwards). In the following, this electronic chart is in fact called a raster chart. Where both vector charts and raster charts are meant, the term electronic chart is used in the following.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e31.fm / 12.08.09

31

CHARTPILOT

3 General

Operating Instructions

3.2 Operating Unit; Trackball and Keyboard

3.2

Operating Unit; Trackball and Keyboard The desktop version of the CHARTPILOT has an ordinary commercial computer-keyboard supplemented by a mouse or by a separate trackball. The console version of the CHARTPILOT is either equipped with a trackball or with a membrane keyboard containing an integrated trackball. The operating procedure can be performed entirely by means of the operating elements appearing on the screen. These mainly consist of buttons grouped in the form of menus according to subjects. The input unit used to operate these operating elements is the trackball or mouse 1); the cursor, which appears on the screen and can be moved by means of the trackball, serves as a pointer. This cursor control by means of the trackball is used not only for the menu operating procedure but also (for example) for the graphic editing of tracks or for the marking of elements of the vector chart. The trackball in its various forms, and the mouse, each have three keys (see Figure 3-1): The key on the left has the main function and is called the DO key throughout this Operating Instructions. With the key in the middle, information about the element marked with the cursor can be called up. This key is called the INFO key throughout this Operating Instructions. The key on the right has further functions which depend on the position of the cursor („contextsensitive“ functions). It is called the MORE key throughout this Operating Instructions. In the case of the trackball which is also used for the series (the illustration on the right), the middle key is the DO key so that this configuration is the same for the CHARTPILOT and the radar indicators 2).

DO key DO key

MORE key

MORE key DO key

INFO key

INFO key

INFO key

MORE key

DO key

MORE key

INFO key

Trackball on the membrane keyboard Fig. 3-1

1) 2)

32

Mouse

Separate trackball (examples)

The various operating devices for cursor control

The functionalities of the trackball and mouse are identical. Wherever the trackball is mentioned in these Operating Instructions, the mouse can be used in the same way for the desktop version. The key is labelled with Cancel. In these Operating Instructions, it is referred to as the MORE key, because its function is identical to the MORE keys of the other operating devices.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e31.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

3 General

Operating Instructions

3.3 The Operating Elements on the Screen

The function keys of the keyboard are mostly assigned to functions of the basic menu line and have the following meanings: Operating element

Function

Further information

F1 (= CHART)

Switches to the Chart mode

page 26

F2 (= CONNING)

Switches to the Conning mode

page 26

F3

None

F4

None

F5 (= Event marker)

Sets an event marker and opens the Drop Event box

page 133

F6 (= Range)

Calls up the Range field to set the range

page 85

F7 (= Set Center)

Specifying the centre of the chart excerpt displayed

page 94 and 95

F8 (= Std Disp)

Switches the chart area to its standard display

page 51

F9 (= Brightness)

Calls up the Brightness field for adapting the display to suit the room brightness

page 83

F10 (= Tree)

Calls up the tree

page 41

F11 (= Menu)

Switches the Menu display on and off

page 37

F12

None

Print Screen or Prt SC

Prints out the screen content on the connected printer

page 73

In Appendix H, you will find a template for the function keys F1 to F12 of the keyboard for the desktop version; you can fix this template to the keyboard until you have become familiar with the function of the keys. Switch-Over between CHARTPILOT Terminal and Slave Terminals If there are slave terminals (monitors including operating units) installed, at any time only one of the terminals is active. An inactive unit is activated when, on that trackball or mouse, the DO key is pressed for three seconds. As a result, the operating unit that has been active up until that time is de-activated.

3.3

The Operating Elements on the Screen If you are already familiar with graphic man/machine interfaces, you can skip Sections 3.3.1 to 3.3.4.

3.3.1

Individual Elements and their Operation

Cursor The cursor generally indicates the screen position on which the pressing of a key has its effect, especially the keys DO, INFO and MORE. The cursor is moved by means of the trackball 1). Depending on its position and its current function, the cursor can have various forms:

1)

You can change the transmission ratio between the trackball movement and cursor movement - see page 344.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e31.fm / 12.08.09

33

CHARTPILOT

3 General

Operating Instructions

3.3 The Operating Elements on the Screen

Cursor outside the chart area, and in the case of context menus that have been opened; in this form, it is used to operate operating elements and to open input fields. Cursor inside the chart area; in this form, it is used to mark a displayed object or a position. The geographical position occupied by the cursor in the chart area is displayed in the Cursor display - see page 48. This form indicates that the CHARTPILOT computer is busy with a task which permits a limited operating procedure only. The cursor looks like this if inputs in text boxes are to be made.

In the case of special functions, the cursor can also have other forms, e.g. when a dialog box is being moved or when the size of a dialog box is being changed - see page 41. Buttons The most important operating elements are the virtual keys („buttons“) which appear on the screen. To operate buttons, the cursor is moved onto the button by means of the trackball and the DO key is then pressed for a short time. In the following, this procedure is called „clicking the button“ or „pressing the button“. Buttons whose names are displayed with weaker contrast (= insensitive display) cannot be pressed. Buttons can have various logical switching functions. Depending on the switching function, they have different appearances: Corresponds to a button which does not engage in the pressed position. The relevant function is triggered by clicking.

Corresponds to a switch with the settings on and off. The function displayed is „on“ when the square is red. Switching over is done by clicking.

Corresponds to a selector switch with several settings. Under the name of the switch, all possible settings of the switch are shown. The selected setting of the switch is indicated by a red diamond. Switching over is done by clicking the desired setting of the switch. In some cases, the switch settings that can be selected alternatively are spatially separate, e.g. Monitoring and Planning in the Presentation > Display Mode menu - see Figure 4-9 on page 94.

This too corresponds to a selector switch with several settings. However, under the name of the switch, only the selected setting of the switch is displayed on the button. Switching over is done by making the other settings of the switch visible by clicking the button, and by then clicking the appropriate setting of the switch.

34

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e31.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

3 General

Operating Instructions

3.3 The Operating Elements on the Screen

By clicking of these arrow keys, the value displayed in the data display field between them can be increased or decreased in steps.

Sliding Controller With a sliding controller, the value of a parameter can be changed by moving the cursor onto the „handle“ of the controller, pressing the DO key, and moving the handle to the desired value by means of the trackball while keeping the DO key pressed. The set value is displayed above the handle. Fine adjustment can be carried out with the aid of the arrow keys after the sliding controller has been provided with the red focus frame by clicking.

Input Fields Editing cursor

These fields, in which data are entered or texts are input (edited), can be recognised from the editing cursor. For editing, the field must be clicked. The editing process is described in Section 3.4.

Lists Particular items of data are displayed in the form of lists. The data displayed cannot be changed in the list. However, they can be manipulated line by line (e.g. transferred, copied, deleted). Which of the manipulations are possible depends on the list and is described in the relevant section of these Operating Instructions. The first step of such a manipulation is always the marking of the lines concerned: Marking a single line: Click the line. Marking several consecutive lines: Position the cursor on the uppermost line that is to be marked, press the DO key, and - while keeping the DO key pressed - move the cursor to the last line that is to be marked. Release the DO key. Most lists have a defined height on the screen. If the list contains more lines than can be displayed, operating elements appear to the right of the list, by means of which all lines are made visible by scrolling: With the triangles, clicking causes the list to be scrolled down or up by one line (or continuously to the end or beginning in the case of prolonged pressing). After positioning of the cursor on the bar, the list can be shifted (scrolled) by any desired amount by means of the trackball, with the DO key kept pressed. By clicking of the gap situated between the triangle and the bar, the list is scrolled down or up by a distance equal to the height of the window. Almost all lists are wide enough to allow the longest line contained in them to be displayed. If the width of a list is not sufficient for this, the list can be scrolled sideways by means of the operating elements described. The operating elements for this then appear below the list. The operating procedure is the same as for the scrolling of lines.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e31.fm / 12.08.09

35

CHARTPILOT

3 General 3.3 The Operating Elements on the Screen

3.3.2

Operating Instructions

Operating Procedure using the Keyboard instead of the Trackball Operating elements can also be operated with the keys of the keyboard. The trackball operating procedure described in Section 3.3.1 is the method most quickly learned and provides rapid operation, but in some cases, operation by means of the keys is very useful. In contrast to the use of the trackball, operation by means of keys is impossible in some cases. In the case concerned, try out the effect of the keys. Basically, operation takes place in two steps: First of all, the operating element or the input field must be marked. After that, the operation takes place on the marked operating element, or the input takes place in the input field. Marking the Operating Element and the Input Field The marked element is the one with a red frame, called the focus frame. The focus frame can be set on a different element of the group with the aid of the arrow keys. The following is generally true: Only when an operating element is provided with the focus frame can that element be operated or used. (Incidentally: This applies also to operation by means of the trackball. When clicking occurs, the focus frame is set automatically, and then - if it is a button - this button if pressed.) It is possible to change over between the groups by means of the Tab key or by simultaneous pressing of the keys Shift + Tab. In lists and in large input fields, the focus frame can be moved in even larger steps by means of the keys Pg Up (or Page up), Pg Dn (or Page down), Home, End, Ctrl + Home, Ctrl + End. If an operating element or an input field cannot be marked in this way, the trackball must be used. Marking of List Lines A desired line can be marked by means of the arrow keys. Several lines can be marked simultaneously by keeping the Shift key pressed while operating the arrow keys. Exit from the list by pressing the Tab key. Operation of Operating Elements Buttons A button provided with a focus frame can be operated by means of the space bar. A button marked with a default frame is operated by means of the Enter key. The default frame is displayed as an additional, grey-shaded, recessed frame. The program specifies which button is given a default frame. Sliding Controllers These are moved by means of the arrow keys. They can be moved in larger steps by simultaneous pressing of the keys Ctrl + arrow keys or by means of the keys Home and End.

3.3.3

Menus A menu is a summary of the functions which can be selected as alternatives depending on the operating situation. There are two different menu systems:

36

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e31.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

3 General 3.3 The Operating Elements on the Screen

-

The hierarchical menus form a consistent system for the operation of (almost) all functions. The complete set of hierarchical menus has a systematic structure. They are therefore particularly suitable for learning the operating procedure. For these reasons, these Operating Instructions are based throughout on the use of the hierarchical menus.

-

For some functions, context menus exist. They permit very fast operating procedures but only offer a very limited overview of all available functions of the set of functions being operated.

3.3.3.1

Hierarchical Menus

In the case of the hierarchical menus, while in a menu you can call up a lower-order menu, and so on until the desired function or display is obtained. The menu at the top of this hierarchy of menus if the basic menu line (see page 45, which is always present and from which other menus can be called up. All other hierarchical menus appear on the right-hand side of the screen after being called up from the basic menu line, and cover each other completely except for the name of the higher-order menu. Thus, of the entire menu hierarchy, only one menu (in addition to the basic menu line) is visible, together with the names of all higher-order menus. Figure 3-3 shows the basic structure of such a menu by means of an example. In particular operating sequences, in addition to the hierarchically structured menus a further menu is displayed at the same time, and disappears when the inputs requested in it have been made. Switching the Menu Display On and Off In the CHARTPILOT main program (see page 77), the display of the (hierarchically structured) menus can be switched on and off by pressing the function key F11 (or the Menu button situated in the basic menu line) The switched-on menus completely cover the switched-on data display (if any) on the strip at the right-hand side. Operating Procedure for the Menus Every setting which you want to make (input of data, changing of the display etc.) basically takes place in the following steps: 1.

Necessary in the CHARTPILOT main program only: If you have not already done so, switch the Menu display on by pressing the function key F11 or the Menu button. After switch-on of the Menu display, the menu that was operated last is always displayed at first.

2.

Call up the menu from which the desired setting can be made. This is done by changing to lowerorder or higher-order menus: Changing to a lower-order menu: All buttons having three dots after their names call up a lowerorder menu (or a dialog box - see page 41). When such a button is pressed, the corresponding menu appears.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e31.fm / 12.08.09

37

CHARTPILOT

3 General

Operating Instructions

3.3 The Operating Elements on the Screen

Calls up the Presentation menu, see Figure 3-12 on page 52. Calls up the Radar/AIS menu, see Figure on page 56. Calls up the Chart menu, see Figure 4-11 on page 100. Calls up the Sensor Settings menu, see Figure 4-35 on page 138 (this is present only in the stand-alone version) Calls up the Alarm Settings menu, see Figure 4-15 on page 107. Calls up the Tracks menu, see Figure 5-2 on page 152. Calls up the Pilot menu, by means of which the submenus TRACKPILOT and SPEEDPILOT (see Figure 3-21 on page 69) can be called up. Calls up the Peripheral Devices menu, by means of which the submenus Printer (see Figure 8-12 on page 336) and Digitizer (see Figure 5-6 on page 160) are called up if these devices are connected.

Fig. 3-2

The top menu appearing in the right-hand side strip

Changing to a higher-order menu: Above the name of the displayed menu, there are buttons with the names of all higher-order menus. By pressing one of these buttons, you change over to the corresponding higher-order menu. To reach the desired menu, there are three different cases: -

The menu being displayed is of a higher order than the desired menu: Single or multiple change-over to the lower-order menu. In these Operating Instructions, the menu names are preceded by the names of all higherorder menus (separated by >).

-

The menu being displayed is of a lower order than the desired menu: Direct change-over to the desired menu.

-

The menu being displayed is neither of a lower order nor of a higher order than desired menu: First of all, change over to a menu which is of a higher order than the desired menu. Alternatively in this case, it is also possible to switch the menu on via the function overview (see page 41).

38

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e31.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

3 General

Operating Instructions

3.3 The Operating Elements on the Screen

All higher-order menus; they can be called up directly by clicking. Menu name of the current menu

Here, the desired settings can be made. All types of operating element described in Section 3.3.1 can occur. Alternatively, the relevant lower-order menu can be called up with a button whose name ends with ... .

In many menus, the bottom line contains buttons which make valid the data that are input in this menu, which reset the inputs to the data that were valid previously, or by means of which the menu is exited (for details, see below). Fig. 3-3

3.

Basic structure of a menu from the menu hierarchy

Make the desired settings. If there is a Reset button or a Cancel button in the bottom line of the menu, you can retrieve the data that were valid previously: Reset button: The values that have been valid since the last take-over are retrieved; the menu is not exited. Cancel button: The values that have been valid since the last take-over are retrieved; the menu is exited.

4.

Take over the settings, i.e. make them valid and, if appropriate, leave the menu. For these purposes, the buttons situated on the left (and in some cases in the middle) in the bottom line of the menu are used: If there is no button on the left in the bottom line of the menu, the setting made becomes valid at the latest when the menu is exited, without any need for further activity. OK button: The settings are valid; the menu is exited (the higher-order menu appears). Apply button: The settings are valid; the menu is not exited. To make the function clearer, the button which makes the setting valid has a special name in some menus. For example, in the Tracks > Delete menu, the button which makes the settings valid (i.e. which irretrievably deletes the track files in this case) has the name Delete. The Exit button which exists in some menus switches off the subroutine which has generated the menu; see page 77.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e31.fm / 12.08.09

39

CHARTPILOT

3 General

Operating Instructions

3.3 The Operating Elements on the Screen

3.3.3.2

Context Menus

Context menus are situated behind particular display fields and areas 1). They consist of a heading (if appropriate) and the buttons situated below it: -

Buttons with a triangle on the right: These call up a subordinate menu.

-

Buttons without a triangle: These execute the relevant function and close the menu.

You can operate context menus in two ways: Operation by clicking: By clicking for a short time with the MORE key into the display field or the area, the menu is opened and remains open. The buttons contained in it are operated by clicking with the DO key. This method is suitable when the trackball is used. In lists, the list entry must have been marked previously (by means of the DO key) so that the functions of the context menu have an effect on it. To close the menu without execution of a function, click at any place outside the menu. Operation by pulling: Put the cursor onto the display field or into the area, press the MORE key, keep it pressed, pull the cursor to the desired menu-position, and release the key on the desired function. This method is particularly fast when the mouse is used. To close the menu without execution of a function, release the key over the heading or over a button with a triangle. 1. Clicking of the Chart Status field in the navigation data line with the MORE key opens this menu.

3. Clicking of a button without a triangle by means of the DO key causes the relevant function to be performed. The menus are closed. 2. Clicking of a button with a triangle by means of the DO key opens a lower-order menu.

Fig. 3-4

1)

40

Clicking outside a context menu closes the menu.

Example of a context menu

These fields and areas are marked with the symbol

in the graphics of this document.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e31.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

3.3.4

3 General 3.3 The Operating Elements on the Screen

Dialog Boxes If the program wishes to tell you something, e.g. if it wants to warn you about an operator error, an appropriate message or question appears in a dialog box. The bottom line of the dialog box contains one or more buttons with which you can acknowledge the message or answer the question. The meaning of the buttons is similar to that of the buttons in the bottom line of a menu. For example, the Cancel button cancels the operating step which led to the call-up of the dialog box, and makes the dialog box disappear. USEFUL INFORMATION Shifting of Dialog Boxes Some dialog boxes can be shifted on the screen by marking the title of the menu or dialog box with the cursor and moving the title by means of the trackball while keeping the DO key pressed. Changing the Size of Dialog Boxes The size of some dialog boxes can be changed: Increasing/decreasing the size of the dialog box in one axis: Position the cursor at the edge or at the corner, press the DO key, and while keeping it pressed pull the box to the desired size. Most dialog boxes of variable size have a small, square button at top right in the frame (see Figure 3-23 on page 71). With this button, you can set the dialog box to its maximum size. By clicking again, you can reset the dialog box to the size selected previously.

3.3.5

The Function Overview (Tree) You can obtain an overview of the top two menu levels and thus of the available main functions. From this function overview - called tree - you can call up these main functions directly and you can also switch over to the Conning mode. The Conning mode has a corresponding tree (see Figure 10-1 on page 362). In the function overview (see Figure 3-5), the following are displayed: the buttons of the Chart and Conning modes (top row) the buttons of the menu positions of the top menu and below each of these the buttons of the menus of the next lower order. Switching the Tree On This is done by pressing the Tree button 1). Switching to a Different Mode (in the NACOS only) Press the relevant mode button. As a result, a switch-over to the desired mode takes place. The Tree is switched off, and the menu used last appears in the new mode. Directly Calling Up a Menu Press the button of the desired menu. As a result, the tree is switched off and the desired menu is switched on.

1)

The function key F10 has the same function.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e31.fm / 12.08.09

41

CHARTPILOT

3 General

Operating Instructions

3.3 The Operating Elements on the Screen

Switching Off the Tree The display of the tree can be exited by pressing the CANCEL button (without switch-over of menu or mode).

Clicking switches the mode over. - Button with red inscription: the current mode

The buttons of the top menus of the current mode and of the menus of the next lower order. By clicking, the corresponding menu is displayed and the display of the function overview is switched off.

Navigation data line; see page 46

Tree

Basic menu line; see page 45 Prepares the switch-off (at the mains) of the CHARTPILOT; see page 26 Stops all programs that are running, and after presentation of the Log-On display it independently starts the main program of the CHARTPILOT (see page 27).

Fig. 3-5

42

Switches the tree off without a functional switch-over taking place. This button switches independent subroutines on. - Button with red inscription: subroutine is switched on

The tree in Chart Mode (CHARTPILOT in the NACOS)

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e31.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

3 General

Operating Instructions

3.4 Inputting Numerical Values and Editing Texts

The tree shown here does not necessarily have to be identical to the one you will find on the CHARTPILOT, since the tree is adapted to suit the system configuration concerned. Its appearance when the CHARTPILOT is being used without a TRACKPILOT is illustrated here.

Fig. 3-6

3.4

The Tree in Chart Mode (CHARTPILOT without TRACKPILOT)

Inputting Numerical Values and Editing Texts Input by means of Trackball and Virtual Keyboard When numbers or texts are to be entered with the aid of the trackball (e.g. because there is no keyboard), this is done via a keyboard which appears on the screen as soon as an input field is clicked with the MORE key. The input possibilities of this virtual keyboard correspond to the requirements of the input field that is clicked. Example 1: Input of the time zone. When the input field (in the menu Sensor Settings > Date/Time - see page 153) is clicked with the MORE key, the virtual numeric keyboard opens up. In its input field, the time zone that is currently entered appears. Click into this input field behind the number that is to be changed, remove the number by means of the button , and input the new number. When you then press the OK button, the entry is taken over. If the original entry is not to be changed after all, click on the old value and press the OK button, or click into some other input field.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e31.fm / 12.08.09

43

CHARTPILOT

3 General

Operating Instructions

3.5 The Screen

Example 2: Input of the Waypoint Notes: When you click on the input field Waypoint Notes (see page 162) by means of the MORE key, the virtual A/N keyboard opens up; it is designed to look like an ordinary commercial keyboard. Special feature: When you press the OK button, the entry is taken over. With the Line button situated above that, another line (which is still empty) is entered. By clicking on a virtual keyboard with the MORE key, you close this keyboard without the entries being taken over. Input via Membrane Keyboard or Ordinary Commercial Keyboard An input can take place when the relevant input field is marked. The editing cursor is in insert mode at first and has the form shown on page 35. The data input or the editing can now be performed with the aid of the keyboard. By pressing of the keys, the characters are entered additionally at the position of the editing cursor. With the Delete key and the Backspace key, the character to the left of the editing cursor is deleted. If larger passages of text are to be deleted, they can be marked beforehand by moving the trackball while keeping the DO key pressed. Double clicking of the DO key marks the entire word or number. By means of the Insert key, the editing cursor can be switched over to the replace mode (and back to the insert mode): It is then displayed as an inverted character-field. The new character replaces the character that is being displayed inverted due to the editing cursor. The editing cursor is controlled by means of the arrow keys. In single-line input fields, the data input is completed with the Enter key or the Enter button. If a button is provided with the default frame, that button too is triggered by this. Some input fields are exited by means of the arrow keys . Most input fields can be exited by pressing the Tab key or by simultaneous pressing of the keys Ctrl + Tab. When clicking occurs, many one-line input fields appear inverted, i.e. their entire content is marked. In the case of these input fields, you can completely replace the existing entry by inputting a character cancel the marking by operating one of the arrow keys , so that you can then change the existing entry. In multi-line input fields, a new line is generated by means of the Enter key. Most input fields can be exited by pressing the Esc key; the data not yet stored are not taken over.

3.5

The Screen So that this section can also be used as a brief reference during work with the CHARTPILOT, details which you will only understand when you have attended an operator training course, or if you have already studied all of these Operating Instructions, are stated without further explanation. If you are currently in the process of getting to know the operating procedures of the CHARTPILOT, you should at first simply skip the points that are unclear to you.

44

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e31.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

3 General

Operating Instructions

3.5.1

3.5 The Screen

Division of the Screen The -

screen is generally divided into the following areas: Navigation data line Chart area Basic menu line.

When the presentation of a data display is switched on, it covers the right-hand side strip of the chart area. When a menu is called up, it likewise covers this side strip.

Navigation data line; see page 46 Chart area; see page 48

Side strip

Basic menu line; see page 45

Fig. 3-7

3.5.2

Screen division in Chart Mode

The Basic Menu Line The right-hand side of the basic menu line contains buttons which must be accessible at all times and are therefore displayed continuously. As long as work is being done with the main program (Chart mode), operating and display functions appear on the left which should be directly accessible at all times for the work in the chart area.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e31.fm / 12.08.09

45

CHARTPILOT

3 General

Operating Instructions

3.5 The Screen

When vector charts are used: Range field Size of the displayed area (if range rings are switched on, the spacing of the range rings is additionally displayed on the right); for operating procedure, see page 85.

When raster charts are used: Scale field Scale of the displayed raster chart or plan. For operating procedure, see page 87

Switches the menus displayed in the chart area into the background and switches the chart area to the standard display; see page 51.

Is displayed when the main program is being operated

Operation and display of the bearing line; see page 112

Fig. 3-8

3.5.3

In the Monitoring display modes: Position of own ship's symbol in the chart area; see page 94 In Planning display mode: Selection of the displayed chartexcerpt; see page 95

Adaptation to room brightness; see page 83.

Switching the menu on and off; see page 36

Operation and display of the VRM; see page 112 Calling up the tree display; see page 41

The basic menu line

The Navigation Data Line The navigation data line displays the most important navigation data and the status data of the electronic chart displayed in the chart area. It also contains (on the far right) the button displayed as a horn symbol, with which the alarm list (see page 69) can be called up.

46

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e31.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

3 General

Operating Instructions

3.5 The Screen

Vector charts: Display groups displayed on the chart - Chart OFF = display of the vector chart is switched off - Permit warn. (yellow background) = The chart might not be up to date - see page 265 - Non-HO data (yellow background) = Type ENC is selected and a cell is displayed which was not officially issued by a hydrographic organisation. (The edge of this cell is hatched in orange.) - Licence (yellow background) = The chart might not be up to date - see page 305; (red background) = CM-93/3Pro Licence Expiry Date has been reached. Only cells of the navigational purposes General Background and World can be shown after this time. Not avail. = No ENC at a scale appropriate for navigation is available. Display groups displayed on the chart; see page 98: - All = all display groups - Standard = standard selection Raster charts: - Chart OFF = display of the vector chart is switched off - Datum mism. on yellow background = The position data contained in the chart are not Red background: Status WGS84 position values. Licence exp. exists. - Licence exp. = Licence has expired; the chart might not be up to date - see page 291. - ENC avail. = An electronic chart of type ENC is available for the area displayed. In the Monitoring display modes: Selected position sensor; The supplement INV = selected position sensor is transmitting invalid data or none at all; position is determined by dead reckoning In Planning display mode: The word Planning appears

Raster charts: Units of measurement of the depth information m: = metres fm: = fathoms ft: = feet

Vector charts: - No display = ideal purpose of the chart - Overscaled = purpose with too small a scale is used (See page 85) Raster charts: - Bad Scale = chart or plan with larger scale is available; see page 87 - Zoom x 2 = chart or plan is displayed enlarged

Selected electronic chart

Display mode: Monitoring display modes: H-UP = Head-Up C-UP = Course-Up Compass course N-UP = North-Up (present actual CD = Centered Display course from the TM = True Motion gyro compass) Planning display mode: and source PLAN

Chart Status field D

Indicates, that Date Dependent Objects are displayed always, irrespective of the current date. See also page 101

Present rate of turn computed from the change in the compass course In the Monitoring display modes: Own position1) In Planning display mode: Position of the chart centre

Speed (SMG) and course1) (COG) over ground (BT) or through the water (WT)

Coordinate system on which the position information is usually based Left: geodetic datum Right: projection: - No information = Mercator - Radar = Radar projection For coordinate system setting procedure, see page 96 For Monitoring and Planning display mode, see pages 91 and 95

Display of the course and speed vectors: - REL = relative to own ship - TRUE = true display

Mode of the log Zone time: - BT = Bottom Track - UTC = zone time is equal to UTC - WT = Water Track - ZT = zone time is UTC plus time This information is absent if a log is zone entered in system not being used as the speed sensor. Data source of the speed values for the SOG/COG Clicking switches the alarm list on. computation (the speed sensor) Yellow background: SOG is computed, taking Horn symbol in red = there is an account of data entered manually (e.g. Set + Drift). alarm (see page 346)

1) Own position, speed and course of the CCRP (conning position); see also chapter 2.1 Fig. 3-9

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e31.fm / 12.08.09

The navigation data line

47

CHARTPILOT

3 General 3.5 The Screen

3.5.4

The Chart Area

3.5.4.1

Division, Individual Displays

Operating Instructions

In the chart area, the electronic chart is displayed. In the chart area, various graphic elements can be displayed additionally, such as the own ship symbol, the targets transmitted by one of the radars, and the pre-planned tracks. The display of most of the graphic elements appearing in the chart area can be switched on and off individually. Furthermore, some of them can be parameterised. The graphic elements appearing in the chart area and their operating procedures are described from page 51 onwards. The following displays cover parts of the chart area - temporarily in some cases (for position and details, see Figure 3-11): TRACKPILOT Display (in the NACOS only) This contains the most important items of the data that are needed specially for steering with the TRACKPILOT. Its display can be switched on and off in the Pilot Display frame in the Presentation > Display Settings menu by operation of the TRACKPILOT function. SPEEDPILOT Display (in the NACOS only) This contains the most important items of the data that are needed specially for sailing with the SPEEDPILOT. Its display can be set in the Pilot Display frame in the Presentation > Display Settings menu by switching the SPEEDPILOT function on. EBL2 Display This makes it possible to operate EBL2 via the button, and (if EBL2 is switched on) it contains the data of EBL2. Its display can be set in the Presentation > Display Settings menu by switch-on of the EBL2 Display function. Digitizer Cursor Display This contains the geographical position of the crosswires magnifier in the chart digitized on the digitizer. It appears only if the digitizer is connected to the CHARTPILOT, the digitizer is set up (see page 166), the display of the Digitizer Cursor display is switched on (by switching the Numerical Position function on in the Peripheral Devices > Digitizer Setup menu). Cursor Display The Cursor display contains the geographical position of the cursor displayed in the chart area, and the distance and bearing of the cursor relative to own ship´s conning position. It continuously covers the bottom right-hand corner of the chart area.

48

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e31.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

3 General

Operating Instructions

3.5 The Screen

Switches the presentation of the data display on and off in the side strip. Selection of the data display that is to be shown

Switches the presentation of the TRACKPILOT display on and off. 1) Switches the presentation of the SPEEDPILOT display on and off. 1) Switches the presentation of the scale bar on and off - see page 53. (Scale bar is present only if vector charts are used) Switches the presentation of the EBL2 display on and off.

1) Is present only in the NACOS.

Fig. 3-10

The Presentation > Display Settings menu

Data Display By switch-on of a data display, further items of nautical information can be put onto the screen. You have a choice between the Track/Schedule display, the Track/Control display, the Conning display, and the Docking display. The data displays are described in Section 3.5.5 from page 64 onwards. The selected data display fills the right-hand strip above the Cursor display. A data display is shown when the Data Display function is switched on in the Presentation > Display Settings menu. In this menu, the data display to be shown can also be selected instead of selection via the title button of the data display being shown. If the CHARTPILOT is part of a NACOS, it is possible to call up on the CHARTPILOT the menus Pilot > TRACKPILOT and, if applicable, Pilot > SPEEDPILOT in order to display the currently existing TRACKPILOT data and SPEEDPILOT data respectively. These menus are briefly explained in Figure 3-21 on page 69. For details of the parameters displayed, please see the Operating Instructions of the radar indicator.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e31.fm / 12.08.09

49

CHARTPILOT

3 General

Operating Instructions

3.5 The Screen

Mode of the TRACKPILOT TRACKPILOT OFF: TRACKPILOT is not active TRACKPILOT FAILURE: TRACKPILOT has failed

TRACKPILOT display

Set course specified by the TRACKPILOT

SPEEDPILOT display

Set radius with which the TRACKPILOT will perform the next manoeuvre

Mode of the SPEEDPILOT SPEEDPILOT OFF: SPEEDPILOT is not active SP FAILURE: SPEEDPILOT has failed

Set speed specified by the SPEEDPILOT Set speed in the next track segment

Next data PD: Pilot Data are switched on for the TRACKPILOT

Navigation data line (see page 46)

Chart area For graphic elements displayed, see Section 3.5.4.2 This data display can be blanked out so that the chart area extends over the entire width of the screen (see page 64)

Basic menu line (see page 45) Digitizer Cursor display

EBL2 display

Data of EBL2 (similar to display of EBL1 data - see page 113)

Position of the crosswires magnifier on the digitized (paper) chart

Cursor display

Cursor position

Bearing of cursor position relative to own ship1)

Distance of cursor position from own ship's position1)

1) Relative bearing and distance to CCRP (conning position) Fig. 3-11

50

The chart area

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e31.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

3 General 3.5 The Screen

Fast Switch-Over to the Standard Display If you are working with a subroutine or are performing particular tasks (e.g. editing of waypoint data) in the main program, the chart area too is almost completely covered. To ensure that, in this situation too, you can obtain a quick overview of the current navigational situation, you can call the display of the chart area into the foreground by pressing the Std Disp button in the basic menu 1). If Planning display mode is switched on, a switch-over to the Monitoring display mode last used takes place (see page 91). The subroutine or the menu of the main program in which you were working when the STD DISP button was pressed is not switched off but continues to run in the background. When you call it up again, you will find that the settings made previously are still valid.

3.5.4.2

Overview of Graphic Elements and their Setting Procedures

The graphic elements generated by the CHARTPILOT for the display in the chart area can be switched on and off individually. Many of them can be parameterised. For the following elements, the procedure for switching the display on and off, the procedure for parameterising them and (if necessary) the symbol used are described in this section: Cursor and digitizer cursor Range rings Chart grid Bearing scale Scale bar Event markers Position fix symbols Own ship's symbol with: Heading line Stern line Curved Headline (only if a TRACKPILOT is installed) Path Prediction Course and speed vector Past plot with time labels and position-times Past plot of the second position-sensor ARPA targets and AIS targets Pre-planned tracks and waypoints User Chart Objects (user-edited objects which supplement the electronic charts) Aids-to-Navigation received via an AIS system which is connected to the radar. Information about the following elements which are likewise displayable in the chart area is given in other sections: Objects of the vector charts in Section 4.3 from page 97 onwards 2) Variable range marker, VRM, in Section 4.5 from page 112 onwards Electronic bearing line, EBL, in Section 4.5 from page 112 onwards

1) 2)

The function key F8 of the keyboard has the same function. All symbols of the electronic chart of type ENC are explained in the info box in the Legend index card.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e31.fm / 12.08.09

51

CHARTPILOT

3 General

Operating Instructions

3.5 The Screen

Setting of the coordinate system (see page 96; menu see Figure 4-10 on page 97) Setting of the Monitoring display mode or Planning display mode (see Section 4.2.4 from page 90 onwards; menu see Figure 4-9 on page 94) Switches on and off the presentation of the individual displays of the chart area and the display of the scale measurement bar (see Section 3.5.4.1; menu see Figure 3-10 on page 49). Switches the display of the stated symbols on and off. Defines the length of the course and speed vectors. Switches the display of the course and speed vectors on and off (own ship and targets). Lets the user select the ship´s symbol (see Section 3.5.4.10) Switches the display of the stated symbols on and off. Defines the prediction time for the display of the Path Prediction. Defines the length of own ship's past plots. Switches on and off the display of the time labels on own ship's past plots. For own ship, this switches on and off the display of the past plot of the second position sensor. Defines the spacing of the time labels on own ship's past plot. Switches on and off the display of own ship's past plot. Fig. 3-12

3.5.4.3

The Presentation menu

Cursor and Digitizer Cursor

The cursor (controlled by the trackball) contains the symbol symbolised by .

in the chart area; the digitizer cursor is

The digitizer cursor shows the present position of the digitizer's crosswires magnifier on the paper chart which is set up there. It appears in the chart area when a digitizer is connected to the CHARTPILOT, the digitizer is set up (see page 166), the display of the digitizer cursor is switched on (by switching on the Digitizer Cursor function in the Peripheral Devices > Digitizer Setup menu) and the position of the crosswires magnifier on the paper chart is situated within the chart area.

3.5.4.4

Range Rings Range rings can be displayed only if vector charts are used.

The range rings are displayed centered to the CCRP (conning position) and at a fixed distance from one another. This distance and the number of rings are specified by the program in accordance with the selected range setting. When the display of the range rings is switched on, the distance of the range rings from one another is displayed in the Range field to the right of the Range display in the basic menu line. Switching on and off the display: With the Range Rings button in the Presentation menu.

52

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e31.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

3.5.4.5

3 General 3.5 The Screen

Grid The chart grid can be displayed only if vector charts are used. The number of grid lines displayed is specified by the program in accordance with the selected range setting.

Switching on and off the display: With the Grid button in the Presentation menu.

3.5.4.6

Bearing Scale

The bearing scale is displayed centered to the CCRP (conning position). Switching on and off the display: With the Bearing Scale button in the Presentation menu.

3.5.4.7

Scale Bar

The scale bar is displayed at the left-hand edge. The scale bar has a length of 1 NM and subdivisions of 0.1 NM if the range setting is 3 NM or less. At the longer range settings, it is 10 NM long and the subdivisions are 2 NM. Switching on and off the display: With the Scale Bar button in the Presentation > Display Setting menu.

3.5.4.8

Event Markers

Event markers which have been set as described in Section 4.9 or on a radar indicator appear in orange with the symbol . If the function Text Labels has been selected in the Chart menu, the remark which was entered when the event was being set appears also beside the event symbol in the chart area. The display of the event markers generally cannot be switched on and off. If event markers are no longer to be displayed, they must be deleted as described in Section 4.9.

3.5.4.9

Position Fix Symbols

Position fix symbols which have been set as per Section 4.10 Section 4.9 or on a radar indicator appear in orange with the symbol . If, in the Chart menu, the Text Labels function has been selected, then the time of the fix and, in brief form, the method of position determination also appear at the position fix symbol (see page 136). The display of the position fix symbol cannot be generally switched on or off. Position fix symbols which are no longer to be displayed must be deleted as per Section 4.10.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e31.fm / 12.08.09

53

CHARTPILOT

3 General

Operating Instructions

3.5 The Screen

3.5.4.10

Own Ship Display

Own ship's symbol:

The own ship can be displayed with three different symbols as selected in the Symbol menu:

Setting

Auto Scaled

Symbol

Remarks

At small range settings (up to 1.5 NM) or with large chart-scales (greater than 1:25000 1)); true to scale 2);located at the CCRP (conning position)

Simplified

Minimized

1) 2)

Greater than 1:50000 if the raster chart is displayed enlarged. depending on the length of the ship

Selection of the symbol to be displayed: With the Symbol menu in the Presentation menu. Own ship's symbol can be supplemented by the following elements: Heading line: An extension of the ship's longitudinal axis as far as the edge of the screen Temporarily switching on and off the display: With the Heading Line button in the Radar/AIS menu. Curved Headline: When the ship is being steered with the TRACKPILOT in Heading mode or Course mode, the track on which the TRACKPILOT is steering the ship in the planned or initiated coursemanoeuvre can be displayed by means of this line (for details, see Operating Instructions of the radar indicator). The line ends at the edge of the screen. Switching on and off the display: With the Curved Headline button in the Presentation menu. Course and speed vector: The tip of the arrow indicates where own ship will be situated after the set time (set with the sliding controller under the Vector Length button in the Presentation menu), assuming that the present course and speed will remain constant. can be seen from the vector symbol whether the vector is relative to the water (Water Track, WT = one arrow-head) or relative to the bottom (Bottom Track, BT = two arrow-heads). The set time also applies to the course and speed vectors of the targets being tracked. Switching on and off the display: With the Vector Length button in the Presentation menu. With this, the course and speed vectors of the tracked targets are switched on or off at the same time.

54

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e31.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

3 General

Operating Instructions

If the relative display has been selected for the course and speed vectors of the tracked targets, own ship's vector is not displayed - see also page 58.

3.5 The Screen

Heading line

Path Prediction: At range settings up to 1.5 NM, the symbol can be used to show where own ship will be situated after the set time (set with the sliding controller under the Prediction button in the Presentation menu), assuming that the present speed and rate of turn (ROT) will remain constant.

Course and speed vector

Switching on and off the display: With the Prediction button in the Presentation menu.

Own ship's symbol

0703

Past plot: The path last sailed by the ship (in the period of time set with the sliding controller under the buttons Past Position and 2nd Past Position in the Presentation menu). The data of the selected position sensor are used as the basis for the past plot calculation. Switching on and off the display: With the Past Position button in the Presentation menu. Even if its display is not switched on, the corresponding data are recorded. Therefore, when you switch on its display, the past plot for the entire period of time selected appears.

0702 0701

Past plot

0700

Time labels 0659 0658

Position times

The past plot can be provided with time markers, and these can be provided with position times: Stern line Time labels: Marking the positions on the past plots at the intervals of time selected with the sliding controller under the Time Labels button in the Presentation menu. Switching on and off the display: With the Time Labels button in the Presentation menu. The time labels are recorded only for as long as the Time Labels function is switched on. Therefore, on the part of the past plot already displayed at the instant of switch-on of this function, no time labels appear. Position times: The present zone time in hours and minutes. Switching on and off the display: With the Text Labels button in the Chart menu. With this, the text labels of the vector charts are switched on or off at the same time. Even when switch-on takes place retrospectively, the position times appear at all time labels. Past plot of the second position sensor: A second past plot which differs from the one already described only in that the data of the second position sensor are used as the basis. By switching on both past plots, it is possible to obtain information about the accuracy of the position sensors. Switching on and off the display: With the 2nd Past Position button in the Presentation menu. Stern line: Backward extension of the ship's longitudinal axis as far as the edge of the screen. Switching on and off the display: With the Stern Line button in the Radar/AIS menu.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e31.fm / 12.08.09

55

CHARTPILOT

3 General

Operating Instructions

3.5 The Screen

3.5.4.11

ARPA Targets and AIS Targets 1)

On the CHARTPILOT, the ARPA targets of one of the radars of the system and the AIS targets 2) can be displayed. Switching the display of the ARPA targets on and off: In the menu Radar/AIS > Targets, by means of the button ARPA Targets from. Switching the display of the AIS targets on and off: In the menu Radar/AIS > Targets by means of the buttons AIS Targets and Sleeping Targets. With the button AIS Targets, all target data provided by the AIS system are also switched off: In the case of the system configuration without AIS operation on the CHARTPILOT, the display of the ARPA targets and AIS targets is switched on/off jointly in the menu Radar/AIS > Targets with the button Targets from - see footnote on next page. Sleeping targets are not displayed. IMPORTANT: As long as the display of the AIS targets is switched off, the AIS targets are not tracked by the CHARTPILOT. For these targets, no collision computation then takes place. Opens the Targets menu Simulation of trial manoeuvres; menu see Figure 4-31 on page 131

Switches the display of the ARPA targets on and off. Selection of the radar from which the ARPA targets to be displayed are to be taken.1)

This switches the entire processing of the AIS target data on and off, and therefore also the display, the collision computation and the automatic target acquisition of the AIS targets. 2) Switches the display of the sleeping targets on and off. 2) Further AIS functions, see Section 4.6 1)

Switches the display of the Aidsto-Navigation on and off. 1)

Handling of AIS targets see page 117. Switches the display of the target IDs on and off. Defines whether the call sign or the ship’s name is displayed as the target ID for AIS targets. Switches the past plots of the targets on and off. Specifies the time length of the past plots of the targets.

1) The number of radar indicators depends on the system layout. 2) Present only if there is an AIS system connected. Fig. 3-13

1) 2)

56

The menus Radar/AIS and Radar/AIS > Targets 3)

In the following, the terms ARPA target and AIS target are used only if the statement is limited to this target type only. The term target is used in the following if the statement applies both to ARPA targets and to AIS targets. and SAR aircraft (see page 116). SAR aircraft are treated and displayed in the same way as AIS targets, and are therefore not mentioned again in the following. Their identity can be determined by means of the info box.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e31.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

3 General

Operating Instructions

3.5 The Screen

Display of ARPA and AIS targets Targets that have been acquired and are being tracked are provided with symbols indicating their track status. Targets being tracked can also be provided with speed vectors and with a past position plot as per Section 3.5.4.11 (see page 56).

3)

If the AIS system is connected in such a way that it cannot be operated on the CHARTPILOT, the menus have the following form:

Switches the display of the ARPA targets and AIS targets on/off jointly.

Functions see above

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e31.fm / 12.08.09

57

CHARTPILOT

3 General

Operating Instructions

3.5 The Screen

ARPA Targets

AIS Targets Sleeping Target The point of the triangle is aligned with the heading of the target, or with its COG if heading information is not available. Dashed symbol: Because of missing data, no collision avoidance computation can be performed - see page 117. A sleeping target with neither a reported heading nor COG will be orientated toward the top of the operational display area. Target acquired automatically by acquisition/guard zone (Target which has triggered the TARGET AUTO-ACQUIRED (n) alarm or the TGT ENTERED GUARZONE (n) alarm)

Target acquired manually

Target acquired automatically by acquisition/guard zone (Target which has triggered the TARGET AUTO-ACQUIRED (n) alarm or the TGT ENTERED GUARZONE (n) alarm)

flashing

Tracked Target The triangle becomes greater than the sleeping target, additionally it is possible to show the true scaled outlines. If the heading information is available, the heading line is displayed additionally, and if the target is turning then a flag on the heading indicator shows the direction of turn. Dashed symbol: See sleeping target

Target (moving) being tracked

Target with ID

4

Target with label as reference target (reference target tracking) Dangerous target 1) Target which has triggered the DANGEROUS TARGET (n) alarm Target whose data are being displayed (symbol and ID are displayed additionally) Lost target Target which has triggered the LOST TARGET (n) alarm.

(xx=target ID yy.y=range, zzz=true bearing)

1)

flashing

Target with ID If the target is transmitting a call sign, this is taken. If not, the system generates the ID AIS with a serial number.

BXGH AIS7

R

flashing, red

Dangerous target 1) Target which has triggered the DANGEROUS TARGET (n) alarm

flashing, red

Target whose data are being displayed (symbol and ID are displayed additionally)

flashing

Lost target Target which has triggered the LOST TARGET (n) alarm. (xx=target ID yy.y=range, zzz=true bearing)

flashing

If the DANGEROUS TARGET (n) alarm is acknowledged by the operator, the symbol stops flashing but is still drawn in red.

Acquired targets can be supplemented by the following elements: Course and speed vectors: Switching on and off the display: With the Vector Length button in the Presentation menu. With this, the course and speed vector of the own ship symbol is switched on/off simultaneously.

Course and speed vector

AIS target

Target ID AHTFG

ARPA target

09

Past plot The vectors (together with the past plots) can be displayed as true vectors or as vectors relative to own ship. Time markers Relative display: The vectors (and the past plots) show the movement relative to own ship. True display: The heads of the vectors are always situated at the positions which the radar targets will reach in the set time if they keep their present speeds and courses.

If you switch the relative display on while Centered Display mode or True Motion mode is switched on, a target on a collision course can be easily recognised from the fact that its course and speed vector is pointing towards own ship - see Figure 3-14.

58

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e31.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

3 General

Operating Instructions

3.5 The Screen

Switching over between true and relative display is performed in the menu Presentation > Display Mode, in the frame Vector Display. The time represented by the vectors can be set with the sliding controller under the Vector Length button in the Presentation menu. The time also applies to the course and speed vector of the own ship symbol. The tips of all vectors displayed therefore represent the same point in time.

Target is on collision course (vector points towards own ship symbol).

True Motion Mode with true vector presentation (basic setting) Fig. 3-14

The same scenario after switch-over to relative vector presentation

Recognition of collision course by means of relative vector presentation

Past plots These (together with the vectors) can be displayed as true plots or as plots relative to own ship: Relative display: Starting at the present position of the target, the past plots indicate the movement made by the target relative to own ship in the set period of time. True display: The past plot shows the geographic positions occupied by the ship in the set period of time. Switching on and off the display: With the Past Positions button in the Radar/AIS > Targets menu. The time represented by the past plots can be set with the Past Position Length sliding controller in the Radar/AIS > Targets menu. Past plots are provided with time markers: These are set simultaneously for all past plots displayed: for past plot lengths from 1 to 6 minutes, they are set at 1-minute intervals; for lengths of 7 to 9 minutes, they are set at 2-minute intervals; and for lengths of 10 to 12 minutes, they are set at intervals of 3 minutes. Target IDs The display of the target markers can be switched on and off (for ARPA and AIS targets together) in the menu Radar/AIS > Targets by means of the button Target IDs. By means of the buttons Call Sign AIS and Ship’s Name AIS, the type of target marker can be defined for the AIS targets. True Scale Outlines

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e31.fm / 12.08.09

59

3 General 3.5 The Screen

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

The targets can also be displayed with an outline representing the actual size (length, width) of the target by means if the True Scaled Targets function. This function is only availbale for AIS targets and if additional conditions like target range, monitor´s DPI and target size are within the appropriate parameters. See Section 3.5.4.11 for further information.

AIS target with course line, past plot and true scale outline

60

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e31.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

3 General

Operating Instructions

3.5.4.12

3.5 The Screen

Pre-planned Tracks with their Waypoints

On the CHARTPILOT, the route to be sailed and the travelling time can be planned for the intended voyage (see Section 5). The result of this planning is the pre-planned track defined by a sequence of waypoints.

5

During the planning, pre-planned tracks are provided (among other things) with data which enable the TRACKPILOT to automatically keep the ship on the track and enable the SPEEDPILOT to keep to the planned speeds and travelling times. Switching on the display: Under Catalogs in the Tracks > Load menu, select the catalog in which the pre-planned tracks to be displayed are listed; next, under Tracks, mark the desired track(s), and press the OK button. The tracks switched on in this way are displayed in orange. If a track is displayed in red, it is the System Track (see Section 6.1.1). The waypoint numbers and the courses of the tracklines are displayed only if in the Chart menu Text Labels is not switched to None.

192 Pre-planned track resulting from the waypoint positions and from the radii stored for them

Parameter point Planned wheel-over point

6 Waypoint with serial number

149

Course to the next waypoint

Switching off the display: In the Tracks > Clear menu, mark the pre-planned tracks which are no longer to be displayed, and press Clear. The display of the System Track (displayed in red) cannot be switched off. If this track is no longer to be displayed, it must first be deselected as the System Track (see page 233).

If the Check Track function is used in the generation or changing of the track and if attention is paid to any error messages that occur during that process (see Section 5.1.9), the track contains no manoeuvres that cannot be performed. Display of the System Track in track control mode To Waypoint: Systems with TRACKPILOT: If the track control mode is set to To Waypoint, the route from own ship to the current waypoint is computed as a temporary track and is displayed addi-

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e31.fm / 12.08.09

Tracklines

9

211 5N M

Display of manoeuvres which cannot be performed: If, during the programming of the track, the waypoints have been positioned so unfavourably (small distance between waypoints, acute angles) and/or the radii have been selected so large that the pre-planned track probably cannot be sailed, this is clearly indicated by a special display of the track (see also Section 5.1.9): At the waypoint, the tracklines (the straight lines to the last waypoint and to the present one) are displayed complete in the form of unbroken lines. On the display, the circular segment defined by the radius is shifted along the trackline towards the last waypoint until it fits between the two tracklines. This shift takes place as far as the last waypoint at the most, but not further than to a distance of 5 NM between the beginning of the curve and the waypoint.

7

176

8 53 Behind the curve end of waypoint 7, this curve does not fit into the angle formed by waypoints 7, 8 and 9. Therefore, the curve is displayed shifted, and the display of the pre-planned track is interrupted by the display of the tracklines. As the track control mode, To Waypoint is set; the ship is not situated on the pre-planned track: - Recomputed current segment of System Track - Unused segment of System Track

232

61

CHARTPILOT

3 General

Operating Instructions

3.5 The Screen

tionally. This temporary track is recomputed continually (every 60 seconds) for the current own position until the TRACKPILOT is switched over to Track mode. The current track segment of the pre-planned track likewise remains displayed, but is not used. In systems without a TRACKPILOT, the temporary track is calculated and displayed for the waypoint previously defined with the function Select; see A p p r o a c h T r a c k t o t h e D e f i n e d S y s t e m T r a c k on page 231. On ships with DNV approval, the way in which the waypoints were generated is indicated by the track pattern used: By means of electronic chart as per Section 5.1.5 or in Text mode as per Section 5.1.6 By means of digitizer

Above a latitude of 85°, no track curves are displayed.

3.5.4.13

Waypoints from Waypoint Files

Waypoints that are needed frequently for voyage planning can be collected in special waypoint files (see page 192). Switching on the display: Under Catalogs in the Tracks > Waypoint File > Load menu, select the catalog in which the waypoint file is listed, then mark the desired file under Waypoint Files and press the OK button. Switching off the display: In the Tracks > Waypoint File > Load menu, press the Clear button. The waypoints from waypoint files are displayed as small circles (same size as parameter points). The ID numbers of the waypoints are displayed if Text Labels is switched on in the Chart menu.

3.5.4.14

Maps

Maps can be generated and displayed on the CHARTPILOT (for the generation of maps, see Section 5.5 from page 214 onwards). A map here is a simplified chart which can only contain sequences of straight segments (map lines) and various symbols. The map lines can have various patterns (of dots and dashes). The possible symbols are shown in Figure 3-15. Patterns and symbols appear in various colours.

Light vessel Radio reporting point

Spar light buoy (port)

Pilot station Anchorage

Hazard buoy (N)

Fishing area

Hazard buoy (S)

Cylindrical buoy

Hazard buoy (W)

Conical buoy Cylindrical light buoy Fig. 3-15

62

Spar light buoy (starboard)

Hazard buoy (E)

Light Radio station

Symbols on a map

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e31.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

3 General 3.5 The Screen

The maps are the only charts capable of being handled on the CHARTPILOT which, for the purpose of better orientation, are also capable of being added as a background to the radar display on any indicator of the radar 9xxx series in radar mode. These maps are not compatible with the maps which can be edited on RADARPILOT 1x00's and which are used there, and they cannot be displayed there. Therefore, this functionality is only available if it is activated on service level. Switching on the display: Under Catalogs in the Maps > Load menu, select the catalog in which the maps to be displayed are listed, then mark the desired map(s) under Maps and press the OK button. Switching off the display: In the Maps > Clear menu, mark the map(s) that are no longer to be displayed, and press Clear.

3.5.4.15

User Chart Objects

The User Chart Objects are individual objects which can be edited on the CHARTPILOT as per Section 5.2 and displayed additionally in Chart mode independently of the electronic chart. Switching on and off the display: In the Chart menu by means of the User Chart Objects button. For symbols used; for explanations relating to the individual User Chart Objects, see Section 5.2. The names of the feature areas and feature lines, as well as the texts of the text notes, are displayed if, in the Chart menu, the Text Labels function is switched on.

Own MARPOL line (green/ orange) Anchor watch area (orange) Danger highlight (red) Own safety line (orange; the hatching points towards the unsafe area) Feature area (ochre, brown) Names and notes are displayed if the display of the Text Labels is switched on Feature line (orange) Text note, information Text note, caution Symbols (examples)

3.5.4.16

Aids-to-Navigation and Base Stations

Aids-to-Navigation are marks whose data are received by an AIS system. To display them, the symbols of the ENC are used, supplemented with a blue circle whose centre is situated at the position of the Aid-to-Navigation. Base stations: Equipment for controlling the AIS system, e.g. as a component of a traffic control centre. Symbol: , surrounded by a blue circle. Base stations are treated in the same way as Aids-to-Navigation, and are therefore not mentioned again in the following. Switching the display on and off: In the menu Radar/AIS by means of the button Aids-to-Navigation. Switch-over of the symbol presentation (Simplified / Paper Chart - see page 100) takes place together with the vector charts (in the menu Charts > Visibility Options).

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e31.fm / 12.08.09

63

CHARTPILOT

3 General 3.5 The Screen

3.5.5

Operating Instructions

Data Displays and Pilot Menus The presentation of the data display is optional. There is a choice between folowing types of data display: The Track/Schedule display contains a collection of the most important data needed for track control and time schedule planning, with the emphasis on time schedule planning. All data displayed there refer to the System Track (see page 229). The Track/Control display likewise contains the most important data needed for track-keeping and time planning, likewise relating to the System Track but with a different set of data. The Conning Data display contains not only the most important data of the System Track for track control but also the propeller shaft revolution rate and (if applicable) the propeller pitch, as well as information about wind, current and depth. In the Docking display, a number of data items needed for docking manoeuvres can be displayed as numerical values and also graphically. A feature shared by all data displays is that the name of the unit and the CHARTPILOT number are entered beside the company logo in the top line 1). Below that, there is the Title button. The number of the CHARTPILOT is used in the data maintenance process of the electronic charts to identify the CHARTPILOT whose data are being processed. On the CHARTPILOT, the Pilot menus are used only to display the TRACKPILOT and SPEEDPILOT data. Settings of the TRACKPILOT or SPEEDPILOT can only be made on the radar indicators. Switching the Presentation of the Data Display On and Off The presentation of the data display can generally be switched on and off with the Data Display function in the Presentation > Display Settings menu. Selection of the Data Display to be Presented Selection is performed either in the Presentation > Display Settings menu or after clicking of the Title button of the data display shown.

1)

64

In the following illustrations, the line is not shown.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e31.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

3 General

Operating Instructions

3.5 The Screen

The Track/Control-Display Title button; after clicking, one of the other data displays can be switched on Name and number of the System Track Last waypoint Number and name of the present waypoint Field is yellow: System Track is violated within the next 20 NM by safety contour, object of interest or own safety line By clicking of the INFO key, the System Track can be checked as far as the last waypoint Geogr. position of the present waypoint Left: Sailing mode: GC = Great Circle, RL = Rhumb Line Centre: Track control mode: To WPT = To Waypoint, To TRK = To Track Right: Pilot Data Status: PD on = Pilot Data are switched on for the TRACKPILOT Left: Bearing of the present waypoint Right: WPD: Distance to the present waypoint 1) WOP: Distance to the WOP Left:

In To Track mode: Direction of the present track line In To Waypoint mode: Last computed course of the temporary track to the present waypoint Field is red: The course limit is exceeded. Right: Track deviation from the System Track; R: Ship is situated to the right of the Track Field is red: The track limit is exceeded. TTG: Probable sailing time up to the present waypoint 1) TTG WOP: Probable sailing time up to the WOP TTG or TTG WOP in red: The APPROACHING WAYPOINT alarm is present Planned time schedule: The following data are obtained if the ship sails to the arrival point at the Arrival Speed. Actual time schedule: The following data are obtained if the ship sails to the arrival point at the present speed. Next leg data: See illustration on next page Switch-over: After clicking Number of the waypoint of the arrival point (for arrival point, see page 233) Estimated time of arrival at the arrival point Planned time of arrival at the arrival point Difference between the estimated time of arrival and the planned time of arrival at the arrival point (Spare: Arriving too early) Probable time to go to the arrival point Remaining distance to go to the arrival point Arrival Speed of the present track segment (for Arrival Speed, see page 233) Arrival Speed of the next track segment 1) At service level, it can be specified that only the distance to go to the WOP is displayed.

Fig. 3-16

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e31.fm / 12.08.09

The Track/Control Display

65

CHARTPILOT

3 General

Operating Instructions

3.5 The Screen

Next leg data: The following data occur if the present leg and the next leg are sailed at the present speed. Number of the next waypoint (waypoint at the end of the next leg) Probable time of arrival at the next waypoint Probable sailing time up to the next waypoint Sailing distance up to the next waypoint Probable sailing time on the next leg Length of the next leg Present speed (with which the times displayed above are computed)

Fig. 3-17

Next Leg Data in the Track/Control Display

The Track/Schedule Display Title button; after clicking, one of the other data displays can be switched on Name and number of the System Track

Number, remark about the waypoint, and geogr. position of the waypoint that is passed last Number1), remark about the waypoint, and geogr. position of the present waypoint Estimated time of arrival at the present waypoint

Switching over to the data of the next waypoint takes place when the present waypoint is lying abeam of the ship. If the TRACKPILOT is steering with Pilot Data or in Track mode, the TRACKPILOT decides when to switch over (usually occurs at the wheel over point).

Probable time to go to the present waypoint Number and remark about the waypoint of the arrival point (for arrival point, see page 233) Estimate time of arrival at the arrival point Probable time to go to the arrival point Arrival Speed of the present track segment (for Arrival Speed, see page 233) Difference between the estimated time of arrival and the planned time of arrival at the arrival point (Spare: Arriving too early) Arrival Speed of the next track segment 1) Number field is yellow: System Track is violated within the next 20 NM by safety contour, object of interest or own safety line By clicking of the INFO key, the System Track can be checked as far as the last waypoint Fig. 3-18

66

The Track/Schedule Display

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e31.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

3 General

Operating Instructions

3.5 The Screen

The Conning Data Display

Title button; after clicking, one of the other data displays can be switched on Last waypoint Number and name of the present waypoint Field is yellow: System Track is violated within the next 20 NM by safety contour, object of interest or own safety line By clicking of the INFO key, the System Track can be checked as far as the last waypoint Estimated time of arrival at the present waypoint TTG: Probable sailing time up to the present waypoint 1) TTG WOP: Probable sailing time up to the WOP TTG or TTG WOP in red: The APPROACHING WAYPOINT alarm is present Bearing of the present waypoint WPD: Distance to the present waypoint 1) WOP: Distance to the WOP -

In To Track mode: Direction of the present track line In To Waypoint mode: Last computed course of the temporary track to the present waypoint Field is red: The course limit is exceeded. Expected rate of turn at the present waypoint, resulting from the actual speed Propeller shaft revolution rate and pitch of the variable-pitch propellers Bar and number at top right: Deviation from the System Track: R and bar to the right: Ship is situated to the right of the track Red strokes: The set track limit Bar is red: The track limit is exceeded. Wind direction Wind speed (switch-over of the unit of measurement by means of context-sensitive menu) Wind display (switch-over by means of context-sensitive menu) Rel: Relative wind; measured by wind sensor True: True wind; computed by the system Ship's symbol represents the present gyro heading Yellow arrow pointing inwards: Wind direction Blue arrow pointing outwards: Direction of the current Red line: Present course = gyro heading + drift angle Present depth measured by the navigation echosounder If an echosounder with several transducers is installed, the selected transducer is noticed here.

Depth history of the past 10 minutes Red line: Depth alarm value that was set in the Alarm Settings menu By means of a context-sensitive menu, the depth range displayed can be set to a different fixed value or to automatic range-adaptation.

1) At service level, it can be specified that only the distance to go to the WOP is displayed.

Fig. 3-19

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e31.fm / 12.08.09

The Conning Data Display

67

CHARTPILOT

3 General

Operating Instructions

3.5 The Screen

The Docking Display

Title button; after clicking, one of the other data displays can be switched on Rate of Turn, computed from the change in the gyro heading values supplied by the compass system Bar to the right: Ship is turning to starboard Triangle at the end of the scale: Exceeding of the scale range

Gyro heading

Harbour display switched on: The power values of the bow thrusters are displayed - see Figure 11-3 Harbour display switched off: Track deviation and course deviation are displayed: Transverse speed at the bow, computed by the system 1) Course deviation (Set course minus actual course) 3) Bar to the right: The actual value lies to starboard of the set value Red lines: The set course limit Bar is red: The course limit is exceeded. Track deviation: 3) Bar to the right. The ship is situated to the right of the track Red lines: The set track limit Bar is red: The track limit is exceeded. Longitudinal speed, measured by the selected speed sensor 1) Propeller shaft revolution rate 2) Pitch of variable-pitch propeller 2) Transverse speed at the stern, computed by the system 1) Rudder angle, from the rudder angle sensor Yellow triangle: The set rudder angle, specified by the TRACKPILOT Red lines: The rudder limit that is set on the TRACKPILOT Wind display (switch-over by means of context-sensitive menu) Rel: Relative wind; measured by wind sensor True: True wind; computed by the system

Water depth under the keel measured by the navigation echosounder at the location of the selected transducer

Wind speed (switch-over of the unit of measurement by means of context-sensitive menu) Wind direction

1) Speed over ground if the selected speed sensor is working in Bottom Track mode,speed through the water if the selected speed sensor is working in Water Track mode 2) Data from the engines 3) Relative to the track used by the TRACKPILOT, computed by the TRACKPILOT. In Heading mode and Course mode, this is the deviation from a track which has been specified by the input of the set course. In Track mode, this is the deviation from the System Track.

Fig. 3-20

68

The Docking Display

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e31.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

3 General

Operating Instructions

3.5 The Screen

The Pilot Menus These menus cannot be operated from the CHARTPILOT. They only display the settings, received from TRACKPILOT and SPEEDPILOT.

On the CHARTPILOT, this has no function. Display of the TRACKPILOT parameters mentioned

Pilot Data is switched on/off for the TRACKPILOT. Setting of the sailing mode Setting of the track control mode Length of time by which the APPROACHING WAYPOINT alarm precedes the TP WHEEL OVER POINT alarm (displayed on the radar indicators) Manual course-correction of the actual course for the TRACKPILOT is switched on/off. Correction value being used at present The automatic course correction of the actual course is switched on/ off for the TRACKPILOT. On the CHARTPILOT, this has no function. Fig. 3-21

3.5.6

The Pilot > TRACKPILOT and Pilot > SPEEDPILOT menus

The Alarm List A special dialog box, the alarm list, appears when an alarm is generated on the CHARTPILOT. The meanings of the alarms reported in that box and the operating procedure for the alarm list are described in Section 9. Alarm messages with time and date of their appearance and with a statement of the subsystem that has triggered the alarm concerned.

Opens the Chart Alarm List. Acknowledges the marked alarm message. Fig. 3-22

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e31.fm / 12.08.09

Switches off the display of the alarm list.

The alarm list

69

CHARTPILOT

3 General

Operating Instructions

3.5 The Screen

3.5.7

The Info Box At any time, you can obtain a display of the following data sorted into index cards and info groups 1), provided that the data are available in the CHARTPILOT: General data relating to the electronic chart displayed, information about the objects contained in the displayed vector chart, the notes and diagrams printed on the raster chart, the Notices to Mariners and the Temporary and Preliminary Notices to Mariners issued by the UKHO (if ARCS charts are used), data of the displayed User Chart Objects and Aids-to-Navigation data of the displayed Aids-to-Navigation received via AIS data of the ARPA and AIS targets being displayed, data transmitted by the own AIS system data relating to each element of the pre-planned tracks displayed data relating to each element of the displayed maps-data relating to each event marker (see page 133) and relating to each position fix (see page 135) If there is a printer connected, this information can also be printed. Display of Data 1.

Position the cursor in the chart area, and press the INFO key. In the chart area, a circle appears round the clicked position, and the info box appears. It contains: all information which the system possesses about the objects situated in the circle (including those objects that are currently not being displayed), all information which the system has about the selected electronic chart, if applicable, the Notices to Mariners and the Temporary and Preliminary Notices to Mariners which are mentioned in the data set of the selected raster chart The position and size of the info box can be changed (see page 41).

2.

Click on the desired index card (see U S E F U L I N F O R M A T I O N ). The info groups 2) marked by means of blue triangles and dealing with the subject of the index card appear. If only info groups are displayed, you can either obtain a list of the objects or data types of a desired info group by clicking on this group, or obtain a list of the objects or data types of all groups by means of Expand. Repeated clicking on the info group switches the display of the objects or data types off again. The general expansion resulting from Expand can be cancelled by pressing the same button, which is meanwhile called Compress.

1) 2)

70

3.

If you click on one of the objects or data types listed, the data box containing the detailed data of this term opens up.

4.

If a Details button appears in the data box, further details (pictures and texts) can be displayed by clicking on that button.

5.

The display of the data box and info box can be switched off by pressing the Cancel button.

The index cards and info groups are different for vector charts and raster charts. if the content of the index card is divided up into info groups, which is very often the case.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e31.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

3 General

Operating Instructions

3.5 The Screen

Statement of the position for which the information is displayed.

With this, the box can be set to maximum size and back again.

Alternative operating procedure for the box Index cards with information about the position clicked with the INFO key; by clicking on the index card, the content is displayed Info groups of the index card; by clicking, objects or data types of the info group are displayed

Info box

Objects or data types of the info group; by clicking, the data box is opened

Expand: By pressing, the objects or data types are displayed for all info groups Compress: The display of all objects or data types is switched off.

Closes the info box and, if applicable, the data box Printing all information existing in the index card currently being displayed

Data box

Detailed data relating to the object or data type clicked

Printing the detailed data contained in the data box Fig. 3-23

Displays more details

Closes the data box

The info box and the data box

Printing of Data With the Print button of the data box, the content of the data box can be printed. With the Print All button of the info box, all data stored in the index card can be printed. Explanations for the Objects Displayed in the ENC In a manner similar to that of Chart 1 (INT 1) of the international (paper) chart series, there exists the ECDIS Chart 1, in which the elements used in the ECDIS are explained. If the display of the electronic chart of type ENC is switched on, this ECDIS Chart 1 can be opened as follows: 1.

Position the cursor in the chart region, press the INFO key, and click on the index card Legend.

2.

By clicking on ECDIS Chart 1, list the pages of ECDIS Chart 1.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e31.fm / 12.08.09

71

CHARTPILOT

3 General

Operating Instructions

3.5 The Screen

3.

Clicking on one of the pages (Show ....) does not cause a data box to open, which is the usual case; instead, the ENC cell ECDIS Chart 1 is called up, a switch-over to Planning display mode takes place, a switch-over to the range setting 0.75 NM takes place, the chart excerpt is set to the area of ECDIS Chart 1 (≈ 15° N, 5° W, i.e. in the Sahara Desert!), and the Presentation mode specially required for ECDIS Chart 1 is switched on.

4.

In ECDIS Chart 1, only the elements are displayed, without any explanations; however, by clicking with the Info key, all information can now be called up (see above, D i s p l a y o f D a t a ). ECDIS Chart 1 can now be used like a normal ENC, i.e. the range setting can be changed, the centre can be shifted, and so on.

5.

When ECDIS Chart 1 is being exited, it must be ensured that a switch-over to Presentation mode takes place again, which is necessary for all other ENC cells. This is done by changing the position of the chart region in some way or other (but not by means of the Set Center button), for example by switching over to Monitoring display mode, or by switching to the standard display by means of the Std Disp button, or – in Planning display mode – by inputting a new position by means of the menu Presentation > Display Mode.

USEFUL INFORMATION Contents of the Index Cards The individual index cards contain the following information: Targets Data of ARPA and AIS targets being displayed or the AIS data of the own ship Tracks/Maps Data relating to tracks and maps User Objects Data relating to objects inserted by the user, e.g. User Chart Objects, event markers, position fixes and data of the Aids-to-Navigation (navigation marks which are reported by the AIS system) Chart Contents For vector charts: Data relating to the chart objects Legend Legend for the electronic chart For vector charts: Presentation parameters. Additionally for the ENC and Own Chart: calling up ECDIS Chart 1, which has explanations of the objects displayed. Status Status of the electronic chart Notes&Diagrams Notes and diagrams that are printed out on the raster chart T&P NMs Notices to Mariners and the Temporary and Preliminary Notices to Mariners issued by the UKHO (for raster charts only)

72

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e31.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

3 General

Operating Instructions

3.6

3.6 Using the Printer

Using the Printer The (optional) printer can be used with equal priority by all of the system's items of equipment. The data to be printed out are assembled page-by-page by each computer; the computer then begins the printing process. Print jobs arriving at the printer from different items of equipment are processed one after another. So that the printer can be used at any time, it should continually be in On-Line mode with paper inserted. 1) If there is an A3 printer connected, only the screen content is printed out over the entire area. All other data are formatted for A4 paper format. Therefore, if screen print-outs are not currently being made, the printer should contain A4 paper. Printing the Content of the Screen In the menu Peripheral Devices > Printer, by pressing of the button Print Screen, a "photograph" of the display currently being shown on the CHARTPILOT screen can be printed out. The same result can be achieved by using the MORE key to click the Menu button and, in the context menu thus opened, clicking the function Print Screen, or on the keyboard by means of the function key Prt Sc (or Print Screen). Stopping the Printing Immediately If printing is to be stopped as quickly as possible, this can be done in the menu Peripheral Devices > Printer by the pressing of Remove Printer Files. The print commands that have already been sent up until that point in time are still processed by the printer.

3.7

Using Removable Devices From Software Version 5.50/6.00 on, it is possible to use, in addition to the Floppy, CD/DVD drive, different types of external removable media with USB-connector to back-up/save/store onto or restore/ load from. Removable Devices can be used on different CHARTPILOT systems, as long as the version of the CHARTPILOT software is 5.5 or higher or 6.0 (Version for new performance standards) and a PCIUSB card is installed in the Electronics Unit.

1)

CHARTPILOT TYPE

Application Software Version

Removable Devices usable

1100

> 5.50 or 6.00

YES 1)

USB 2.0 connectors only availlable on installations after August 2008.

The following instructions are valid for every function of the CHARTPILOT, where data is stored on or restored from removable media. In such chapters of the manual, which differ from the instructions below, the different methods of storing or restoring are described there. Possible removable USB-Storage-Media 2):

1) 2)

The operating procedure that is necessary on the printer is described in the Operating Instructions enclosed with the printer. Note: Depending on the type of the monitor the USB-port can be found on the front panel near the adjustment key of the monitor or on the back side of the CHARTPILOT Electronics Unit.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e31.fm / 12.08.09

73

CHARTPILOT

3 General

Operating Instructions

3.7 Using Removable Devices

Card Reader for CF-, MS-, SD-, SM-flash cards USB-disk/stick USB-hard drive USB-Floppy (if connected to the USB-port, built-in Floppy will not be active or displayed) USB-CD/DVD-drive (Only for restoring operations. If connected to the USB-port, built-in CD/DVD drive will not be active or displayed) Note: USB-sticks/disks with write/read protection for Windows™ Vista™ OS can not be used or have to be formatted completly (including the boot sector of the USB-stick/disk) in DOS- or LINUX-format. For each function of the CHARTPILOT, where data operations are possible on removable media, a Device Selection (selecting removable media) is available. After activating the respective function the following dialog box appears (Figure 3-24):

z_cp_

• • • • •

Fig. 3-24

Device Selection (selecting removable media)

In the Device Selection box the following media designations are possible:

74

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e31.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

3 General

Operating Instructions

3.7 Using Removable Devices

Floppy (MS-DOS): Select this entry to store one or more files, if a DOS-formatted floppy disk is used. It is the same way like working with a Floppy on a WINDOWS PC. • Floppy (Archive): Select this entry to save as RAW-archive or load from. This mode is needed to read data from older systems or to store data for older systems. • USB-Disk: Select one of the USB-Disks to store there. It is possible to use several USB-Disks for data operations in contrast to a CD/DVD or floppy drive. If the USB-Disk has a volume label, which will be displayed. Alternativly there will be displayed the type of the USB-Disk. • CD/DVD drive: Select the CD/DVD-drive (not visible in Figure 3-24) to restore/load data from the CD/DVD. It is only possible to perform reading operations. If the dialog box is opened before inserting a USB-Disk it will not yet be displayed in the list. For display press the Refresh button. The missing USB-Disk(s) appears. After selecting a list item (e.g. USB-Disk 1: …) click on the OK-button or leave the dialog box by clicking the Cancel-button. Clicking the OK-button opens the next dialog box (Figure 3-25).

z_cp_301.gif

•

Fig. 3-25

Navigation dialog box (store/save/backup)

This dialog box is used for navigating through the file structure of the selected media and to select the folder or to select file(s) for restore operations. The left frame of the dialog box always displays the folder(s). The right frame displays the file(s) contained in the selected folder. To navigate through the folders click on one of the folder names to get in. To get back one step click on the 1st line in the folder frame marked Display Mode menu. With a small numerical value of True Motion Reset, you define that own position is situated more at the centre of the screen but that the True Motion Reset occurs more frequently.

Switches the Monitoring display mode on, i.e. own position is always situated in the displayed area.

Selection of the Monitoring display mode

For Monitoring display mode only: When the ship reaches this radius, a True Motion Reset occurs The vectors and past plots of the targets are displayed relative to own ship; the vector of own ship's symbol is omitted (see page 58). The vectors and past plots of the targets and the vector of own ship's symbol are displayed true (see page 58). Switches on the Planning display mode, i.e. any desired area can be displayed, regardless of own position. For Planning display mode only: Geographic position of the chart area centre which occurs after pressing of the Apply button or the Enter key. Takes over the position that has been input; the menu is not exited

Fig. 4-9

94

The Presentation > Display Mode menu

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

Operating Instructions

4.2 Basic Setting for the Situation Display

USEFUL INFORMATION True Motion Reset A True Motion Reset takes place when (in the Monitoring display mode True Motion) the own ship symbol reaches the limit of the True Motion Reset area. When the True Motion Reset occurs, the chart is shifted along the present ship's headmarker in the opposite direction so that the centre of the chart area is once again situated ahead of the ship. True Motion Reset Area This area is circular, is situated at the centre of the chart area, and has the radius that was set by means of the True Motion Reset controller. The percentage displayed there refers to half the height of the chart area.

4.2.4.2

Planning Display Mode

The Planning display mode is provided specially for the tasks of planning: any geographical area can be displayed regardless of the current own position by setting the picture centre at any geographical position. In Planning display mode, the chart is always aligned with true north upwards. If own position is situated in the chart area displayed, own ship symbol is displayed unless its display is generally switched off. Switching On the Planning Display Mode Press the Planning button in the Presentation > Display Mode menu 1). Specifying the Centre of the Displayed Chart-Excerpt To do this, there are two possible methods: If the desired centre is not situated in the present display area, the centre coordinates can be input: Under Planning in the Presentation > Display Mode menu, input the centre coordinates of the new chart excerpt and press the Apply button. If the desired centre is situated in the present display area, the chart excerpt can be moved manually: Press Set Center in the basic menu line 2), and in the chart area click the position that is to be the new centre of the chart excerpt. This function can also be executed several times in order to reach new chart excerpts step-by-step (e.g. along the course being steered or along the pre-planned track). Within a raster chart, a new centre can also be defined by clicking on the desired position in the overview display. The overview display is opened by means of the Overview function of the context menu of the chart region. See Figure 4-6 on page 90. Switching On with the Subroutine Chart Maintenance When you switch back directly from the subroutine Chart Maintenance to the program Navigation by means of the Set Planning Mode function, the Planning display mode is switched on and the centre of the displayed chart excerpt corresponds to the position clicked in the (zoomed) world chart - see page 247

1) 2)

Alternative: In the Display Mode context menu of the Chart Status field (navigational data line) Or the function key F7 on the A/N keyboard

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

95

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance 4.2 Basic Setting for the Situation Display

4.2.5

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

Setting the Coordinate System This setting can be made only if vector charts are used. The coordinate system (projection and geodetic datum) used for the display can be set, e.g. so that the position data on the screen and on a paper chart are identical to each other or in order to minimise the distortions in the graphic display and thus errors in range measurement and in the determination of bearings. Setting the Projection and the Geodetic Datum 1.

Under Projection in the Presentation > Coordinate System menu, choose between the Radar projection (this corresponds to the projection created by the radar measurement) and Mercator.

2.

Under Geodetic Datum, select the appropriate geodetic datum. WARNING: If the vector chart is being used for navigation, the geodetic datum WGS 84 must be selected.

3.

Press the Apply button in order to put the new settings into effect. You can leave the Coordinate System menu by means of Presentation, for example. The setting procedure can also be carried out in the context menu after clicking into the position display of the navigation data line has been performed by means of the MORE key.

USEFUL INFORMATION Scope of Validity of the Coordinate System Selected Here All displays provided by the CHARTPILOT refer to the coordinate system selected here, with the following exceptions: For the period of editing of pre-planned tracks and maps, a different coordinate system (e.g. that of the paper chart used) can be set for the position values that are to be input; this can be done via the editing menu concerned. When the editing menu is exited, a return to the coordinate system selected here takes place automatically. The programs for navigational consulting (Consulting) and for maintenance of the chart data (Chart Maintenance) are based on the Mercator projection and on the geodetic datum WGS 84. Parameterisations for Special Tasks At service level, it can be specified that UTM and Gauss-Krueger too can be selected under Projection in the Presentation > Coordinate System menu. In this case, the Presentation > Coordinate System menu contains the Hemisphere button, with which the hemisphere must be input if the UTM or GaussKrueger projection is selected. If UTM and Gauss-Krueger projections are selectable, it can also be specified at service level that, for these two projections and for the Mercator projection, not only automatic determination of reference data but also manual input of reference data is to be possible. In this case, the Presentation > Coordinate System menu is supplemented by the Reference frame. Figure 4-10 shows the menu in this configuration. Projection at High Latitudes If the Radar projection is not in the switched-on state, it is switched on automatically as soon as the 85th parallel of latitude is reached in the chart area. An appropriate message appears.

96

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

Operating Instructions

4.3 Settings of the Electronic Chart

Exits the menu; only the settings that were input before pressing of the Apply button are taken over. Definition of the projection Definition of the geodetic datum Manual input of the hemisphere for UTM and Gauss-Krueger projection Reference data of the projection: - Auto: Automatic determination of the reference data - Manual: Makes it possible to input the reference data manually (changes the distortion of the display). Manual input of the reference latitude of the Mercator projection Manual input of the UTM zone

These functions are available only when parameterisation for special tasks has been enabled at service level.(For example on survey-vessels)

Manual input of the Gauss-Krueger projection

Takes over the data that were input; the menu is not exited. The data that have been valid since the last take-over are restored again; the menu is not exited. Fig. 4-10

4.3

The Presentation > Coordinate System menu

Settings of the Electronic Chart Overview of the Settings for the Display of Electronic Charts: 1.

The electronic charts of the type that is to be used must be available with the desired scale for the necessary geographical area on the hard disk drive of the CHARTPILOT in the data area created for them. These data must be completely up to date, see also page 79.

2.

Select the chart type in the Chart menu with the Type button 1).

If a vector chart is selected:

1)

3.

Switch the display of the vector chart on generally in the Chart menu by pressing the Chart Visible button.

4.

In accordance with Section 4.3.1, specify the objects and text labels that are to be generally displayed.

5.

In accordance with Section 4.3.2 (from page 102 onwards), specify the depth contours that are to be displayed.

6.

In accordance with Section 4.3.3 (from page 104 onwards), switch the display of the User Chart Objects on.

Or in the Chart Type context menu after clicking into the Chart Status field of the navigation data line has taken place by means of the MORE key.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

97

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance 4.3 Settings of the Electronic Chart

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

7.

If the area to be displayed is not the area around own ship's currently existing position, switch into Planning display mode and specify the centre of the chart excerpt that is to be displayed; see Section 4.2.4.2 on page 95.

8.

Via the range setting as per Section 4.2.2 (page 85), the vector chart cells to be displayed are selected.

If raster charts are selected: 9.

If the area to be displayed is not the area around own ship's currently existing position, switch into Planning display mode and specify the centre of the chart excerpt that is to be displayed; see Section 4.2.4.2 on page 95.

10. In accordance with Section 4.2.3 (from page 87 onwards), select and set the raster chart that is to be displayed. 11. In accordance with Section 4.3.3 (from page 104 onwards), switch the display of the User Chart Objects on. 12. Information about the chart can be taken from the info box in accordance with Section 3.5.7 (from page 70 onwards) (index cards Legend, Status and Notes&Diagrams). 13. Notices to Mariners and the Temporary and Preliminary Notices to Mariners can be looked up in the info box (index card T&P NMs).

4.3.1

Defining the Objects to be Displayed in the Vector Chart Because the symbols, areas, lines and labellings (collectively called objects in the following) are individually stored electronically in the vector chart, it is not necessary to display all of the objects all of the time. Instead, an appropriate and, at the same time, uncluttered display can be achieved by selection of the display groups required. Furthermore, for a number of objects (e.g. buoys), there is a choice between two symbol presentations. Irrespective of this, the number of text labels displayed can be influenced. Display Groups to be Displayed Object classes (complete sets of similar objects) are grouped into display groups; for example, the object class Restricted Areas together with the object class Military Practice Areas and other similar object classes forms the display group Cautionary Areas. IMO has defined two categories for the selection of the display groups that are to be shown: Display Standard: Contains the display groups which are normally necessary for voyage planning and voyage monitoring. Display Base: Consists of the display groups which, as a minimum requirement, definitely have to be displayed. They are normally not sufficient for safe navigation. In both cases, further display groups can be displayed. WARNING: When the vector charts are being used, it must be ensured at regular intervals (e.g. after a change of watch) that all of the necessary display groups are being displayed. Not even the Display Standard setting guarantees the completeness of the display.

98

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

Operating Instructions

4.3 Settings of the Electronic Chart

Editing the manual ENC update, see page 201. Editing the User Chart Objects, see page 193. Marking of events (see page 133; menu see Figure 4-33 on page 134). Marking of position fix (see page 135; menu see Figure 4-35 on page 136). Use Line of Position to verify ship´s position, see page 137. Selection of the chart type Selection of the display groups to be displayed: Base: Display of the prescribed minimum scope (+ = plus the display groups switched on in the Visibility Options > Visibility Groups menu) Standard: Display of the prescribed standard scope All: Display of all objects (– = minus the display groups switched off in the Visibility Groups menu) Input of the depth contours and safety depth when vector charts are being used, see page 102 Display options for vector charts, e.g. switching individual display groups on and off; menu see Figure 4-12 Display options for raster charts; menu see Figure 4-5 Switches the display of the electronic chart on and off. Switches the display of the User Chart Objects on and off. Defines whether the User Chart Objects produced by conversion of the maps are to be displayed also - see page 326. Specifies the number of texts displayed in the chart area - see page 100.

Fig. 4-11

The Chart menu

Selecting the Display Standard Groups In the Chart menu, set the Category button to Standard. In the Chart > Visibility Options > Visibility Groups menu, you can additionally obtain a display of the display groups listed there by switching on the corresponding buttons (leave the menu by pressing OK). In the Chart menu (and in the Chart Status field of the navigation data line), a plus sign then appears behind Standard. Changing the Selection of the Display Groups

1)

-

When, in the Chart menu, you set the Category button to Base, all display groups prescribed by the IMO as a minimum requirement are displayed. In the Chart > Visibility Options > Visibility Groups menu, you can additionally obtain a display of the display groups listed there by switching on the corresponding buttons (leave the menu by pressing OK). In the Chart menu, a plus sign then appears behind Base.

-

When, in the Chart menu, you set the Category button to All, all display groups that exist in the electronic chart are displayed 1). In the Chart > Visibility Options > Visibility Groups menu, you can switch off the display of the display groups listed there by switching off the corresponding buttons (leave the menu by pressing OK). In the Chart menu, a minus sign then appears behind All.

With the exception of the data quality features. When these too are added if necessary, a plus sign appears behind All.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

99

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

4.3 Settings of the Electronic Chart

Opens the menu ... > Visibility Groups Paper Chart: The symbols of the paper charts are used. Simpified: Symbols optimised for screen display are used. Symbolized: The symbols of the paper charts are used. Plain: Symbols optimised for screen display are used. Marking of the objects changed in the ENC: None: No marking Last: Changes made by the last Update are marked. All: All changes are marked. Within Effective Dates: Objects are displayed only during the time periods entered in the electronic chart. Always Visible: Objects are displayed always. An indication appears in the navigation data line. See page 47. Objects for which additional text information exists are marked. Light sectors are displayed true to scale Light descriptions are displayed Non-navigable areas are marked additionally by means of a diagonal grid. Isolated dangers situated in shallow water are displayed Objects are displayed independently of the selected chart scale.

Switched-on display groups are displayed additionally in the case of Display Base and Display Standard . Switched-off display groups are not displayed in the case of Display All.

Exits the menu without the new settings becoming effective. Puts the settings of this menu into effect; the menu is exited. Fig. 4-12

The menus Chart > Visibility Groups and ... > Visibility Groups

Defining the Symbol Presentation For symbols and areas, it is possible to define whether they should be displayed in the same way as on the paper charts or whether a simplified set of symbols optimised for display on the screen should be used. These settings are made in the menu Chart > Visibility Options: Symbols: Paper Chart and Areas: Symbolized = display as on paper charts, Symbols: Simpified and Areas: Plain = simplified display. Setting the Display of Text Labels In the Chart menu, the number of texts displayed can be specified by means of the Text Labels button: None: No texts Few: Only the most important text labels are displayed. Normal: The text labels that are normally adequate for navigation appear. All: All text labels contained in the chart appear.

100

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

Operating Instructions

4.3 Settings of the Electronic Chart

In this way, the text labels of the chart, of the User Chart Objects, of event markers and of position fixes are switched on/off and selected. Temporary Displays Marking of Official Changes of the ENC: The ENC lines and symbols changed by official updates can be marked: All changed objects are framed by a large, orange star. All changed lines are displayed uniformly by bold, orange dashes. This setting is made in the Chart > Visibility Options menu by means of the Highlight Official Updates button: None: No marking (standard setting). Last: All objects changed by the last official update are marked. All: All objects changed by official updates in the ENC that is present in the CHARTPILOT are marked. Temporary Objects Temporary Objects: For objects which are not present continuously, e.g. buoys which are deployed seasonally, it is possible to define whether the display is to take place only at the time entered for it in the electronic chart. This setting is made in the menu Chart > Visibility Options by means of the Objects Depending on Date button: Within Effective Dates: Objects are displayed only during the time periods entered in the electronic chart. Always Visible: Objects are displayed independently of the time periods entered. An indication appears in the navigation data line. See page 47. Additional information: If the function Extra Info Symbols is switched on, the objects for which additional information is given in the Data box (of the Info box - see Figure 3-23 on page 71) (behind the i label Information: or obtainable by pressing the button Details) are marked with the symbol . True-to-scale display of the lights: If the function Full Length Light Section is switched on, the length of the lines of the light sectors corresponds to the nominal range. Light descriptions: If the text labels are switched on, the display of the light descriptions can be switched on and off by means of the function Light Descriptions. Additional marking of the non-navigable area: If the function Shallow Water Pattern is switched on, the non-navigable shallow water area and mud flat areas are additionally marked by means of diagonal grid-lines. Display of isolated danger situated in shallow water: If the function Shallow Water Dangers is switched on, the isolated danger symbols which are situated in shallow water are displayed. Non-suppression of objects in the case of small scale: If the function Ignore Scale Minimum is switched on, chart objects are displayed even in the case of chart scales that normally cause suppression of the display of these objects. For a very large number of chart objects, the smallest chart scale is defined at which the object should still be displayed - see also page 206.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

101

CHARTPILOT

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

Operating Instructions

4.3 Settings of the Electronic Chart

4.3.2

Defining the Depth Contours to be Displayed In the display of the vector charts, it is possible to use colour to clearly distinguish the navigable areas from the non-navigable ones, depending on the draught of the ship. Navigable areas are displayed in white or grey-white, non-navigable areas in light blue or blue. The boundary between these areas is the safety contour. The safety contour is particularly important because it is a basis for the ECDIS Monitoring (see page 104) and for the checking of tracks (see page 185 and 230). It is also possible both inside the navigable area and inside the non-navigable area to distinguish between two areas with different depth ranges: Within the navigable area, the deep contour differentiates between the adequately deep areas displayed in grey-white and the deeper areas displayed in white. Within the non-navigable area, the shallow contour differentiates between the areas displayed in light blue which are adjacent to the navigable area, and the even shallower areas displayed in blue.

Disp la

Chart zero y:

Safety depth Shallow contour Blue Ligh t bl

ue

Safety contour (input value) Safety contour (value existing in the vector chart) Grey -w

hite

Deep contour

Whit e

Non-navigable area

Fig. 4-13

Navigable area

Diagram of the depth contour system

Spot soundings from individual measurements are displayed more prominently if they project beyond a particular depth. This depth is set as the Safety Depth. This situation is shown graphically in Figure 4-13. Inputting the Safety Depth, Safety Contour and Other Depth Contours

102

1.

In the Chart > Depth Contour menu, input the safety depth (draught plus a reserve of 2 m, for example).

2.

Input the safety contour (value greater than the safety depth).

3.

By input of shallow contour (value between 0 and the safety contour), the non-navigable area can be divided into two areas having different depth ranges. By input of deep contour (value greater than the safety contour), the navigable area can be divided into two areas having different depth ranges.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance 4.3 Settings of the Electronic Chart

These relationships are illustrated the Chart > Depth Contour menu by a graphic. The coloured areas set in this way can only be formed from the depth areas contained in the vector chart, i.e. from areas representing a certain depth range. Since their minimum and maximum values are normally formed from depth values that are also commonly utilized in paper charts as depth contours, such values should also be used for the settings. If a value is entered which is not defined in the vector chart as an area boundary, the displayed contour runs along the next deeper boundary that is available in the vector chart. In the Chart > Depth Contour menu, the values that are entered continue to be displayed. The input of these four values can also be performed on any other CHARTPILOT and on any MULTIPILOT of the system. This value is automatically equalised system-wide; the last input is valid. Exception: A CHARTPILOT configured as a planning station on service level does not distribute nor receive these settings from other stations. If, in the menu Chart > Depth Contour, the button Depth Shades is set to Four, each of these four areas is displayed in a different colour - see also Figure 4-13. Displaying the Depth Values of the Contours In the Chart > Depth Contour menu, the depth values for the depth contours being displayed can be switched on/off by means of the Contour Labels function. None: No depth values are shown at the depth contours. Safety: Only the depth values of the safety contour are shown. All: The depth values of all depth contours up to 100 m that are available in the vector chart are shown. 1) The boundaries of the chart areas are almost always indicated by means of depth contours. Unlike what might be expected, these are often not continuous lines. Interruptions in the depth contour appear as gaps. For the safety contour, these gaps are closed by the program of the ECDIS. This is done even when depth areas with different boundary depths are used over the range of the safety depth. In such a case, various depth values are shown along the safety contour. Wherever they are shown, they correspond to the depth value defined there in the vector chart.

1)

Therefore also of the depth contours that are not at the same time shallow contours, safety contours or deep contours.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

103

CHARTPILOT

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

Operating Instructions

4.4 ECDIS Monitoring

Four: The partial areas defined as shallow contour and deep contour are displayed in different colours - see page 102. Two: A colour distinction is made only between navigable and non-navigable areas. Setting the depth values, see text Displaying the depth values of the depth contours: None: No depth values are shown at the depth contours. Safety: Only the depth values of the safety contour are shown. All: The depth values of all depth contours up to 100 m that are available in the vector chart are shown.

Fig. 4-14

4.3.3

The menu Chart > Depth Contour

Switching the display of the User Chart Objects on and off The display of the User Chart Objects is switched on and off in the Chart menu by means of the function User Chart Objects. Because User Chart Objects are independent of the electronic chart used, they can be easily identified by switching off the display of the electronic chart (by means of Chart Visible in the Chart menu): the chart objects that are then still being displayed are User Chart Objects.

4.4

ECDIS Monitoring During the voyage, the ECDIS subsystem of the CHARTPILOT performs a number of nautical checks at short intervals of time. If defined criteria are infringed, an appropriate alarm is given. The ECDIS monitoring can be divided into Track monitoring with the checks of own ship against the System Track (for System Track, see page 229) and monitoring of the depth on the basis of the water depth measured by the navigation echo sounder. Alarms are selected via the Track Alarms menu, see page 105, and the Depth Alarm, see page 111. Chart monitoring with the checks of own ship's position, of the ship’s movement and of the System Track relative to the vector chart and the User Chart Objects own safety line, danger highlight and own MARPOL line. Alarms are selected via the Chart Alarms menu (see page 106) and can be activated independently for own ship and the system track.

104

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

Operating Instructions

4.4 ECDIS Monitoring

The detailed results of the chart monitoring process are collected in a chart alarm list which can be opened via the button Show Chart Alarm List available in the Alarm List menu. This list is also opened if a chart alarm is acknowledged by the operator. So that this ECDIS Monitoring can serve its purpose, namely increasing the nautical safety, the following prerequisites must be fulfilled: The best possible sensors for position and speed must be selected. By means of a comparison between the available position sensors, a check must be performed to ensure that the selected position sensor is supplying correct position data. If a vector chart is used, it must be available for the entire navigated area. Otherwise, own safety lines and danger highlights must exist for the missing areas. If a raster chart is used, own safety lines and danger highlights for all potentially dangerous areas and objects must exist for the entire navigated area. The track used must have been successfully checked as per Section 5.1.9. The latest relevant nautical warning information received by radio must be taken into account, possibly by the editing of own safety lines or danger highlights or by manual ENC update. The check of the track used should, if necessary, be repeated after incorporation of the warning information. The safety contour value must have been set correctly; see page 102. The alarm criteria must be correctly set - see the following sections. The colour reproduction produced by the monitors must be correct. In the case of doubt and once per year, the monitor performance must be checked in accordance with Appendix A, Section A 3.

4.4.1

Track Monitoring: Own Ship against the System Track This monitoring is closely related to equivalent functions of the TRACKPILOT; see U S E F U L I N F O R MATION. Course Monitoring If the difference between the actual course and the course defined by the System Track is greater than the set (= displayed) course limit, the alarm message COURSE LIMIT EXCEEDED appears. If the ship is being steered in Track mode, no message appears on the CHARTPILOT. Settings: The valid course limit is displayed in the Alarm Settings menu. If a TRACKPILOT is installed, the input of the course limit in the Alarm Settings menu can only be performed on a radar indicator that is switched to act as the TRACKPILOT Master. If the TRACKPILOT uses the data of the System Track (PD=On), then on passing a waypoint the course limit that was entered in the track for this waypoint becomes valid. This value is automatically equalised system-wide; the last input is valid. If no TRACKPILOT is installed, no system-wide equalisation takes place for manual input. If a System Track is defined, then on passing a waypoint the course limit that was entered in the track for this waypoint becomes valid. In the Alarm Settings menu, with the Track Alarms button the output of this alarm jointly with the output of the alarm TRACK LIMIT EXCEEDED can be suppressed for this CHARTPILOT. 1) Monitoring of the Cross Track Distance If the deviation of the ship's position from the System Track is greater than the displayed track limit, the alarm message TRACK LIMIT EXCEEDED appears. If steering is being performed in Track mode, no message appears on the CHARTPILOT. The settings/displays take place in a manner similar to those of course monitoring.

1)

This setting is not possible if the TRACKPILOT is being operated in Track mode - see USEFUL INFORMATION.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

105

CHARTPILOT

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

Operating Instructions

4.4 ECDIS Monitoring

Alarm on Approaching the present Waypoint When the probable travelling time needed to reach the wheel over point (WOP) of the next course manoeuvre defined by the System Track becomes less than the Waypoint Approach value displayed in the Alarm Settings menu, then in the case of steering with NEXT data the alarm message APPROACHING WAYPOINT appears. If steering is being performed in Track mode, no message appears on the CHARTPILOT. The settings/displays take place in a manner similar to those of course monitoring. In addition, by switching off the function Waypoint Approach, the output of this alarm can be suppressed for this CHARTPILOT, even if the other track alarms are not suppressed.

Setting of the chart alarms (if vector charts are used), activating the anchor watch function; menu see Figure 4-17 on page 109 Switches the acoustic signal for particular alarms on and off generally - see page 346.

Activates the track alarms for the CHARTPILOT. Display 1) of the set course limit Display 1) of the set track limit When track alarms are activated, this activates the APPROACHING WAYPOINT alarm for this CHARTPILOT. Display 1) of the APPROACHING WAYPOINT alarm value Setting of the limit values for the automatic acquisition of AIS targets with output of the DANGEROUS AIS TARGET alarm (see page 118). Switching off the automatic acquisition of AIS targets - see page 119 Activates the alarm DEPTH LIMIT EXCEEDED Setting of the depth value for the alarm DEPTH LIMIT EXCEEDED Exits the menu. Data that are input have an effect only if the Apply button was pressed beforehand. Takes over the data that have been input; the menu is not exited. 1) In

Fig. 4-15

the case of systems without TRACKPILOT: input also

The Alarm Settings menu

USEFUL INFORMATION The Connection with the TRACKPILOT The monitoring of own ship against the System Track is performed independently of the CHARTPILOT by the TRACKPILOT as well (if the TRACKPILOT is switched on). During this process, both programs operate with identical limit-values. The TRACKPILOT always checks against the track which is valid for it.

106

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

Operating Instructions

4.4 ECDIS Monitoring

This leads to the following conclusions: The limit values can be set both via the TRACKPILOT controller and via the track alarms of the ECDIS Monitoring operating facility. If a limit value is changed on the TRACKPILOT, this causes an automatic change in the limit value for the ECDIS track alarms and vice versa. The last input is valid. Because, with the alarm limit values, the TRACKPILOT also changes its control behaviour, the setting of the (ECDIS) track alarms also affects the control behaviour of the TRACKPILOT. Therefore, if there is a TRACKPILOT the setting is possible only on the TRACKPILOT Master. If the TRACKPILOT is being controlled with the aid of the Pilot Data contained in the pre-planned track, then the limit values for the (ECDIS) track alarms are automatically changed as well. Both programs generate equivalent alarms. As long as the TRACKPILOT is being operated in Heading mode or Course mode, the TRACKPILOT performs its checking not against the System Track but against the track that is set manually (course line on the set course). The tracks against which checking is being performed simultaneously are therefore different from one another, and both the alarms generated by the TRACKPILOT and those generated by the ECDIS subsystem appear. In Track mode, the TRACKPILOT too performs checking against the System Track; in order to avoid double alarms, only the alarms of the TRACKPILOT are then output. These appear on the TRACKPILOT Master only.

4.4.2

Chart Monitoring: Own Ship against Vector Chart and User Chart Objects For this ECDIS Monitoring function, the program constructs a monitoring sector (ahead sector) with an adjustable sector width and a length which can be defined in the menu Alarm Settings > Chart Alarms under Ahead Sector Width or Distance by inputting the distance or under Time by inputting the travelling time respectively. (In the case of input of the travelling time, the length is computed from the currently existing speed.) The guard sector opens out from own position in the direction of the ship's movement and is carried along with the ship; see Figure 4-17. The monitoring is performed both with the guard sector and with own position. 1) The monitoring takes place for all of the objects which are entered in the electronic chart or are stored as User Chart Objects. The monitoring is therefore independent of whether the display of these objects is switched on or off. It might be an advantage to suppress the guard sector monitoring if the speed is very low. The limit value for this is entered under Min. Speed for Chart Alarms in the menu Alarm Settings > Chart Alarms. If the value 0 kn is entered, no suppression takes place.

4.4.2.1

Monitoring on the Basis of a Vector Chart

Warning against Sailing into an Area of Insufficient Depth When a safety contour (see page 102) or another area with insufficient depth (less than the set safety contour value) is touched by the guard sector, e.g. an object belonging to the object class Land Area, the SAFETY CONTOUR NEARBY alarm appears, together with a statement of the class of object touched and the supplement ahead or inside shown in the Chart Alarm List. The safety contour is formed from all objects of the object classes Land Area and Intertidal Area and from the objects of the object classes Depth Area or Dredged Area whose depths are equal to or the next size greater than the value entered in the menu Chart > Depth Contour under Safety Contour.

1)

The ship´s own position monitoring is done by searching intersections between the ship contour (defined on service level) and the monitored chart objects.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

107

CHARTPILOT

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

Operating Instructions

4.4 ECDIS Monitoring

For this monitoring, the cells with the highest precision available are used. The might be different from the cells being used for display. It is therefore helpful to use another display range for visual check and to use the Info Box. 1) The setting of the guard sector length for this monitoring process is performed in the Safety Contour frame in the menu Alarm Settings > Chart Alarms. There, the output of the SAFETY CONTOUR alarm can be generally suppressed by means of the Safety Contour Ahead button. As soon as own ship is situated on the safety contour or on one of the other above-mentioned areas, the SAFETY CONTOUR alarm likewise appears, with the supplement Inside shown in the Chart Alarm List.

Safety contour

Guard sector moves along with the ship and its direction is always the same as the ship's direction of movement (the guard sector is not displayed on the screen) Ahead sector width, set in the Chart Alarms menu

Length was input in the Safety Contour frame in the Alarm Settings > Chart Alarms menu

Ship's position when the SAFETY CONTOUR alarm occurs

Fig. 4-16

Generating the Chart Alarm with the Guard Sector (example: SAFETY CONTOUR Alarm)

Warning about Running Over a Potentially Dangerous Object If the guard sector touches an object from a series of object classes specified in the program, such as Restricted Area, Fishing Ground, Traffic Separation Zone or Buoys, the alarm OBJECT OF INTEREST NEARBY appears, with a statement of the class of object that is touched and with the supplement ahead or inside, shown in the Chart Alarm List. This alarm also appears if objects are touched which belong to particular object classes and are provided with depth information (e.g. Underwater Rocks, Wrecks) and whose depth is less than the value entered under Safety Contour in the menu Chart > Depth Contour. The setting of the guard sector length for this monitoring process is performed in the Object of Interest frame in the menu Alarm Settings > Chart Alarms. There, the output of the OBJECT OF INTEREST alarm can be generally suppressed by means of the Object of Interest Ahead button. If own ship is situated on or within one of the above-mentioned objects, the alarm likewise appears.

1)

Info Box: See chapter 3.5.7

108

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

Operating Instructions

4.4.2.2

4.4 ECDIS Monitoring

Monitoring against User Chart Objects

If an own safety line is touched by the guard sector 1), the alarm USER CHART OBJECT NEARBY appears, with the supplement Own safety line ahead or crossing. 2) If an own MARPOL line is touched by the guard sector, the alarm USER CHART OBJECT NEARBY appears, with the supplement Own MARPOL line ahead or crossing. If an area belonging to the object class danger highlight is touched by the guard sector, the USER CHART OBJECT NEARBY alarm appears, with the supplement Danger highlight ahead. The setting of the guard sector for this monitoring is performed in the User Chart Objects frame in the menu Alarm Settings > Chart Alarms. There, the output of the USER CHART OBJECT alarm can be generally suppressed by means of the User Chart Objects Ahead button. Because the own safety lines and danger highlights are available independently of the chart type, this part of the ECDIS monitoring process can also be performed if raster charts are used. It is urgently recommended 3) that, if raster charts are used, the dangerous areas and objects and (for example) traffic separation zones should be marked by means of own safety lines or danger highlights. If own ship is situated on an area belonging to the object class danger highlight, the alarm USER CHART OBJECT NEARBY appears, with the supplement Inside danger highlight shown in the Chart Alarm List. Own speed below which the chart alarms are not given. Width of the Ahead Sector in which objects are detected. Sensitises the SAFETY CONTOUR chart alarm. If Ahead is marked, alarms are activated for Ahead Sector and Own Ship. Length of the guard sector used to monitor the safety contour. The length of the guard sector used to monitor the safety contour; it is computed from Time and the existing speed. If On Track is marked, alarms are activated for the system track. Sensitises the OBJECT OF INTEREST chart alarm. Length of the guard sector used for monitoring against sailing over particular objects. The length of the guard sector used for monitoring against sailing over particular objects; it is computed from Time and from the existing speed. Sensitises the USER CHART OBJECT chart alarm. Length of the guard sector used for monitoring against own safety lines, own MARPOL lines and danger highlights. The length of the guard sector used for monitoring against sailing over own safety lines, own MARPOL lines and danger highlights; it is computed from Time and from the existing speed. Activates the anchor watch function, see page 111. Takes over the data that have been input; the menu is not exited. Exits the menu. Data that are input have an effect only if the Apply button was pressed beforehand. Fig. 4-17

1) 2) 3)

The Alarm Settings > Chart Alarms menu

On ships with DNV approval, the alarm appears only if the own safety line is touched from within the safe area. In the case of other ships, this setting can also be made at service level. The supplementing information is shown in the Chart Alarm List. On ships with DNV approval, this is compulsory.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

109

CHARTPILOT

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

Operating Instructions

4.4 ECDIS Monitoring

Repetition of the Alarms WARNING: An alarm is repeated if an object belonging to a different object class is touched or the same object class with a smaller range. If, for example, the ship is sailing along a line of buoys and is too close to them, the alarm OBJECT OF INTEREST NEARBY appears only for the first buoy.

4.4.3

Chart Monitoring: System Track against Vector Chart and User Chart Objects For this ECDIS Monitoring function, a monitoring strip twice as wide as the track limit contained in the data of the System Track and having a length of 10 to 20 NM is generated by the program around the currently existing region of the System Track. (For details of this construction, see U S E F U L I N F O R M A T I O N .) With this monitoring strip, the program performs the same checks as with the guard sector in the monitoring of own ship's data as per Section 4.4.2. Here too, the alarms SAFETY CONTOUR, OBJECT OF INTEREST and USER CHART OBJECT 1) are used, but the supplement has the text On Track. Thus, an alarm or a warning is given 10 NM at the latest ahead of a potentially dangerous area or object which could be run over when the ship is sailing along the System Track. Furthermore, the fields of the To WPT number in the data displays Radar/ARPA, Track/Schedule and Conning are given a yellow background. When these alarms occur, you should definitely initiate a check of the currently existing part of the System Track and the part lying ahead by clicking with the INFO key into one of the To WPT number fields mentioned. The same checking routine then takes place as the one used at the end of the track generation process (see Section 5.1.9). USEFUL INFORMATION Details of the Monitoring Strip In all cases, the currently existing track segment (i.e. the track segment the ship is currently sailing on) is monitored. If this is longer than 10 NM and has therefore been automatically divided up into subsegements, the currently existing subsegment and the next one are monitored. If the currently existing track segment is not longer than 10 NM or if the ship is situated on the last subsegment, then the next track segment too or its first 10-NM subsegment is monitored. The curent or next segmant may also include the track curve at a waypoint. The monitoring strip is situated centrally over the track and is twice as wide as the track limit contained in the data of the System Track. If the track has not been completely edited and a track limit has not been entered, then only the line between the waypoints is therefore monitored. The width of the monitoring strip is changing at the same locations on the track as the track limit changes occur.

1)

A warning about the own safety line is given only if the own safety line is touched from within the safe area.

110

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

4.4.4

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance 4.4 ECDIS Monitoring

Track Monitoring: Depth Alarm If the water depth measured by the connected navigation echo sounder is less than the depth alarm value displayed in the Alarm Settings menu, the alarm DEPTH LIMIT EXCEEDED or DEPTH ALARM is given. Settings: The input of the limit value takes place on the CHARTPILOT in the Alarm Settings menu. In systems with radar 1000 series, however, it can also be performed on any other CHARTPILOT and on any radar indicator of the system, and the value is automatically equalised system-wide; the last input is valid. With the button that is available in the Alarm Settings menu, it is possible to define whether an alarm shall be given on this CHARTPILOT.

4.4.5

Anchor Watch If the ship is located completely within an anchor watch area defined as a User Chart Object 1), the CHARTPILOT can monitor the anchoring position. Activating the Anchor Watch Function When the ship is located completely within the anchor watch area, activate the anchor watch function by means of the button Chart > Alarm Settings > Chart Alarms > Anchor Watch Area. If the display of the User Chart Objects was not switched on previously, it is now switched on through the activation of the anchor watch function. The borders of the monitored anchor watch area are displayed as a thick red line. Alarms If the ship touches the borders of the anchor watch area and the anchor watch function is activated, the alarm EXITING ANCHOR WATCH AREA is shown. Special feature: This alarm cannot be acknowledged. It disappears when the ship is completly inside the ANCHOR WATCH area again or when the watch alarm function is switched off. Deactivating the Anchor Watch Function Before the ship leaves the anchorage, deactivate the anchor watch function with the button Chart > Alarm Settings > Chart Alarms > Anchor Watch Area. If this is not done, the alarm EXITING ANCHOR WATCH AREA will be shown on leaving the anchorage. If the anchor watch function is not deactivated after that, the alarm OUT OF ANCHOR WATCH AREA is shown as soon as the ship is located completely outside of the anchor watch area. When this alarm is acknowledged, the anchor watch function is then switched off automatically.

1)

For editing the anchor watch area, see page 200.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

111

CHARTPILOT

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

Operating Instructions

4.5 Determination of Positions, Bearings and Ranges

4.5

Determination of Positions, Bearings and Ranges For the graphic determination of positions, true bearings and ranges in the chart area, the cursor, two electronic bearing lines (EBL's), the variable range marker (VRM) and the measurement line are available. When the ship is getting near to the present waypoint of the System Track (for System Track, see page 229), you can display the situation relative to this waypoint in enlarged form by calling up the optional Waypoint Zoom box. All data relative to own ship are measured or calculated by reference to the CCRP (Consistent Common Reference Point). The CCRP, by default the conning position on the bridge, is defined for the ship on service level. See also chapter 1.2 Determining the Position of a Displayed Object If the cursor is situated in the chart area, the geographical position of the cursor is shown in the Cursor display. For many objects, the precise position is also contained in the info box, which you can open by clicking with the INFO key. Determining the Bearing from Own Ship to an Object You can use either the cursor or the EBL: Bearing Measurement by means of the Cursor If the cursor is situated in the chart area, the true bearing from own ship to the cursor position is displayed in the Cursor display. Bearing Measurement by means of EBL Set the EBL Mode button to CEN and click it into the display field of EBL1 or EBL2 1). With the cursor, turn the EBL to the object. In the EBL display field, the true bearing to the object is displayed.

EBL2, here with origin not on own ship symbol and with range marker VRM

2.38 NM 22.6 °

Measurement line with statement of length and direction

EBL1, here with origin on own ship symbol

Chart Work menu for generating/deleting the measurement line; menu is opened with Cancel key

EBL2 display and button; the display is switched on in the Presentation > Display Settings menu.

Cursor Cursor display with cursor position and distance and bearing from own ship to cursor position

EBL1 display and button VRM display and button Fig. 4-18

1)

The elements for determination of position, bearing and range

By clicking into the display field, the display of the EBL is switched on automatically. Alternatively, you can also use the EBL1 or EBL2 button beforehand. If EBL2 is to be switched on by means of the button and cursor, the presentation of the EBL2 display must be switched on in the Presentation > Display Settings menu.

112

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

Operating Instructions

4.5 Determination of Positions, Bearings and Ranges

EBL Mode button with the following possibilities. - FIX REL: The EBL moves with own ship; origin of EBL is a distance from own ship which can be set by means of the cursor after pressing of Set. - FIX ABS: The origin of the EBL is a geographical position which can be set by means of the cursor after pressing of Set. - CEN: The EBL moves with own ship; origin of EBL is own ship.

EBL button switches the display of the EBL on and off. (When switch-on occurs, the EBL appears with the setting that it had last.)

After Set has been clicked, the origin of the EBL can be defined with the cursor (only if the EBL Mode button is at FIX REL or FIX ABS).

Fig. 4-19

Button and display field of the EBL

Determining the Range from Own Ship to an Object You can use either the cursor or the VRM: Range Measurement by means of the Cursor If the cursor is situated in the chart area, the range between own ship and the cursor position is indicated in the Cursor display. Range Measurement by means of VRM Click into the VRM display field 1) and, by means of the cursor, pull the range marker ring to the desired size and fix it by clicking. The radius of the range marker ring is continuously displayed in the VRM display field.

VRM button switches the display of the VRM on and off. (When switch-on occurs, the VRM appears with the setting that it had last.)

Fig. 4-20

VRM display - Indicates the radius of the VRM. (Value is identical to the distance between the EBL origin and the EBL distance marker.) - Must be clicked so that the radius of the VRM can be set by means of the cursor.

Button and display field of the VRM

Determining the Bearing between Two Objects You can use either the measurement line or the EBL: Bearing Measurement by Means of the Measurement Line

1)

1.

Position the cursor in the chart area and click with the MORE key. In the context menu Chart Work which is thus opened, click Set Line (with the DO key).

2.

Click the position from which the measurement is to be performed. A line is now drawn between the clicked point and the cursor position. The bearing and range from the clicked point to the cursor position are indicated above the cursor position.

3.

By means of a second click, the line (including the numerical values) is fixed.

By clicking into the display field, the display of the VRM is switched on automatically. Alternatively, you can also use the VRM button.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

113

CHARTPILOT

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

Operating Instructions

4.5 Determination of Positions, Bearings and Ranges

Generating a measurement line by clicking the positions for origin and end point of the measurement line

Menu appears when cursor is situated in chart area and MORE key is pressed

Deletes the measurement line

Length of measurement line

2.38 NM 22.6 ° Direction of measurement line as seen from beginning of measurement line

Specifies the position of the own ship symbol on the screen - see page 94 Manual correction of the system position; see page 152

Measurement line

Cancel the manual correction of the system position Opens the Waypoint Zoom box in which, when own ship is getting near to the present waypoint, its position is displayed relative to this waypoint in enlarged form - see Figure 4-22.

Beginning of measurement line

Only in the case of raster charts: This displays the displayed chart completely; see Figure 4-6 on page 90. Fig. 4-21

4.

Context menu of the chart area and measurement line

The line (including the numerical values) is deleted in the context menu Chart Work by means of the Clear Line function.

Bearing Measurement by means of EBL Set the EBL Mode button of the desired EBL to FIX ABS. Then click the corresponding Set button and, by means of the cursor, click the position from which the bearing measurement is to be performed. Click the corresponding EBL display field, turn the bearing line to the desired direction by means of the cursor, and fix it by clicking. In the EBL display field, the true bearing to the object is displayed. In the procedures described above, the EBL origin is fixed at the set geographical position. If the EBL origin is to move along with own ship, FIX REL must be used instead of FIX ABS. Determining the Range between Two Objects You can use either the measurement line or a combination of EBL and VRM: Range Measurement by means of Measurement Line If you determine the bearing between two objects by means of the measurement line (see above), the range between these objects will also be displayed to you. Range Measurement by means of EBL If the VRM and EBL are displayed simultaneously, a range marker appears on the EBL. The range between the EBL origin and the range marker is equal to the set VRM. Thus, if you position the range marker on the second object by moving the VRM, the range between the first object (EBL origin) and the second object is indicated in the VRM display field.

114

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

Operating Instructions

4.5 Determination of Positions, Bearings and Ranges

Displaying the Situation Relative to the Present Waypoint of the System Track in Enlarged Form 1) Click into the chart area by means of the MORE key; in the context menu Chart Work which then appears, click onto the WP Zoom Display function. The Waypoint Zoom box then opens (see Figure 4-22). Name of the present waypoint

Pressing of the arrow keys changes the scale in the Waypoint Zoom box (between 5 m and 1000 m per grid line) Number: Distance between two grid lines (horizontally and vertically)

Switches the Waypoint Zoom box to the optimum scale and positions the space between own ship's symbol and the present waypoint to the centre of the box. Fig. 4-22

Distance and bearing to the present waypoint Right/Left display; distance of the vertical side of the triangle: deviation from the System Track Apex of the triangle: movement direction relative to the System Track The north direction in the Waypoint Zoom box corresponds to the north direction in the chart area. The grid displayed serves as a visual distance-reference. It is not related to the chart grid. Closes the Waypoint Zoom box

The Waypoint Zoom-Box

If there is a defined System Track, the present waypoint is named there in the top line and the distance and bearing to the present waypoint is displayed in metres or kilometres. Below that, the deviation from the System Track and the movement relative to the System Track are displayed in a Right/Left display. In the graphics area of the Waypoint Zoom box, own ship's symbol and - if the distance is not too great - the present waypoint and the (segment of the) System Track are displayed with the scale indicated in the bottom line of the Waypoint Zoom box. The number between the arrow keys refers to the distance between two grid lines of the underlying measurement-grid. The alignment of the Waypoint Zoom box graphics corresponds to the alignment of the chart area. The scale can be changed by means of the arrow keys, independently of the scale in the chart area. If the distance from the present waypoint is small enough, the optimum scale is set by pressing of the Auto button, and the space between own ship and the present waypoint is moved to the centre of the graphics. If the distance is still too great, the smallest possible scale is set and own ship's symbol appears at the centre of the box. The Waypoint Zoom box can be shifted and its size can be changed - see page 41. USEFUL INFORMATION Switching Off the Display of EBL and VRM The display is switched off by clicking the EBL button or VRM button. When the display is switched off, the data of the EBL or VRM remain in storage: when an EBL or the VRM is switched on, these elements appear with the values that were set last. Bearing Measurement Errors at High Latitudes The EBL is always displayed as a straight line. The numerical value displayed is always the direction at the EBL origin. In the radar projection, this causes significant measurement errors at high latitudes for bearings over large distances. 1)

This optional function is provided for survey purposes and can be activated at service level only.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

115

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance 4.6 Automatic Identification System (AIS)

4.6

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

Automatic Identification System (AIS) This section deals with the case in which the AIS system can be operated on the CHARTPILOT. If the AIS system is connected in such a way that it can be operated only on the radar indicators and - if present - on its own Display and Control Unit, the AIS functions are limited on the CHARTPILOT to the display of the tracked AIS targets and the Aids-to-Navigation. The operating procedure for this is described on page 56 and page 63. In case of a direct interface to the AIS electronics in addition to the ARPA electronics, the Universal Shipborne Automatic Identification System (AIS) automatically provides the ship's nautical officers with important information about nearby vessels or other relevant objects within the VHF range. Full control of the AIS is possible by means of the CHARTPILOT then. The AIS system transmits own ship data cyclically via two defined VHF channels and receives the same data of the other ships and objects that are equipped with an AIS.

4.6.1

Overview The AIS is integrated within the navigation system in such a way that it can be operated on all radar indicators and on all CHARTPILOTs of the system. A special switch-over facility is unnecessary for this purpose; the most recent operating action is applicable. The operating procedure takes place in the menu Radar/AIS (see Figure 4-23) and its submenus. AIS Targets and Other AIS Objects With regard to the objects that can be detected by the AIS and transferred to the CHARTPILOT, a distinction is drawn between the following: AIS targets: ships that are equipped with an AIS system, SAR aircraft: search-and-rescue aeroplanes or helicopters, Aids-to-navigation: navigation marks, e.g. beacons and buoys, Base stations: Equipment for controlling the AIS system, e.g. as a component of a traffic control centres The AIS targets and SAR aircraft 1) are handled in the same way as sleeping targets as soon as their data are received by own AIS. Sleeping targets can be acquired manually or automatically, so that they can then be tracked by the system - see Section 4.6.2. All AIS objects can be displayed in the chart area (see page 63). Their data can be displayed by means of the Info box. Safety Messages and Long-Range Interrogation Via AIS, safety messages 2) can be communicated if necessary, which are then passed on by all receiving systems as a message or an alarm to their display units. The procedures for dealing with the safety messages received, and for transmitting your own safety messages, are described in Section 4.6.4. The AIS can also be interrogated about ship data via different equipment. Details of this long-range interrogation, as it is called, are described in Section 4.6.5.

1) 2)

SAR aircraft are treated and displayed in the same way as AIS targets, and are therefore not mentioned again in the following. Their identity can be determined by means of the Info box. Also called safety related messages in the relevant regulations.

116

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

Operating Instructions

4.6 Automatic Identification System (AIS)

Treatment of the ARPA and AIS targets; for menu, see Figure 4-24 on page 118 Simulation of avoidance manoeuvres (trial manoeuvres); for menu, see Figure 4-31 on page 131 Switches the transmitter on and off (the reception part remains switched on) Switches the low power mode on and off - see page 127 Input/display of the own ship data transmitted by own AIS system; for menu, see Figure 4-26 on page 121 Displaying a received safety message - see Figure 4-27 Transmitting a safety message - for menu, see Figure 4-28 on page 123 Long-range interrogation - for menu, see Figure 4-29 Transmitter settings - for menu, see Figure 4-30 Switches the display of the Aids-to-Navigation on and off.

Fig. 4-23

The menu Radar/AIS

Monitoring/Setting of the Own Ship Data Transmitted Most of the information transmitted from your own AIS system is generated automatically by the system. However, some items of information (e.g. ship's draught, hazardous cargo, destination, ETA) have to be defined by the operator - see Section 4.6.3. IMPORTANT Because these data are voyage-dependent, their updating should be assured by including them in the navigational check list. Setting of the communication technique (channel selection, bandwidth, transmission power etc.) usually takes place fully automatically. In very rare cases, however, manual setting procedures too might be necessary for this channel management process. For details, see Section 4.6.6.

4.6.2

Treatment of the AIS Targets

Manual Target Acquisition With the on-going introduction of the AIS system, the number of sleeping targets will increase rapidly. Therefore, the display of the sleeping targets will then normally be switched off. However, targets which are nautically important should continue to be displayed. This is achieved by acquiring these targets, which thus become tracked AIS targets. As long as the entire processing of the AIS target data is not switched off, tracked AIS targets continue to be displayed. Furthermore, with the Info box, a much greater quantity of data can be requested about tracked AIS targets than about sleeping targets. Manual Acquisition of a Sleeping Target 1.

Switching on the display of sleeping targets: In the menu Radar/AIS > Targets, by means of the button Sleeping Targets.

2.

In the menu Radar/AIS > Targets, in the frame AIS Targets click on the button Acquire Target and then, in the chart area, click on those sleeping targets, one after another, that are to be acquired.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

117

CHARTPILOT

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

Operating Instructions

4.6 Automatic Identification System (AIS)

This function of the cursor is switched off as soon as the cursor leaves the chart area.

Display settings of the ARPA targets, see page 56 ff. Switches the entire processing of the AIS target data on and off, and therefore switches on and off the display, collision computation and automatic target acquisition of the AIS targets. Switches the display of the sleeping targets on and off. Manual acquisition of the AIS targets Deletion of individual AIS targets Deletion of all AIS targets Display settings of the AIS targets, see page 119 Display settings of the ARPA targets and AIS targets, see page 59

Fig. 4-24

The menu Radar/AIS > Targets

Automatic Target Acquisition and Collision Computation by the CHARTPILOT IMPORTANT Automatic target acquisition cannot take place unless the processing of the AIS target data is switched on: the function AIS Targets must be switched on in the menu Radar/AIS > Targets. Sleeping targets are acquired automatically with the aid of the collision computation: as soon as a Sleeping target 1) falls below the set CPA and TCPA values, it is automatically acquired, the alarm DANGEROUS AIS TARGET appears, and the AIS target is displayed as a dangerous target. The alarm DANGEROUS AIS TARGET also appears if an AIS target that is already being tracked falls below the set CPA and TCPA values. If, on falling below the CPA/TCPA values, there are already 40 AIS targets being tracked, the alarm DANGEROUS AIS TARGET ACQUISITION FAILED appears first of all. In this case, at least one non-critical AIS target must be deleted. As soon as this has been done, target acquisition and the output of the DANGEROUS AIS TARGET alarm take place for the new acquired target. Setting the CPA and TCPA values: In the menu Alarm Settings, the largest "closest point of approach" distance that is still to be regarded as dangerous must be entered behind CPA (Closest Point of Approach), and the time between output of the alarm and reaching of the CPA must be entered behind TCPA (Time to CPA).

1)

SAR aircraft are displayed in the same way as AIS targets, but are recognised as SAR aircraft. Automatic acquisition does not take place for them.

118

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

Operating Instructions

4.6 Automatic Identification System (AIS)

In particular cases, it might be required to prevent AIS targets from being acquired by the collision computation, for example to avoid unnecessary alarms in port or at other berths caused by AIS targets, without having to change the CPA/TCPA settings. This takes place in the Alarm Settings menu by means of the Auto AIS Target Acq button. IMPORTANT For AIS targets, the collision computation, i.e. also the automatic acquisition and the outputting of the DANGEROUS AIS TARGET alarm, can be performed only if the following condition is fulfilled: The necessary condition for the collision computation is that the relative speed between own ship and the target is known. This must be determined from the speed vector over ground (SOG, COG) transmitted from the AIS target and from the own speed vector over ground. The own speed vector over ground is mainly determined from the Bottom Track data of the selected speed sensor; otherwise, it is determined with the aid of the SOG/COG of the selected position sensor If an AIS target is not transmitting SOG and COG, no collision avoidance computation takes place for this target. Therefore, the target cannot be acquired automatically. If it is already being tracked, no DANGEROUS AIS TARGET alarm occurs in the case of a dangerous approach. The symbol of this AIS target is dashed. Deletion of Targets, Loss of Target An acquired AIS target is tracked by the CHARTPILOT until it is deleted or it is lost (loss of target). Deletion of AIS targets: In the menu Radar/AIS > Targets, in the frame AIS Targets click on the button Cancel Target and then, in the chart area, click on those AIS targets one after another that are to be deleted. This function of the cursor is switched off as soon as the cursor leaves the chart area. By deletion, the AIS targets become sleeping targets again. Deletion of all AIS targets: In the menu Radar/AIS > Targets, click on the button Cancel All Targets. A safeguard question then appears; answer Yes to that question. As a result, the tracking of all AIS targets is stopped and the AIS targets become sleeping targets again. Loss of target: An AIS target is lost when, for a specified length of time, the AIS system does not receive any data from that target. The alarm LOST AIS TARGET then appears and the symbol changes its form accordingly and flashes until the alarm is acknowledged. True Scaled AIS Targets Due to the fact that the transmitted AIS data set also contains information about the system´s position abord the ship, the size of the ship can be determined. If additional factors like target distance, display range, monitor´s DPI and the size of the target itself are within the appropriate parameters, the target can be displayed in true scale. The target is then no longer displayed as a triangle like described in Section 3.5.4.11, but the triangle is set into a look-alike shape that represents the size of the target and the system´s position.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

119

CHARTPILOT

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

Operating Instructions

4.6 Automatic Identification System (AIS)

Lost target, true scale

Own ship, true scale

Fig. 4-25

4.6.3

Tracked target, true scale

Tracked target, as symbol only. This target is probably too small to be displayed in true scale relating to the actual display range and DPI

AIS targets displayed in True Scale

Specifying / Viewing Own AIS Data

Specifying the Data that are to be Transmitted Depending on Speed The following data are the data which are transmitted cyclically by own AIS system and have to be specified by the operator. IMPORTANT The following data must be entered at the beginning of every voyage and (if necessary) must be updated during the voyage to ensure correct and up-to-date information to be sent to other ships. Input and display of the own AIS data take place in the menu Radar/AIS > Voyage Data - see the illustration. So that the data entered will take effect, the Apply button must be pressed.

120

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

Operating Instructions

4.6 Automatic Identification System (AIS)

Destination The time of arrival planned for the specified destination (UTC) The present draught Ship type or cargo: Depending on the ship type, after clicking of the Set button it is possible to choose between several possibilities Navigation status: Depending on the ship type, after clicking of the Set button it is possible to choose between several possibilities Number of persons on board

Puts the changes into effect Causes resetting to the original data

Fig. 4-26

The menu Radar/AIS > Voyage Data

Viewing Own AIS Data The data transmitted by own AIS system can be viewed in the Info box, in the index card Targets. For this purpose, the operator must click on the own ship symbol (by means of the key).

4.6.4

Safety Messages

Receiving Safety Messages When the AIS system receives a safety message, the alarm NEW SAFETY MESSAGE appears. The content of the safety message is contained in the menu Radar/AIS > Read Message, in the lower list. Above this list, the identification data of the transmitting AIS object 1) are displayed: MMSI Maritime Mobile Service Identity, definite identification of the AIS system (and hence of the target) ID Target marker (i.e., the call sign, if available) Lat, Lon Position at the transmission instant BRG, RNG True bearing and range of the AIS object at the transmission instant

1)

An AIS object because not only AIS targets (ships) but also Base stations and Aids-to-Navigation can transmit safety messages.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

121

CHARTPILOT

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

Operating Instructions

4.6 Automatic Identification System (AIS)

In the upper list of the menu Radar/AIS > Read Message, the 40 safety messages received last are listed. In the column New, those messages whose contents have not yet been displayed on this indicator are marked with an asterisk.

List of stored received messages After clicking of a message, its content and the data of the transmitting AIS object are displayed.

Data of the transmitting AIS object at the transmission instant; see text

Content of the message which is marked in the upper list

Fig. 4-27

The menu Radar/AIS > Read Message

Sending a Safety Message If necessary, a safety message can be sent. This can be a standardised distress message or a nonstandardised, individually entered text. The message can be broadcast generally or it can be sent to a particular AIS object. Broadcasting a Message

122

1.

Open the menu Radar/AIS > Send Message. If necessary, change the setting of the top button from Addressed to Broadcast.

2.

If a standardised distress message is to be sent, click on the button Message Type and then click on the desired message type. The content of the message is then displayed. or: If an individual message is to be sent, User Defined must be selected as the message type. The message can then be entered in the input field situated below that.

3.

The message is sent via the AIS system by pressing the Send button.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

Operating Instructions

4.6 Automatic Identification System (AIS)

Broadcast: The message is broadcast generally Addressed: The message goes to the target whose MMSI number is entered. MMSI of the addressee of the message (input and display field) Target marker (call sign) of the addressee This makes it possible to select the addressee by clicking in the PPI Selection of the message type: New Message, User Message 1 ... 5: Individual text, which can be edited in the message field

Message field containing the content of the message

This sends the message Resets all settings and deletes a message that has already been edited

Fig. 4-28

The menu Radar/AIS > Send Message

Sending a Message to a Particular AIS Object 1.

Open the menu Radar/AIS > Send Message. If necessary, change the setting of the top button from Broadcast to Addressed.

2.

Either enter the MMSI number of the addressee in the MMSI field or: Switch on the function Address to Target, and in the chart area click on the AIS target that is to receive the message.

3.

If a standardised distress message is to be sent, click on the button Message Type and then click on the desired message type. The content of the message is then displayed. or: If a freely composed, individual text is to be transmitted, the following possibilities exist:

4.

5.

1)

a)

Click on the button Message Type and then click on message type New Message and edit the new message with the virtual keyboard.) 1)

b)

Click on the button Message Type, and by selecting User Message 1 ... 5 call up the message that was stored last under the selected designation. Each message can be altered with the aid of the virtual keyboard after clicking. The message is stored during transmission.

The message is sent via the AIS system by pressing the Send button.

The AIS does not allow the transmission of all characters that are usually present on the alphanumeric keyboard. The characters that cannot be transmitted cannot be entered.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

123

CHARTPILOT

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

Operating Instructions

4.6 Automatic Identification System (AIS)

4.6.5

Long-Range Interrogation The AIS system can be requested by other equipment, e.g. SatCom equipment, to transmit own ship data. Because this request can be made over longer distances than the VHF range, it is called longrange interrogation. The requesting station specifies the data that are to be requested. 1) Reply Modes The reaction of the AIS system to long-range interrogation is defined by the selected Reply mode. The task of setting the Reply mode is performed in the menu Radar/AIS > Interrogation by means of the button Reply Mode: OFF: The AIS system does not react to the request. MANUAL: When interrogation occurs, the AIS INTERROGATION alarm appears with the supplement Reply requested. The reply is sent when, in the menu Radar/AIS > Interrogation, the Reply button is pressed 2). AUTO: When interrogation occurs, the reply is sent automatically. For information, the alarm AIS INTERROGATION appears (without a supplement and without an acoustic signal).

For setting the Reply mode - see text

Here, the last 10 incoming interrogations are listed with the MMSI of the interrogating station and with the time and date of the interrogation. R: The interrogation has been answered. By clicking, the data of the interrogation are shown in the lower display.

MMSI and name of the requesting station

Content of the interrogation, requested data

Triggers the reply for the interrogation whose data are displayed in the lower list

Fig. 4-29

1) 2)

The menu Radar/AIS > Interrogation

Such requests can come from shore stations, e.g. from shipping companies, traffic control centres or government offices, but not from the AIS systems that are normally carried on board. The Reply button triggers the reply to the interrogation whose data are displayed in the menu. If, after a AIS INTERROGATION alarm, the menu is opened, the data of this interrogation are displayed.

124

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

Operating Instructions

4.6.6

4.6 Automatic Identification System (AIS)

AIS Settings

Automatic Setting Procedure The AIS system cannot function unless all AIS systems communicate on the same VHF channels and unless the communication bandwidth and the transmission level are correctly set. The settings needed for this are normally made automatically as described in the following. It is also possible to make a setting manually, but this should only be done in exceptional cases after the ship's command personnel have been informed accordingly, see page 126. VHF channels 2087 and 2088 are used worldwide for the two AIS channels. As default values, AIS channel A uses the VHF channel 2087 the AIS channel B uses the VHF channel 2088, and for both channels, the bandwidth setting is Auto, and transmission is performed with power level High. In particular geographical regions or situations, it is necessary to deviate from these settings. The necessary values are received via the AIS channels. 1) These data also contains the information about the region in which these settings are to be used, including the transition zone surrounding that region. The switch-over is performed automatically when the ship is located in the transition zone. This is done in the following steps: As soon as the ship reaches the boundaries of the transition zone, one AIS channel is set to the different VHF settings (with the other AIS channel remaining unchanged) and the alarm Channel management changed is shown. As a result, the targets situated inside and on either side of the transition zone are now seen 2) and the ship is also seen by these targets; see the diagram. On leaving the transition zone, the second AIS channel is also switched over to the different VHF settings. The general effect is that a ship which is not located in the transition zone does not see any targets located behind the transition zone.

Sees A, B, D, E, F Sees B, C, D

Sees C, D, F

A

C

E

B

D

F

Area with Region with different VHFTransition default VHF zone settings settings

Viewing of Data Sets for the AIS Settings The data set currently being used by the AIS system is displayed when the menu Radar/AIS > Channel Management is opened. In the bottom line, the status of the displayed data (e.g. Data set used) appears beside the Next button: Before DATA SET: (no entry): Default values AIS: Data have been received via one of the VHF transceivers. DSC: Data have been received via the DSC transceiver. MAN: Data have been entered manually. After DATA SET: USED: The data currently being used by the AIS system NOT USED: Data are currently not being used by the AIS system. EDITED: The displayed data have been altered manually but have not yet been stored. 1) 2)

However, these data can also be transferred by DSC. The AIS electronics unit also has a DSC receiver, so that even AIS electronics units which do not have their AIS channels set correctly can receive these data. When the channel management is used, this usually changes the VHF channels. This example refers to such a change

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

125

CHARTPILOT

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

Operating Instructions

4.6 Automatic Identification System (AIS)

In the line SELECT, there is a display for channel A and channel B, indicating whether the transmitter (TX) and/or the receiver (RX) is switched on. If there are any more data sets, they can be called up by means of the button Next. 1) Entering a Data Set Manually The displayed values can be altered (but do not alter them unless expressly instructed to do so by an authorised person). A data set with the altered data is stored by pressing the Apply button. Only data sets for regions up to a distance of a few hundred NM can be entered.

Settings of a transceiver (channel A): TX: Defines whether transmission takes place via channel A. RX: Defines whether reception takes place via channel A. Channel No.: Number of the VHF channel Bandwidth: Transmission/reception bandwidth Settings of the second transceiver (channel B): Same as channel A Transmission level Geographical area in which the settings take effect. It is bounded by lines of longitude and latitude. The north-east and south-west corners must be entered. Transition zone in which the old setting is still retained Status of the displayed data (see text) Switch-over to further stored data sets Puts the changes into effect Resets to the original data Fig. 4-30

The menu Radar/AIS > Channel Management

Switching Off the Transmitter of the AIS Electronics Unit If necessary, the transmitting of your own AIS data can be completely prevented by switching-off the function AIS Transmitter On. CAUTION The transmitter should not be switched off except in justified exceptional cases, because when it is switched off, own ship can no longer be detected as an AIS target by other ships and cannot participate in the communication between ships, equipped with AIS. The status TRANSMITTER ON/OFF is stored and can also be called up after an accident at sea.

1)

In addition to the default values, eight data sets can be managed.

126

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

Operating Instructions

4.7 Navigational Information from Telex (NAVTEX)

Reducing the Transmission Power when Loading and Unloading Tankers During the loading and unloading of tankers, the transmission power of the AIS transmitter must be reduced for safety reasons. This Low Power mode is only admissible by regulation for this particular situation. The corresponding button is therefore only provided on tankers, and the Low Power mode can only be switched on when the navigational state AT ANCHOR or MOORING is entered in the menu Radar/ AIS > VOYAGE DATA and the speed is below 3 Kts. In the menu Radar/AIS this setting is made by switching-on the function AIS LOW POWER MODE. On completion of the loading procedure, the Low Power mode must be switched off again by setting the button LOW POWER MODE to OFF. If the operator forgets to deactivate the Low Power mode, the transmitter is automatically switched to normal power when AT ANCHOR or MOORING is no longer entered as the navigational state, or when the speed exceeds 3 kts.

4.7

Navigational Information from Telex (NAVTEX) Subjects of this Section: The most important characteristics of the NAVTEX system Displaying and managing received NAVTEX messages Drawing geographical objects received by means of NAVTEX messages

4.7.1

NAVTEX Summarised Briefly The NAVTEX receiver is a Narrow Band Direct Printing (NBDP) device operating on the frequency 518 kHz (some equipment can also operate on 490 and 4209.5 kHz). It is a vital part of the Global Maritime Distress and Safety System (GMDSS). NAVTEX automatically receives Maritime Safety Information such as Radio Navigational Warnings, Storm/Gale Warnings, Meteorological Forecasts, Piracy Warnings, Distress Alerts, etc. (full details of the system can be found in IMO Publication IMO-951E - The NAVTEX Manual). Each message begins with a start of message function (ZCZC) followed by a space then four B characters. The first, (B1), identifies the station being received, the second, (B2), identifies the subject i.e. Navigational Warning, Met Forecasts, etc., and the third and fourth, (B3 + B4), form the consecutive number of the message from that station. This is followed by the text of the message and ends with an end of message function (NNNN).The NAVTEX system broadcasts COASTAL WARNINGS that cover the area from the Fairway Buoy out to about 250 nautical miles from the transmitter; the transmissions from some transmitters can be received out to 400 nautical miles and even further in unusual propagational conditions.

4.7.2

NAVTEX on CHARTPILOT Modern NAVTEX receivers include an INS port 1) which is programmed to transfer the received message and its alarm messages to any external system. The Radar Series 1100 can be connected to the NAVTEX INS port whereby these text messages and alarms can be made available on the radar system and any connected CHARTPILOT.

1)

Technically, the INS port is a serial interface according to IEC 61162.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

127

CHARTPILOT

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

Operating Instructions

4.7 Navigational Information from Telex (NAVTEX)

For identification of the received messages the above mentioned B-characters are combined to a message identifier (ID) shown in the list of NAVTEX messages in the NAVTEX window. To open this list, select Tree, NAVTEX or MENU, NAVTEX (See menu on next page). The NAVTEX window is opened automatically when the NEW MESSAGE warning is acknowledged. On the CHARTPILOT you can take over one or more geographical position data, which are thereafter shown as points, lines or areas in the chart. These geographical NAVTEX objects are only available on the CHARTPILOT which was used to create them. That means, that the objects are not distributed between the CHARTPILOTs or to radar indicators.

4.7.3

Displaying received NAVTEX messages New NAVTEX Message When the NAVTEX electronics unit receives a new message, the Alarm NAVTEX NEW MESSAGE appears only if the button NAVTEX Alarms is activated. To activate this alarm function, click on the button NAVTEX Alarms in the NAVTEX window. Even when the NAVTEX alarms are switched off, incoming messages are stored in the CHARTPILOT radar and can be called up at any time. 1) Displaying/Printing Incoming MESSAGES Up to 200 messages that have arrived during the last 60 hours can be displayed at any time: 1.

Click on the buttons Tree and NAVTEX one after the other. The NAVTEX list opens. Up to 200 messages that have arrived last are listed:

1)

ID:

Number of the message from which the message came.

New:

Messages that have not yet been read are provided with an asterisk *.1)

Date and Time:

The date and time of reception.

2.

With Print All all messages can be printed out on the printer connected to one of the CHARTPILOTS.

3.

Mark the desired message by clicking to read it.

In case the NAVTEX Alarms are switched off, new incoming messages are stored, but no longer marked as NEW. If messages are to be unmarked, (the asterisk * is to be deleted), switch off the NAVTEX Alarms button; this will also cancel the NEW MESSAGE alarm and remove it from the alarm list.

128

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance 4.7 Navigational Information from Telex (NAVTEX)

4.The NAVTEX MESSAGE dialogue is opened, and the marked message is displayed: Below the identification data of the station, the received text message is listed in the frame. With CANCEL, the dialogue is closed. 5.With Print the contents of the message can be printed out on the printer connected to one of the CHARTPILOTS. 6.With Drop Position geographical positions can be drawn on the displayed chart. (See next chapter). For details about the NAVTEX alarms and warnings refer to chapter 9.

4.7.4

Extracting Geographical Data from NAVTEX Messages Messages sometimes contain geographical information which may be desired to be displayed in the electronic chart. In order to take over these data, open the relevant message as described before and proceed as follows: 1.

Mark one or more Lat/Lon data by moving the trackball cursor to the end of the position string and clicking DO.

2.

Click on Drop Position, whereby another dialogue opens, in which it is neccessary to check the correctness of the interpreted position data one by one. Check and -if neccessarycorrect the data step by step. It is possible to use the ASCIIkeyboard of the CHARTPILOT or the virtual keyboard to enter values.(See Section 3.4)

3.

Thereafter click on the Apply button so that the system stores and displays these positions as a point object, a line or an area.

4.

Graphical objects generated in this way can be verified by clicking on Show in Chart, whereby the CHARTPILOT will be switched over to planning mode and the chart area wil be centered at the object drawn in the chart in step 3.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

129

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

4.8 Trial Manoeuvres

As long as the NAVTEX geographic object is shown in the chart, it can be clicked with the INFO button. Then, the message can be read again. In the window which is opened thereafter the object can be deleted by a click on the Delete in Chart button.

INFO DO

Useful Information: The messages concerning an object are stored for 60 hours, thus, the objects themselves are stored for 60 hours and will be deleted thereafter. The maximum number of stored messages and geagraphical objects is limited to 200.

4.8

Trial Manoeuvres You can obtain a graphic display of the effect of a simulated manoeuvre of own ship relative to the displayed targets (ARPA and AIS targets) and relative to the safety contour (and to the other elements displayed in the electronic chart). During the trial manoeuvre display, the own ship symbol is displayed at the existing position. The target symbols are moved away from their existing positions in accordance with the simulated manoeuvre instant. The target vectors too correspond to the simulated situation and not to the existing one. Switching On the Trial Manoeuvre Display The trial manoeuvre display is switched on by pressing the Trial Manoeuvre button in the Radar/AIS menu.

130

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

Operating Instructions

4.8 Trial Manoeuvres

Switching on produces the following settings: The course and speed vectors of the targets are displayed. The vectors are displayed as relative vectors, independently of the display mode (the display mode is not changed). The past plots of the targets are not displayed. The Trial Manoeuvre menu appears. In addition, the Trial Course Line appears. This is a black line which initially points in the course direction, starting from the own ship symbol. In addition, the own ship symbol of the trial manoeuvre is displayed. This is a thinly drawn own ship symbol which is initially situated under the own ship symbol, points in the direction of the set course, and therefore cannot yet be distinguished from the latter (if the drift angle is small). In the lower area of the display, a large, flashing is displayed to draw attention to the fact that the trial manoeuvre display is switched on and that the symbols and vectors of the targets are therefore no longer being displayed in accordance with the actual existing situation. Display of a Trial Manoeuvre In the Trial Manoeuvre menu, you can now simulate the manoeuvre data: with Trial Course, the set course onto which the ship is steered by the manoeuvre, with Trial Speed, the speed at which the ship will sail after the manoeuvre, with Trial Delay, the time up until the start of the manoeuvre. Setting of the simulation data is best performed with the arrow keys, because then the display of the trial manoeuvre changes continually as the set values change.

Simulated set course after the trial manoeuvre Simulated own speed after the trial manoeuvre Time up until the trial manoeuvre Ends the trial manoeuvre Fig. 4-31

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

The Radar/AIS > Trial Manoeuvre menu

131

CHARTPILOT

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

Operating Instructions

4.8 Trial Manoeuvres

Targets get relative vectors

Trial Course Line Identification of trial manoeuvre display

Scenario before switch-on of the trial manoeuvre display (True Motion mode with true vector presentation)

The same scenario after switch-on of the trial manoeuvre display (The right-hand target is on a collision course.)

The set course that was set with Trial Course

Trial Course Line Position of the trial manoeuvre No danger of collision (vector indicates sufficiently large passing distance relative to Trial Manoeuvre position)

Distance to the trial manoeuvre, as set with Trial Delay

The same scenario after setting of a trial manoeuvre which would prevent a collision Fig. 4-32

Display of a Trial Manoeuvre

Interpretation of the Display: The own ship symbol continues to indicate own ship's existing position, and it points ahead. On the route up to the manoeuvre that was set by means of Trial Delay, the Trial Course Line represents the existing course; at the position at which the manoeuvre would take place, the Trial Course Line bends and turns onto the course that was set by means of Trial Course. The line therefore approximately represents the track that the ship would sail along if the manoeuvre were actually performed. The arc along which the ship would sail in the manoeuvre is not displayed; the manoeuvre characteristics of the ship are not taken into account. If the manoeuvre is actually to be executed, it would have to be started at a suitably earlier instant. The own ship symbol of the trial manoeuvre is displayed at the position of the simulated manoeuvre. It points in the direction of the simulated set course.

132

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

Operating Instructions

4.9 Marking an Event

The targets are displayed at the positions which they would occupy at the instant of the simulated manoeuvre if their existing courses and speeds were maintained. The course and speed vectors of the targets are displayed relative to the own ship symbol of the trial manoeuvre. They refer to the course that was set by means of Trial Course and to the speed that was set by means of Trial Speed. Consequently: If the vector of a target points towards the own ship symbol of the trial manoeuvre, the execution of the trial manoeuvre would put own ship onto a collision course relative to this target. For the same scenario, Figure 4-32 shows the display before and after switch-on of the trial manoeuvre display and after the setting of a trial manoeuvre. Switching Off the Trial Manoeuvre Display Switching off is done by pressing the Cancel button situated in the Radar/AIS > Trial Manoeuvre menu.

4.9

Marking an Event If necessary, own position or some other position can be marked in the chart area by means of the (orange) event marker . An event can be provided with a remark. More than one event marker can be set. The chart area can be adjusted at any time so that one of the events forms the centre. Event markers can optionally be edited on all of the system. There is only one set of event markers in the system; edited data are automatically distributed system-wide, i.e. stored on all hard disks and displayed when required. Marking an Event 1.

Press the function key F5, or else press the Drop Event button in the Chart > Events menu. In the Drop Event menu which then opens up, own position and the time of the set event are displayed.

2.

The event position can now be changed by switching on the Pick function in the menu and clicking the desired position in the chart area. The clicked position is now displayed under Geographic Position.

3.

If necessary, directly enter a short remark about the event under Remark, or, after pressing of the Select button, mark the remark in the resulting Event Remark Selection menu and press OK.

4.

In the Chart > Events menu, store the event by pressing the OK button and close the menu. The event marker is now displayed. If Text Labels is switched on in the Chart menu, the remark entered also appears beside the event symbol in the chart area.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

133

CHARTPILOT

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

Operating Instructions

4.9 Marking an Event

Sets the event. Opens the Drop Event menu (see Figure 4-34), with which the event marker is set at another position and a remark about the event can be entered. Opens a menu in which it is possible to edit event remarks, which can then be called up at any time.

List of stored events (The time statement is the stored time in UTC)

Centres the chart area on the event marked in the list of stored events and switches to Planning display mode Deletes the events marked in the list of stored events

Fig. 4-33

The Chart > Events menu

Pick function switched off: own position is the event position Pick function switched on: click the event position in the chart by means of the cursor

Event position Date and time of the event Enter a remark, e.g. by calling up remarks which have already been edited.

Stores the event and closes the menu

Mark the remark Closes the menu without an event being stored.

Enters the marked remark and closes the menu Fig. 4-34

134

Closes the menu

The Drop Event menu

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

Operating Instructions

4.10 The Marking of Position Fixes

Adjusting the Chart Area so that an Event Forms the Centre In the Chart > Events menu, mark the desired event in the list, and press the Show in Chart button. The Planning display mode is then switched on and the chart excerpt is adjusted so that the event is situated at the centre. Editing Event Remarks which can be Called Up In the menu Chart > Events, press the button Edit Remarks List, edit the remark in the input field, and add the remark to the list by pressing the Add button. You can delete remarks in the list by marking them and then pressing the Delete button. Putting an event remark into the list avoids the need to edit that event remark again, since the remarks entered in the list can be called up in the menu Event Remark Selection when an event marker is being set. Deleting Events In the Chart > Events menu, mark the desired events in the list, and press the Delete button. Management of the Event Data Event markers are not entered in electronic charts but are stored independently of them in a file 1).

4.10

The Marking of Position Fixes Position fixes can be marked in a manner similar to the entering of positions in the paper chart. They are marked with the (orange) symbol . Procedures and possibilities are largely the same as for the setting of event markers. Position fixes can optionally be edited on all of the system. There is only one set of position fixes in the system; edited data are automatically distributed system-wide, i.e. stored on all hard disks and displayed when required. Entering a Position Fix 1.

In the menu Chart > Position Fixes, press the button Drop Position Fix. In the Drop Position Fix menu which then opens up, own position and the time of the set position fix are displayed.

2.

The position of the position fix can now be changed by switching on the Pick function in the menu and clicking on the desired position in the chart region. The clicked position is now displayed under Geographic Position.

3.

By means of the button Position Finding Method, select the method of position-determination. The objects before the dash are the short form with which the symbol can be provided on the screen; see step 4.

4.

1)

In the menu Chart > Position Fixes, store the position fix by pressing the OK button and close the menu. The position fix symbol is now displayed.

together with the position fixes and the areas edited as User Chart Objects; for the handling of the file, see Section 8.1.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

135

CHARTPILOT

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

Operating Instructions

4.10 The Marking of Position Fixes

If, in the Chart menu, the Text Labels function is switched on, the time of the fix (zone time) appears above the position fix symbol in the chart region, and the method of position-determination appears in the short form under the symbol.

time of the fix (hours and minutes)

1342

dG

position-determination (short form)

Setting the Chart Region as the Centre by Means of a Position Fix In the menu Chart > Position Fixes, mark the desired position fix in the list and press the Show in Chart button. This causes switch-on of the Planning display mode, and the chart excerpt is automatically set in such a way that the position fix is situated at the centre. Deleting a Position Fix In the menu Chart > Position Fixes, mark the desired position fixes in the list and press the Delete button. Managing the Position Fix Data Position fixes are not entered in electronic charts; instead, they are stored independently of them in a file 1). Sets the position fix. Opens the Drop Position Fix box, with which the position fix symbol can be set at another position and the method of position-determination can be entered. If the Pick function is switched off: Own position is the position of the position fix If the Pick function is switched on: By means of the cursor, click on the position of the position fix in the chart region

Position of the position fix Date and time of the position fix Select the method of position-determination. On the left, the short form is entered, which appears as a text label Stores the position fix and closes the menu

List of the stored position fixes (the time statement is the stored time in UTC)

Closes the menu without any storing of a position fix.

Centres the chart region on the position fix which is marked in the list of stored position fixes, and switches over to the Planning display mode. Deletes the position fixes which are marked in the list of stored position fixes

Fig. 4-35

1)

The menus Chart > Position Fixes and ... > Drop Position Fix

together with the Events and the areas edited as User Chart Objects; for handling of the file, see Section 8.1.

136

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

Operating Instructions

4.11

4.11 Using Lines of Position

Using Lines of Position In order to verify or determine the ship´s position, there are three possibilities using the Lines of Position function. They make use of fixed objects in the vicinity of the ship which are also plotted in the chart, for example a light-house. The three possibilities are: Known Bearing and Range From the ship´s bridge, the true bearing φ and range r of the lighthouse are taken. Both values are entered into the CHARTPILOT and are then calculated with the result of the actual position of the ship. Known position of the light-house

φ

r

Cross Bearing From the ship´s bridge, the true bearings φ1 and φ2 of two fixed objects are taken. The intersection point of those two base lines is the actual position of the ship. If the two base lines intersect in a rather acute or flat angle, a third object with its base line can be used. Known position of light-house #1

φ1 φ2

Known position of light-house #2

Optional: φ3 Optional: Known position of light-house #3

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

137

CHARTPILOT

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

Operating Instructions

4.11 Using Lines of Position

Transferred Base Line The ship is sailing with known and constant speed and course. The true bearing φ1 of one fixed object is taken and entered into the system. After a while the true bearing φ2 of the same object is taken again. Due to the fact that the ship´s position has changed, the true bearing does now have another value. The intersection point of the new base line (2) and the transferred base line (1) is the actual position of the ship. Known position of light-house Base line 2

Transferred base line 1 φ2

Base line 1 φ1

Ship´s position at time t + Δt.

Ship´s position at time t.

138

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

Operating Instructions

4.11 Using Lines of Position

The Lines of Position-menue

Three tabs for possible Lines of Position Pick the position of the fixed object from the chart. The position is then displayed below Indication of the object´s position. Alternatively, an object´s position can be entered here manually Enter the bearing of the known object Enter the range of the known object, if applicable Choose whether the time the known object has been acquired is the actual time or enter the time manually Select here if the data are relevant for this LOP or if they shall be transferred from another LOP. Click to use data of acquired object Click to reset data. See Useful Information below Indication of the calculated ship´s position Sets the position fix. See Section 4.10. (Button is only active if data has been entered in the fields above). See also important remark below Use calculated position data for Dead Reckoning. (Button is only active in case the position sensor is set to Estimated. See Section 4.12.3. Further on, it must be configured in several entries on service level, that Dead Reckoning can be activated.This is especially dependant on the settings for the use of sensors.)

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

139

CHARTPILOT

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

Operating Instructions

4.11 Using Lines of Position

Important remark on Drop Position Fix Position fix Base line #1

Base line #2

1342 LOP 2 1342

LOP 1 1342

EP

After having clicked on Drop Position Fix, the calculated position is displayed on the screen by means of a symbol and additional information. See Section 4.10 for details. It may happen that the symbol of the position fix is not displayed at the same position as the intersection of the base lines. This is not a fault! The base lines are displayed as straight lines within a mercator projection. But in reality, they should be displayed as slight curves, with a radius depending on the actual geographical position of the ship. The calculation of the Drop Position Fix takes this fact into account and may deliver a slightly different position than the graphical method does. The more northern or southern the ship´s position is, the more different are the calculated and graphically determined positions. Performing a Position Fix using known Bearing and Range 1.

Choose an object which can be seen from the ship´s bridge and that is also detectable on radar.

2.

Open the Lines of Position dialogue. Click on LOP 1 and on Reset to clear all data. Then, click Pick Position. In the chart, locate the desired object and click on it. The position data of the object will be displayed 1).

3.

Take and enter the Bearing and Distance data of the object that has been acquired.

4.

Choose whether the time of the acquisition of the known object is the actual time or enter the time manually.

5.

Click on Apply. The calculated Position Fix will be displayed in the LOP-window. It is now possible to display the calculated position fix in the chart by clicking on Drop Position Fix. See Section 4.10 for details. If the position sensor is set to Estimated, the position fix can be used as new origin for the dead-reckoning. Click on Use for DR Origin to take over the position fix.

Performing a Position Fix using Cross Bearing

1)

1.

Choose two objects which can be seen from the ship´s bridge.

2.

Open the Lines of Position dialogue. Click on LOP 1 and on Reset to clear all data. Then, click Pick Position. In the chart, locate the desired object and click on it. The position data of the object will be displayed 2).

Alternatively, the position of the object can be entered manually into the Lat / Lon fields. If you wish to do so, do not klick on Pick Positon.

140

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

Operating Instructions

4.11 Using Lines of Position

3.

Take and enter the Bearing data of the object that has been acquired.

4.

Choose whether the time of the acquisition of the known object is the actual time or enter the time manually.

5.

Click on Apply.

6.

Open the tab for LOP 2 and repeat the action done for the first object, but use the second one !

7.

If neccessary, a third base line can be added: Open the tab for LOP 3 and repeat the action done for the first two objects, but use the third one !

8.

After having clicked on Apply, red baselines are displayed in the chart. The calculated Position Fix will be displayed in the LOP-window. It is now possible to display the calculated position fix in the chart by clicking on Drop Position Fix. See Section 4.10 for details. If the position sensor is set to Estimated, the position fix can be used as new origin for the dead-reckoning. Click on Use for DR Origin to take over the position fix.

2)

Alternatively, the position of the object can be entered manually into the Lat / Lon fields. If you wish to do so, do not klick on Pick Positon.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

141

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance 4.11 Using Lines of Position

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

Performing a Position Fix using Transferred Base Line 1.

Choose an object which can be seen from the ship´s bridge and that will be visible for at least as long as the position determination is supposed to take.

2.

Open the Lines of Position dialogue. Click on LOP 1 and on Reset to clear all data. Then, click on Pick Position. In the chart, locate the desired object and click on it. The position data of the object will be displayed 1).

3.

Take and enter the Bearing data of the object that has been acquired.

4.

Choose whether the time of the acquisition of the known object is the actual time or enter the time manually.

5.

Click on Apply. The base line will be displayed in the chart.

6.

Let the ship sail until the bearing of the object has changed significantly. Make sure the course and speed of the ship does not change !

7.

Open the tab for LOP 2, take the new bearing of the object (its position is already displayed) and enter the value into Bearing 2). Click on Apply. The base line will be displayed in the chart.

8.

Choose the LOP from which the transferred base line is to be taken. Select the appropriate LOP with the Mode selector. In the described case, LOP 1 must be selected, because LOP 1 is the base line that must be transferred to the new position.

9.

Click on Apply. The transferred base line will be displayed in the chart. and the calculated Position Fix will be displayed in the LOP-window. It is now possible to display the calculated position fix in the chart by clicking on Drop Position Fix. See Section 4.10 for details. If the position sensor is set to Estimated, the position fix can be used as new origin for the dead-reckoning. Click on Use as DR Origin to take over the position fix.

1) 2)

Alternatively, the position of the object can be entered manually into the Lat / Lon fields. If you wish to do so, do not klick on Pick Position. Do not click on Pick Position this time ! This would mean that another object than the first one is to be used. So, this would lead back to the cross-bearing mode !

142

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

Operating Instructions

4.11 Using Lines of Position

Useful Information: The position data from LOP 1 is automatically copied into the LOP 2-tab after Apply has been clicked, the position data from LOP 2 is automatically copied into the LOP 3-tab after Apply has been clicked. This makes it easier to work with the data, especially when using transferred base lines. Clicking on Reset on LOP 1 erases all data in all tabs, clicking on Reset on LOP 2 erases data in LOP 2-tab and LOP 3-tab. Clicking on Reset on LOP 3 erases data only in LOP 3. All actions taken with respect to LOP are stored in the voyage recording. Position fixes generated by means of LOP are stored in the list Position Fixes... There, they can be edited in several ways.(See Section 4.10)

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

143

CHARTPILOT

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

Operating Instructions

4.12 Selection and Setting of the Navigation Sensors

4.12

Selection and Setting of the Navigation Sensors For many important functions, the CHARTPILOT depends upon receiving adequately accurate values for the navigation data heading, speed and position. Some of the sensors concerned are present redundantly, so that you have to make a choice. Furthermore, some settings have to be made manually, e.g. during course transfer, which might have to be synchronised, or after status changes of the sensor. The CHARTPILOT can be configured in such a way that selection and setting of the navigation sensors are generally not possible, because these settings are intended to be made on the radar indicators or on a CHARTPILOT integrated in the bridge console, but not on a CHARTPILOT situated at the chart table, are not possible if the TRACKPILOT is in the active state, or are not possible if the TRACKPILOT is being operated in Track mode because the settings are then intended to be made on the TRACKPILOT Master only, or are possible at any time. (This configuration is implemented in special cases only.)

Reading of position, speed and course delivered by the radar system.

Setting of the course transfer; menu see Figure 4-37 on page 145 Selection of the position sensor and associated settings; menu see Figure 4-39 on page 149 Selection of the second position sensor; menu see Figure 4-39 on page 149 Selection of the speed sensor; manual input of drift and speed values; menu see Figure 4-38 on page 147 Setting of date and time; menu see Figure 4-40 on page 153

Fig. 4-36

The Sensor Settings menu

USEFUL INFORMATION Sensor Master The tasks of selecting the navigation sensors and setting the navigation data take place by means of software in one of the connected radar indicators. This radar indicator is called the Sensor Master. The Sensor Master function can be executed on any radar indicator to which a gyro compass system, a speed sensor and a position sensor system are directly connected. If several radar indicators have these connections, the program automatically defines which of the radar indicators is the Sensor Master. If the Sensor Master fails, another radar indicator automatically becomes the Sensor Master, in which case - if possible - the sensor selection and the settings remain unchanged. The Sensor Master can also be changed manually by the operator on any radar indicator having this function.Availability of the Sensor Menus As described above, the menus and functions of the following chapters 4.12.1to 4.12.5 are only available on the CHARTPILOT if they are configured on service level.

144

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

Operating Instructions

4.12.1

4.12 Selection and Setting of the Navigation Sensors

Course Transfer Settings For the transfer of the heading information, a technique can be used which transfers course changes only, but not the absolute value. In these cases, therefore, the synchronism of the course transfer must be checked after switch-on of signal transfer, and must be corrected if necessary.

Heading value used in the CHARTPILOT at present Here, input the heading value obtained by reading the gyro compass. 1)

1)

On modern compass systems the heading information is available as an absolute value (mostly from a serial interface according to IEC 61162). In this case, the above mentioned menu is used to accept the currently transferred heading data, for instance after a failure or signal interruption of the heading measuring system and no input can be made in the Set field of the Set Gyro menu.

Puts the settings of this menu into effect; the menu is exited. Exits the menu without the new settings being put into effect. Fig. 4-37

The Sensor Settings > Set Gyro menu

Synchronising of Course Transfer 1.

Call up the Sensor Settings > Set Gyro menu. The heading value to which the system is currently synchronised is indicated there under Actual.

2.

Under Set, input the heading value obtained by reading the compass.

3.

When the values under Actual and Set are identical, press the OK button and check that the same heading values are now being displayed in the navigation data line of the CHARTPILOT and on the compass indicator.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

145

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance 4.12 Selection and Setting of the Navigation Sensors

4.12.2

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

Selection of the Speed Sensor; Input of Own Speed and Drift Normally, there is more than one speed sensor. One of them has to be selected. In the case of speed sensors which transfer only the speed ahead, the drift must be input manually. As an alternative to selecting a speed sensor, the speed can also be input manually if necessary. Selection of the Speed Sensor 1.

In the Select frame in the menu Sensor Settings > Speed Sensor, mark the desired sensor. If the marked sensor is a position sensor, the following applies: When the marked sensor reports that the data transferred are valid, the message Valid Value appears instead of the mode (Bottom Track or Water Track) in the menu. If the marked sensor reports that the data are not valid, the message Invalid Value appears. If the marked sensor does not transfer any status message about the validity of the values transferred, Not Available appears there.

2.

If a sensor was selected which can simultaneously supply the speed through the water and the speed over the bottom, the speed that is to be used preferentially must be switched on in the LOG Priority frame. If a sensor was selected which does not have this possibility, no input is possible.

3.

Pressing of the OK button selects the marked speed sensor. The speed sensors also include position sensors which transfer not only the position but also the speed (and course) over ground . IMPORTANT: GPS receivers and other position receivers generally do not fulfil the IMO Performance Standards for SDME (Speed and Distance Measuring Equipment). On ships with BSH or DNV approval, the use of speed signals from position sensors is usually not permitted In the Select list, all sensors that are possible as suppliers of the speed signal are listed. If several sensors of the same type are connected, they are given a serial number in addition to the sensor type identification. If a sensor does not transfer a transmitter identifier, the Sensor Master cannot assign the received signals to a sensor type. So that the speed data transferred can be used nevertheless, such a sensor appears in the list as None.

Inputting the Present Drift In the Manual frame in the Sensor Settings > Speed Sensor menu, enter the magnitude of the drift under Drift and enter the direction of the drift under Set. Exit the menu by pressing the OK button. This input is possible only in the case of single-axis logs.

146

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

Operating Instructions

4.12 Selection and Setting of the Navigation Sensors

In the list, a dual axis log is marked: Sensor status 1) Longitudinal and transverse speeds over ground (WT) and through the water (BT) transferred from the marked sensor List of the connected speed sensors; mark the speed sensor that is to be selected.

Definition of whether speed through the water or speed over ground is to be used in the system, if the log delivers both types of data

In the list, a single-axis log is marked: Sensor status 1) In the list, a position sensor is marked as the speed sensor:

Longitudinal speeds transferred from the marked sensor

Sensor status 1) Course and speed over ground

Input fields for the drift (magnitude and direction)

The display depends on the speed sensor that is marked in the list.

In the list, MANUAL is marked: Longitudinal and transverse speeds obtained from the values that were entered last under MANUAL Exits the menu without the new settings being put into effect.

Input field for longitudinal speed and drift (magnitude and direction) which take effect after pressing of OK.

Puts the settings of this menu into effect; the menu is exited.

1) Bottom Track, Water Track: Present sensor mode Valid Value: The marked sensor is transferring valid data. Invalid Value: The marked sensor is reporting the transferred data as invalid. Not Available: The marked sensor is not supplying a status message.

Fig. 4-38

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

The Sensor Settings > Speed Sensor menu (systems with radar 1000 series)

147

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance 4.12 Selection and Setting of the Navigation Sensors

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

Inputting Own Speed Manually In the Select list in the Sensor Settings > Speed Sensor menu, mark Manual Speed instead of a sensor. In the Manual frame, enter the speed at which the ship is sailing. Enter the present drift and set if applicable, and exit the menu by pressing the OK button. WARNING: For safety reasons, an available speed sensor must be selected as soon as possible. The modes of the NACOS might be limited by the selection of Manual Speed. USEFUL INFORMATION Determination of the Longitudinal and Transverse Speeds If a sensor is selected which produces the speed information in the form of course over ground and speed over ground (e.g. a position sensor), the system uses this information and the heading value from the gyro compass to compute the longitudinal and transverse components of own speed that are displayed and used in the system. Failure of the Speed Sensor If the selected speed sensor fails, the menu Sensor Settings > Speed Sensor, in which some other sensor is marked, opens up automatically. After checking the sensor data displayed there, select this sensor by means of OK or select some other sensor.

4.12.3

Selection of the Position Sensor; Settings to Determine the Position Of the position sensors that are connected, it is necessary to select the one whose position data are used generally in the system for determination of the system position. If a DGPS receiver has been selected, it is optionally possible to define whether the position received is to be used only if the DGPS receiver is operating in Differential mode. As an alternative to selecting a position sensor, it is also possible to specify, if necessary, that the system position is to be determined in the Sensor Master by dead reckoning (Estimated Position). After the position sensor has been selected, the accuracy of the position data must be checked continuously, even although the system continuously performs a check of the position quality. In addition, a second position sensor can be selected so that its positions can be plotted as a second past plot for comparison purposes. Selection of the Position Sensor Call up the Sensor Settings > Position Sensor menu and mark the desired sensor in the Select list. Behind Lat and Lon in the frame below the list, the position currently being transferred from the marked sensor appears. If the marked sensor reports that the data transferred are valid, the message Valid Value appears there. If it reports that the data are not valid, the message appears. If the marked sensor does not transfer any status message about the validity of the values transferred, Not Available appears there. The distance from the position currently being used to the position transferred from the marked sensor is displayed behind Distance, and the corresponding direction is displayed behind Bearing. If the difference displayed is relevant for the nautical situation, you must first check whether the sensor marked is a sufficiently accurate one.

148

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

Operating Instructions

4.12 Selection and Setting of the Navigation Sensors

Selection of the position sensor marked is done by pressing the OK button. On ships with BSH approval and on ships with DNV approval, the take-over of position values is permitted only if the sensor, by means of a status signal, declares that these data are valid. Position sensors which do not transmit this status signal can be displayed but cannot be selected for use in the system. Specifying the Use of the GPS Mode in the Case of the DGPS Receiver 1) Call up the Sensor Settings > Position Sensor menu, and in the Use of GPS frame switch on the DGPS and GPS function if the position data generated in GPS mode are to be used too. Otherwise, switch on the function DGPS only. If the TRACKPILOT is in the activated state, this setting can only be made on a radar indicator that is switched to act as the TRACKPILOT Master. If the USE of GPS function is not available (not visible in the menu), GPS and DGPS mode are treated as valid position data.

List of connected position sensors; mark the position sensor that is to be selected. Valid Value: The marked sensor is transferring valid data. Invalid Value: The marked sensor is reporting the transferred data as invalid. Not Available: The marked sensor is not supplying a status message. Position currently being transferred by the marked sensor Distance between the position currently being used in the CHARTPILOT and the position transferred from the marked sensor Direction from the position currently being used in the CHARTPILOT to the position transferred from the marked sensor Use of the DGPS receiver data in the case of failure of the DGPS mode: DGPS only: GPS receiver is regarded as having failed. DGPS and GPS: The data determined in GPS mode are used. If Estimated is marked, input fields for the starting position of the dead reckoning appear here. Puts the settings of this menu into effect; the menu is exited. Exits the menu without the new settings being put into effect. Fig. 4-39

1)

The Sensor Settings > Position Sensor and ... > 2nd Position Sensor menus

The Use of GPS function is optional and only visible if activated on service level.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

149

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance 4.12 Selection and Setting of the Navigation Sensors

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

Checking the Accuracy of the Position Data In the chart area, any inaccuracy of the position data leads to a displacement between the own ship symbol and the ARPA targets on the one hand, and the electronic chart and User Chart Objects, the AIS targets, the pre-planned tracks, the Aids-toNavigation on the other hand. The position used is normally sufficiently accurate if, with a small range setting, the fixed targets coincide with the corresponding symbols on the electronic chart. To minimize the inaccuracies, the system position can be corrected manually - see Section 4.12.4. If the entire set of ARPA targets is displayed rotated relative to the electronic chart or User Chart Objects, this indicates that there is a compass error. The position used by the CHARTPILOT can be checked continuously against a second position sensor; see below, S e l e c t i n g t h e S e c o n d P o s i t i o n S e n s o r . Selecting the Second Position Sensor In the Select list in the Sensor Settings > 2nd Position Sensor menu, mark the desired sensor. Behind Lat and Lon in the frame below the list, the position currently being transferred from the marked sensor appears. Furthermore, the distance from the position currently being used to the position transferred from the marked sensor is displayed behind Distance, and the corresponding direction is displayed behind Bearing. When the OK button is pressed, the marked position sensor is selected. For the plotting of the second past plot, the position determined by dead reckoning can be used instead of the second position sensor. The inputs for this are made in the Sensor Settings > 2nd Position Sensor menu as described above. Determining the Position Used by Means of Dead Reckoning If there is no position sensor available, the only available method of position determination is that of dead reckoning from the gyro heading and the data of the selected speed sensor. 1.

In the Select list in the Sensor Settings > Position Sensor menu, select Estimated instead of a sensor.

2.

In the lower Estimated frame, enter the position with which the dead reckoning is to be started.

3.

The dead reckoning is started by pressing the OK button. In the CHARTPILOT, the position determination performed by dead reckoning is called Estimated Position. WARNING: The accuracy of the dead reckoning position must be checked continually. For safety reasons, an available position sensor must be selected as soon as possible. The operation of the system might be limited by the selection of Estimated Position; for example, the modes of the TRACKPILOT are limited, and after 10 minutes the AIS is switched off.

Correction of the Dead Reckoning Position when Estimated Position is Used

150

1.

Before the known position e.g. determined by means of cross-bearings is reached, enter this position in the lower Estimated frame in the Sensor Settings > Position Sensor menu.

2.

When the position entered has been reached, press the OK button in the Sensor Settings > Position Sensor menu.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance 4.12 Selection and Setting of the Navigation Sensors

USEFUL INFORMATION Conning Position On every ship, a point on the ship is defined at service level as the conning position. Normally, it is the conning position on the bridge. Except for the information in the Sensor Settings menu, all system displays relative to own position refer to this conning position. For use in the system, all position sensor values are converted to the conning position. In these Operating Instructions, the system position is also called own position. System Reaction on Failure of a Sensor If the selected position sensor fails, the system automatically switches over to Estimated Position, and a message about the failure is given (the alarm POSITION TIMEOUT or POSITION INVALID). If the course sensor or speed sensor fails while Estimated Position is switched on (the alarm GYRO FAULT, SPEED TIMEOUT or SPEED INVALID), the value used for the dead reckoning is the last course or speed value transferred before the failure.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

151

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance 4.12 Selection and Setting of the Navigation Sensors

4.12.4

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

Manual Correction of the Position (Position Adjust) For various reasons, it can happen that the position of the electronic chart or of the self-generated mapon the screen is not in agreement with reality (i.e. with the ship's own position and with the ARPA targets). In such cases, the Position Adjust function offers the possibility of adding the necessary correction value (position offset) to the own position used in the NACOS. WARNING: Be very careful when using the Position Adjust function: by checking several objects, make certain which area the position offset can be valid in. Check regularly whether the position offset is still valid, especially after a change of positional accuracy from DGPS to GPS and vice versa. WARNING: When the watch is changing over, the selected offset must definitely be pointed out to the new officer of the watch. Every time the Position Adjust function is used, the fact of its use and the determined values are stored by means of the Voyage Recorder. Performing the Position Adjust With the Cancel key (or the right-hand key of the mouse) click to the chart background. In the menu that is thus opened, press Adjust Position. With the Cancel key (or the right-hand key of the mouse) click to a chart symbol (i.e. a light house) for which an ARPA target exists. Draw a line to the corresponding ARPA fixed target symbol, and click this symbol (with the DO key or the left-hand key of the mouse). The distances displayed on the line are added as the position offset to the system position. The position offset has an effect throughout the whole system, i.e. on the automatic trackkeeping, on the position of the electronic chart relative to the track, etc. For this reason, it can happen that, as a result of the position adjust, an alarm message (e.g. the TRACK LIMIT alarm of the TRACKPILOT) is triggered on connected units. Display of the Position Offset The size of the position offset is indicated in the line ADJ ... in the Cursor display. After the position adjust has been performed, the position field of the navigation data line is given a yellow background. Resetting the Position Offset The position offset is reset automatically (i.e. is set to zero) whenever a change-over to a different position sensor occurs. The resetting occurs manually in the context menu of the chart area with the function Clear Pos. Adjust.

4.12.5

Setting the Time Zone If a zone time differing from the UTC is to be processed and displayed in the CHARTPILOT and on all other SAM Electronics equipment items of the system, the time zone must be entered on one of the equipment items: Under Time Zone in the Sensor Settings > Date/Time menu, input the time difference of the desired time zone relative to UTC. Leave the menu by pressing the OK button. The time zone that is entered takes effect over the entire system.

152

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

Operating Instructions

4.13 Chartpilot with Local Sensors

The date and time delivered by the position sensor connected to the Sensor Master (see ) are used throughout the entire system. (Input not possible)

Input field for the time zone (time difference relative to UTC)

Puts the settings of this menu into effect; the menu is exited. Exits the menu without the new settings being put into effect.

Fig. 4-40

4.13

The Sensor Settings > Date/Time menu

Chartpilot with Local Sensors In the integrated system - CHARTPILOT with SAM radars (1x00 series) - CHARTPILOT within a NACOS (with SAM radars and TRACKPILOT) the CHARTPILOT receives its navigation sensor data regularly from the connected radar indicators. In case of a failure of the complete radar system or if the communication or connection to the radar system is lost, the CHARTPILOT can be used as a backup for emergency operation if local navigation sensors are connected to its optional serial interface. The following chapter describes the additional functionality available on a CHARTPILOT with local backup navigation sensors.

4.13.1

Local Sensors Menu Operation of local sensors installed at the CHARTPILOT are supported by an aditional Sensor Settings menu. In the Local Sensors window, the displayed sensor data are totally independent from the system sensors. For compatibility with the CCRS (see 1.2) the position, speed and course are corrected for the conning position, which is the CCRP defined on service level. 1)

1)

Also the sensor offsets for the local sensors are to be set on service level.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

153

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

4.13 Chartpilot with Local Sensors

Reading of position, speed and course delivered by the radar systemand used system-wide. as described in chapter 4.12 The selection of Local Sensors is only available in case of failure status of the data distribution from the radar system (alarm NAVIGATION DATA NOT AVAILABLE is present)

Heading value received from the connected heading sensor. Position data currently being tranferred by the connected position sensor Course and speed currently received from the connected position sensors, or course and speed calculated by the CHARTPILOT using the heading and the data received from the connected Selection of the position sensor. (see page) Selection of the second position sensor. (see page) Selection of the speed sensor; manual input of drift and speed values. (see page)

Fig. 4-41

4.13.2

Operation of these menus and correponding data display is also possible if System Sensors are selected.

The Local Sensors menu

Switchover between System Sensors and Local Sensors After the alarm NAVIGATION SENSOR DATA NOT AVAILABLE has been announced, the local sensors can be activated by clicking on the Local Sensors button in the menu Sensor Settings. From now on, this CHARTPILOT is working with its own navigation sensors which can be operated via the corresponding sub-menus. Other parts of the system or other CHARTPILOTs are not affected. After the System Sensors are available again (that means the alarm NAVIGATION SENSOR DATA NOT AVAILABLE has been cancelled), the operator must click on the System Sensors button in order to reactivate the sensor data received from the radar system again. Restrictions: During use of the Local Sensors, the setting of date and time is not possible, but the CHARTPILOT´s internal UTC time is synchronized with the UTC of the connected GPS sensor. Additionally, the previously set zone time (ZT) will be retained. It cannot be changed until the system data are available again. The Position Adjust function (see chapter 4.12.4) cannot be executed while the Local Sensors are activated. After switchover a previously set position offset is cleared by the system, but after reactivation of the system sensors it will be available again and be reused automatically with its current setting. Useful information: Depending on the installation and configuration on service-level - a heading sensor (gyro compass or equivalent) - a position sensor

154

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance 4.13 Chartpilot with Local Sensors

- a speed sensor or a second position sensor can be available for local use in the CHARTPILOT system. The data received from the sensors connected directly to the CHARTPILOT can be displayed at any time in the Local Snesors menu, even if they are not activated for use.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

155

4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance 4.13 Chartpilot with Local Sensors

156

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e32.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

5

5 Voyage Planning 5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

Voyage Planning The part of the (long-term and medium-term) voyage planning that can be performed on the CHARTPILOT consists of generating and, if necessary, modifying pre-planned tracks for the planned route - see Section 5.1, procuring and updating the electronic chart for the voyage area - see Section 7.3 to 7.8, the editing (if necessary) of the Manual Update data of the ENC as per Section 5.3 (if ENC files are used which do not contain the latest safety-relevant changes), if necessary, generating User Chart Objects - see Section 5.2, generating an Own Chart in special cases (if no chart is available for the region to be navigated, but navigation is to take place with an electronic chart) – see Section 5.4.

5.1

Generation of Pre-planned Tracks The work on the pre-planned tracks can be performed on any radar indicator or on the CHARTPILOT, whichever is selected. These items of equipment exchange the entered data with one another, so that (for example) a track that is generated on the CHARTPILOT can also be altered on any RADARPILOT.

5.1.1

General Information about Pre-planned Tracks Pre-planned tracks 1) are planned voyage routes which are generated on the basis of waypoint sequences and are stored in the form of files. They can then be used by the components of the system as follows: -

Tracks can be displayed in the chart area on the CHARTPILOT in Chart mode.

-

On any radar indicator, one or more tracks can be selected and added as a background to the radar picture. The present part of the track is then displayed automatically on the radar picture.

-

On the radar indicator or on the CHARTPILOT, one of the displayed tracks can be defined as the System Track, which is effective for the entire system. With the aid of the TRACKPILOT, the ship can be piloted automatically along this track. But even during manual control, the diverse displays at the system components that refer to the System Track can be most helpful.

-

If the planned time of arrival is input at the beginning of the voyage, the CHARTPILOT continuously performs a speed calculation while the ship is sailing along the track; this calculation is based on the speed settings contained in the track file, and its purpose is to achieve the required time of arrival. The result, the Arrival Speed, is displayed in the Track/Schedule display, and can be used by the operator as the current speed setting.

-

If the system is equipped with a SPEEDPILOT, the speed can be controlled automatically while the ship is sailing along the System Track, in such a way that the Arrival Speed is achieved and the time schedule planning is thus fulfilled. Alternatively, predefined speeds that are likewise contained in the track file (Profile Speeds) can be set for the individual track segments by means of the SPEEDPILOT.

Geographical Position and Shape of a Track A track is divided by waypoints into track segments. The waypoints are the main construction elements of the track. Their positions are defined by geographical coordinates.

1)

In this document, pre-planned tracks are also simply called tracks if there is no danger of confusion.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

157

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning

Operating Instructions

5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

If it is planned that the ship will change course at a waypoint, the radius of the turn must be specified. In this case, at the beginning of the manoeuvre computed on the basis of the specified radius, the track leaves the track line 1) at the wheel over point (WOP), and after completion of the manoeuvre it goes over to the next track line. The geographical coordinates of the waypoints, together with the radii assigned to the waypoints, thus define the geographical position and shape of the track. Tracks each have a first waypoint and a last one. During editing, all waypoints are automatically numbered consecutively, beginning at 1 for the first waypoint. All track functions refer to this sequence. Thus, a track can only be sailed in the direction for which it has been generated. However, the direction of a track that has already been generated can be reversed by means of a simple operating step during editing and then processed further - see page 177.

Actual waypoint (To WP)

WOP

s Radiu

n ctio e r i gd ilin Sa

Track

Last waypoint (From WP)

Fig. 5-1

Shape of the track in the case of course changes

There is practically no limit to the number of waypoints that a track can consist of, or to the length of a track. Thus, the entire route between two ports can be defined as one track. It can often be appropriate to divide the entire distance up into individual tracks. For example, if a port is approached from various directions along various routes, it might be appropriate to perform separation into the port-related segment that is identical for all routes and the part that is specific for the route concerned. In this way, the data relating to the port need to be input once only, and the maintenance of these data only has to take place in one track. When the voyage begins, a new track covering the entire distance can then be generated in a simple manner by taking over all waypoints of the individual tracks into this overall track by means of a special operating function - see page 172 and 177.

1)

Track line = a line joining two consecutive waypoints

158

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

5 Voyage Planning 5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

The Data of Which a Track Consists In addition to the administrative data, which refer to the entire track, a track can contain a series of data per track segment. These data are assigned in each case to one of the two waypoints which form the limits of the track section. They are therefore called waypoint data. Administrative Data (for details, see page 189) The -

following parameters refer to the entire track: Track Number Track Name Catalog to which the track is assigned Notes (your own notes about the track)

Waypoint Data (for details, see page 182) Parameters for general use of the track: Waypoint Number Waypoint Position Remark about the waypoint Parameter Point Attribute Waypoint Notes Administration ID Administration Owner Parameters that are also used for the automatic parameterisation of the TRACKPILOT (these data are also called Pilot Data): Radius Sailing mode Track control mode Rudder economy Course limit Track limit Parameters for time planning and for use of the SPEEDPILOT: Profile Speed Planned Speed Arrival attribute The following data are computed from the waypoint data by the program and can be displayed (for details, see page 173), Track (= direction of the track line) Distance Track Distance USEFUL INFORMATION Assignment of the Waypoint Data to the Track Segments Depending on their meaning, the waypoint data have different areas (relative to the waypoint) in which they act: The speeds and the waypoint notes are used during the approach to the waypoint for which they are entered. All other data are valid starting at the waypoint for which they are entered.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

159

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning 5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

5.1.2

Operating Instructions

Generation, Handling and Administration of the Tracks During the generation of the tracks, you can transfer the waypoint positions graphically, (in Graphic mode) from the electronic chart, and - if a digitizer is connected - from a (paper) chart. You can also edit the waypoint positions by alphanumeric input (in Text mode); all other data must be edited in this mode. In Text mode, the following functions too are possible: During the generation of a track, waypoints - including all waypoint data - can be taken over (copied) from tracks that already exist. By means of a special function, all waypoints of an existing track can be appended (copied) onto the track that is being generated. By means of another special function, the direction of the track can be reversed, i.e. the first waypoint becomes the last one, and so on. Waypoints used frequently can also be collected in a waypoint file (see page 192), from which the waypoint positions can be taken when necessary. This possibility is provided, for example, for using the CHARTPILOT on survey vessels. Once the track has been generated, it should definitely be checked with the special checking function. The track that is checked must be stored in the form of a separate file 1) on the hard disk of the CHARTPILOT and assigned to a catalog. During the storing process, you have to give the track a track number, by means of which the system - in conjunction with the catalog name - can clearly identify any track. So that you too can identify the track later, you should give the track an appropriate track name during the storing process. If a track is to be displayed or modified on the CHARTPILOT, you first have to load it. In this process, a track stored on the hard disk is copied into the main memory. For modifying a track, you have all of the input possibilities that are also available to you for the initial generation process. After the modification, the track must be stored. If this is done under the old track number, the old data set of the modified track is lost. If, during the storing process, you input a new track number, the modified track is stored additionally as a new track; the original track continues to exist in unchanged form. Although it is improbable, hard disk drives can get damaged or the data stored on them can be erased. So that, in such cases, the stored data are not irretrievably lost, it is absolutely essential to make a backup copy 2) at regular intervals, i.e. before such an event can occur (see page 321). After a hard disk fault or after the hard disk has been exchanged, the files can then be copied back 3) to the hard disk drive (see page 324). This mechanism can also be used to exchange files between the systems on different ships.

1) 2) 3)

In the following, no distinction is drawn between the track and the track file. on/from a Floppy or on/from a removable device (see also Chapter 3.7: "Using Removable Devices" on page 73) see footnote 2

160

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning

Operating Instructions

5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

Loads tracks into the main memory so that they can be displayed, modified or handled in some other way (see pages 165 and 176). Defining the System Track (see page 241; menu see Figure 6-1 on page 231). Deselects the System Track (see page 230). Opens the menu area for execution of voyage preparation (see page 235 and 240; menu see Figure 6-5 on page 237). With this function, any waypoint of the System Track can be defined as the next waypoint that is to be approached (see page 230 and 241; menu see Figure 6-2 on page 232). Deletes tracks from the main memory, e.g. to switch off the display of these tracks in the chart area (see page 61). Opens the menu area for the generating of tracks; makes it possible to create catalogs (see page 189; menu see Figure 5-4 on page 166). Deletes tracks on the hard disk, and deletes superfluous catalogs (see page 319). Opens the menu area for the generating of waypoint files (see page 192; see also Figure 5-16 on page 193). Fig. 5-2

The menu Tracks

Generation of Tracks A track is generated by inputting (editing) the waypoint positions and the other waypoint data and the administrative data. If the file is then stored, the track that has been generated is available at any time in the entire system. Methods of Data Input For data input, the following possibilities are available, depending on the equipment of the CHARTPILOT: Generation of Waypoints and Input of Waypoint Positions -

If an electronic chart of the area is available: by clicking the waypoint position with the aid of the cursor in the chart area of the CHARTPILOT screen, if the CHARTPILOT is equipped with a digitizer: by clicking the waypoint position with the aid of the digitizer pointer on the (paper) chart aligned on the digitizer, if neither an electronic chart nor a digitizer is available: by alphanumeric editing, including the possibility of taking over waypoints from a waypoint file (see page 192).

After appropriate preparation (see page 164), all three methods can be used interchangeably: -

To switch over between editing with the electronic chart and alphanumerical editing, all that has to be done is to press the Text Mode button in the Tracks > Edit menu, which is already in the open state anyway.

-

Both during editing with the electronic chart and during alphanumeric editing, the digitizer is in the active state without any need for further switching.

The administrative data and all other waypoint data must be edited alphanumerically. Alphanumeric editing takes place in Text mode, for which a large menu covering the entire chart area is available. An overview of the display in Text mode is shown in Figure 5-3. The individual areas are explained in detail in the following sections.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

161

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning

Operating Instructions

5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

Intended for other system configurations

Administrative data of the track See page 189.

At this instant, the last modification of the track was stored.

Coordinate system which is used as the basis for the input of the waypoint positions - see page 173 1)

The Tracks > Edit menu; see page 166

Input area: Here, the waypoint data of the waypoint marked in the waypoint list are displayed and edited see Section 5.1.6 (page 173) and Section 5.1.8 (page 180). Waypoint list: - Shows an overview of all edited waypoints together with a selection (defined by you) of waypoint data. - Permits alphanumeric generation of waypoints (see page 173).

Fig. 5-3

1) If parameterisation of the coordinate system for special tasks has not been selected at service level, the Geographic button serves only for the display of the (permanently) selected projection (see page 96).

The CHARTPILOT display for the editing of tracks in Text Mode

The Work Steps for Generating a Track The generating of tracks is mainly divided into the following steps (the same applies to the modifying of existing tracks): Preparing the generation of the track - see page 164, Setting the digitizer up, if it is to be used - see page 166, Generation of waypoints - see page 171. 173 and 178, Editing of waypoint data - see page 180, Checking the track - see page 185, Completing the generation of the track - see page 189.

162

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

5 Voyage Planning 5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

To minimise the effort needed for the editing and later modification of the waypoint data, the work of generating the waypoints and editing the waypoint data should be done in a particular order. This order is based on the following facts: -

The TRACKPILOT, the SPEEDPILOT and the time schedule planning process use the values contained in the track and the values that are input manually while the ship is sailing along the track, until a new value is set for these parameters. To parameterise the TRACKPILOT and SPEEDPILOT with the aid of the track, it is thus only necessary to make one entry . for the waypoint at which the automatic setting process is to take place for the first time, . for each waypoint at which the value is to change automatically, . for each waypoint at which a value that may have been input manually while sailing along the track is to be reset. Any other entry has the disadvantages . that a value entered manually during sailing of the track is reset unintentionally, . and that, in the case of a modification of the track file, an unnecessarily large quantity of data have to be modified.

-

Every waypoint that is generated contains at least the following waypoint data: . Waypoint number (assigned automatically by the program) . Waypoint position, . Sailing mode, . Track control mode.

-

After one waypoint has been generated, generation of the other waypoints is done mainly by copying and modifying existing waypoints. When waypoints are copied, such copying always includes all of the waypoint data entered (in the case of generation by means of the electronic chart and digitizer: using the cursor position as the waypoint position).

If you comply with the sequence of waypoint generation and waypoint data editing described in the following, you will obtain with minimum effort a track which contains only the necessary waypoint data and no irritating additional waypoint data: Generate the first waypoint of the track. If the waypoint was generated in Text mode, edit the waypoint position and the remark about the waypoint. If you do not want to use the values for the sailing mode, (Rhumb Line) and track control mode, (To Track) that are entered automatically by the program, correct the value concerned. Generate all other waypoints in the order in which they are to appear in the track. If the waypoints have been generated in Text mode, you should at the same time also edit the waypoint position and the remarks about the waypoint. Edit all other necessary waypoint data. It might be appropriate to do this in several separate runs for separate subjects, e.g. entering all radii in one run, all speeds in another run, and so on. USEFUL INFORMATION Use of Various Coordinate Systems for Position Input The position data that are input on the CHARTPILOT do not have to refer to any particular coordinate system. It is possible to choose between various coordinate systems. Generally, the CHARTPILOT program (and also the connected radar/NACOS components) work internally with the chart datum WGS 84. If position data referring to a different chart datum are input, a conversion to WGS 84 automatically takes place internally during input. A necessary prerequisite for correct conversion is that the chart datum used is known to the program! If a different chart datum for the display is selected on the CHARTPILOT, all positions are converted to the desired chart datum specifically for this display. If the position input is performed graphically, the program must also know the projection of the chart used.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

163

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning 5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

Operating Instructions

From the above remarks, the following statements apply to the various methods of position input: -

Graphic editing in the electronic chart: In the case of all vector charts and most raster charts, the coordinate system is known to the program and is taken into account by the program. For the position input, no further setting activity is necessary in this respect. WARNING: Raster charts whose coordinate system is not known 1) are permitted to be used as the basis for editing only in those geographical areas in which high positional accuracy is not important.

-

Alphanumerical editing (in Text mode): The program cannot know which chart datum is relevant for the position data that are to be input; therefore: WARNING: In Text mode, you must ensure that, for the editing, the chart datum that is set is the one to which the source of the position data refers (see page 173). Furthermore, by input of the projection used, you can adapt the input and display areas to suit the projection-specific position parameters.

-

Graphic editing with the digitizer: The chart datum and projection of the chart used are important, and must be input when the chart is being set up on the digitizer: WARNING: In the process of setting up on the digitizer, the projection and chart datum that are suitable for the chart used must definitely be entered.

5.1.3

Preparing the Generation or Modification of the Track A track can be generated in various ways: By generation as a new track By copying and modifying an existing track. A track can also be modified at any time (if it has not been defined as the System Track). Generating a New Track 1.

Check whether the electronic chart being used is officially approved (see also page 79). If an officially approved electronic chart of the area is available with a suitable scale, you should use this chart to generate the waypoints; in the case of non-approved electronic charts, please check the nautical safety of your planning by comparing with official (paper) charts. WARNING: Raster charts whose coordinate system is not known 2) are permitted to be used as the basis for editing only in those geographical areas in which high positional accuracy is not important.

1) 2)

These are indicated in the Chart Status field of the navigation data line by the entry Datum mism. on a yellow background. These are indicated in the Chart Status field of the navigation data line by the entry Datum mism. on a yellow background.

164

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning

Operating Instructions

5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

If a vector chart is used, switch on the display of this (with the Chart Visible button in the Chart menu). Switch the chart area to Planning display mode and select the chart excerpt so that at least the position of the first waypoint is situated in the chart area and so that the scale permits sufficiently precise graphic input. You can also make this setting by marking the position of the first waypoint in the (zoomed) world chart by means of the Chart Maintenance subroutine and by switching back directly into the Navigation program - see page 247. 2.

If the system is equipped with a digitizer and you want to perform editing graphically on the basis of a (paper) chart, you must first set up the digitizer in accordance with Section 5.1.4.

3.

If you want to use waypoints from a waypoint file (see page 192), you must load that file: under Waypoint Files in the Tracks > Waypoint File > Load menu, mark the waypoint file, and leave the menu by pressing the OK button.

4.

Call up the Tracks > Edit menu. If there are one or more tracks loaded, the number and name of one of the loaded tracks are displayed there under Selected Track. In this case, you must create a new (still empty) track by pressing the New button. If there is no track loaded, the new track is already created by calling up the Tracks > Edit menu; there is then no need to press the New button. The program automatically gives the number 0001 and the title untitled xxx to the new track. The correct number and title are input upon completion of the track generation process at the latest (see page 189).

You can now begin to generate the waypoints - see page 171, 173 and 178. Track Generation by Copying and Modifying an Existing Track 1.

If the modification is to be performed using graphic aids, this should be prepared in the same way as for generation of a new track as described in steps 1 to 3 above.

2.

Loading an existing track: Under Catalogs in the Tracks > Load menu, click the catalog to which the track is assigned; under Tracks, click the track that is to be loaded; then leave the menu by pressing the OK button. Under Loaded Tracks in the Tracks > Edit > Select menu, all loaded tracks are displayed.

3.

Under Loaded Tracks in the Tracks > Edit > Select menu, click the track that is to be used as the basis, and leave the menu by pressing the OK button. The track selected in this way is stated under Selected Track in the Tracks > Edit menu which then appears. You can now begin to generate the waypoints - see page 171, 173 and 178.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

165

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning

Operating Instructions

5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

Modifying an Existing Track The preparations for this are the same as for track generation by copying and modifying an existing track.

Number and name of the track that is being edited. Selection of the track that is to be modified or that is to be used as the basis for the new track. Press if a brand new track is to be generated. This reverses the direction of the selected track - see page 177. Takes over all waypoints of an existing track and copies them behind the last waypoint see pages 172 and 177. Checks the selected track - see page 185. Stores the selected track - see page 189; menu see Figure 5-14 on page 190. Operating elements for graphic editing on the basis of the electronic chart - see page 171

Switches over between Text mode and Graphic mode.

Fig. 5-4

5.1.4

The Tracks > Edit menu

Setting Up the Digitizer Before you can edit waypoints with the digitizer, it has to be set up, i.e.: The chart must be fixed to the digitizer. The coordinate system and the scale of the chart used must be input. The position of the chart on the digitizer must be calibrated. Criteria for the selection of the suitable chart: Largest possible scale in order to achieve maximum accuracy and display of all nautical obstacles, wrecks etc., the reference latitude and chart datum must be known, the chart must be up to date. Fixing the Chart on the Digitizer 1.

Lay the chart on the digitizer and fix it so that it cannot be moved; it does not have to be aligned at a particular angle. All that has to be done is to ensure that the part of the chart from which position data are to be digitized is lying within the working area of the digitizer. On the A0 and A1 boards, the working area is situated within the area formed by four cornermarkers; on the A2 board, it is situated under the transparent sheeting.

166

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning

Operating Instructions

5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

These Operating Instructions refer to the DrawingBoard (size A2 to A0) from the CalComp company. Reading of the operating instructions written by the digitizer manufacturer is unnecessary, since the required operating steps are explained in the following. However, if a different type of digitizer is used, it might be necessary to additionally utilise the digitizer manufacturer's operating instructions that are supplied along with the digitizer. 2.

Put the digitizer pointer down on the working area. Switch the digitizer on now if this has not already been done; the POWER lamp must be alight. If the digitizer is in the switched-on state and the digitizer pointer is situated outside the working area, the POWER lamp flashes and an acoustic signal sounds.

Setting the Coordinate System and Calibrating the Chart You are guided through this work step-by-step by the program after you have pressed the Setup Assistant button in the Peripheral Devices > Digitizer menu. Therefore, a few remarks about the procedure will be sufficient here: Paper Chart No. Under Paper Chart No. in the first dialog box which opens up after pressing of the Setup Assistant button, input the number of the chart that is lying on the digitizer. You can allocate this number yourself (max. 18 places; all editable characters are permitted). It is used only for simplification of repeated calibration of the charts. The program stores the coordinate system that was input during first-time calibration of the chart, and the reference coordinates that were entered, and assigns them to the Paper Chart No. If you want to use the same chart again later, you do not need to input these data again. Once a Paper Chart No. has been input, it cannot be erased after successful completion of the calibration process. However, if you want to use the number for a different chart, you can alter in any desired manner the data that are stored for this number. If you want to know whether a Paper Chart No. has already been allocated, input the number and press the Next>> button. If a chart projection is marked (by inverted display) in the list which then appears, the Paper Chart No. has already been allocated. Coordinate System In the Chart Projections and Chart Datums lists, mark the coordinate system in which the chart exists. For important notes about this, see U S E F U L I N F O R M A T I O N on page 169. Calibration Procedure The chart is calibrated by inputting the coordinate values for each of four reference points one after another, and by clicking the reference point on the chart in each case. Clicking on the (paper) chart: Position the digitizer pointer exactly on the point that is to be clicked, and briefly press the 0 key of the digitizer pointer. The four reference points must fulfil the following conditions: Two reference points situated side by side must be at the same latitude, and two reference points situated one above the other must be at the same longitude, i.e. in the Mercator projection they must form a rectangle. As the reference points, coordinate crosses are the most suitable. They must be as far apart as possible. The larger the rectangle formed by the reference points, the smaller the effect of the digitization error of the reference point coordinates on the subsequent digitization. The sequence of input is important: you must always begin with the south-west reference point and continue counterclockwise. If the assignment of the coordinate values does not correspond to this instruction, a request to repeat the calibration appears before completion of the calibration process.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

167

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning

Operating Instructions

5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

If, during input, errors have been made or the reference points have not been input with the necessary accuracy, an error message appears, requesting that the calibration be repeated (for possible source of error, see USEFUL INFORMATION, P r e c i s i o n o f D i g i t i z a t i o n ). The geographical coordinates of the reference points that are read on the chart must be input here. Number of the reference point

Coordinates of the reference points

Resets the coordinate values to the initial values. Calibration must be begun again at reference point 1.

Opens the dialog box that was shown previously, and makes it possible to correct the values that were input there. Fig. 5-5

Transition to the next work step

Exits from the menu without activation of the inputs.

Dialog Box for Calibration of the Chart

Setting the Display of the Digitizer Position on the Radar PPI and in the Chart Area In the last dialog box, by switching on the Digitizer Cursor function you can specify that the position of the digitizer pointer will be displayed on the radar PPI and in the Chart Area by the symbol . With the Numerical Position function, you can switch the presentation of the Digitizer Cursor display on and off. Both functions are also available in the Peripheral Devices > Digitizer menu. The digitizer pointer does not act on the display processes and editing processes until the digitizer has been set up. Setting the Desired Chart Excerpt on the Radar PPI and in the Chart Area When you have successfully set up the chart, you can put the digitizer pointer down on the chart at the position that is to become the centre of the screen display. When you then press the Set Planning Mode button in the Peripheral Devices > Digitizer menu, the display mode is switched over to the Planning display mode (i.e. the chart excerpt is independent of the ship's own position) and the screen excerpt is moved accordingly.

168

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning

Operating Instructions

5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

Calibrating the chart. -

Switches the Planning display mode on. Sets the display centre to the current position of the digitizer pointer.

Clears the calibration data. In the chart area, this switches on and off the presentation of the chart position of the digitizer pointer. Switches on and off the presentation of the Digitizer Cursor display.

Paper Chart No. of the calibrated chart and its coordinate system

Fig. 5-6

The Peripheral Devices > Digitizer menu

USEFUL INFORMATION Preparing the Charts During first-time calibration of a chart, it is desirable to label this chart with the Paper Chart No. and to mark the reference points on it with a transparent text-marker. In this way, the calibration of the chart is reduced to the input of the Paper Chart No. and to clicking of the four marked reference points. If the whole chart does not fit on the digitizer, separate Paper Chart Nos and reference points can be defined and marked for the individual areas. Grids of the Usable Projections In the vast majority of charts, the Mercator projection is used. With the other projections, not all grid lines are parallel to one another. On charts having a large scale, this lack of parallelism is not obvious. Because input of the correct projection is very important for precise digitization, the projection type should be read off the labelling of the chart.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

169

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning

Operating Instructions

5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

Mercator

Gauss Conformal Cylindrical Polyconic (This is the transversal Mercator projection.)

Fig. 5-7

Cassini Cylindrical Equal Spaced

Gauss-Krueger UTM

Grids of the digitizable projections

The NGO chart datum The NGO chart datum exists with three different reference longitudes. In some cases, these are not marked on the charts. Allocation of the numbers of NGO Ref. 10°43'30.0E: NGO Ref. 10°43'37.5E: NGO Ref. 10°43'22.5E:

the Norwegian charts to the NGO chart datums: Charts 8, 9, 55, 58, 62 to 65, 73 to 78 Charts 6 and 7 All other charts

Precision of Digitization The digitizer has a digitization precision of ± 0.25 mm. During calibration, the program performs a check in which the digitizer coordinates of the four reference points are compared with the geographical coordinates entered, taking account of the entered scale, projection and chart datum (including the reference latitude if applicable). In this check, the program permits a standard deviation of 1 mm 1). The Menu Line of the Digitizer The menu line (coloured key-symbols) is not needed for use of the digitizer with the CHARTPILOT, but it is capable of being operated. IMPORTANT: The menu line of the digitizer must not be operated. If a menu function is triggered by accident (with the digitizer pointer), this can cause faults in the digitization. Such faults can be corrected by switching the digitizer off, switching it on again after a few seconds at the earliest, and setting up the digitizer again. Ending the Digitizer Work If you no longer need the digitizer, you can switch it off at the mains. Several seconds after switch-off, the set-up is cleared. Alternatively, you can leave the digitizer switched on at the mains and you can clear the set-up by means of the Clear Setup function in the Peripheral Devices > Digitizer menu.

1)

Default value, can be set at service level.

170

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

5.1.5

5 Voyage Planning 5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

Generating Waypoints by Means of the Electronic Chart In the Tracks > Edit menu, the Text mode function must not be switched on; if necessary, press the Text Mode button in order to switch into Graphic mode. Generating, inserting, moving and deleting are done with the functions mentioned under Graphic mode. The function desired is switched on by clicking, as usual. If the cursor is then moved into the chart area, this function remains switched on until the cursor is moved out of the chart area or until the MORE key is pressed. Generation of the First and Subsequent Waypoints Switch on Set/Continue and click the desired waypoint position; then click the next waypoint position, and so on. Each click in the chart area generates a waypoint at the end of the track, and enters the cursor position as the waypoint position. The resulting track is displayed in the chart area. If necessary, move the displayed chart area after pressing Set Center. It should only be moved by an amount which still allows the last waypoint to be displayed in the chart area. After that, you can generate further waypoints behind the last waypoint (see below). If the waypoint to be generated is so far away that, with the selected scale, it cannot be displayed together with the last waypoint, the following procedure can be used: With Range, increase the range setting sufficiently, behind the last waypoint, generate the waypoint (even if the position is initially not precise) - see below. after pressing Set Center, move the displayed chart area to the position of the new waypoint. with Range, reduce the range setting sufficiently and move the new waypoint to the exact position (see below). After that, you can generate further waypoints behind the new waypoint (see below). If you wish to use the sailing mode Great Circle or the track control mode To Waypoint, it is advisable to edit these data immediately after generation of the first relevant waypoint. Generation of Further Waypoints Behind the Last Waypoint or in Front of the First One Switch on Set/Continue and click the last waypoint or the first one. Click the position of the next waypoint that is to be generated, then click the next waypoint position, and so on. The clicking of the waypoint can be cancelled by pressing the MORE key. Inserting One or More Consecutive Waypoints Switch on Set/Continue and click the track line between the waypoints between which the waypoint is to be inserted. Click the position of the waypoint that is to be inserted. Behind this waypoint, further waypoints can be inserted by clicking. The clicking of the track line can be cancelled by pressing the MORE key. Shifting a Waypoint Switch on Modify, click the waypoint that is to be moved, and then click the desired position. The clicking of the waypoint can be cancelled by pressing the MORE key. Deleting Waypoints Switch on Delete and, one after another, click the waypoints that are to be deleted.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

171

5 Voyage Planning 5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

Inserting Parameter Points Switch on Set Parameter Point, and on the track line click the point at which the waypoint data are to change. Parameter Points are waypoints at which no course change takes place but at which particular parameters can be set to different values (see page 183). Taking Over Waypoints from a Waypoint File In the input area of the Text Mode menu, switch on Compose. You can now generate and insert waypoints at the positions of the waypoints that are stored in a waypoint file, as described above for the Set/Continue function. The only difference compared to the Set/Continue function is that, after selection of the Compose function, only the position of a waypoint stored in a waypoint file is accepted as a waypoint position. The waypoints contained in the loaded waypoint file are indicated in the chart area by small orange circles. Taking Over All Waypoints from an Existing Track 1.

If the track whose waypoints are to be copied has not yet been loaded: Under Catalogs in the Tracks > Load menu, click the catalog to which the track is assigned, under Tracks click the desired track, load the track by pressing the OK button, and call up the Tracks > Edit menu.

2.

Under Catalogs in the Tracks > Edit > Merge menu, mark the catalog to which the track whose waypoints are to be copied is assigned. Then, under Tracks, mark the desired track.

3.

Leave the Merge menu by pressing the OK button. As a result, all waypoints (including all waypoint data) of the track marked in the Merge menu are copied behind the last waypoint.

USEFUL INFORMATION If a Waypoint Cannot be Modified In the chart area, although several tracks can be displayed simultaneously, only the selected track can be modified. If you cannot modify a displayed waypoint, the track to which the waypoint belongs is not the selected track. It is advisable to switch off the display of all unneeded tracks (in the Tracks > Clear menu). Conversion of the Coordinate System of Raster Charts In most files of the raster charts, the projection and chart datum are entered. In the case of these charts, the program automatically performs a conversion to the WGS84 chart datum used in the NACOS. The content of these charts is then displayed in the WGS84 chart datum; if you set the cursor to the symbol of a buoy, for example, the Cursor display shows the position which the buoy has in the WGS84 chart datum. Therefore, from the point of view of positional accuracy, this chart is suitable as the basis for editing. If the datum of the chart used here is not WGS84, the grid depicted is not displayed correctly; if you set the cursor to a intersection in the coordinate system, the Cursor display shows a position differing from the grid position. In the case of some raster charts, there is no chart datum entered in the files. These charts are indicated in the Chart Status field of the navigation data line on the CHARTPILOT by the entry Datum mism. (= Datum mismatch) on a yellow background, and cannot be converted to WGS84. With these charts, the grid is displayed correctly, but the chart contents do not have the WGS84 positions. These charts are therefore unsuitable as a basis for the generation of tracks except in areas in which high positional accuracy is not important (e.g. on the open sea).

172

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning

Operating Instructions

5.1.6

5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

Generating Waypoints Alphanumerically in Text Mode In the Tracks > Edit menu, switch on the Text mode function. The Text Mode menu shown on page 162 appears.

5.1.6.1 1.

Preparation Under Coordinate System (see Figure 5-3 on page 162), select the chart datum to which the position data to be input refer. WARNING: When the Text mode is exited, the coordinate system that is active for the Text mode is automatically set to the coordinate system that was selected for the display of the electronic chart in the Navigation > Presentation > Coordinate System menu. Therefore, whenever you call up the Text Mode menu again, you must repeat step 1 (and 2). You can avoid the repeated input of the coordinate system that is active for the Text mode as follows: For the duration of the track generation process, for the display of the electronic chart you should set the coordinate system to which the position data to be input refer.

2.

Under Coordinate System, select the projection in which the position data to be input exist or in which the display of the position data in the Text Mode menu is to take place.

3.

If the waypoint parameters which you need for your work are displayed in the waypoint list, you can now begin to generate the waypoints 1). Otherwise, you should first configure the waypoint list in a suitable form.

Configuring the Waypoint List In the waypoint list, all waypoints generated are listed. In this list, not only the waypoint number but also all waypoint data can be displayed, but not all at the same time. It is therefore necessary to define which data are to be displayed: 1.

After pressing of Columns, the menu shown in Figure 5-9 appears: There, under Configured, the parameters whose data are displayed in the waypoint list are listed in the order in which they are displayed; under Available, all other waypoint parameters whose data can be displayed in the waypoint list are listed. In the following, the designations used in the Columns menu are shown on the left, and those used in the headline of the waypoint list are shown beside them.

1)

If parameterisation of the coordinate system for special tasks has been selected at service level, you must choose beforehand under Coordinate System the projection in which the position data to be input are available or in which the display of the position data is to take place in the Text Mode menu.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

173

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning

Operating Instructions

5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

Waypoint data whose parameters were selected in the Tracks > Edit > Text Mode > Columns menu for display in the waypoint list

Starts the printing of the track list (listing of waypoint data for all waypoints - see page 191; menu see Figure 5-15 on page 191).

Calls up the Tracks > Edit > Text Mode > Columns menu; (see Figure 5-9 on page 175), in which it is possible to specify the parameters whose data are to be displayed in the waypoint list and printed out in the track list.

Stores the marked waypoints as waypoints that are to be copied.

Deletes the marked waypoints and stores them in the copying memory.

Fig. 5-8

Control Mode Course Limit Date Distance Economy Owner ID Planned Speed Position 1)

2.

1)

Before the waypoint marked last, this inserts the last waypoints that were either deleted or marked with Copy.

The waypoint list in the Text Mode menu.

Profile Speed Radius Remark ROT (PlSp) Sail Mode Track Track Distance

CM CrsL Date Dist Ec Owner ID PlSp Latitude Longitude PrSp Rad Remark ROT Pl SM Track TrkDst

Track Limit Type

TrkL Type

Track control mode Course limit Date on which one of the items of waypoint data was modified last Distance from the last waypoint Rudder economy Administration Owner and Administration ID Planned Speed Waypoint position Profile Speed Radius Remark about the waypoint The maximum ROT that occurs at the Planned Speed Sailing mode Direction of the track segment starting at the last waypoint Distance from the first waypoint (sum of the distances between the waypoints) Track limit Arrival attribute and parameter point attribute

Under Available, mark the parameters that are to be displayed, and by pressing Add>> enter them under Configured. If there is no parameter marked under Configured, the entry takes place at the last position; thus, the parameter concerned is then displayed on the left in the waypoint list. If there are one or more parameters marked under Configured, the entry takes place before these markers.

If parameterisation of the coordinate system for special tasks has been selected at service level, selection of Position causes a display of the waypoint position in the coordinates corresponding to the projection that was input under Coordinate System in the Text Mode menu. In the Columns menu, the following are then available in addition: Position GEO = waypoint position stated in geographical coordinates Position GK = waypoint position stated in Gauss-Krueger coordinates Position UTM = waypoint position stated in UTM coordinates

174

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning

Operating Instructions

5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

3.

Under Configured, mark the parameters that are not to be displayed, and by pressing Text Mode > Columns menu

Generation of Waypoints

In the waypoint list, all waypoints generated are listed line-by-line. As in all lists, the lines (i.e. in this case, the waypoints) can be marked here too. Waypoints are generated, deleted and copied by performing marking in the waypoint list and by then pressing the appropriate function button. Editing, i.e. modifying the waypoint data, is done not in the waypoint list but in the input area situated below it. If there is a line marked in the waypoint list, you can call up a small menu by pressing the MORE key. If you then click the menu item Show in Chart, the electronic chart appears with the marked point as the centre. (Return with Text Mode) For details of editing of the waypoint data, see page 180. Generating the First Waypoint in a New Track There is a blank line marked in the waypoint list. Within the Waypoint-xxxx frame, the number 0001 is displayed, i.e.: 1.

Input the waypoint position.

2.

We recommend inputting a remark about the waypoint, e.g. the name of the waypoint. This remark is intended to help you to identify the waypoint during the subsequent processing. It then not only appears in this Text Mode menu but for voyage preparation it can also be displayed and printed in the time planning lists.

3.

If you want to use the sailing mode Great Circle, you should input this value now.

4.

If you want to use the track control mode To Waypoint, you should input this value now.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

175

5 Voyage Planning 5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

5.

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

By pressing of the Enter button (see Figure 5-3 on page 162), the first waypoint is now generated with the data that were input. It appears in the waypoint list with the waypoint number 0001. (Waypoint numbers are allocated automatically by the program.)

Generating Another Waypoint behind the Last One 1.

In the waypoint list, mark the line below the last waypoint. The data displayed in the input area for this new waypoint are a copy of the data of the waypoint that was previously marked last.

2.

Correct the waypoint position and the remark about the waypoint (see above).

3.

Press the Enter button. The new waypoint that is thus generated is displayed in the waypoint list. The next (blank) line is marked.

By successive repetition of processes 2 and 3, all waypoints of the track can now be generated. Inserting a New Waypoint before a Waypoint 1.

In the waypoint list, mark the waypoint before which the additional waypoint is to be inserted. The data of the waypoint marked are displayed in the input area.

2.

Correct the waypoint position and the remark about the waypoint (see above).

3.

Press the Insert button (see Figure 5-3 on page 162). The new waypoint that is thus generated is displayed in the waypoint list. All waypoints situated behind it are automatically renumbered 1).

Deletion of Waypoints In the waypoint list, mark waypoints that are to be deleted, and press the Delete button. The remaining waypoints are automatically renumbered. Inserting Deleted Waypoints In the waypoint list, mark the waypoint before which the deleted waypoints are to be inserted, and press the Paste button. The waypoints that were deleted last with the aid of the Delete button or were copied with the aid of the Copy button are inserted. Copying of Waypoints 1.

In the waypoint list, mark the waypoints that are to be copied, and press the Copy button.

2.

In the waypoint list, mark the waypoint before which the waypoints to be copied are to be inserted, and press the Paste button. The waypoints to be copied are then inserted.

Taking Over Waypoints from an Existing Track

1)

1.

Under Track in the input field Name (see Figure 5-3 on page 162), note the name of the track which you are currently processing.

2.

If the track from which the waypoints are to be copied is not yet loaded: Under Catalogs in the Tracks > Load menu, click the catalog to which the track is allocated, under Tracks click the desired track, load the track by pressing the OK button, and call up the Tracks > Edit menu.

3.

Press Select; under Loaded Tracks click the track from which the waypoints are to be copied; and leave the menu by pressing the OK button. (If you have just performed step 2, you now have to press Text Mode again.) In the waypoint list, mark the waypoints that are to be copied, and press the Copy button.

When you press the Insert button, it gets the default frame. After that, the Enter key acts like the Insert button. If you want to insert further waypoints at the same place, you can then take the Enter key instead of the Insert button.

176

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning

Operating Instructions

5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

4.

Press Select; under Loaded Tracks click the track into which the waypoints are to be copied (you noted its name in step 1; and leave the menu by pressing the OK button.

5.

In the waypoint list, mark the waypoint before which the waypoints to be copied are to be inserted, and press the Paste button. The waypoints to be copied are then inserted. When the Copy button (and also the Delete button) is pressed, the waypoints marked in the waypoint list are written into the waypoint copying memory; the old content of the waypoint copying memory is overwritten. With the Paste button, the content of the waypoint copying memory is always inserted at the place marked in the waypoint list. The last content of the waypoint copying memory is not deleted until the CHARTPILOT is switched off.

Taking Over All Waypoints from an Existing Track 1.

If the track whose waypoints are to be copied is not yet loaded: Under Catalogs in the Tracks > Load menu, click the catalog to which the track is allocated, under Tracks click the desired track, load the track by pressing the OK button, and call up the Tracks > Edit menu.

2.

Under Catalogs in the Tracks > Edit > Merge menu, mark the catalog to which the track whose waypoints are to be copied is allocated. Then, under Tracks, mark the desired track.

3.

Leave the Merge menu by pressing the OK button. As a result, all waypoints (including all waypoint data) of the track marked in the Merge menu are copied behind the last waypoint.

Taking Over Waypoints from a Waypoint File 1.

In the waypoint list, mark the waypoint before which the waypoints to be taken over are to be inserted.

2.

Press the Compose button (see Figure 5-3 on page 162). In the menu (see Figure 5-10) which then appears, the waypoints of the loaded waypoint-file are listed. (If the input fields Owner, From ID and To ID are set differently from the settings shown in Figure 5-10, it might be that not all waypoints are listed; see page 178.)

3.

In the list, mark the waypoints that are to be copied, and press the Copy to Track button. The waypoints that are to be copied are then inserted in the waypoint list of the track. In the case of the waypoints of the waypoint file, the waypoint parameter sailing mode is generally set to Rhumb Line, and cannot be set to Great Circle until after take-over into the track.

Reversing the Direction of the Entire Track In the Tracks > Edit menu, press the Reverse button. As a result, the first waypoint becomes the last waypoint, the second one becomes the second-last one, and so on, i.e. the track can now be sailed in the opposite direction. The assignment of the waypoint data to the waypoints is automatically interchanged so that the same values are applicable on the same track segments (see A s s i g n m e n t o f t h e W a y p o i n t D a t a t o t h e T r a c k S e g m e n t s on page 159): -

Profile Speed, Planned Speed and Waypoint Notes are entered at the next waypoint 1).

-

Sailing mode, track control mode, Rudder economy, course limit and track limit are entered at the preceding waypoint.

All other waypoint data remain unchanged. WARNING: After reversal of the track, it is necessary to check carefully whether the existing data are correct for the new sailing direction as well.

1)

This refers to the situation after reversal.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

177

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning

Operating Instructions

5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

In traffic separation zones, for example, the waypoint positions must be changed, the waypoint notes might have to be assigned to a different waypoint, speeds during arrival and departure are different, and so on. USEFUL INFORMATION

Only the waypoints of the owner entered here are listed (after Apply Filter has been pressed). If the waypoints of all owners are to be listed, an asterisk (*) must be input.

Only those waypoints whose ID's lie in the number range defined here are listed (after Apply Filter has been pressed).

Press so that the entries made under Owner, From ID and To ID have an effect on the list.

After Apply Filter has been pressed, all waypoints of the loaded waypoint-file - which are allocated to the owner entered above under Owner and - which have an ID lying in the number range defined by the values entered under From ID and To ID are listed here.

Inserts the marked waypoints in the track before the waypoint marked last in the waypoint list of the Text Mode menu.

Fig. 5-10

Leaves the menu without transferring of the marked waypoints to the track.

The Tracks > Edit > Text Mode > Compose menu

Filtering Waypoints of a Waypoint File All waypoints contained in a waypoint file are allocated to an owner. Each waypoint is identified by means of a number called an ID, which was allocated per owner during generation of the waypoint file. In the Tracks > Edit > Text Mode > Compose menu, it is possible to input under Filter whether all waypoints contained in the waypoint file are to be mentioned in the list situated under it, or only those of a particular owner, and whether, for the selected owner, all waypoints or only those within a particular ID number range are to appear in the list. All waypoints contained in the waypoint file are listed if an asterisk * is entered under Owner, the number 0000 is entered under From ID, and the number 9999 is entered under To ID. To enable the settings in these three input fields to have an effect, the Apply Filter button must be pressed.

5.1.7

Generating Waypoints with the Digitizer With the digitizer, you can generate waypoints regardless of whether the Graphic mode or the Text mode is switched on in the Tracks > Edit menu. The digitizer cannot be used to move or delete waypoints.

178

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning

Operating Instructions

5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

It is not essential but nevertheless usually very useful to set the coordinate system for editing to the one used in the (paper) chart situated on the digitizer (see pages 96 and 173). If you are using the Graphic mode, you should switch on the digitizer cursor. In the chart area, the digitizer cursor indicates the current geographical position of the digitizer pointer on the (paper) chart calibrated there. Before you generate the first waypoint of the track by means of the digitizer, you should make certain that the chart has been calibrated correctly. To do this, position the digitizer pointer on a coordinate cross (if possible, not one that was used as a reference point) and compare these coordinates with the presentation on the Digitizer Cursor display. If the positions are not in agreement with one another, check the set coordinate systems (the coordinate system of the (paper) chart is marked in the Peripheral Devices > Digitizer > Coordinate System menu) and, if necessary, repeat the setting-up of the chart on the digitizer. Switching the Display of the Digitizer Cursor On and Off In the Peripheral Devices > Digitizer menu, the display of the digitizer cursor can be switched on and off by pressing the Digitizer Cursor button. You thus have the possibility of checking the digitizer-generated waypoints and other objects at the paper chart in relation to their presence in the electronic chart. WARNING: If shoals or hazardous objects are not shown on the electronic chart, the navigation should only be based on the paper chart. Switching the Digitizer Cursor Display On and Off With the Numerical Position function, you can switch on and off the presentation of the Digitizer Cursor display (contains the numerical indication of the digitizer cursor position). Generating the First and Subsequent Waypoints Click the waypoint position on the (paper) chart, then click the next waypoint position, and so on. Each click generates a waypoint at the end of the track and at the same time enters the cursor position as the waypoint position. The resulting track is displayed in the chart area if the Graphic mode is switched on. Clicking on the (paper) chart: Position the digitizer pointer exactly at the point that is to be clicked, and briefly press the 0 key of the digitizer pointer. If you want to use the sailing mode Great Circle or the track control mode To Waypoint, it is advisable to edit these data immediately after generation of the first waypoint. Whether you also enter the remark about a waypoint after every generation of a waypoint, or whether you do so subsequently during editing of the waypoint data, depends (for example) on the spatial configuration of the or on the CHARTPILOT relative to the digitizer, and is a matter for you to decide. Inserting One or More Consecutive Waypoints Graphic mode is switched on: Switch on Set/Continue, and on the screen click the track line between the waypoints between which the waypoint is to be inserted. Click the waypoint position on the (paper) chart. Behind this waypoint, further waypoints can be inserted by clicking. The clicking of the track line can be cancelled by pressing the MORE key. Text mode is switched on: In the waypoint list, mark the waypoint before which the waypoint is to be inserted. Click the waypoint position on the (paper) chart. Behind this waypoint, further waypoints can be inserted by clicking.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

179

5 Voyage Planning 5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

Generating Further Waypoints behind the Last Waypoint or before the First Waypoint Graphic mode is switched on: Switch on Set/Continue and click the last or first waypoint. On the (paper) chart, click the position of the waypoint that is to be generated, then click the next waypoint position, and so on. The clicking of the waypoint can be cancelled by pressing the MORE key. Text mode is switched on: In the waypoint list, mark the last or first waypoint. On the (paper) chart, click the position of the waypoint that is to be generated, then click the next waypoint position, and so on. USEFUL INFORMATION Switching Off the Digitizer, Deleting the Reference Points If you no longer wish to use the digitizer for editing, but at the latest when you remove the paper chart from the digitizer or when you switch the digitizer off, you have to delete the reference points. This occurs when, in the Peripheral Devices > Digitizer menu, you press the Clear Setup button and appropriately answer the safeguard question which then appears.

5.1.8

Editing Waypoint Data In the Tracks > Edit menu, switch on the function Text mode. The Text Mode menu shown in Figure 53 on page 162 appears. In the waypoint list, all waypoints generated are listed line-by-line. The data of the waypoint marked last appear in the input area situated under the waypoint list - see Figure 5-11 on page 181. Only there can the waypoint data be edited (input and modified). In the frame Waypoint-xxxx, the number of the waypoint whose data are displayed in the input area and can be edited is shown. After you have generated the waypoints of the track, you can either edit the values of one or more thematically interrelated parameters in separate runs for all waypoints, or edit all waypoint data for each waypoint one after another in one run. Furthermore, in a simple manner, you can simultaneously assign the same values to several waypoints. Editing the Values of a Parameter for All Waypoints 1.

In the waypoint list, mark the first waypoint that is to be processed.

2. 3.

In the input area, press the desired button or mark the input field in which a value is to be entered or modified.

4.

Enter or modify the value in the input field. In these input fields, only characters which are meaningful for the parameter concerned are accepted. Wherever separating characters are prescribed (e.g. the colon, the decimal point and the blank in the case of Lat and Lon), they are set automatically. Speeds, limits and the radius can be entered as whole numbers or as decimal fractions. As the decimal character, a point must be used. Numbers outside the permissible value range are not accepted.

5.

180

Press the Enter 1) key. As a result, the value that is input is taken over into the track file, and a switch-over takes place to the data set of the next waypoint.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning

Operating Instructions

5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

6.

If necessary, mark in the waypoint list the next waypoint at which the parameter is to be modified or entered.

7.

By repeating processes 2 or 3, 4 and (if appropriate) 5, enter the values of the parameter for the remaining relevant waypoints.

Number of the waypoint whose data are displayed in the input area and can be edited there. For details of the waypoint data, see text.

-

-

Takes over the values displayed in the input area into the track file, and switches over to the next waypoint. Generates the first waypoint (see page 175). Fig. 5-11

Before the waypoint marked last in the waypoint list, this inserts a waypoint with the data shown in the input area (see page 176.

Makes it possible to change the geographical position by input of the direction and distance by which the displayed position is to be changed.

Makes it possible to take over waypoints from the loaded waypointfile; menu see Figure 5-10 on page 178.

The input area in the Text Mode menu

Editing All Parameters One after Another in One Run for All Waypoints 1.

Mark the first point in the waypoint list.

2. 3.

In the input area, press the desired button or mark the input field in which a value is to be entered or modified.

4.

Enter or modify the value in the input field (for notes, see above).

5.

One after another, mark the input fields in which a value is to be entered or modified, and enter or modify the value concerned.

6.

Press the Enter key. As a result, all of the values that are input are taken into the track file and switching forward takes place to the data set of the next waypoint.

7.

By repeating the processes 5 and 6, enter the waypoint data of the remaining waypoints.

Assigning the Same Values to Several Waypoints Simultaneously 1.

1)

In the waypoint list, mark all waypoints to which you wish to assign the same values in one operation.

if the Enter button has the default frame. Otherwise, the first time, you must press the Enter button instead of the Enter key. As a result, the Enter button gets the default frame and the Enter key then acts like the Enter button.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

181

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning

Operating Instructions

5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

2. 3.

In the input area, press the desired button or mark the input field in which a value is to be entered or modified.

4.

Enter or modify the value in the input field (for notes, see above).

5.

One after another, mark the other input fields in which a value is to be entered or modified, and enter or modify the value concerned (for notes, see above).

6.

Press the Enter key. As a result, the menu Edit Several Waypoints is opened (see Figure 5-12 on page 182). There, the parameters which you have just entered or modified are switched on. You can modify the selection of parameters by clicking.

7.

When you press the OK button in the Edit Several Waypoints menu, for all parameters that are switched on there the values displayed in the input area are entered in all marked waypoints.

Parameters: (Remark about the waypoint) (Arrival attribute and parameter attribute) (Sailing mode) (Track control mode) In all marked waypoints, this enters the values that are displayed for the switchedon parameters in the input area. Switches on the parameters that were switched on when this menu was called up. Closes the menu without modification of the waypoint data. This menu appears only if the same values are to be assigned to several waypoints at the same time; see page 181. Fig. 5-12

The Tracks > Edit > Text Mode > Edit Several Waypoints menu

Details of the Waypoint Data Waypoint Number Meaning: Serial number within the track; is automatically allocated consecutively by the program, beginning at 1. It clearly identifies the waypoint within the track. It appears as a reference marker in all lists, in the chart area, and in all other displays of the system which refer to the individual waypoint. Display in the input area: Behind Waypoint in the Waypoint-xxxx frame Remark about the Waypoint Meaning: Helps to identify the waypoint during the subsequent processing. It can be displayed or printed out in all lists, and can be shown in most displays of the system which refer to the individual waypoint. Appears under Details in the Info window (together with other waypoint data). As a remark, the name (for example) of the waypoint can be entered. Editing: In the input field in the Waypoint-xxxx frame

182

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

5 Voyage Planning 5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

Arrival Attribute Meaning: Only waypoints for which the Arrival Attribute is set can be used as arrival point. The passage plan can be generated in such a way that only waypoints having the Arrival Attribute are contained in it. Editing: Under Arrival in the Waypoint-xxxx frame Parameter Point Attribute Meaning: With the aid of a waypoint for which the Parameter Point Attribute is set, new values for the parameters Profile Speed Planned Speed Course limit Track limit Rudder economy can be set within a straight track segment. Editing: Under Change Parameters Only in the Waypoint-xxxx frame Special features during editing: Parameter points should not be generated until editing of the waypoint data takes place. If a waypoint that has already been generated is to be converted retrospectively into a parameter point, all values other than those of the named parameters are deleted after the pressing of Change Parameters Only, and the position is changed so that it lies on a straight line between the last waypoint and the next one. Waypoint Position Meaning: Geographical position of the waypoint Editing: In the Geographic Position 1) frame. Special features during editing: The quadrants are input with N, S, E, W; + and – are accepted too. A position can be moved, with input of distance and direction. To do this, press Adjust; in the menu which then opens, input the values by which the waypoint is to move; and leave the menu by pressing the OK button. Sailing Mode Meaning: This specifies whether the track segment between this waypoint and the next waypoint is to be computed, displayed and used as the basis for steering with the TRACKPILOT and displayed as a Great Circle or as a Rhumb Line. The default setting defined by the program is the Rhumb Line. Editing: Under Sail in the Sail Control frame. Track Control Mode Meaning: This parameter is used for automatic parameterisation of the TRACKPILOT. It specifies whether, in the track segment between this waypoint and the next waypoint if the ship is not situated on the pre-planned track, the waypoint is to be approached directly (To Waypoint) or whether the preplanned track is to be approached first, after which the ship will begin to approach the waypoint (To Track). The default setting defined by the program is To Track. Editing: Under To in the Sail Control frame.

1)

The names of the input fields depend on the projection selected under Coordinate System.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

183

5 Voyage Planning 5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

Radius Meaning: Radius with which the manoeuvre is to be performed Editing: Under Radius in the Sail Control frame Waypoint Notes Meaning: Here, you can input information and instructions for the nautical personnel, which are displayed in the Waypoint Data display of the radar indicators while the ship is approaching this waypoint when sailing along the track. The consecutive waypoint notes can be used as an automatic notebook. In addition, lowest line is printed out in the passage plan. This text appears under Details in the Info window (together with other waypoint data). -

Waypoint Notes can be printed as a complete list of a track

Editing: In the input field Waypoint Notes In the Waypoint Notes window you can "cut and paste" the text for the use in the same track for another waypoint: 1.

Select the line which includes the note to be copied.

2.

Click with the more key into the Waypoint Notes window (opens the virtual keyboard).

3.

Select a new line where the note shall be copied to.

4.

Click ok in the virtual keyboard.

5.

Click ENTER in the track editor.

6.

select the line again for modification of the copied text. Waypoint notes cannot be displayed in the waypoint list.

Planned Speed Meaning: This is the speed that is planned for the track segment between the last waypoint and this waypoint. While the ship is sailing along the track, the Arrival Speed is computed on the basis of the Planned Speed values. The Arrival Speed is the speed with which the ship will have to sail in order to reach the destination at the planned estimated time of arrival and which is used as the speed setting by the SPEEDPILOT in Arrival mode - see page 233. Because the Arrival Speed is displayed in the Track/ Schedule display, it can be adopted as the set value for the manual speed setting even without a SPEEDPILOT. Because it is possible for you at any time to limit the Arrival Speed, it is recommended that, as the Planned Speed, the maximum speeds that are permissible and possible should be entered. While the ship is sailing along the track, you can generally limit the speed to an economical value and can increase the limit if a delay occurs. Editing: Under Planned Speed in the To Waypoint Use: frame Profile Speed Meaning: The Profile Speed is used by the SPEEDPILOT in Profile mode as the setting for the track segment between the last waypoint and this waypoint. By input of the Profile Speed, in conjunction with the SPEEDPILOT you thus have the possibility of sailing along the track with a predefined speed profile. Editing: Under Profile Speed in the To Waypoint Use: frame

184

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

5 Voyage Planning 5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

Course Limit Meaning: Alarm limit of the TRACKPILOT for the difference between set course and actual course. It also influences the correction performed by the TRACKPILOT if the ship deviates from the track and the ECDIS monitoring, see Section 4.4. Editing: Under Course Limit in the At Waypoint Change: frame Track Limit Meaning: Alarm limit of the TRACKPILOT for the deviation from the set track. The track limit also influences the possibility of switching the TRACKPILOT over to Track mode, the control precision of the TRACKPILOT in Track mode, filtering and monitoring of the external position-data, the ECDIS monitoring, see Section 4.4 the checking of the System Track (see page 230), and the checking of the edited track (see page 185). Editing: Under Track Limit in the At Waypoint Change: frame Rudder Economy Meaning: Optimization of the TRACKPILOT between precision of control and frequency of rudder movement, depending on the sea state and on the wind. To simplify manual adjustments during use of the TRACKPILOT, this value should only be entered for the first waypoint and at the boundary between a protected area (harbour, river, canal) and an unprotected area. Editing: Under Economy in the At Waypoint Change: frame

5.1.9

Checking of Tracks A necessary prerequisite for achieving the required safety in the use of the track is that, before being used, the track is carefully checked. This check should take place immediately after the track has been created or changed, i.e. before storage. this check, the track must be subjected to a geometrical check and a check against the electronic chart and the User Chart Objects. These checks take place one after another under program control. Furthermore, the sailing times resulting from the speeds entered can be checked; this check too takes place under program control.

5.1.9.1

Geometrical Check

This check takes place independently of the electronic chart used. However, because the geometrical check, if successful, is followed by the check against the electronic chart, without any interruption, then before the start of the check against the electronic chart it is necessary to create the conditions for the execution of the check against the electronic chart and the User Chart Objects; see page 187. Starting the Check The check is started by pressing the Check button in the menu Tracks > Edit. In the Check Track dialog box which then opens up, the following messages may appear as results of the geometrical check: Error: [Waypoint No.]: Short radius. A radius is too short, i.e. shorter than the limit value that was set for it at service level.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

185

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning

Operating Instructions

5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

If no radius was input at the first waypoint, the program uses 0.0 NM as the input value, i.e. it reacts as if too short a radius had been input. Error: [Waypoint No.]: Long radius. A radius is too long, i.e. the distance to the next waypoint is so small and the radii are so long that the curve planned in this way can probably not be executed at this waypoint (see also page 61). Error: [Waypoint No.]: Max ROT exceeded. The rate of turn is too high, i.e. the ROT resulting from the radius and from the Planned Speed is larger than the limit value that was set for it at service level. Note: [Waypoint No.]: Parameter point within curve. There is a parameter point situated in the curve area. To make certain that the changes made by means of the parameter point are indeed effective in the desired track section, parameter points should basically lie outside the curve area. During the geometrical check, the track is evaluated statistically. The result appears after pressing of the Extreme Values button in the Check Track dialog box. In the dialog box which then opens up, the following extreme values are displayed, together with the waypoint at which they occur: Largest radius Smallest radius Largest course-change Largest rate of turn referenced to the Planned Speed (this information covers only the track sections for which a Planned Speed has been defined). Shortest track-section, taking account of the planned radii. (Too small a value leads to the error message Long radius.)

No. of checked track

Number of errors found

Extreme values of the checked track

Result of check

Status Message

Closes the dialog box.

Fig. 5-13

Closes the dialog box.

The Check Track dialog box and the Extreme Values dialog box

Correcting the Track If a message is marked and then clicked with the MORE key, the following can be performed in the context menu: For the purpose of editing, you can switch directly into Text mode by means of Edit Waypoint. In Text mode, the waypoint to which the message refers is already marked. By means of Show in Chart, you can switch into Graphic mode; the waypoint to which the message refers is situated at the centre of the chart area. If appropriate, modify the track and start the check again.

186

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning

Operating Instructions

5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

Continuing/Ending the Check If none of the messages mentioned appears, the check against the electronic chart and the User Chart Objects starts automatically. If the status message Track checked. No errors found. appears, the track has been checked successfully.

5.1.9.2

Check against the Electronic Chart and the User Chart Objects

Preparation 1.

In the menu Chart > Depth Contour, set the safety contour correctly; see page 102.

2.

Set the type of the electronic chart against which the check is to be performed.

3.

In the Chart menu, switch on the display of the User Chart Objects.

4.

Adjust the range setting so that cells of the electronic chart or raster charts which contain the nautically relevant information are displayed.

5.

If a vector chart is used, check whether cells having the appropriate navigational purpose are present for the entire track, at least over the width corresponding to the contained track limit: Correctly set the display of the objects that are to be displayed; see page 98. With the Set Center function, sail along the track. If the Own Chart is used, it must also be ensured that it contain all nautically relevant information. For the track areas which are not covered by suitable cells, all nautically relevant objects must be marked by means of own safety lines or danger highlights. To check this, the raster chart can be used – see step 6. If there is no suitable raster chart available, the check must be performed manually against the paper chart. For this purpose, the planned track, including the track limits, must be entered in the paper chart and checked on that chart. WARNING: Vector charts which have not been approved or updated might contain errors. Successful checking of the track on the basis of such vector charts does not guarantee that the ship can sail safely along the track.

6.

If raster charts are used, then 1) all nautically relevant objects must be marked by means of own safety lines or danger highlights for the entire track, at least over the width corresponding to the track limit. For this purpose, sail along the track by means of the Set Center function. WARNING: The checks mentioned in steps 5 and 6, and the editing of the own chart and own safety lines and danger highlights, must be performed with extreme care.

7.

1)

If necessary, edit any missing objects as own safety lines or danger highlights, and repeat the preparation procedure.

This is prescribed for ships with DNV approval.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

187

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning

Operating Instructions

5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

Performing the Check The check begins automatically after a successful geometrical check; see page 185. In this check, the geographical shape of the track 1) is compared with the data of the vector chart and with the User Chart Objects own safety line and danger highlight. For the execution of the check, the display settings mentioned under Preparation are not important. What is important is the selection of the type of electronic chart and the setting of the safety contour. For the check, the cells with the highest precision are used as the basis. They might therefore differ from the cells used for the display. Because of this, messages might occur which initially contradict the presentation of the track in the vector chart 2). In the Check Track dialog box, the following messages can appear as results: Error: Leg to [waypoint No.]: [object] Violation at: [position] The object mentioned is shallower than the set safety contour (see page 102). The track segment touches or covers the object before the stated waypoint at the position mentioned. The objects which lead to this error message are the same objects as those which, in the case of ECDIS monitoring, trigger the SAFETY CONTOUR alarm or the USER CHART OBJECT alarm; see page 110. Error: Leg to [waypoint No.]: No charts of type [type of vector chart] For the track segment before the waypoint mentioned (or for part of that segment), the program does not find a cell of the vector chart having the navigational purpose being searched for. The nautical check is therefore incomplete if, in the area, not all relevant objects exist as own safety lines or danger highlights. Warning: Leg to [waypoint No.]: [object] Violation at: [position] The object mentioned is potentially dangerous. The track segment touches or covers the object before the stated waypoint at the position mentioned. The objects which lead to this message are the same objects as those which, in the case of ECDIS monitoring, trigger the OBJECT OF INTEREST alarm; see page 107. Correcting the Track If a message is marked and then clicked with the MORE key, the following can be performed in the context menu: For the purpose of editing, you can switch directly into Text mode by means of Edit Waypoint. In Text mode, the waypoint to which the message refers is already marked. By means of Show in Chart, you can switch into Graphic mode; the waypoint to which the message refers is situated at the centre of the chart area. If the line with the position information is marked, the position of the violation appears at the centre of the chart area after Show in Chart. If appropriate, modify the track and start the check again.

1) 2)

The track considered here also includes the area with the width corresponding to the track limits contained in the pre-planned track. To clarify supposed contradictions of this kind, it is helpful to switch to a different range setting and to use the Info box.

188

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

5.1.9.3

5 Voyage Planning 5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

Computation of Sailing Times

It is possible to compute the sailing times that occur if the track is sailed at Planned Speed or at a constant speed, and to compute what the effect of a speed limit would be. This is done when you generate a passage plan without printing it out - see page 235. You can also have the sailing times computed for the case in which the track is sailed at the Profile Speed. You obtain these values when you are preparing the printing of the passage plan and passage list and configure TTG Profile Mode and ETA Profile Mode for the waypoint list - see page 238.

5.1.10

Completing the Generation of the Track The new or modified track must be stored together with a statement of the necessary administrative data so that the data that are input will not be lost as soon as the CHARTPILOT (or the CHARTPILOT program) is switched off. The details of this process depend upon whether the track has merely been modified, or whether it has been generated as a completely new track, or whether it is generated on the basis of an existing track. Ending the Generation of a Completely New Track In the Tracks > Edit menu, the Text mode must be switched on. 1.

In the No. input field in the Track frame of the Text Mode menu, enter a new track number and press the Enter key. When specifying the track number, pay attention to the following points: Each track is assigned to a catalog. Within the catalog, the track is clearly identified by means of the track number, i.e. within a catalog the same track number can only be assigned once. In all listings from which tracks can be selected, the tracks are listed together with a statement of the track number in ascending order. Track numbers do not have to be assigned consecutively. Before you specify the track number, you should therefore be certain which catalog you want to assign the track to. For example, you can inspect the list of existing catalogs by looking under Catalogs in the Tracks > Edit > Merge menu. If you mark the relevant catalog there, all tracks that already exist in the catalog are listed under Tracks, together with their numbers. (Leave the Merge menu by pressing the MORE button!) If you accidentally enter a track number that has already been assigned, your attention will be drawn to this in good time.

2.

In the Name input field in the Track frame, enter the track name and press the Enter key. When specifying the track name, pay attention to the following points: In (almost) all listings, the track name is listed behind the track number. In many listings, only the first 13 characters of the track name appear.

3.

You can press the Notes button and in the input field of the menu opened in this way you can make notes about the track; later, you can at any time examine these notes at the same place. After editing the notes, you must close the menu by pressing the OK button.

4.

Storing the track: Under Catalogs in the Tracks > Edit > Store menu, mark the catalog in which the track generated is to be entered. If you want to generate a new catalog, you can input under Selected Catalog the name of the catalog that is to be generated. In the Tracks > Edit > Store menu, press the OK button. If this menu is then closed, the track is saved on the hard disk of the CHARTPILOT (and also on the hard disk of the MULTIPILOT, if present). If, by means of step 1, you have input a track number that already exists in the catalog,

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

189

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning

Operating Instructions

5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

you will be asked whether the existing track is to be overwritten. Because, in the case described here, the track is a new one, you must answer this question by pressing the No. button and by entering a different track number (either as described in Text mode or in the No. input field in the Tracks > Edit > Store menu). While the TRACKPILOT is being operated in Track mode, no track can be put into storage under the number of the System Track in the directory of the System Track.

Number under which the track selected for editing is stored; this number can be changed here. Name of the selected track; this name can be changed here.

In this list of existing catalogs, mark the catalog in which the track is to be stored.

Catalog in which the track is stored. By overwriting with a new name, a new catalog is generated. Activates the settings of this menu; the menu is exited. Leaves the menu without activation of the new settings. Fig. 5-14

The Tracks > Edit > Store menu

Ending the Generation of a Track which you Generate by Copying and Modifying an Existing Track In the main memory, by the selection process described in Section 5.1.3 (see page 164), you have already generated a copy of the existing track. The modifications which you have made were made in this copy. Therefore, the administrative data of the track used as the basis must not be taken over, because otherwise the track used as the basis would be overwritten by the modified copy. 1.

Switch on Text mode, alter the track number in the No. input field in the Track frame and press the Enter key.

2.

Also modify the track name and (if applicable) the notes - see above, processes 2.

3.

Store the track - see above, step 4.

Ending the Modification of a Track In the main memory, by the selection process described in Section 5.1.3 (see page 164), you have already generated a copy of the existing track. The modifications which you have made were made in this copy. The track stored on the hard disk must now be overwritten by this copy: do not alter the track number; call up the Tracks > Edit > Store menu; do not alter the catalog; and close the menu by pressing the OK button. A question then appears about overwriting of the existing track file; answer this question by pressing the Yes button.

190

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning

Operating Instructions

5.1.11

5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

Printing Out Track Data in List Form The waypoint data of all waypoints of a track can be printed out in list form. You have a choice between a standard list containing the following parameters (from left to right): . Waypoint number . Arrival attribute and parameter attribute . Waypoint position, stated in geographical coordinates . Sailing mode . Track control mode . Radius . Planned Speed . Remark about the waypoint and a list with a different configuration which you can specify yourself; the configuration selected for the waypoint list in the Text Mode menu is used. Preparing the Printing of the List (if still necessary) 1.

Set the printer and the printer control (see page 73).

2.

Loading a track: Under Catalogs in the Tracks > Load menu, click the catalog to which the track is assigned, under Tracks click the track that is to be loaded, and leave the menu by pressing the OK button.

3.

Selecting a track: Under Loaded Track in the Tracks > Edit > Select menu, click the track that is to be used as the basis, and leave the menu by pressing the OK button.

4.

In the Tracks Edit menu, switch on the Text mode function.

Printing Out a Standard List 1.

In the Text Mode menu, press the Print button. The Print menu appears:

2.

Under Format, press the Standard button. By pressing the OK button, start the printing of the standard list. Prepares the printing of the list in standard configuration. Prepares the printing of the list in the configuration of the waypoint list. Prepares the printing of the Waypoint NOTES in the configuration of the waypoint list. Printing takes place on this printer. 0 = no printer is selected. Leaves the menu without a print-out taking place. Starts the printing. Fig. 5-15

The Tracks > Edit > Text Mode > Print menu

Printing Out the List in a Different Configuration 1.

In accordance with the desired list, configure the waypoint list displayed in the Text Mode menu (see page 173).

2.

In the Text Mode menu, press the Print button. The Print menu appears.

3.

Under Format, press the As Configured button. By pressing the OK button, start the printing of the list.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

191

5 Voyage Planning 5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks

5.1.12

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

Generating Waypoint Files For waypoints that are needed frequently (e.g. approach buoys used in several tracks), it is also possible to generate waypoint files from which, during generation of the tracks, the waypoint positions can be transferred if necessary. The loading and generation of waypoint files take place via the Tracks > Waypoint File menu. The procedure involves the use of methods and operating sequences that are also used for the generation of tracks. Because you will probably not use waypoint files until you have acquired experience in the generation of tracks, the following description covers only those special features that occur during the generation of the waypoint files. Waypoint files consist of the following data: Administrative data (these data refer to the entire waypoint file) Number of the waypoint file Name of the waypoint file Catalog to which the waypoint file is assigned Last modified date, time Waypoint data Owner ID Waypoint position Remark about the waypoint Waypoint files can be assigned to the same catalogs as those that also contain the tracks. The numbers of the waypoint files can be assigned independently of the numbers of the tracks. If several waypoint files are generated, it must be noted that, in contrast to tracks, only one waypoint file at a time can be loaded, i.e. the content of only one waypoint file can be displayed. The waypoints contained in a waypoint file have no relationship to one another; the sequence of the waypoints within the file does not have any significance. However, the set of waypoints in a waypoint file can be sorted into two levels: Owner is the upper level. It consists of a four-place alphanumerical code and can (for example) be assigned to the person who generated the waypoint. ID is a four-figure number which can be assigned freely for each owner. In the subdivision into owner and ID, it must be noted that, when the waypoint positions are being taken over into a track, waypoints of any given owner and of any given ID number range can be selected by means of a special filter function (see page 178).

192

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning

Operating Instructions

Fig. 5-16

5.2

5.2 Editing of User Chart Objects

The Tracks > Waypoint File > Edit menu with the Text Mode menu

Editing of User Chart Objects User Chart Objects can be edited on all CHARTPILOTs and all MULTIPILOTs of the system. There is only one set of User Chart Objects in the system; edited data are automatically distributed system-wide, i.e. stored on all hard disks and displayed when required. A CHARTPILOT or MULTIPILOT being shutdown or off-line during editing, deleting or modifying of User Chart Objects will receive the new or modified data when it is online again.

5.2.1

General The User Chart Objects can be added to the electronic charts. These objects are not tied to the type of electronic chart used, and can be displayed independently of them on the CHARTPILOT and on the indicators of the Radar Series.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

193

5 Voyage Planning 5.2 Editing of User Chart Objects

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

The following objects can be input into the system's database as User Chart Objects: Danger highlights: Areas used to mark danger areas and individual dangers. They appear as transparent red areas with a thick red border. Own safety lines: Lines used to mark unsafe areas. They are displayed as orange lines provided with hatching . The hatching points towards the unsafe area. The danger highlights and the own safety lines are used in the same way as the safety contour of the vector charts as a basis for ECDIS monitoring (see page 104) and for the checking of the tracks (see page 185 and 230). Consequently, these important functions can also be implemented when raster charts are used. Own MARPOL lines: Lines for the marking of areas that are relevant according to MARPOL 73/ 78 1). These appear as dashed orange/green lines. They are used as a basis for chart monitoring (see page 107). Anchor watch areas: These areas define anchoring zones that can be monitored (see page 111). They appear as orange-bordered areas filled with orange anchor symbols. Feature areas: Used to display areas of any kind (without functions for ECDIS monitoring or for the checking of tracks). They appear as transparent ochre areas with a brown border. Feature lines: Used to display lines of any kind (without functions for ECDIS monitoring or for the checking of tracks). They appear as orange lines. Feature areas and feature lines can each be provided with a name and a remark. The names appear on the screen if (in the Chart menu) the display of text labels is switched on. The name and remark can be viewed at any time in the Info box. Symbols: The most important symbols of the ENC can also be edited as User Chart Objects. They differ graphically from the vector chart symbols by the additional (orange) marking . Text notes: Notes which are fixed at a particular geographical position and are marked there by means of a symbol. The (orange) symbol ! is provided for the marking of danger information; the (orange) symbol i is intended for all other notes. The notes appear at the symbol on the screen if (in the Chart menu) the display of text labels is switched on. However, they can also be viewed at any time in the Info box. NAVTEX symbols and areas: 2) Geographical positions which are sometimes part of NAVTEX messages can semi-automatically be transferred to user objects. Please refer to chapter 12-10. Their presentation is comparable to the Text Notes (see above), but the symbol coming with NAVTEX objects is a N . The graphical NAVTEX objects are (in contrast to the other User Chart Objects) not distributed over the entire system. They are shown only on the CHARTPILOT they have been created on. These objects can easily be deleted by a INFO-click on the N object and then clicking on Delete in the chart after opening the NAVTEX window. Automatic Management of the User Chart Objects Files User Chart Objects are stored in various files (see page 321), but the files are automatically stored and called up for display. Each input or change of the User Chart Objects is saved by the program immediately and automatically on the hard disk drive. Therefore, the final storing too is omitted (in contrast to tracks and Own Charts). The distribution of the new or changed data to the other items of equipment in the system takes place as soon as the editing menu is exited. On the other hand, because the editor cannot be exited without storing, it is not possible to recover the old data after a change.

1) 2)

MARPOL 73/78 = The International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution of Ships, 1973 Only available if a NAVTEX receiver is connected to the radar system.

194

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning

Operating Instructions

5.2 Editing of User Chart Objects

If there are several CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs in a system, the catalog structure of the User Chart Object files, their file structure and the contents of the files are automatically kept identical on all of the hard disk drives that exist there. As a result of this, there is a common stock of data in the system, regardless of which CHARTPILOT or MULTIPILOT was used for editing. Data Source Electronic chart: If an officially approved electronic chart with a suitable scale exists for the area (ARCS chart or ENC), this chart should be used to generate the objects. In the case of non-approved electronic charts, the nautical safety of the planning must be checked by comparing with official (paper) charts. WARNING: ARCS charts whose coordinate systems are not known 1) may be used as the basis of editing only in those geographical areas in which high accuracy of position is not important. Paper chart: If neither a suitable electronic chart nor a digitizer is available, the positioning of the objects takes place with the cursor and its displayed position only. Preparation for Editing Editing can take place at any time, both in Planning display mode and in Monitoring display mode. 1.

Check to determine whether the electronic chart used is officially approved.

2.

Switch on the display of the electronic chart (in the Chart menu, by means of Chart Visible). Select the chart excerpt in such a way that the scale allows a graphic input with adequate accuracy. You can also make this setting by marking the position on the (zoomed) world chart by means of the Chart Maintenance subroutine, and switching back directly to the Navigation program; see page 247.

3.

If the system is equipped with a digitizer and the objects are to be inserted on the basis of a (paper) chart, the digitizer must be set up beforehand in accordance with Section 5.1.4. WARNING: In the process of setting up on the digitizer, the projection, scale and chart datum that are suitable for the chart used must definitely be entered.

General Remarks about the Editor Editing is performed in the menu Chart > Edit User Chart Objects. The menu can be opened only if this menu is not open on any of the other items of equipment in the system 2). By opening the menu Chart > Edit User Chart Objects (= start of the editor), the display of the User Chart Objects is switched on. Before insertion, all characteristics of the objects that are to be inserted are to be specified in the Set Objects frame (except for the position). Insertion is then performed by clicking on the desired position. The geographical coordinates are displayed at all times as the cursor position. For the insertion of objects, the digitizer can additionally be used in the manner described for the editing of tracks in Section 5.1.7. In order to modify objects that already exist, the desired function is selected first of all in the frame Modify Objects, and then the object to be modified is selected in the chart area by clicking on the object that is to be changed. If, at the clicked position, there are several objects that can be modified by means 1) 2)

These are marked in the Chart Status field of the navigation data line by the entry Datum mism. on a yellow background. User Chart Objects can be edited on any CHARTPILOT and MULTIPILOT of the system, but only on one equipment item at a time.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

195

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning

Operating Instructions

5.2 Editing of User Chart Objects

of the selected function, a context menu appears for the purpose of selecting the object that is to be modified. If Delete is selected, the context menu is always shown, in order to reduce the risk of accidental deletion. During the input and modifying of lines and areas, the cursor position is often joined to the adjacent line points by means of a "rubber band" and the distance and direction of the cursor position are shown relative to the preceding line point. At any time, the "rubber band" represents the shape that would be caused by clicking. By pressing of the MORE key, the cursor can be released from the "rubber band" and hence from the object being edited. Y

Example: Inserting a line point

Z X

— X — Y — Z — : Existing line Distance and direction of the cursor as seen from point X; values are stated on the extension of the line from point X to the cursor.

2.35NM 251.3°

Cursor

Insertion of the object named

Modifying of individual User Chart Objects

Deletion of individual User Chart Objects

Fig. 5-17

The menu Chart > Edit User Chart Objects

USEFUL INFORMATION Auxiliary Points Generated Automatically At high latitudes, the following is applicable: If two set points of a line (including an area-bounding line) are more than one degree of longitude apart, the line is automatically provided with auxiliary points (one point per degree of longitude). The auxiliary points are not visible, but they fix the line at the geographical position concerned.

196

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning

Operating Instructions

5.2 Editing of User Chart Objects

Because edited lines are always straight, this characteristic leads to the fact that long lines near the pole which intersect several degrees of longitude become curved lines when the projection is switched over (Mercator/radar). Therefore, when editing is performed in the radar projection, approximate Great Circles are created. Generating User Chart Objects from Maps When a map edited on the RADARPILOT 9xxx and on the MULTIPILOT 91xx is converted, the objects contained in the map become User Chart Objects. For details, see Section 8.1.6.

5.2.2

Editing of Symbols General Remarks about the Editor: After the cursor has been moved into the chart area, the editing function remains switched on until the cursor exits from the chart area again. Inserting a symbol: Press the Symbols button. If there is a symbol description in the display field under the Symbols button, the symbol described can now be set at the desired position by clicking. Repeated clicking sets the same symbol several times.

Position of the symbol to be inserted Selected: After pressing Set, the Planning mode is switched on and the inserted symbol is displayed in the centre. Inserts the defined symbol at the position entered Description of the symbol specified for insertion Opens the Select Symbol menu for specifying the symbols to be inserted; for menu, see Figure 5-19. Opens the box Set Symbol by Position

Fig. 5-18

The menu Chart > Edit User Chart Objects after pressing the button Symbols

If a symbol other than the one actual selected is to be inserted, it must first be defined: Press the Select Symbol button, and in the menu Charts > Edit User Chart Objects > Select Symbol which then opens up press the button of the desired symbol. With most symbols, the Object Feature box then opens up, in which additional parameters have to be set. Symbols can also be inserted at any position by specifying the geographic coordinates. To do this, press the button Set Symbol by Position, enter the position and click on Set. If the option Show After Set was selected, clicking on Set switches on the Planning mode and the chart excerpt appears in the chart area with the inserted object in the middle. Moving a symbol: Switch on Move, click on the symbol, and click on the new position.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

197

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning

Operating Instructions

5.2 Editing of User Chart Objects

Deleting a symbol: Switch on Delete, click on the symbol, and in the context menu click on the button containing the description of the symbol that is to be deleted.

Selection of the symbol which is to be inserted In most cases, this causes opening of the Object Feature box; see Figure 5-20.

Fig. 5-19

The menu Charts > Edit User Chart Objects > Select Symbol

Symbol selected in the menu ... Select Symbol

Input of additional parameters

This ends the specifying of the symbols which are to be inserted. Stops the specifying of the symbols which are to be input.

Fig. 5-20

198

Examples of the Object Feature Box

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning

Operating Instructions

5.2.3

5.2 Editing of User Chart Objects

Editing of Lines Inserting a line: Press the Lines button, and in the frame Lines which then opens up press the button of the desired type of lines. By clicking on the desired position, set the starting point of the line, and then set all other points one after another by clicking. The input is completed by pressing of the MORE key. If Feature Line was selected, a dialog box is first shown for entry of the name and remark which, for this feature line, are later to be displayable in the Info box. Inserting a point: Switch on Continue, click on the line where a point is to be inserted, and then click on the position of the new point. Continuing the line: Switch on Continue, click on the starting point or end point of the line, and then set new points by clicking on the positions. Moving a point: Switch on Move, click on the point, and click on the new position. Cutting a line: Switch on Cut, and click on the line where cutting is to take place. Because the cutting point is initially not visible, it is advisable to move one of the new starting points or end points immediately after the cutting takes place. Deleting a point: Switch on Delete, click on the point, and click in the context menu ... Line (Vertex Only). Reversing the safe/unsafe side of an own safety line: Switch on Reverse Own Safety Lines and click on the own safety line. The hatching must always point towards the unsafe area. Converting a feature line into a own safety line and vice versa: Switch on Convert Lines and click on the line. 1) Deleting a line: Switch on Delete, click anywhere on the line, and click in the context menu ... Line (Whole Object).

5.2.4

Editing of Areas Areas which cover the North Pole or South Pole cannot be edited.

5.2.4.1

Editing Danger Highlights and Feature Areas

Inserting an area: Press the Areas button, and in the frame Areas which then opens up press the button of the desired type of area. Set the vertices of the area one after another by clicking on the desired position. The input is completed by pressing of the MORE key. If Feature Line was selected, a dialog box is first shown for entry of the name and remark which, for this feature line, are later to be displayable in the Info box. If the danger highlight is to be provided with a remark, which can be viewed in the Info box for example, this can be done by setting a text note; see below. Inserting a vertex: Switch on Continue, click on the line bounding the area where a vertex is to be inserted, and then click on the position of the new vertex.

1)

This function is provided so that own safety lines can be obtained from feature lines which have been generated by conversion of a map; see G e n e r a t i n g U s e r C h a r t O b j e c t s f r o m M a p s on page 197.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

199

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning

Operating Instructions

5.2 Editing of User Chart Objects

Moving a vertex: Switch on Move, click on the vertex, and click on the new position. Deleting a vertex: Switch on Delete, click on the vertex, and click in the context menu ... (Vertex Only). Deleting an area: Switch on Delete, click anywhere on the area, and click in the context menu ... (Whole Object).

5.2.4.2

Editing Anchor Watch Areas

Editing a Polygonal Anchor Watch Area Inserting the area: Press the Areas button, and in the frame Areas which then opens up press Anchor Watch Area. In the box which then opens, click on Polygon. Set the vertices of the area one after another by clicking on the desired position. The input is completed by pressing of the MORE key For all other editing functions: see Section 5.2.4.1. Editing a Circular Anchor Watch Area Inserting the area: Press the Areas button, and in the frame Areas which then opens up press Anchor Watch Area. In the box which then opens, click on Circle. By clicking in the chart area, define the center of the circle, then pull open the circle to the desired size by using the cursor, and click again. Deleting the area: Switch on Delete, click anywhere on the anchor watch area, and click in the context menu ... (Whole Object). Editing an Anchor Watch Area as a Zone with the Shape of a Ring Segment Inserting the area: Press the Areas button, and in the frame Areas which then opens up press Anchor Watch Area. In the box which then opens, click on Zone. In the field Width, enter the (radial) width of the zone. In the field Angle, enter the (segment) angle of the zone. By clicking in the chart area, define the center of the circle, then pull open the circle to the desired size and in the desired direction by using the cursor, and click again. Deleting the area: Switch on Delete, click anywhere on the anchor watch area, and click in the context menu ... (Whole Object).

5.2.5

Editing of Text Notes General Remarks about the Editor: After the cursor has been moved into the chart area, the editing function remains switched on until the cursor exits from the chart area again. Inserting a text note: Press the Text Notes button. In the dialog box which then opens up, specify by means of Category the category (and therefore the symbol appearing in the chart area), enter the note, and press the OK button. By clicking on the desired position, set the text note. Repeated clicking sets the same text note several times. Moving a text note: Switch on Move, click on the text note, and click on the new position. Deleting a text note: Switch on Delete, click on the text note, and click in the Text Note context menu.

200

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning

Operating Instructions

5.3

5.3 Editing of Manual Updates of the ENC

Editing of Manual Updates of the ENC The content of the ENC can be changed not only by means of official updates (see page 259) but also by the editing of a Manual Update. In this process, objects can be added, attributes of existing objects can be changed, and existing objects can be marked as being deleted. Because the edited Manual Updates must be distributed together with the ENC data to all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs of the system, and because chart maintenance measures should generally be performed at the same CHARTPILOT, it is advisable to also edit them there. Marking of Changes in the Chart The changes are marked by the addition of the following (orange) markings: New

Modified

Deleted

Point objects, Symbols for centres of areas Lines, Borders of areas

Point objects inserted manually are not visually different from the corresponding User Chart Objects. If you wish to know which type is involved, briefly switch off (in the Chart menu) the display of the User Chart Objects or obtain information with the aid of the Info box. Objects which have been changed by an official update are not marked, but they can be marked by means of the function Highlight Official Updates so that they become visible – see page 101

Display of file name Input/indication of display scale Makes it possible to process a further manual ENC update. Opens the editing menu. Options for display of the chart during editing Shows the detailed record of all stored entries in the Manual Update file. Stores the entered data (after an appropriate enquiry).

Calls up a safeguard question; appropriate answering of this causes switch-off of the editor. Fig. 5-21

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

The menu Chart > Edit Manual ENC Update

201

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning 5.3 Editing of Manual Updates of the ENC

Operating Instructions

Management of the Manual Update Data Any change in the ENC relates to a particular cell of the ENC. For each cell, all changes are summarised in a manual ENC update file. During this process, the files of the cells remain unchanged. When the ENC file is then used, the contents of the associated manual ENC update files are also taken into account automatically. So that the changes will also take effect on the other items of equipment in the system, the new or changed manual ENC update files must be transferred to these items of equipment – see page 287. If the system is equipped with a digitizer and if objects are to be inserted on the basis of a (paper) chart, the digitizer must be set up beforehand in accordance with Section 5.1.4. Preparation for Editing 1.

In the Chart menu, select the chart type ENC and press Edit Manual ENC Updates.

2.

Select the ENC file that is to be changed. With the aid of the Select Manual Update Chart box which is now open, three possibilities of doing this exist: a) Switch the Pick function on, and in the chart region click on a position that is covered by the ENC file that is to be changed. Under Chart, all ENC files that exist at this position are listed. Mark the file that is to be changed, and press OK. b) In the box, input the coordinates, and then press Refresh. Under Chart, all ENC files that exist at this position are listed. Mark the file that is to be changed, and press OK. c)

Under Selected Chart, input the file name of the chart (name of the cell), and press OK.

These charts are present at the clicked/ entered position. By clicking, mark the chart that is to be edited.

Selection of the ENC file by input of the file name

Selection of the ENC file by clicking on the position in the chart region Selection of the ENC file by input of the position

Press so that the charts which exist at the entered position will be listed under Chart Selection.

Starts the editor with the marked chart.

Fig. 5-22

202

The Select Manual Update Chart Box

3.

In the ENC Update Log Data box which is thus opened, enter your name or some other identifier behind User Identification, and behind Source enter the source from which the change data come. After the pressing of OK, the chart appears as an overview display, i.e. in such a way that all of it is visible.

4.

Set the display scale, either by setting the range value or by inputting the scale in the input area Scale 1:.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning

Operating Instructions

5.

5.3 Editing of Manual Updates of the ENC

In the menu Chart > Edit Manual ENC Update > Chart Settings, by means of Category, define which display groups (objects) can be displayed during editing, by means of Text Labels, specify whether text information is to be displayed, by means of Ignore Scale Minimum, specify whether the objects selected with the aid of Category are to be displayed independently of the display scale or whether the automatic displaysuppression function which acts in the case of smaller display scales is to activated. In the menu Chart > Edit Manual ENC Update > Chart Settings, the values that are set in the menu Chart > Depth Contour are displayed for information – see page 102.

6.

Move the chart so that the editing position is situated in the chart region: this can be done with the Set Center function or in the menu Chart > Edit Manual ENC Update > Edit by entering the editing position under Centre Position. Editing can now be started.

The Addition of Objects 1.

In the menu Chart > Edit Manual ENC Update > Edit, under Define Objects click on the type of object (point object, line object or area object), and in the menu thus opened click on the desired object.

2.

In the case of most point objects, an Object Features box now opens up, in which further characteristics of the selected type can be specified. In the case of the depth contour, its depth value must be entered.

3.

Click on the position of insertion. Right from the beginning in all cases, you have to click on the final position. If you have clicked on an incorrect position, the object will have to be deleted and the input will have to be repeated. In the case of a point object, the insertion process is now finished, and so the attributes of the inserted object should now be entered – see below. By clicking on further positions, the same point object can be inserted repeatedly. In the case of line objects and area objects, the next vertices are defined by further clicking. The insertion process is ended by pressing the MORE key. The next click then sets the first point of a further object of the selected type. If several objects of the same type are to be inserted, it is advisable to set the attributes correctly after insertion of the first object. The subsequent objects are then inserted with these attributes. If the Undo button is pressed in the menu Chart > Edit Manual ENC Update > Edit immediately after the addition process, the last entry is cancelled.

Changing the Attributes of the Objects 1.

In the menu Chart > Edit Manual ENC Update > Edit, switch on the Modify Attributes function, click on the object that is to be processed, and in the context menu which is thus opened mark the object that is to be processed. In the context menu, all objects situated at the clicked position are listed, including those which are invisible because the Ignore Scale Minimum function is switched off. Objects under the heading of the ENC file name with the extension MUD indicate entries of the ENC Update file. The supplements of the point objects, such as lights, topmarks etc., are treated as objects, and also have to be processed individually.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

203

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning

Operating Instructions

5.3 Editing of Manual Updates of the ENC

2.

In the Attributes box which is thus opened, the attributes can now be added or changed. In this connection, it must be ensured that the attribute Scale Minimum is set at a suitable value. This value is the smallest display scale at which the object is still displayed. The effect of the Scale Minimum can be seen very clearly if the display scale is changed by an extreme amount by adjustment of the range value, once with the Ignore Scale Minimum function switched on and once with it switched off (in the menu Chart > Edit Manual ENC Update > Chart Settings). If the Undo button is pressed immediately after the modification, the last modification is cancelled.

Specifying the object that is to be inserted.

Changing/inputting the object attributes. Deleting objects, or providing them with a deletion marker.

The position entered here is set at the centre of the chart region after the pressing of Apply.

Cancels the last input.

Fig. 5-23

The menu Chart > Edit Manual ENC Update > Edit

Deleting Objects, Marking Existing Objects as Deleted 1.

In the menu Chart > Edit Manual ENC Update > Edit, switch on the Delete Objects function, click on the object that is to be deleted, and in the context menu which is thus opened mark the object that is to be deleted.

2.

The object marked in the context menu is now marked on the chart. If the safeguard question which simultaneously appears is answered with Yes, the object is provided with a deletion marker. The ECDIS monitoring function associated with the object is not cancelled by this. If the object was inserted or modified in the current session, the object or modification is completely removed. If the Undo button is pressed immediately after deletion, the deletion is cancelled or the deletion marker is deleted.

204

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

5 Voyage Planning 5.4 Editing Cells of Own Chart

Ending the Editing Before the editing of a Manual Update is ended, you must pay attention to the following points: The objects inserted during this session can no longer be removed after saving of the Manual Update 1). It is true that the objects can be marked later as being deleted, but they remain visually present. The modification markers and deletion markers inserted during this session can no longer be removed after saving of the Manual Update 1). If a further Manual Update file is to be created or changed: In the menu Chart > Edit Manual ENC Update, press the Chart Selection button and, by answering the question that might appear, decide whether the changes made should be saved. Continue as described above under P r e p a r a t i o n f o r E d i t i n g , beginning at 2.b) If the changes are to be saved: In the menu Chart > Edit Manual ENC Update, press the Store and End button. If no further Manual Update file is to be created or changed: In the menu Chart > Edit Manual ENC Update, press the Exit button.

5.4

Editing Cells of Own Chart With the Own Chart editor, (paper) charts can be digitised. During this process, cells of Own Chart are created which are technically 2) equivalent to those of the ENC. Own Chart, in contrast to the User Chart Objects, can always only be displayed as an alternative to some other electronic chart. Therefore, it must contain all of the information that is necessary for safe navigation, and so the amount of editing needed is considerable. Therefore, Own Charts are probably only appropriate for areas for which no official electronic charts are available. Because the edited Own Chart cells and the Chart Maintenance subroutine have to be distributed to all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs of the system, it is advisable to edit them at that particular CHARTPILOT with which the chart maintenance is performed.

5.4.1

Characteristics of Own Chart Technically, Own Chart is equivalent to the ENC in every respect, with the sole exception that not all objects defined for the ENC are available for Own Chart. However, the object selection is adequate for ensuring that all of the information needed for safe navigation can be integrated into Own Chart. All objects used in Own Chart are therefore described in ECDIS Chart 1 - see page 71.

The explanations regarding the ENC which are contained in these Operating Instructions, particularly in 4.2 to 4.4 and 7.3, are thus applicable for Own Chart too, and cannot be repeated here. In addition, only those aspects that have to be specially borne in mind during editing are pointed out here.

1) 2)

Except for the possibility of completely deleting the manual ENC update file – see page 287. As far as approval is concerned, Own Charts do not have the status of the ENC or ARCS charts. They cannot under any circumstances replace paper charts. No statement can be made here about approval or about restrictions in their use.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

205

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning

Operating Instructions

5.4 Editing Cells of Own Chart

Skin of the Earth and Other Objects The objects to be edited can mainly be divided up into Skin of the Earth: Objects which describe the earth's surface (lines and areas) and Overlaid Objects: Objects that are displayed on the earth's surface (points, lines and areas). Skin of the Earth: Areas of the Skin of the Earth are, for example, land areas or areas with a particular depth range. These areas are displayed in colour over their entire extent, and by definition they are mutually exclusive. (A water area with "depth between 10 m and 20 m" cannot simultaneously be a land area or a water area with "depth between 5 m and 10 m".) The lines of the Skin of the Earth are the bounding lines of these areas. Overlaid Objects: These consist of all point-objects as well as all lines and areas that are not objects of the Skin of the Earth. Areas of this kind, e.g. traffic separation zones, anchorage area etc., are displayed transparently, either with outlines only, or as transparent patterns, or both. Basically, they are not mutually exclusive. (An area designated as a "caution area" can certainly also be a "restricted area".) Simultaneous Display of Several Cells When Own Chart is being used, the algorithm described on page 85 under A u t o m a t i c S e l e c t i o n o f t h e P u r p o s e s t o b e D i s p l a y e d is used. Where cells of the same navigational purpose overlap, all objects contained in these cells are displayed superimposed on one another. It is not defined which of the objects are on top. Exception: The areas of the Skin of the Earth are situated below all other objects. Where Skin of the Earth areas too are contained in several cells, only one of these areas is displayed; it is not defined which one that is. From this it follows that, in areas where cells having the same navigational purpose overlap, all data should definitely be edited in only one of the cells - see the illustration. All objects of this area should be edited only in cell X or in cell Y.

Cell X Cell Y

If cells having different navigational purposes are displayed simultaneously, the objects of the cells with the larger scale cover the cells with the smaller scale. This also applies to Skin of the Earth areas. From this, it follows also that if an object is contained in a cell with a small scale, it also has to be edited in the cell with the larger scale. Recommendation: During the editing process, display all cells (at least occasionally for checking) which, according to the algorithm described above, can be displayed simultaneously when Own Chart is being used. Range-Dependent Suppression of the Display of Individual Objects When Own Chart is being used, particular objects automatically cease to be displayed when the display scale becomes smaller than the value specified for such display. As a result, for example, when cells having different navigational purposes are being displayed simultaneously, of the large-scale cell on top only the most important objects are displayed and over-filling of this area is avoided. When the range is reduced, the objects appear as soon as the scale becomes smaller than the specified scale. This limit value can - and should - be defined as the Scale Minimum attribute for each individual relevant object during the editing process.

206

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning

Operating Instructions

5.4 Editing Cells of Own Chart

Coordinate System of Own Chart Own Chart is displayed in the Mercator projection during editing. The geodetic datum is WGS 84. Management of Own Chart Management of the edited Own Chart (transfer to other units in the system, deletion of cells) is done with the aid of the subprogram "Chart Maintenance" - see page 288 onwards.

5.4.2

Preparation for Editing

Setting Up the Digitizer Editing is best done on the basis of an approved, up-to-date paper chart with the aid of the digitizer after the latter has been set up in accordance with Section 5.1.4. It is true that all inputs can also be made without a digitizer, but because the editing of these Own Chart cells is a really laborious task anyway, it is not advisable to do without the digitizer. As preparation, the digitizer must be set up in accordance with Section 5.1.4 together with the paper chart that is to be used as the basis. WARNING: In the process of setting up on the digitizer, the projection, scale and chart datum that are suitable for the chart used must definitely be entered. Starting the Own Chart Editor Press the Tree button, and then the Own Chart editor button. the Own Chart Editor menu appears. Loading of existing cells and generation of a new cell From the loaded cells, this selects the cell that is to be edited. Data of the cell that is currently being edited Editing of the cell(s) (Intermediate) storage of the cell(s) that is (are) being edited

Selection of the display groups that are to be displayed - see page 99; this is set to All when the Edit menu is opened Setting of the depth contours - see page 102 Setting of the display Switching the display of the text labels on and off Switching on and off the range-dependent suppression of the display of individual objects. By opening of the Edit menu, Ignore Scale Minimum is switched on, i.e. all objects are displayed during editing. Switches the Own Chart editor subroutine off and calls up the display of the electronic chart again. Fig. 5-24

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

The Own Chart Editor menu

207

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning

Operating Instructions

5.4 Editing Cells of Own Chart

Generating a New Cell 1.

In the Own Chart Editor menu, press the Load (New) Cell button to open the box having the same name.

2.

Behind Select (New) Cell, enter the name of the new cell. For this purpose, use the name of the paper chart used.

3.

Press the Add button. In the box which then opens up, enter the data of the cell: ... Border: The geographical borders of the cell Scale: The scale of the paper chart used Date of Edition: The date of issue of the paper chart used

4.

After pressing of the OK button, the new, empty cell is generated and displayed. The range and the center position are automatically set in such a way that the complete cell is displayed. The area of the cell is shown dashed.

Loading the Existing Cell that is to be Modified 1.

In the Own Chart Editor menu, press the Load (New) Cell button to open the box having the same name. There, all cells that are present in the Own Chart database are initially listed (sorted according to navigational purpose).

2.

In the list, mark the cell that is to be modified (or enter its name behind Select (New) Cell). If the name of the cell is not known, the list of possible cells can be reduced by entering the position of the cell under Geographic Position and then pressing the Refresh button. As a result, only those cells are listed that are present in the region of the current editing area.

3.

With the Add button, the marked or entered cell is loaded and displayed. The range and the center position are automatically set in such a way that the complete cell is displayed. The area of the cell is displayed dashed. Selection of the cell by input of position

After starting of the Own Chart editor: Listing of all cells present in the local database

Press so that the cells present at the entered position will be listed.

After pressing of the Refresh button: These cells are situated in the current editing area (in whole or in part). Purpose: The navigational purpose (see Section 4.1.3) Cells already loaded are marked as loaded-.

This cell is loaded. Loads the selected cell additionally

By clicking, mark the cell that is to be edited.

Fig. 5-25

Removes all cells from the load memory and loads the selected cell

The Load (New) Cell box

Loading Further Cells 1.

208

After the cell that is to be edited has been loaded, press the Refresh button in the Load (New) Cells box.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

2.

5 Voyage Planning 5.4 Editing Cells of Own Chart

From this list, load further cells if necessary. All loaded cells are displayed simultaneously (transparently, one on top of another). If the wrong cell has been loaded by mistake: By means of Replace, all loaded cells can be removed from the load memory and replaced by the cell selected in the list.

Selecting the Cell that is to be Edited In the editing area, the cell selected for editing is marked by means of a violet frame. The data of this cell are displayed in the Selected Cell frame in the Own Chart Editor menu: Name, Scale and Date of Edition: For data entered during generation of this cell, see above. Last Modification: Date of the last modification that was made with the Own Chart editor. This date is automatically entered in the data set if editing is ended with storage. If the wrong cell has been selected and objects are to be inserted: In the Own Chart Editor menu, open the Cell Selection box by pressing the Select button. In that box, all loaded cells are listed. Mark the desired cell and press Select. If the names of the cells are not informative enough, the data of the marked cell can be displayed by means of the Info button. Return with OK. If the wrong cell has been selected and existing objects are to be modified, the procedure already described can be used. In this case, however, selection is much easier during editing - see S e l e c t i n g a D i f f e r e n t C e l l f o r E d i t i n g on page 211. Specifying the Editing Area The display scale during editing: Enter the desired scale in the Scale field or change the range by means of the arrow button of the Range field. Center position: Move the cursor in the editing field to the desired position and press the INFO key or press the Set Center button and then click on the desired position in the editing field, or enter the position in the Set Position frame in the menu Own Chart Editor > Edit and press Apply or in the Own Chart Editor menu, press the Select button, and in the box which then opens up mark the desired cell and, at that place, press the Set Center button. The center position is then set at the center of the marked cell. After pressing of the Overview button, the display scale and the center position are selected such that all loaded cells are displayed. In the Own Chart editor, the effect of the INFO key is usually not to open the Info box but to specify a new center position. Specifying the Display of the Cells In the Display Settings frame of the Own Chart Editor menu, selection of the objects that are to be displayed can be influenced as follows: With Category: Selection of the display groups that are to be displayed - see page 99 With Text Labels: Switching all text labels on and off With Ignore Scale Minimum: When this function is switched on, no range-dependent suppression of the display of objects takes place. With Depth Contour, the way in which the depth contours are to be displayed is specified - see page 102 So that all objects will be visible during editing, when the Edit menu is opened the Category is automatically set to All and the function Ignore Scale Minimum is switched off.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

209

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning

Operating Instructions

5.4 Editing Cells of Own Chart

5.4.3

Editing of Own Chart Cells

General Remarks about Editing The actual editing process (insertion and modification of objects) takes place in the menu Own Chart Editor > Edit and in its submenus. The following descriptions are based on this menu. There are six editing functions available: Set: Insertion of new objects (definition of the object, position, necessary attributes) Modify Attributes: Modifying and adding to attributes Insert/Continue: Insertion of line points (and also points in the border lines of the areas) and extending the lines Move: The moving of points (point objects, line points, including the points of the border lines of areas) Cut Lines: The cutting of lines (not of border lines of the areas) Delete: Deletion of the objects (all kinds) On the left under the editing area, a message about the switched-on editing function appears. Key functions within the editor: DO: Normal function INFO: This sets the center position at the place that is clicked in the editing area. MORE: This switches off the active function.

Return to the Own Chart Editor menu Name of the cell that is being edited Specifying the object that is to be inserted

Modifying and adding to the object attributes Deletion of objects or assigning the deletion mark to them

The position entered here is set at the center of the chart area after pressing of Apply.

Fig. 5-26

210

The menu Own Chart Editor > Edit

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning

Operating Instructions

Selection of the Objects that are to be Modified An object that is to be modified is selected by clicking on it in the editing area. If there are several objects at the clicked position, a context menu appears, in which these objects are listed. There, all objects that are present at the clicked position in any one of the loaded cells are also listed. The name of the cell is likewise listed. In the context menu, click on the object that is to be modified.

5.4 Editing Cells of Own Chart

Cell selected for editing (normal script) The objects contained there at the clicked position Cell that is loaded but not selected for editing (pale script) The objects contained there at the clicked position

Selecting a Different Cell for Editing If, in the context menu, an object is clicked which is not present in the cell selected for editing, the result is that the cell containing the clicked object is selected for editing. This setting continues to exist until, by a similar process or by means of the Select button of the Own Chart Editor menu, a different cell is selected. Identification of the Objects Present in the Editing Area If there is no editing function switched on and there is only one object present at the clicked position, or if an object is clicked that is not present in the cell selected for editing, the context menu containing the type of the clicked object appears also. For this purpose, a switched-on editing function can be switched off beforehand by means of the MORE key and then switched back on again in the Edit menu. The Set function (the only function for which special settings have to be made) retains the settings previously made. Measuring/Specifying the Distance and Direction between Two Positions Press the Set Ref Point button (on the left under the editing field), and click on the reference position. The distance and bearing of the cursor position relative to the reference position are now displayed beside the cursor position. Adding Overlaid Objects 1.

In the Set Objects frame of the Edit menu, click on the kind of object (point object, line object or area object), and in the menu which then opens up click on the desired object.

2.

With many objects, a box now opens up in which particular attributes of the selected type have to be specified. With many point objects, further additions have to be defined in this box, such as topmarks or lights.

3.

In the editing area, enter the position(s) of the object that is to be inserted; do this either by clicking with the digitizer cursor, mouse cursor or trackball cursor, or by entering the geographical coordinates in the Edit menu. In the case of a point object, the insertion process is now finished, and so the other attributes of the inserted object should now be entered - see below. By clicking on further positions, the same point object is inserted repeatedly. In the case of line objects and area objects, the next vertices are specified by further clicking. Insertion is ended by pressing the MORE key. The next click then sets the first point of a further object of the selected kind. If several objects of the same kind are to be inserted, it is a good idea to set the attributes correctly after insertion of the first object. The subsequent objects are then inserted with these attributes.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

211

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning

Operating Instructions

5.4 Editing Cells of Own Chart

Long lines are not automatically fixed by means of auxiliary points (in contrast to lines of the User Chart Objects - see page 196, A u x i l i a r y P o i n t s G e n e r a t e d A u t o m a t i c a l l y ). When Own Chart is being used, lines are displayed as straight lines between the manually edited positions, regardless of the projection that is selected at that time. As a result, the following is true: If, in the radar projection too, a line at high latitudes is to run via the same coordinates as those displayed during editing, straight lines must be subdivided (fixed) by means of auxiliary points that are inserted manually. 4.

With all inserted objects, the attributes entered must be checked/corrected and added to - see below.

Adding Objects of the Skin of the Earth 1.

In the Set frame of the Edit menu, click on the Skin of the Earth button to open the menu having the same name. The geometry of each area of the Skin of the Earth is defined by one of the lines contained in the Skin of the Earth menu. The area concerned must thus be completely enclosed by these lines; the boundaries of any of these areas usually consist of various types of line. Except for the Closing Lines, the lines are also independent objects which are displayed when Own Chart is being used and whose data can be called up in the Info box. The Closing Lines are auxiliary lines which bound the areas of the Skin of the Earth at those places where no bounding line is to be displayed. This is usually the case at the boundaries of the cell that is being edited. Therefore, when the cell is being generated it has a closing line which coincides with the boundaries of the cell. This Closing Line too can, if necessary, be modified like all other lines.

2. 3.

Edit the lines as described under A d d i n g O v e r l a i d O b j e c t s . In the Areas frame, select the kind of area; then, one after another, click on all areas of this kind. Repeat this for the other kinds of area. It is true that the depth areas are given identical colours, depending on the setting of the depth contour, but nevertheless they are independent objects, as can be seen in the Info box when Own Chart is being used.

Return to Edit menu

These lines are independent objects, but they also represent the boundaries of the Skin of the Earth areas.

This auxiliary line serves to bound the Skin of the Earth areas, but is displayed as a line in the Own Chart editor only.

This defines the meaning of the areas whose geometry is specified by the lines which can be edited in this menu.

Fig. 5-27

212

The menu Own Chart Editor > Edit > Skin of the Earth

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning

Operating Instructions

5.4 Editing Cells of Own Chart

Modifying or Adding to Attributes of the Objects 1.

In the Edit menu, switch on the function Modify Attributes and click on the object that is to be processed. The supplements of the point objects, such as lights, topmarks etc., are listed as objects, and also have to be processed individually.

2.

In the Attribute Editor box which then opens up, the attributes can now be added to or modified. In this connection, it must be ensured that the attribute Scale Minimum is set appropriately. For the meaning of Scale Minimum, see Seite 206.

Modifying the Geometry or Position of the Objects Inserting a line point (also a point on the border lines of areas): Switch on the Insert/Modify function, and click on the line at the place where a line point is to be inserted. Then click on the position of the new line point. Extending a line: Switch on the Insert/Modify function and click on the line at its end; then click on the position of the new line point. Moving a point (point object, line point, or point on the border lines of areas): Switch on the Move function and click on the point; then click on the new position of the point. Cutting a line: Switch on the Cut function, click on the line at the place where it is to be cut, and answer the resulting safeguard question with Yes. Because the cutting point is invisible at first, it is advisable to move or delete one of the new starting/end points immediately after cutting. Deleting a line point (also a point on the border lines of areas): Switch on the Delete function and click on the point that is to be deleted. In the context menu, click on the entry with the supplement (Vertex Only). Deleting an object (point object, line, or area): Switch on the Delete function and click on the object that is to be deleted. If necessary, click on the entry with the supplement (Whole Object) in the context menu, and answer the resulting safeguard question with Yes. Deleting a feature line: switch on Delete, click at any place on the feature line, and click on Feature Line (Whole Object) in the context menu.

5.4.4

Ending the Editing Process In the Own Chart Editor menu, press the Store button. In the box which then opens up, all loaded cells are listed. The cells that have been modified but not yet stored after starting of the editor are marked as -modified-. Cells that have already been stored after starting of the editor and have not been modified since then are marked as -stored-. One after another, mark the cells that are to be stored and press the Store button. As a result, the old content in each case is overwritten in the local database and the present date is entered under Last Modification in the data set of the cell. Exit the box by means of the Close button. Ending the subprogram Own Chart Editor: In the Own Chart Editor menu, press the Exit button and answer the safeguard question appropriately. Before the new or modified cells can be used throughout the entire system, they have to be transferred to the Own Chart databases of the individual units by means of the Chart Maintenance subprogram - see Section 7.5.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

213

5 Voyage Planning 5.5 Generation of Maps

5.5

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

Generation of Maps At the radars of the series 9xxx, the only possibility of displaying sea chart information together with the video lies in generating “maps”, over which the radar video can then be superimposed. Such maps can be generated at any radar of the series 9xxx and used locally there; alternatively, they can be edited much more conveniently at a CHARTPILOT or MULTIPILOT 91xx and are then available to all series 9xxx radars. If such self-generated sea chart information is also to be used at the CHARTPILOT, it is advisable to edit the corresponding User Chart Objects, because - unlike the maps - these are compatible to the electronic charts. For the same purpose as these maps, maps can also be edited at the radars of the series 1x00 that can then be displayed locally there in Radar mode. The maps generated for the radar 1x00 series are not compatible to those produced for the radar 9xxx series, however. The map editor described below therefore only serves to generate maps for use at the radar 9xxx series. For this reason, it is normally not available at systems with the radar 1x00 series. 1)

5.5.1

General Information about Maps

The Elements of the Map A map can contain both map lines (for land contours, channel boundaries etc.) and various symbols (for buoys, beacons etc.). Map lines are chains of straight segments whose starting points, end points and vertices (called linepoints in the following) are defined by the geographical position. The positioning of the symbols too is done by defining their geographical positions. It must be clearly understood that, in contrast to maps printed on paper, each of the maps being discussed here can span the entire world, because any geographical position can be entered in any map. Furthermore, the various areas of a map can have any desired different degrees of detail. When the data are being divided up into individual maps, it must be remembered that maps are difficult to maintain if they contain too many items of data. On the other hand, each map has to be called up separately for display in the radar picture, and so this operating procedure is often necessary if maps cover only a small geographical area. The Data of Which a Map Consists A distinction must be drawn between the administrative data, which relate to the entire map, and the data of the map elements. Administrative Data (for details, see page 226) The -

following parameters relate to the entire map: Map number Map name Catalog to which the map is assigned Last modified date, time (the date and time of the last modification; these are generated automatically)

Data of the Map Elements (for details, see pages 220 and 224)

1)

Note on Radar 9600 Maps: For users of the CHARTPILOT who would like to use maps formerly edited for Radar 9xxx series also on their new systems, this functionality can be achieved by a special setting on service level.

214

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning

Operating Instructions

5.5 Generation of Maps

A map line is defined by the following data: The sequence in which the line points are entered in the line point list The starting identifier, which is assigned to the first line point of a map line. Data for each line point: Line point positions Map line pattern Map line colour Furthermore, a remark about the line point can be entered. Each symbol is defined by the following data: Symbol position Symbol type Symbol colour Furthermore, a remark about the symbol can be entered.

5.5.2

Generation, Handling and Administration of Maps Insofar as is permitted by the various tasks and structures, there is no difference between maps and tracks as far as generation, handling and administration are concerned. Generated maps too are stored in the form of separate files on the hard disk of the CHARTPILOT (and the MULTIPILOT 91xx, if present) and are assigned to the same catalogs as those to which the tracks are assigned. The menu operating procedure for maps is performed via the Maps menu, just as the menu operating procedure for tracks is performed via the Tracks menu. Like the waypoint positions, so can the positions of the line points and symbols too be transferred from the electronic chart or possibly with the digitizer from the (paper) chart, or can be edited in Text mode together with the other items of map data. Like the waypoint in the case of the track, in the case of the map the map lines and/or symbols can also be taken over (copied) from maps that already exist, or - by means of a special function - all map lines and symbols of an existing map can be appended (copied) to the map that is being generated. In this section and in the description of the map generation process, it is assumed that you have already studied the generating of tracks. The details explained in Section 5.1 regarding the tracks, insofar as such details also apply to maps, are not repeated here. Therefore, there is no need for you to search through pages of text already known to you from Section 5.1 in order to find maprelated information. Thus, if an explanation which you need is missing, look it up in Section 5.1.

Loads maps into the main memory so that they can be displayed, modified or handled in some other way (see page 165). Deletes maps from the main memory, e.g. in order to switch off their display in the chart area (see page 61). Opens the menu area for the generating of maps; makes it possible to generate catalogs (see page 189; menu see Figure 5-29 on page 216). Deletes maps irretrievably on the hard disk and deletes superfluous catalogs (see page 319).

Fig. 5-28

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

The Maps menu

215

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning

Operating Instructions

5.5 Generation of Maps

Generation of Maps A map is generated by generating the map lines and/or symbols and by inputting (editing) their additional data and the administrative data. If the file is then stored, the map generated is available at any time. Map lines and symbols are generated in the same way as waypoints, by inputting the positions (of the line points and symbols). The methods and procedures are similar; exception: in the Maps > Edit menu, by pressing Symbols or Lines under Objects, it is additionally necessary to specify whether symbols or map lines are to be edited. Thus, in the case of the map, the symbols and map lines are processed in separate operations. As in the case of the tracks, with the maps too the administrative data and the other data of the map lines and symbols must be edited in Text mode. The Text mode menus too that are used are very similar to the Text mode menu used in the track generation process. Regardless of whether you wish to generate a completely new map or to generate a map by copying an existing one, or whether you wish to modify a map, the preparations are the same as for track generation (see page 164), and so too is the method of completion (see page 189). Here too, the following applies to the coordinate systems used: WARNING: In Text mode, you must ensure that, for editing, the same chart datum is set as the one to which the source of the position data refers. In the process of setting up on the digitizer, the projection and chart datum that are suitable for the chart used must definitely be entered.

Number and name of the map that is being edited Selection of the map on which the new map is to be based, or of the map that is to be modified Press if a completely new map is to be generated. Takes over all map lines or symbols of an existing track, and copies them behind the last waypoint; see pages 219 and 219. Storing the selected map; see page 226. Specifying whether map lines or symbols are to be edited: - The Text Mode menu is switched over accordingly. - The operating elements for graphic editing act only on the selected type of element. - The Merge button acts only on the selected type of element. - With the digitizer, only the selected type of element can be edited. Operating elements for graphic editing by means of the electronic chart; see page 217 Switches over between Text mode and Graphic mode, and thus switches on and off the menu for alphanumerical editing. Fig. 5-29

216

The Maps > Edit menu

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning

Operating Instructions

Administrative data of the map, see page 226

5.5 Generation of Maps

Coordinate system on which the input of the line point positions is based; see page 216

The Maps > Edit menu; see below

Input area: Here, the data of the line point marked in the line point list are displayed and edited - see page 222. When the editing of the symbols is switched on, the data of the symbol marked in the symbol list appear here. Line point list: - Shows an overview of all edited map lines and line points, together with a selection (defined by you) of waypoint data. - Makes it possible to generate map lines and line points alphanumerically (see page 222). When the editing of symbols is switched on, the symbol list appears here (see page 225).

Fig. 5-30

5.5.3

The CHARTPILOT Display for the editing of maps in Text Mode

Generating Map Lines and Symbols by Means of the Electronic Chart In the Maps > Edit menu, the Text mode function must not be switched on, press the Text Mode button. The generation, insertion, shifting and deletion of map lines and symbols are performed (as in the case of the waypoints, see page 171) with the functions listed under Graphic Mode.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

217

5 Voyage Planning 5.5 Generation of Maps

5.5.3.1

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

Map Lines

To generate the map lines, the Lines button under Objects in the Maps > Edit menu must be in the pressed state. Generating a Map Line A map line is generated by generating line points at the starting point, at each bend, and at the end of the line. If the pattern or colour is to change within the map line, a line point must be generated at the position of the change. 1.

Before the first line point is generated, the pattern and colour of the map line should be set. In this way, you avoid the retrospective work that would otherwise be needed later (in Text mode) for these characteristics. Whenever a line point is being generated, the pattern and colour of the line point processed last are taken over. Therefore, there are three different cases:

2.

-

The map line is to be given the pattern and colour of the map line that was processed last: The task of generating the line points can be started without any further activities.

-

The map line is to be given the pattern and colour of a map line displayed on the screen: Switch on Modify, and click on the map line with the desired pattern/colour combination. Switch on Set and start to generate the line points.

-

The map line is to be given a new pattern/colour combination: Switch to Text mode, select the desired pattern and colour under Line (for details, see page 223), and switch back to Graphic mode. Switch on Set and start to generate the line points.

Generating the line points: Switch on Set and click the position of the first line point, then click the position of the next line point, and so on. Each click in the chart area generates a further line point at the end of the map line, and thus enters the existing cursor position as the line point position. The resulting map line is displayed in the chart area. After clicking of the last line point, move the cursor out of the chart area or press the MORE key. If you use the MORE key, Set remains switched on, and with the next click of a position you generate the first line point of the next map line.

Extending an Existing Map Line Switch on Continue and click the first or last line point. Click the position of the next line point that is to be added, then click the next line point position, and so on. Inserting One or More Consecutive Line Points Switch on Continue and click the map line between the line points between which the line point is to be inserted. Click the position of the line point that is to be inserted. Behind this line point, further line points can be inserted by clicking. You can cancel the clicking of the map line by pressing the MORE key. Shifting a Line Point Switch on Modify, click the line point that is to be shifted, and then click the desired position. The clicking of the line point can be cancelled by pressing the MORE key.

218

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

5 Voyage Planning 5.5 Generation of Maps

Deletion of Line Points Switch on Delete; one after the other, click the line points that are to be deleted. Cutting a Map Line Switch on Delete and click the map line between the line points. Taking Over All Map Lines from an Existing Map The maps whose map lines are to be copied must be loaded. Under Catalogs in the Maps > Edit > Merge menu, mark the catalog to which this map is assigned, and under Maps mark the desired map. Leave the Merge menu by pressing the OK button. As a result, all map lines (including all line point data) of the map marked in the Merge menu are copied into the map selected for editing.

5.5.3.2

Symbols

To generate the symbols, the Symbols button under Objects in the Maps > Edit menu must be in the pressed state. Generation of Symbols 1.

Symbols can be generated in any desired sequence. Because, whenever a symbol is generated, the type and colour of the last symbol processed are taken over, by proceeding according to type and colour you avoid the retrospective work (in Text mode) that would otherwise be needed later for these characteristics. Therefore, there are three different cases: The symbol is to be given the type and colour of the symbol that was processed last: The symbol can be generated without any further preparation. The symbol is to be given the type and colour of a symbol displayed on the screen: Switch on Modify, and click on the symbol with the desired pattern/colour combination. Switch on Set and generate the symbol(s). The symbol is to be given a new pattern/colour combination: Switch to Text mode, select the desired type and colour under Symbol (for details, see pages 224 and 223), and switch back to Graphic mode. Switch on Set and generate the symbol(s).

2.

Generating the symbols: Switch on Set and click the position of the symbol, then click the position of a further symbol, and so on. Each click in the chart area generates a symbol of the same type and colour and enters the existing cursor position as the symbol position. These symbols are displayed in the chart area.

Shifting a Symbol Switch on Modify, click the symbol that is to be shifted, and then click the desired position. The clicking of the symbol can be cancelled by pressing the MORE key. Deletion of Symbols Switch on Delete and, one after another, click the symbols that are to be deleted. Taking Over All Symbols from an Existing Map The map whose symbols are to be copied must be loaded. Under Catalogs in the Maps > Edit > Merge menu, mark the catalog to which this map is assigned, and under Maps mark the desired map. Leave the Merge menu by pressing the OK button. As a result, all symbols (including all symbol data) of the map marked in the Merge menu are copied into the map selected for editing.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

219

5 Voyage Planning 5.5 Generation of Maps

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

USEFUL INFORMATION If a Displayed Map Line or Symbol Cannot be Modified Although it is possible to display several maps simultaneously in the chart area, only the map selected for editing can be modified. If you cannot modify a displayed element, it probably does not belong to the selected map. It is advisable to switch off the display of all maps that are not needed (this should be done in the Maps > Clear menu).

5.5.4

Generating Map Lines and Symbols with the Digitizer With the digitizer, you can generate map lines and symbols regardless of whether the Graphic mode or the Text mode is switched on in the Maps > Edit menu. Shifting and deletion of line points and symbols is not possible by means of the digitizer. Whether you generate map lines/line points or symbols with the digitizer depends on whether the Symbols or Lines button is pressed under Objects in the Maps > Edit menu. The generation of map lines and symbols with the digitizer is done in the same way as described for waypoints in Section 5.1.7 (see page 178). The remarks made there about the generation of the coordinate system and of the digitizer cursor are applicable here too. Before you generate the first line point or symbol with the digitizer, you should ensure that the chart is correctly calibrated. To do this, position the digitizer pointer on a coordinate cross (if possible, not one that was used as a reference point) and compare these coordinates with the presentation on the Digitizer Cursor display. If the positions are not in agreement with one another, check the set coordinate systems (the coordinate system of the (paper) chart is marked in the Peripheral Devices > Digitizer > Coordinate System menu) and, if necessary, repeat the setting-up of the chart on the digitizer.

5.5.4.1

Map Lines

To generate the map lines, the Lines button under Objects in the Maps > Edit menu must be in the pressed state. Generating a Map Line A map line is generated by generating line points at the beginning, at every bend and at the end of the line. If the pattern or colour is to change within the map line, a line point must be generated at the position of the change. 1.

Before the first line point is generated, the pattern and colour of the map line should be set. In this way, you avoid the retrospective work that would otherwise be needed later (in Text mode) for these characteristics. Whenever a line point is being generated, the pattern and colour of the line point processed last are taken over. Therefore, there are three different cases:

220

-

The map line is to be given the pattern and colour of the map line that was processed last: The task of generating the line points can be started without any further activities.

-

The map line is to be given the pattern and colour of a map line displayed on the screen: Switch on Modify and click on the map line with the desired pattern/colour combination. Switch on Se t and start to generate the line points.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning

Operating Instructions

-

2.

5.5 Generation of Maps

The map line is to be given a new pattern/colour combination: Switch to Text mode, select the desired pattern and colour under Line (for details, see page 223), and switch back to Graphic mode. Switch on Set and start to generate the line points.

Generating the line points: Click the line point position on the (paper) chart, then click the next line point position, and so on. Each click generates a line point at the end of the map line and enters the existing cursor position as the line point position. The resulting map line is displayed in the chart area if Graphic mode is switched on. After clicking the last line point, press key 3 of the digitizer pointer. With the next click of a position, you generate the first line point of the next map line.

Inserting One or More Consecutive Line Points Graphic mode is switched on: Switch on Continue and, on the screen, click the map line between the line points between which the line point is to be inserted. Click the line point position on the (paper) chart. Behind this line point, further line points can be inserted by clicking. The clicking of the map line can be cancelled by pressing the MORE key. Text mode is switched on: In the line point list, mark the line point in front of which the line point is to be inserted. Click the line point position on the (paper) chart. Behind this line point, further line points can be inserted by clicking. Extending a Map Line Graphic mode is switched on: Switch on Continue and click the last or first line point of the map line. On the (paper) chart, click the position of the line point that is to be generated, then click the next line point position, and so on. The clicking of the line point can be cancelled by pressing the MORE key. Text mode is switched on: In the waypoint list, mark the last or first waypoint. On the paper chart, click the position of the line point that is to be generated, then click the next line point position, and so on.

5.5.4.2

Symbols

To generate the symbols, the Symbols button under Objects in the Maps > Edit menu must be in the pressed state. Generation of Symbols 1.

Symbols can be generated in any sequence. Because, whenever a symbol is being generated, the type and colour of the symbol processed last are taken over, by proceeding according to type and colour you avoid the retrospective work (in Text mode) that would otherwise be needed later for these characteristics. Therefore, there are three different cases: -

The symbol is to be given the type and colour of the symbol that was processed last: The symbol can be generated without any further preparation.

-

The symbol is to be given the type and colour of a symbol displayed on the screen: Switch on Modify, and click on the symbol with the desired pattern/colour combination. Switch on Set and generate the symbol(s).

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

221

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning

Operating Instructions

5.5 Generation of Maps

-

2.

The symbol is to be given a new pattern/colour combination: Switch to Text mode, select the desired type and colour under Symbol (for details, see pages 224 and 223), and switch back to Graphic mode. Switch on Set and generate the symbol(s).

Generating the symbols: Click the position of the symbol, then click the position of a further symbol, and so on. Each click in the chart area generates a symbol of the same type and colour and enters the existing cursor position as the symbol position. These symbols are displayed in the chart area if Graphic mode is switched on.

5.5.5

Generating Map Lines Alphanumerically in Text Mode Select Lines under Objects in the Maps > Edit menu, and switch on the Text Mode. The Text Mode menu shown on page 178 appears. As you can see, it is very similar to the Text Mode menu for generating a track (see page 162). In fact, a map line is generated by generating the line points, just as a track is generated by generating the waypoints (see page 173). Here too, as a preparatory step, the coordinate system to which the line point positions to be input refer must be set, and if necessary the line point list must be configured. The editing of the line point data too is done in the same way as described for waypoint data in Section 5.1.8 (beginning page 180).

Line point data whose parameters were selected in the Maps > Edit > Text Mode > Columns menu for display in the line point list

Causes printing of the line point list; see page 227.

Calls up the Maps > Edit > Text Mode > Columns menu, in which it is possible to specify the parameters whose data are to be displayed in the line point list and (if necessary) printed out.

Stores the marked line points as line points that are to be copied.

Fig. 5-31

Deletes the marked line points.

In front of the line point marked last, this inserts the line points that were either deleted last or marked last with Copy.

The line point list in the Text Mode menu

Differences exist in the following points only: 1.

222

In the task of configuring the line point list, the following line point parameters can be set (the designations used in the Maps > Edit > Lines > Columns menu are quoted on the left, and those used in the headline of the line point list are quoted in the middle column).

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning

Operating Instructions

5.5 Generation of Maps

Color

Color

Date Pattern

Date Pattern

Position 1)

Latitude Longitude Remark

Remark 2.

The colour of the section of the map line between this line point and the line point which is entered above it in the line point list Date on which one of the items of line point data was modified last Pattern (of dots and dashes in the map line section between this line point and the line point entered above it in the line point list) Waypoint position Remark about the line point

In contrast to the track, a map can contain several lines. You obtain several map lines by splitting up one map line: Splitting up a map line: In the line point list, mark the line point above which splitting is to take place, and under Line press the New Line button. As a result, the marked line point becomes the start of the map line that is formed by the line points entered under it. This start of a map line is marked by means of an asterisk on the left in the line point list.

3.

In contrast to the track, a map line has no direction; in contrast to waypoints, the line points and map lines have no serial numbers. Consequently, for the map lines there is no function equivalent to the reversal of the track direction.

4.

For the map lines, there is no equivalent to the waypoint files. -

-

Sets the start of a map line. Splits up a map line.

Takes over the values displayed in the input area into the map file and switches over to the next line point. Generates the first line point. Fig. 5-32

5.

For details of pattern and color, see text.

In front of the line point marked last in the line point list, this inserts a line point with the data shown in the input area.

Permits the modification of the geographical position by input of the direction and distance by which the displayed position is to be modified.

The input area of the line point data in the Text Mode menu

Line points have two parameters for which waypoints do not have an equivalent: Pattern Meaning: This specifies the pattern of dots and dashes which is to be used for displaying the map line between this line point and the line point that is entered above it in the line point list. By selection of the Pattern 01, the display of a map line section can be suppressed. Editing: In the Line frame Color Meaning: This specifies the colour in which the map line is displayed on the colour screens between this line point and the line point entered above it in the line point list.

1)

See footnote on page 174

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

223

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning

Operating Instructions

5.5 Generation of Maps

The following colours are available: Default (colour which is programmed for the display of map lines for the Radar mode) Black/white (black if Brightness is set to Bright Day; white in all other brightness settings) Magenta Blue Green

5.5.6

Generating Symbols Alphanumerically in Text Mode Select Symbols under Objects in the Maps > Edit menu, and switch on Text Mode. A Text Mode menu appears, differing from the one shown on page 217 in that it contains the symbol list shown in Figure 533 and the symbol data input area shown in Figure 5-34. Symbols are generated in exactly the same way as the waypoints of a track or the line points of a map line. Here too, as a preparatory measure, it is necessary to set the coordinate system to which the symbol positions to be input refer, and (if necessary) to configure the symbol list. The editing of the symbol data too is done in the same way as described for waypoint data in Section 5.1.8 (beginning page 180). Differences relative to the editing of the navigation lines exist in the following points only: 1.

In the configuring of the symbol list, the following parameters can be set (the designations used in the Maps > Edit > Symbols > Columns menu are quoted on the left, and those used in the headline of the symbol list are quoted in the middle column). Color Date Position 1) Remark Type

Color Date Latitude Longitude Remark Type

The colour of the symbol Date on which one of the items of symbol data was modified last Waypoint position Remark about the symbol Symbol type (form and meaning of the symbol)

2.

Symbols are individual elements. They do not form lines. Therefore, the sequence of the symbols within the file is of no significance, and the editing possibilities which relate to lines are not applicable here.

3.

Symbols have only one parameter for which the line points have no equivalent: Type Meaning: This specifies the form of the symbol. Editing: In the Symbol frame

1)

Light vessel

Spar light buoy (SB)

Radio reporting point

Spar light buoy (P)

Pilot station

Hazard buoy (N)

Anchorage

Hazard buoy (E)

Fishing area

Hazard buoy (S)

Cylindrical buoy

Hazard buoy (W)

Conical buoy

Light

Cylindrical light buoy

Radio station

See footnote on page 174

224

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning

Operating Instructions

5.5 Generation of Maps

Symbol data whose parameters were selected in the Maps > Edit > Text Mode > Columns menu for display in the symbol list

Causes printing of the symbol list; see page 227.

Calls up the Maps > Edit > Text Mode > Columns menu, in which it is possible to specify the parameters whose data are to be displayed in the symbol list and (if necessary) printed out.

Stores the marked symbols as symbols that are to be copied.

Fig. 5-33

Deletes the marked symbols.

In front of the symbol marked last, this inserts the symbols that were either deleted last or marked last with Copy.

The symbol list in the Text Mode menu

For details of Type, see text; for Color, see page 223.

-

Takes over the values displayed in the input area into the map file, and switches over to the next symbol. Generates the first symbol.

Fig. 5-34

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

In front of the symbol marked last in the symbol list, this inserts a symbol with the data displayed in the input area.

Makes it possible to modify the geographical position by inputting the direction and distance by which the displayed position is to be modified.

The input area of the symbol data in the Text Mode menu

225

5 Voyage Planning 5.5 Generation of Maps

5.5.7

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

Completing the Generation of the Map The new or modified map must be stored, together with a statement of the necessary administrative data, so that the data that have been input will not be lost as soon as the CHARTPILOT is switched off. The details of this process depend on whether the map has only been modified, whether it has been generated as a completely new map, or whether it is generated on the basis of an existing map. Ending the Generation of a Completely New Map In the Maps > Edit menu, the Text mode must be in the switched-on state. 1.

In the No. input field in the Map frame, enter a new map number. When specifying the map number, note the following: Map numbers are independent of track numbers, i.e. a map and a track both having the same number can be assigned to one and the same catalog. All circumstances that also have to be taken into account in the specifying of the track number (see page 189).

2.

In the Name input field in the Map frame, enter the map name. When specifying the map name, note the following: In (almost) all lists, the map name is quoted behind the map number. In many lists, only the first 13 characters of the map name appear.

3.

Store the map: Under Catalogs in the Maps > Edit > Store menu, mark the catalog in which the map generated is to be entered. If you want to generate a new catalog, you can input under Selected Catalog the name of the catalog that is to be generated (see also page 189). In the Maps > Edit > Store menu, press the OK button. When this menu is then closed, the map is saved on the hard disk of the CHARTPILOT. If, in step 1, you have input a map number that already existed in the catalog, you are asked whether the existing map is to be overwritten. Because, in the case described here, the map is a completely new one, you must answer this question by pressing the No button, and you must enter a different map number (either as described in Text mode or in the No. input field in the Maps > Edit > Store menu).

Ending the Generation of a Map which you Generate by Copying and Modifying an Existing Map In the main memory, when preparing the editing, you have already generated a copy of the existing map by selection. The modifications which you have made were made by you in this copy. Therefore, the administrative data of the map that is used as the basis must not be taken over, because otherwise the map used as the basis would be overwritten by the modified copy. 1.

Switch on Text mode, and in the No. input field in the Map frame change the map number.

2.

Also change the map name - see above, step 2.

3.

Store the track - see above.

Ending the Modification of a Map In the main memory, when preparing the editing, you have already generated a copy of the existing map by selection. The modifications which you have made were made by you in this copy. The map stored on the hard disk must now be overwritten by this copy: do not change the map number; call up the Maps > Edit > Store menu; do not alter the catalog; and close the menu by pressing the OK button. A question then appears about overwriting the existing map file; you must answer this question by pressing the Yes button.

226

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

5 Voyage Planning

Operating Instructions

5.5.8

5.5 Generation of Maps

Printing Out Map Data in List Form Like the waypoint data of all waypoints of a track, it is also possible to print out, in list form, the line point data of all map lines of a map and the data of all symbols contained in a map. The procedure is the same for all three types of list, and is described on page 191. Whether you print out the data of the map lines or the data of the symbols depends upon whether Symbols or Lines is selected under Objects in the Maps > Edit menu. The standard list which can be selected with Standard in the menu Maps > Edit > Print contains the following -

for . . . . .

map lines: Marking of the beginning of the line by means of an asterisk, Line point position stated in geographical coordinates, Colour, Pattern, Remark about the line point,

-

for . . . .

symbols: Position stated in geographical coordinates, Colour, Pattern, Remark about the symbol.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

227

5 Voyage Planning 5.5 Generation of Maps

228

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e33.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

6

6 Voyage Execution 6.1 Voyage Preparation

Voyage Execution If, during the voyage, the CHARTPILOT is currently not being used for planning, it is used in Chart mode for navigation and collision avoidance. The operating procedure for this is described in Section 4. This section describes which preparations have to be made at the beginning of the voyage for the utilisation of the tracks generated as per Section 5.1, and which operating procedures can be performed on the CHARTPILOT during the voyage with regard to the track being used. Furthermore, under V o y a g e P r e p a r a t i o n , the time schedule planning aspect of track generation, of voyage preparation and of voyage execution is summarised.

6.1

Voyage Preparation This section describes the preparations that have to be made when pre-planned tracks are to be used during the voyage. This work can be done on any CHARTPILOT or MULTIPILOT. If a pre-planned track is only to be used to steer the ship, it is sufficient to define this track as the System Track in accordance with Section 6.1.1. If the possibilities provided by the system to control the speed of the ship are to be utilised too, set values for the times and speed to be achieved must have been specified to the system. An overview of the procedures required for this is given in Section 6.1.2.

6.1.1

Defining the System Track If the ship is to sail along a pre-planned track, this track must be defined beforehand as the System Track. This can also occur on any radar indicator. The System Track is an important basis for the ECDIS monitoring (see page 104). A System Track must also be defined so that the passage plan can be activated to achieve the planned sailing time (see page 240). When a pre-planned track is defined as the System Track, it acquires the following special characteristics: The TRACKPILOT and SPEEDPILOT cannot be remotely controlled by any pre-planned track other than the System Track. When the passage plan is being activated, the System Track is always used as the basis. Therefore, the set speed information and sailing time information computed by the system during the voyage always refer to the System Track. In the data displays of the CHARTPILOTs and the radar, only data of the System Track are displayed. If the system configuration is suitable, the System Track is also available on the connected GPS receiver 1). The System Track is indicated by the fact that it is displayed in red with a dashed line style (and nor in orange with a dotted line style like all other tracks).As long as the TRACKPILOT is using data of the System Track (i.e. when steering with Pilot Data and in Track mode) or the SPEEDPILOT is using data of the System Track (i.e. in Profile mode and in Arrival mode), no other pre-planned track can be defined as the System Track.

1)

This function can be activated on service level of the radar system and for specific position sensors only.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e38.fm / 12.08.09

229

6 Voyage Execution 6.1 Voyage Preparation

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

Defining the System Track on the CHARTPILOT 1.

The pre-planned track must be loaded: In the Tracks > Load menu, under Catalogs click the catalog to which the track is assigned, under Tracks click the track that is to be loaded, and exit the menu by pressing the OK button.

2.

Under Loaded Tracks in the Tracks > Set System Track menu, mark the track that is to be defined as the System Track, and exit the menu by pressing the OK button. Frequently, own ship's position is then joined to the System Track by means of a approach track (for details of this, see below under A p p r o a c h T r a c k t o t h e D e f i n e d S y s t e m T r a c k ).

If own ship's position is beside the System Track, you must check whether the program has selected the current waypoint that you want to approach (displayed under To WP in the Track/Schedule or Track/ Control display, for example) or whether you will have to define a different waypoint to be approached. Defining a Different Current Waypoint Under Waypoints in the Tracks > Select menu, mark the desired waypoint and exit from the menu by pressing the OK button. As a result, this waypoint is set as the current waypoint. The defining of a different current waypoint leads automatically to other changes, which are defined below under A p p r o a c h T r a c k t o t h e D e f i n e d S y s t e m T r a c k . Checking the System Track You have the possibility of checking the System Track against the vector chart and against the User Chart Objects. The program uses the same routine as for the track check which is performed at the end of the track generation process (see page 185). The check can also be performed during the voyage. The region from the present track segment to the last waypoint is checked in this case. The check is started by clicking with the INFO key into the field To WP, on the Track/Schedule display or on the Conning Data display. For the currently applicable track section, this check is also performed automatically by the program while the ship is sailing along the track section – see page 106. Deselecting the Existing System Track on the CHARTPILOT If neither the TRACKPILOT nor the SPEEDPILOT is using data of the System Track, the System Track can be deselected on the CHARTPILOT by pressing the Cancel System Track button in the Tracks menu

230

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e38.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

6 Voyage Execution

Operating Instructions

6.1 Voyage Preparation

USEFUL INFORMATION Approach Track to the Defined System Track The approach track, which - possibly after defining of the System Track or of a different current waypoint - joins own ship's symbol to the current waypoint of the System Track, appears because the track control mode of the TRACKPILOT was switched to To Waypoint. 1) The switch-over of the TRACKPILOT to To Waypoint (and thus the insertion of the approach track) always occurs when, during the defining of the System Track, the beginning of this track lies ahead (and therefore waypoint No. 1 was used as the current waypoint) or when a different current waypoint was defined in the manner described above. If, during the defining of the System Track, the ship is already situated beside the System Track, a waypoint situated ahead (to one side) is automatically used as the current waypoint. In this case, the TRACKPILOT is switched to To Waypoint if the use of the Pilot Data is switched on and, in the System Track, the track control mode is set to To Waypoint for the track segment that is now the current track segment, or if the use of the Pilot Data is not switched on and the track control mode of the TRACKPILOT (in the Pilot > TRACKPILOT menu) is To Waypoint.

Mark the track that is to become the System Track.

Defines the marked track as the System Track (if neither the TRACKPILOT nor the SPEEDPILOT is already using data of a track); the menu is exited.

Exits the menu without definition of the System Track.

Fig. 6-1

1)

The Tracks > Set System Track menu

If the CHARTPILOT is not being operated in the NACOS, the approach track appears in the following cases: - When the System Track is being defined, the beginning of this track is situated ahead (and therefore waypoint No. 1 was used as the current waypoint). - A different current waypoint was defined as described above.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e38.fm / 12.08.09

231

CHARTPILOT

6 Voyage Execution

Operating Instructions

6.1 Voyage Preparation

When the System Track is being defined, the ship does not necessarily have to be near this track. On the contrary, the ship can be situated at any distance from the track. In the case of the voyage from Rotterdam to New York, at the exit from the English Channel for example the track for the approach to New York could be loaded and the first waypoint of this track could be approached in Track mode if there are no other nautical conditions opposing this. Whether the approach track which then appears follows a great circle or is a rhumb line depends on the setting of the sailing mode in the TRACKPILOT 1) (for display, see the Pilot > TRACKPILOT menu). The approach track to the defined System Track can be used as the track in every respect. Thus, for example, it can not only be sailed along automatically with the TRACKPILOT: in the activated passage plan too (see page 233), this route is taken into account for the time planning.

Number and name of the System Track

Mark the waypoint which is to be directly approached.

Pressing the OK button - sets the marked waypoint as the present waypoint, - switches the track control mode to To Waypoint.

Exits the menu without a waypoint having been selected.

Fig. 6-2

6.1.2

The Tracks > Select menu

Planning and Achieving the Voyage Timing To plan the timing of the voyage and to fulfil this plan, several processes occurring at different times are necessary. They depend upon whether the planning is to take place on the basis of the Planned Speed values or on the basis of a constant speed.

1)

If the CHARTPILOT is not being operated in the NACOS, the sailing mode parameter of waypoint No. 1 is the key parameter for this.

232

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e38.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

6 Voyage Execution 6.1 Voyage Preparation

Voyage Planning on the Basis of the Planned Speed Values 1.

During Track Generation For the individual track segments, the Planned Speed must be defined (see page 184). Furthermore, the waypoints which are to appear in the passage plan or are to be selectable as the arrival point must be labelled by entering the Arrival Attribute (see step 2). If the individual track segments are to be sailed at particular speeds with the aid of the SPEEDPILOT (in Profile mode), the Profile Speed values must be input (see page 184).

2.

Before the Start of the Voyage (for details, see Section 6.1.3) If the planned time of departure and/or the planned time of arrival are known, a passage plan can be printed out. For this purposes, the following items are input: the starting point, i.e. the waypoint at the beginning of the track section that is to be covered by the time schedule planning (this is usually the first waypoint of the pre-planned track), the destination point, i.e. the waypoint at the end of the track section that is to be covered by the time schedule planning (e.g. port of destination, pilot take-over point etc.; this destination point is called the arrival point in the following), the planned time of departure or the planned time of arrival or - in the case of ferry services for example - both the planned time of departure and the planned time of arrival, the maximum speed at which the ship is to sail (speed limit). For all waypoints (which are provided with an Arrival Attribute), the passage plan contains, among other things, the Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA) resulting from the Planned Speed values and from the values that were input in the process of generating the passage plan. If the time of departure and the time of arrival have been input and if these times are further apart than the time difference resulting from the Planned Speed values, taking account of the speed limit that has been input, then for the computation of the ETA values the highest Planned Speed values are reduced sufficiently to ensure that the time of arrival that was input will in fact be achieved. The speed at which the ship must sail in order to achieve the computed (and displayed) ETA values is called the Arrival Speed within the system. The Arrival Speed values too are listed in the passage plan.

3.

Shortly Before or After Departure To ensure that, during the voyage, the relevant displays and the computation of the Arrival Speed will refer to the planned time of arrival at the arrival point, the passage plan must be activated. For this purpose, the arrival point and the planned time of arrival must be input anew after the preplanned track has been defined as the System Track. The ETA values of the waypoints situated ahead of the ship and the Arrival Speed values of the track segments situated ahead of the ship are then computed anew. The computation is based on the distance still to be sailed before the arrival point is reached, and on the existing time. The Arrival Speed is determined as follows: If, with the Planned Speed values that were entered, the arrival point would be reached earlier than planned, the Planned Speed values are reduced for the computation in the manner described in step 2. If, with the Planned Speed values that were entered, the arrival point would be reached later than planned, the delay is indicated behind Delay in the Track/Schedule display. The active voyage planning data can be modified at any time. It is also possible at any time to generate a new passage plan containing the updated data for the rest of the voyage.

4.

During the Voyage While the ship is sailing along the System Track, the computation described in step 3 is continuously repeated by the program. The Arrival Speed which is computed during that process for the present

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e38.fm / 12.08.09

233

CHARTPILOT

6 Voyage Execution

Operating Instructions

6.1 Voyage Preparation

track segment (and for the next one) and the ETA computed during that process for the present waypoint and for the arrival point are displayed in the Track/Schedule display. From this, it follows that if no delay is displayed, the arrival point will be reached at the planned instant of time, as long as the ship sails at the Arrival Speed displayed in each case, if a delay is displayed, it can be reduced or prevented by increasing the speed limit that was input. If the system is equipped with a SPEEDPILOT, the currently applicable Arrival Speed can be achieved by activating the SPEEDPILOT and operating it in Arrival mode. CHARTPILOT 01.11.95 DMY P A S S A G E

Text entered under Notes in the Text Mode menu during track generation

The first waypoint listed is the starting point.

Data of the waypoints that have an Arrival Attribute

The last waypoint listed is the arrival point.

Fig. 6-3

10:27:04 HMS [ZT]

Page

1

P L A N

1300 STO-S.ARM-KAS-HKI Charts: 1125, 2314, 1316, 1317 ArSp

ETA

ATA

3.1 8.0 12.0 12.0 10.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 8.0 17.0 19.0 22.0 22.0 23.0 23.0 23.0 23.0 23.0 23.0 23.0 23.0 23.0 23.0 16.0 12.0 1.5

10:26 10:47 10:51 11:11 11:24 11:34 11:51 12:14 12:27 12:48 13:04 13:36 13:51 14:03 14:19 14:35 14:51 14:58 15:47 16:16 16:53 17:35 18:12 19:11 20:34 21:35 22:31 22:44 22:50 23:01 23:30

__:__ __:__ __:__ __:__ __:__ __:__ __:__ __:__ __:__ __:__ __:__ __:__ __:__ __:__ __:__ __:__ __:__ __:__ __:__ __:__ __:__ __:__ __:__ __:__ __:__ __:__ __:__ __:__ __:__ __:__ __:__

Remark AVGÅNG VÄRTAN FJÄDERHOLM.VHF KUNGSHAMN GRANHOLMEN BERGHOLMEN LAGNÖGR.VHF OFB Ö.ÄLGÖGRUND BLÖTHOLMEN RYSSMASTERNA STABOUDDE GRYTEN EKNÖ FURUSUND SKATEN MARÖ VHF LERSKÄR TJÄRVEN SÖDERARM ARMBÅGEN BOGSKÄR SUOMEN LEIJONA LILLHARUN HAMNSKÄRS KUMMEL BENGTSKÄR JUSSARÖ KALLBÅDAN H:FORS KASUN FLATHÄLLSGRUNDET GRÅHARA G-SVÄRD ANK.HELSINGFORS

Waypoint Notes

Weather/Remarks

ANM.VHF 9 ANM.VHF 9 . . . ANM.VHF 9 . ANM.VHF 9 . GRHOLMEN VHF 9 . ANM.VHF 9 . . ANM.VHF 9 D =0.02 ANM.VHF 9 2 RODERP./ECON.6 B= D= L= B= D= L= B= D= /NMT SF B= D= L= B= D= L= B= D= L= B= D= L= B= D= L= ANM.TILL GRHARA SE CHECK LISTA 1 ANM.VHF 16 SE CHECK LISTA 2

Example of a Passage Plan

Voyage Planning on the Basis of a Constant Speed If the greater part of the pre-planned track is to be sailed at constant speed and therefore no Profile Speed values have been entered for the track, it might be sufficient to perform the voyage planning activity only for that part of the track that is to be sailed at constant speed. In that case, during the passage plan generation process in step 2, you should input not the speed limit but the set speed (see page 235), and when the passage plan is being activated (step 3) you should additionally input this set speed (see page 240).

234

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e38.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

6.1.3

6 Voyage Execution 6.1 Voyage Preparation

Generating the Passage Plan If the time of departure or the desired time of arrival or (e.g. in the case of schedule shipping line services) the time of departure and the time of arrival are known, the passage plan can be generated. The passage plan (see Figure 6-3 on page 234) contains among other things the ETA values for all waypoints that are provided with an Arrival Attribute, and can be used as a dead reckoning table. Generating the Passage Plan 1.

Adjust the printer and the printer controller (see page 73).

2.

In the Tracks > Load menu, load the track that is to be used as the basis, mark that track in the Tracks > Time Schedule > Loaded Track menu, and exit the menu by pressing the OK button. The Time Schedule menu appears (see Figure 6-5 on page 237); its structure is similar to that of the text editing menus. 1)

3.

If the parameters which you need for your work are not displayed in the waypoint list of the Time Schedule menu, you must first configure the waypoint list (see below).

4.

Switch off the Show All function.

5.

Specifying the time zone to which all time information in the passage plan is to refer: in the frame Time Zone, select Actual if the time zone that is currently set (entered in the menu Sensor Settings > Date/ Time - see page 152) is to be used select UTC or select Manual and enter the time zone that is wanted for the passage plan.

6.

Selecting the Starting Point (the waypoint at which the time calculation is to begin): In the waypoint list, mark the starting point and press Set Departure.

7.

Selecting the arrival point: In the waypoint list, mark the arrival point and press Set Arrival.

8.

Setting the speed limit (if the voyage planning is to take place on the basis of the Planned Speed values): Press the Planned button in the Speed Base frame; under Limit, enter the maximum speed at which the ship is to sail; and press the Apply button in the Speed Base frame.

9.

or Inputting the Set Speed (if the planning is to take place on the basis of a constant speed): Press the Set button in the Speed Base frame; under Value, enter the speed at which the ship is to sail; and press the Apply button in the Speed Base frame.

10. Now, you can input only the planned time of departure. The earliest possible times of arrival are then computed on the basis of this point in time. input only the planned time of arrival. The latest possible times of departure are then computed on the basis of this point in time. input both the time of departure and the time of arrival. If these times are further apart than the time difference resulting from the Planned Speed values, taking account of the set speed-limit, or resulting from the set speed that was input, then for the computation of the ETA values the highest speed values are reduced sufficiently to ensure that the time of arrival that was input will in fact be achieved. If these times are closer together than the time difference resulting from

1)

If, in the passage plan, the position data are to refer to a coordinate system different from the one that was set for the display in the chart area, you can set the desired coordinate system under Coordinate System in the Time Schedule menu.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e38.fm / 12.08.09

235

CHARTPILOT

6 Voyage Execution

Operating Instructions

6.1 Voyage Preparation

the Planned Speed values, taking account of the set speed-limit or resulting from the set speed that was input, the possible times of arrival are computed on the basis of the time of departure that was input. Inputting the Planned Time of Departure Under ETD in the input area in the Departure frame, input the planned time of departure (estimated time of departure), and press the Apply button in the Departure frame. The time-dependent data are then computed anew in the waypoint list. Inputting the Planned Time of Arrival Under ETA in the input area in the Arrival frame, input the planned time of arrival (estimated time of arrival), and press the Apply button in the Arrival frame. The time-dependent data are then computed anew in the waypoint list. All time information must be based on one and the same time zone, preferably the one that will be set for the system during the planned voyage. 11. If the desired timing is displayed in the waypoint list, the passage plan can be printed or stored on a Floppy or removable device 1): Press the Print button; in the menu which then appears, click Passage Plan; and press the OK button. The passage plan is then printed. If, in the Print menu, To Floppy or To Device is selected instead of To Printer, the passage plan is not printed out. It will be stored as a CSV-file on a removable device 2). The name of the file is "MapFile.txt". This file can be read by the Microsoft programs Word or Excel, and then processed further, for instance in order to add specific information or to generate a user specific print format on an external Windows-PC. Passage Plan and Passage List can be printed only, As Configured must be used to store the passage plan a removable device. Prepares the printing of the passage plan. Prepares the printing of the passage list in standard configuration- see. page 239. Prepares the printing of the passage list in the configuration of the waypoint list of the Time Schedule menu. - see page 239. Selects whether the passage plan, the passage list or the time schedule is output to the printer (To Printer) or written to a removable device as a file (To Floppy or To Device). Printing takes place on this printer. 0 = no printer is selected. Leaves the menu without a print-out taking place. Starts the printing. Fig. 6-4

1) 2)

The Tracks > Time Schedule > Print menu

see also Chapter 3.7: "Using Removable Devices" on page 73 see footnote 1)

236

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e38.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

6 Voyage Execution

Operating Instructions

6.1 Voyage Preparation

Calls up the Tracks > Edit > Text Mode > Columns menu (Figure 5-9 on page 175) in which it is possible to specify the parameters whose data are to be displayed in the waypoint list and are to be printed out in the list of time schedule planning data.

Initiates printing of the passage plan or of the time schedule planning data in list form - see page 239.

Selecting the time zone to which all time information in the passage plan refers: UTC Actual: The time zone that is currently set (entered in the menu Sensor Settings > Date/ Time - see page 152) Manual: The time zone that is entered manually here

Here, a different coordinate system can be set for the listed position data than the one that is set for the chart area. 1)

Management data of the track; under Notes, you can inspect the notes that were input during generation of the track. Switched on: In the waypoint list, all waypoints are listed. Switched off: Only the waypoints having an Arrival Attribute are listed. Waypoint list: Waypoint data whose parameters were selected in the Tracks > Time Schedule > Columns menu for display in the waypoint list. The Arrival Speed and the ETA values are calculated from the values that were input in the Departure, Arrival and Speed Base frames. Defines the marked waypoint as the starting point (not possible if the track is defined as the System Track). Defines the marked waypoint as the arrival point. Activates the passage plan with the values displayed in this menu (possible only if the track is defined as the System Track). Data of the starting point; if necessary, change ETD and press Apply (not possible if the track is defined as the System Track).

Data of the arrival point; if necessary, change ETA and press Apply.

1) If the parameterisation of the coordinate system for special tasks was set at service level, the Geographic button serves only to display the (permanently) set projection (see page 96). Fig. 6-5

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e38.fm / 12.08.09

Planned pressed: The Arrival Speed and the ETA values are computed from the Planned Speed values, taking account of the limit that is entered under Limit. Set pressed: The Arrival Speed and the ETA values are computed for the speed that is entered under Value. The Planned Speed values are not used. After any change of these data, press Apply.

The Time Schedule menu

237

CHARTPILOT

6 Voyage Execution

Operating Instructions

6.1 Voyage Preparation

Configuring the Waypoint List The configuring of the waypoint list shown here is done in the same way as the configuring of the waypoint list during generation of the tracks (see page 173). During this process, the following parameters can be set (the designations used in the Tracks > Time Schedule > Columns menu are listed on the left, and the designations used in the headline of the waypoint list are listed beside them). 1. All parameters which can be configured for the waypoint list during generation of the track: Control Mode Course Limit Date Distance Economy Owner ID Planned Speed Position 1) Profile Speed Radius Remark Sail Mode Track Track Distance

CM CrsL Date Dist Ec Owner ID PlSp Latitude Longitude PrSp Rad Remark SM Track TrDst

Track Limit Type

TrkL Type

Track control mode Course limit Date on which an item of the waypoint data was last altered Distance from the last waypoint (from waypoint to waypoint) Rudder economy Administration Owner and Administration ID Planned Speed Waypoint position Profile Speed Radius Remark about the waypoint Sailing mode Direction of the track segment from the last waypoint Sum of the distances between the waypoints, cumulatively from the first waypoint onwards Track limit Arrival Attribute and Parameter Point Attribute

2. Special Planning Parameters: Arrival Speed

ArSp

DistanceR

Dist R

Distance To Go R

DTG R

ETA

ETA

ETA Profile

ETA P

Track Distance R

TrDstR

TTG

TTG

TTG Profile

TTG P

Length of the track segment to the waypoint (along the track, taking account of the radii) Length of the track segment to the waypoint (along the track, taking account of the radii) Total distance to go to the arrival point (along the track, taking account of the radii) Estimated time of arrival (probable time of arrival if the ship sails at the Arrival Speed) ETA for Profile mode (probable time of arrival if the ship sails at the Profile Speed) Total distance from the starting point (along the track, taking account of the radii) Time to go (sailing time to the arrival point if the ship sails at the Arrival Speed) TTG for Profile mode (sailing time to the arrival point if the ship sails at the Profile Speed)

If you select ETA Profile and TTG Profile, the waypoint list will show you the times which will result if the ship sails along the track with the Profile Speed values.

1)

See footnotes on page 174

238

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e38.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

6 Voyage Execution

Operating Instructions

6.1.4

6.1 Voyage Preparation

Printing Out Time Schedule Planning Data in List Form The planned timing of the voyage can be printed out in list form. The passage plan is one of the possibilities for doing this; the process of generating it is described on page 235. Another standard configuration is the passage list. Alternatively, however, you can configure the list yourself, and while doing so you can select the parameters to be listed. Passage List In the passage list, the following parameters are listed for all waypoints of the pre-planned track (see Figure 6-6: Waypoint number Arrival attribute and Parameter attribute Length of the track segment to the waypoint (along the track, taking account of the radii) Planned Speed Arrival Speed Profile Speed Time to go Estimated time of arrival Remark about the waypoint. The passage list is generated and printed out in exactly the same way as the passage plan, the only difference being that, after pressing of the Print button, Passage List has to be clicked instead of Passage Plan - see page 236, step 11. Configured List If you proceed in accordance with Section 6.1.3 as if you wanted to generate a passage plan, but after pressing of the Print button you then click As Configured instead of Passage Plan, a list is printed out with the configuration that is set for the waypoint list in the Time Schedule menu. With the Show All button, you can specify whether the data of all waypoints are to be printed out, or only the data of those waypoints that have an Arrival Attribute.

CHARTPILOT 01.11.95 DMY P A S S A G E

10:27:25 HMS [ZT]

Page

1

L I S T

1300 STO-S.ARM-KAS-HKI

Text entered under Notes in the Text Mode menu during track generation

The data of all waypoints are listed.

Fig. 6-6

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e38.fm / 12.08.09

Charts: 1125, 2314, 1316, 1317 No. 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008

A

A P A

DistR

PlSp

ArSp

PrSp

TTG

0.00 0.39 0.76 0.69 0.53 0.28 0.45 1.31

3.1 3.4 8.0 8.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 12.0

3.1 3.4 8.0 8.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 12.0

3.1 3.4 8.0 8.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 12.0

6:54 5:41 5:08 3:57 1:39 2:14 6:33

ETA 01.11.95 01.11.95 01.11.95 01.11.95 01.11.95 01.11.95 01.11.95 01.11.95

10:26 10:32 10:38 10:43 10:47 10:49 10:51 10:58

Remark AVGÅNG VÄRTAN YTTER OM VÄRTAN LOUDDEN FJÄDERHOLMARNA FJÄDERHOLM.VHF HÖGUDDEN KUNGSHAMN HASSELUDDEN

Beginning of a Passage List

239

6 Voyage Execution 6.2 Changes in the Voyage Planning and in the Track during the Voyage

6.1.5

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

Activating the Passage Plan So that, during the voyage, the Arrival Speed and the displays for fulfilment of the passage plan will refer to the planning values that are input during generation of the passage plan, the passage plan must be activated with these values as soon as the System Track has been defined. 1.

In the Tracks > Time Schedule menu, press the System Track button. In the Time Schedule menu which then appears, the data of the System Track are displayed.

2.

Set the speed limit (if the pre-planned track is to be sailed on the basis of the Planned Speed values): In the Speed Base frame, press the Planned button; under Limit, enter the maximum speed at which the ship is to sail; and in the Speed Base frame, press the Apply button. or Input the set speed (if the pre-planned track is to be sailed at a constant speed): In the Speed Base frame, press the Set button; under Value, enter the speed at which the ship is to sail; and in the Speed Base frame, press the Apply button.

3.

4.

Select the arrival point: In the waypoint list, mark the arrival point, and press Set Arrival.

5.

Input the planned time of arrival: Under ETA in the input area in the Arrival frame, input the planned time of arrival, and press the Apply button in the Arrival frame. This time of arrival must refer to the time zone that is set for the system (e.g. on the radar) when the time of arrival is input.

6.

Press Activate Schedule, and answer the question which then appears by pressing the Yes button. Only then do the inputs that were made become effective. If the values that are input here are not in agreement with the passage plan generated previously, the generation of the passage plan can be repeated with input of the new values. The differences relative to the procedure described in Section 6.1.3 are that the starting point and the departure time can no longer be defined and that the passage plan is printed only for the waypoints lying ahead. If, during activation of the passage plan, the ship is not situated on the System Track (see page 231), this is taken into account in the activated passage plan.

6.2

Changes in the Voyage Planning and in the Track during the Voyage This section describes the possibilities available to you for changing the System Track and the activated voyage planning during the voyage, and how the track can change during the voyage as a result of other influences. All of the changes described here are temporary. The stored data of the track that is defined as the System Track remain unaffected by this. Changing the Activated Voyage Planning If lateness develops during the voyage and is displayed, the voyage planning for the rest of the voyage can be modified by raising the speed limit that was input during activation of the schedule. The planned time of arrival too or the arrival point can be altered during the voyage. The input of the new values is done using the procedure described in Section 6.1.5.

240

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e38.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

6 Voyage Execution 6.2 Changes in the Voyage Planning and in the Track during the Voyage

Changing the Track by Changing the Sailing Mode If the ship is being steered with the TRACKPILOT in Track mode, the sailing mode (see page 183) can be changed manually on a radar indicator, i.e. the current track segment (and possibly the following track segments up to the next waypoint for which the sailing mode is defined in the stored track data) changes from a rhumb line to a great circle segment or vice versa. 1)) Depending on the spacing and position of the waypoints, a lateral offset occurs between the waypoints, which, if the range setting is small, can also cause the track to disappear from the screen. A Waypoint Lying Further Ahead is Approached Directly When the ship is sailing along the System Track, it can be specified that, instead of the current waypoint, a different waypoint is to be approached directly. This specification process can also be performed on the CHARTPILOT:

1) 2)

1.

Under Waypoints in the Tracks > Select menu, mark the waypoint that is to be approached.

2.

Press the OK button. As a result, the marked waypoint is set as the current waypoint, the track control mode is switched to To Waypoint, the distance between the ship and the waypoint that is now the current waypoint is computed anew as a direct connection and is displayed additionally in the chart area, in the System Track, the current track segment is replaced by this newly computed track segment 2).

If the CHARTPILOT is not being operated in the NACOS, a change in the sailing mode is possible only by editing the track. For this purpose, the track must be deselected so that it is no longer the System Track. All displays of the System Track (e.g. those in the data displays) now refer to the newly computed System Track.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e38.fm / 12.08.09

241

6 Voyage Execution 6.2 Changes in the Voyage Planning and in the Track during the Voyage

242

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e38.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts

Operating Instructions

7

7.1 General

Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts If the use of electronic charts is to increase the level of safety in navigation, the charts that are displayed must be reliable. A prerequisite for this is that the charts are installed correctly and are constantly kept up-to-date. This goal can only be achieved if the operator has adequately understood what effect his data maintenance activities actually have on the system. Unfortunately, the fact that, for technical reasons, different procedures are necessary for the various chart types 1) which can be used at the CHARTPILOT, that the same objects or concepts are given different names by the providers 2), that the same terms sometimes have different meanings 3) and also that the on-board systems differ in the number of CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs and with regard to the chart types used 4) does not lead to particularly clear situation. If you are not yet familiar with the subject matter, we recommend the following: First read Section 4.1: "General Information about Electronic Charts and User Chart Objects" on page 79 and 4.2 for general information on the chart types used (or to be installed) in your system. Then read through Section 7.1: "General" on page 243 and 7.2 and, if possible, reproduce the operating sequences described there at a CHARTPILOT for a better understanding. Only then should you perform the work described in Section 7.3: "Data Maintenance of the ENC" on page 259 to 7.8 for the chart types used or to be installed in your system.

7.1

General For each chart type to be used, every CHARTPILOT and every MULTIPILOT has a database on its hard disk drive. 5) This contains all the files needed for displaying and updating the corresponding chart type. These sets of data must be continually updated, i.e. new files must be transferred to them, and old files must be deleted or overwritten there. At CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs, only the chart data existing in the own database can be displayed. 6) Most chart maintenance activities can be performed at any CHARTPILOT for all CHARTPILOTs and all MULTIPILOTs 7), but please note: IMPORTANT: It is urgently recommended that all chart maintenance work for all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs should, if possible, always be performed o n t h e s a m e C H A R T P I L O T .

1) 2) 3) 4)

5)

6)

Examples: Various licensing schemes; different information on the data media provided Example: The “permit” for ARCS charts is known as the “licence” for other chart types. Example: For various chart types, the “plan” is the designation for the navigational purpose corresponding to the largest chart scale, but for ARCS charts this is also the term for detailed charts it contains. Such a plan can also have the navigational purpose Harbour or Approach. It is not practicable to produce separate Operating Instructions for the various combinations which may result. This section refers to the maximum version of the system, i.e. having several CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs and using all the possible chart types. If there is only one CHARTPILOT or no MULTIPILOT installed, the corresponding selection possibilities and transfer requirements mentioned in the following are not applicable. The same applies for the chart types. The same chart types are normally used on all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs. On the service level, however, it is possible to define that certain chart types are not used on particular CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs, i.e. that no databases for these types are created there. The reason for distinctions can also lie in the different possibilities of the units which can be combined with each other: Within a NACOS xx-2 system, for example, only the chart type CM-93/2 can be used at a MULTIPILOT 9x22, but other chart types can also be utilized at a CHARTPILOT. The data of the charts displayed at the CHARTRADARs of the system originate from the databases of a CHARTPILOT (defined for this purpose on the service level).

7)

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

243

CHARTPILOT

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts 7.1 General

Operating Instructions

IMPORTANT: The initial installation can take several hours. Even an update may require a considerable length of time. Therefore, perform this task in good time before the start of the voyage. IMPORTANT: The chart maintenance work must be carried out so that the databases of all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs always have the same status. This is ensured if the notes given here are observed and the sequences described are followed.

☞

7.1.1

An easily determined indication of unequal stati of the databases is when the numbers of cells / charts they contain are different; see Figure 7-2.

Starting, Background Operation and Ending the Chart Maintenance Subroutine Data maintenance of the electronic charts is performed by means of the Chart Maintenance subroutine. An exception to this rule is the data maintenance of the User Chart Objects, which is performed together with the track files and waypoint files - see Section 8.1: "Management of the Track, Waypoint, Map and User Chart Objects Files" on page 319.

☞

When starting the Chart Maintenance subroutine, all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs at which a chart maintenance action is to be performed must already have been switched on.

Starting: Press the Tree button, and then press the Chart Maintenance button. As a result, the world chart appears (see Figure 7.1.2) together with the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance and the selection menu. In the following, this setting is assumed as the starting point. Background operation: To use the CHARTPILOT for other purposes while prolonged maintenance sequences are running automatically, there are the following possibilities: Switching over without changing the previous settings: Press the Tree button, and then in the top line press the CHART or CONNING button. Switching over to the standard display using the button Std Disp (see page 51). Switching over to Planning display mode at a marked position (see page 247).

☞

As soon as the chart maintenance program running in the background needs an operator action, a message is shown. Then return to the current chart maintenance operation by using the buttons Tree and Chart Maintenance.

Ending: The Chart Maintenance subroutine should be terminated if it is not performing any operations: In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, press the Exit button.

244

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts

Operating Instructions

7.1.2

7.1 General

The World Chart

Menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance - see Figure 7-3 on page 248 World chart with display of the existing charts or cells For certain background operations that take some time, an appropriate message is shown here.

Selection menu - see Figure 7-2 on page 246

Geographical position of the cursor on the world chart Fig. 7-1

The Chart Maintenance display with the world chart

The world chart offers a graphic overview of the existing files of the various types of electronic chart, for all CHARTPILOTs, MULTIPILOTs and for the Removable Device 1) of the CHARTPILOT being operated. If necessary, it is also possible to select here the electronic chart files that are to be dealt with in connection with data maintenance - see page 253. Furthermore, the pre-planned tracks existing in the system can be added to the display of the world chart. Displaying the Position of the Existing Cells / Charts / Plans 2) 1.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, select under Source the equipment item or data medium whose data are to be displayed.

☞ 2.

1) 2) 3)

If the content of a Removable Device 3) is to be displayed and if this data medium was exchanged after the start of the Chart Maintenance subroutine, a new table of contents must be generated by pressing the Make Table of Contents button; see also page 257.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, select under Type the type of electronic chart whose data are to be displayed.

see also Section 3.7: "Using Removable Devices" on page 73 Cells of the vector charts (ENC, CM-93/3Pro, CM-93/2, Own Chart), charts and plans of the raster charts (ARCS). see also Section 3.7: "Using Removable Devices" on page 73

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

245

CHARTPILOT

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts

Operating Instructions

7.1 General

3.

By means of the Navigational Purpose button under Displayed Cells or Displayed Charts in the Selection menu, select the navigational purpose of the cells / charts / plans that are to be displayed. The existing cells / charts / plans which fulfil the selection are marked by means of white hatching. The white lines around these areas represent the boundaries of the individual cells / charts / plans.

Displaying an Excerpt from the World Chart in Enlarged Form 1.

In the Selection Mode frame, select the Rectangle function.

2.

Move the cursor to a corner of the area that is to be enlarged, press the DO key, and keep it pressed; with the trackball, draw a rectangle round the area that is to be enlarged, and release the DO key. If the rectangle is to be modified, move the cursor to the line or corner that is to be modified; when the cursor symbol changes, press the DO key and correct the rectangle. Next, under Display, press the Zoom button.

3.

For greater enlargement, repeat point 2.

4.

If necessary, press Previous to return to the display that had been generated previously.

5.

If necessary, press World to return to the display of the world chart.

For zooming, switch on Rectangle.

In the case of long-duration data maintenance activities, the current program-status is displayed here.

Navigational purpose of the displayed cells 1)

Switches on/off the display of towns and points of approach.

Specifying the chart excerpt.

Graphic selection of cells*)

Total number of cells

1) 2)

Scale range of the navigational purpose being displayed (in the case of ARCS, CM-93/2 and CM-93/3Pro)

Number of cells 1) 2) of the navigational purpose being displayed

1) or ARCS charts and ARCS plans. 2) When all databases of a chart type have the same status, the number must be the same: Check this by marking all Sources one after the other in the Chart Maintenance menu; see Figure 7-3. Fig. 7-2

The selection menu in the Chart Maintenance display

Displaying the Position of the Existing Tracks 1.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > Display Tracks, select under Catalogs the catalog in which the tracks to be displayed are listed, and under Tracks select one or more tracks.

2.

Press the OK button. The selected tracks are then displayed (in orange) in the world chart.

Alternatively, all tracks can be displayed by pressing the Display All Tracks button.

☞

If there are a large number of tracks, the necessary loading of all tracks might take several minutes.

The display of the tracks is switched off by pressing the Clear Track Display button in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > Display Tracks and by exiting the menu by pressing the OK button. Display of Town Names and Points of Approach By pressing the Locations button, you can switch on and off the display of the town names and points of approach on the world chart.

246

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

7.1.3

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts 7.2 Common Aspects of the Various Chart Types

Switching Over to Planning Display Mode at a Marked Position 1.

Enlarge the excerpt of the world chart so that the centre of the chart excerpt that is to be displayed can be defined precisely enough.

2.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set as the Type the electronic chart that is to be used.

3.

In the Selection menu, define the range scale of the chart display by setting the navigational purpose.

4.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, press the Set Planning Mode button, and for the question which then appears give the answer OK.

5.

In the world chart, click on the position that is to be the centre of the chart excerpt which is to be displayed. As a result, a switch-over to Planning display mode occurs, a switch-over to the display of the electronic chart occurs, and in the case of vector charts, there is a switch-over to a range corresponding to the navigational purpose that is set under Displayed Cells or, in the case of raster charts, a chart having the scale that is displayed under Displayed Charts is selected, the clicked position is used as the centre of the chart area.

☞

The Chart Maintenance subroutine continues to run. If a return to that subroutine is to take place, the buttons Tree and Chart Maintenance must be pressed one after another. The display that had been set before pressing of the Set Planning Mode button then appears.

7.2

Common Aspects of the Various Chart Types

7.2.1

The Menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance The most important operating steps here are: -

1) 2)

Selection of the chart type: After pressing the Type button. Selection of the data source, the data of which are to be displayed, transferred or deleted: Mark as required in the Source list. Explanation of the possibilities: CHARTPILOT/MULTIPILOT: The source is the database of the equipment item mentioned. If several equipment items of the same type are present, the number displayed in the header of the equipment item’s data display is stated - see page 64. (this one): If there are several CHARTPILOTs installed, (this one) indicates the CHARTPILOT on which this menu appears (= local database). CDROM: The source is the CD/DVD 1) that is inserted in the CD/DVD 1) drive Floppy: The source is the Floppy disk that is inserted in the Floppy of the CHARTPILOT USB-Disk X 2): The source can be a USB-disk or an external USB-storage-media connected via the USB-port of the CHARTPILOT, see also Section 3.7: "Using Removable Devices" on page 73.

see footnotes on page 245 and on page 298. X means 1, 2, 3 ...

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

247

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts 7.2 Common Aspects of the Various Chart Types

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

Selection of the chart maintenance activity: With the buttons Update and Transfer: Transfers/updates of the chart or cell files. With the button Delete: Deletion of files in the databases. With the button ... Licensing or ... Subscription: Procure/transfer/change of the subscription, permits or licences. With the button Other Functions: Other functions, e.g. delete databases completely. For further operating possibilities in this menu: see Figure 7-3. Checking of the available hard disk capacity (see page 259) Marking the equipment item / data medium (source) whose cells/charts/plans are to be displayed, transferred or deleted, list of availlable items will be updated every 3 second. Selecting the type of electronic chart to be displayed. This generates a table of contents of the inserted data medium; it is only necessary after an exchange of CD/DVD, USB-Disk(s) or Floppy (see page 257). Transferring and updating of chart data. The button that must be used for a particular transfer or update is described in Section 7.3: "Data Maintenance of the ENC" on page 259 to 7.8. Deleting of chart data. After the clicking of a position, this switches over into the main program (into Planning display mode), and thus switches on the display of the electronic chart. This does not cause switch-off of the Chart Maintenance subroutine (see page 247). Displays tracks in the world chart (see page 246). Purchase/transfer/change the subscription, permits or licences. Other functions, e.g. delete databases completely. Switches the Chart Maintenance subroutine off and calls up the display of the electronic chart again (see page 244). Fig. 7-3

7.2.2

The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance

Procuring the Subscription, Permits and Licences The electronic charts are not included within the scope of delivery of the CHARTPILOT 1). To be able to use them, licensed cells / charts must be procured or a subscription taken out in many cases. Licensed cells / charts are encrypted by the manufacturer or provider. The provider supplies a key that is needed to be able to use such a cell / chart; amongst other data, it contains the identification code of the system for which the cells / charts were procured. It is therefore necessary to inform the provider about this system identification code 2) in addition to the required geographical regions. You can determine the system identification code at the CHARTPILOT, specify the required geographical areas, and then contact the provider 3) yourself.

1) 2) 3)

Exception: In certain cases, a licence of the chart type CM-93/3Pro is included in the scope of supply; see page 299. This system identification code has the designation User Permit No. for the chart types IHO ENC and ARCS and the designation System ID for Jeppesen Marine ENC and CM-93/3Pro. For CM-93/2, it is contained in the CM-93/2 User Code. Or the distributor. In this business, some distributors perform the tasks of the provider, and vice versa. The term "provider” will be used throughout this document, even when the tasks typically performed by a distributor are involved.

248

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts 7.2 Common Aspects of the Various Chart Types

Depending on the chart type, you will then receive one key for all regions (with CM-93/2, where this is called the Authorization Code), a file with keys for individual regions or cells (with Jeppesen Marine ENC 1) and CM-93/3Pro, where they are called licences), or one or more files with the keys for the individual cells / charts (with IHO ENC 1) and ARCS, where they are called permits). Normally, you will receive these data on a Floppy. It is also possible that they are sent by e-mail to the ship, where they must then be copied to a Floppy or external USB-Disk(s) 2). These keys must then be transferred to the local database before the licensed cells / charts can be transferred. Insofar as they are needed for the display, they are automatically transferred to the other databases during the transfer and updating of the chart and cell files.

☞

Before the cells / charts for which licences were installed are actually used (Section 4: "Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance" on page 79 and following sections), the corresponding chart type must be selected again as per Section 4.1.1: "Switching On the Display of the Chart and Selecting the Chart Type" on page 79 at the corresponding CHARTPILOT or MULTIPILOT. This does not apply to the CHARTPILOT at which the chart maintenance work was performed.

For further details on this subject, see Section 7.3.1: "Permits for Licensed ENC cells" on page 261 to 7.8.1.

7.2.3

Transferring and Updating the Charts or Cell Files (ARCS) chart and (vector) cell files are made available by the relevant provider on CD-ROM/external USB-Disk(s), both for the initial installation and the regular updates. Various providers make it possible, through their online update services, to transfer the most recent data to the ship by e-mail and/or by Internet file transfer, so that the necessary CD-ROM (or, in certain cases, the Floppy or external USBDisk(s)) can be produced on board. There are two different functions: Transfer function: This is started with the Transfer button of the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance. It can be used for all chart types to perform the following tasks: Transfer data of all files, or of selected files, from the CD-ROM, USB-Disk(s) or Floppy to one, several or all databases of the system. Also to copy all, or selected, files from the local database to one, several or all other databases of the system. 3) If there are files, will be overwritten on the CHARTPILOT, a safeguard question apears. Update function: This is started with the Update button of the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance.2) If there are files, which will be overwritten on the CHARTPILOT, a safeguard question apears. It is used for licensed ENC cells, for ARCS charts and for CM-93/3Pro cells. In one working step, this function is used for the following purposes with the CD-ROM/USB-Disk(s) on one, several or all databases of the system: New additional files are transferred 4). Where necessary, files are updated. Outdated files that are no longer supported are deleted (for ENC cells and ARCS charts after a safeguard question).3)

1) 2) 3)

4)

Jeppesen Marine ENC and IHO ENC: see page 259 see also Section 3.7: "Using Removable Devices" on page 73 A Select Device dialog box opens, if the file-structure (Table of Contents) of ENC, ARCS, CM-93/3Pro-charts or cells does not have the standard file structure. CD/DVD, Floppy or USB-Disk(s)s having the stanard file structure will be updated automatically to the CHARTPILOT without opening a Select Device dialog box. Not with all online update services.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

249

CHARTPILOT

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts

Operating Instructions

7.2 Common Aspects of the Various Chart Types

With regard to the selection of these functions and the order in which the data are transferred to the various databases of the system, we recommend this approach: Always first transfer the licences / permits to the local database; see Section 7.2.2: "Procuring the Subscription, Permits and Licences" on page 248. For the initial installation of the databases with all chart types using the Transfer function, first transfer all data to the local database only and then, in a second step, transfer them from the local database to all other databases. If the provider offers an online update service, we urgently recommend that you use this service and perform the following step with the data received in this way; see below. Perform the updates of the licensed ENC cells, the ARCS charts and the CM-93/3Pro cells using the Update function in one working step for all databases. For the updates of the unlicensed ENC cell files and the CM-93/2 cells using the Transfer function, first transfer all data to the local database only and then, in a second step, transfer them from the local database to all other databases. (In these cases, the corresponding deletion measures must be used to ensure that files which are no longer supported do not remain in the databases.) Installation of subsequently licensed cells and charts: as for updating (in the case of large quantities of data, also as for initial installation). Other approaches are possible and, in special cases, even advisable; see Section 7.3: "Data Maintenance of the ENC" on page 259 to 7.8. Online Update Services: If a PC with Internet connection is available on board, the online update service that is offered should be used no later than one week after last receiving a regular (Update) CD. If this is done, the charts used on board can be kept constantly up-to-date. With all online update services, the data must be requested by the ship for each update; in contrast to the procedure for the regular update, the provider does not automatically send the data. From the viewpoint of the CHARTPILOT, a distinction must be made: Update procedure of the company Jeppesen Marine: This is available for the chart types Jeppesen Marine ENC and CM-93/3Pro and bears the designation Real Time Update (RTU). This method is supported by the CHARTPILOT, in that the request file can be generated there; see Section 7.3.5: "Real Time Update (RTU) for C-MAP ENC" on page 270. Update procedures of other providers: At present, Primar Stavanger offers an online update service for IHO ENC and UKHO offers one for ARCS charts. These providers also supply PC programs for downloading the data. What all procedures have in common is that the update data received at the PC must be transferred to a CD/DVD/USB-Disk(s) (or Floppy), with which an update is then performed at the CHARTPILOT as per Section 7.3.4: "Update Function: Update of IHO ENC Cells on All Databases" on page 268, 7.3.6 or 7.7.5 NOTICE: These online updates do not replace the regular updates. Even if online updates are performed at regular intervals, an update must still be carried out with every (Update) CD received in the regular way.

Dialog Box for Displaying the Progress and Errors/Warnings As soon as the program begins the transfer, update or other lengthy operations, a dialog box opens; this has the same basic structure for all activities: The activities currently taking place are reported in the upper list of the dialog box. At the end of the process, the completion message is shown together with notes on any problems which may have occurred. If applicable, the lower list indicates which problems occurred for which cells / charts. The Print button can be used to log these activities on paper.

250

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts

Operating Instructions

7.2 Common Aspects of the Various Chart Types

The Abort button can be used to terminate the entire process, if necessary. The transfer and conversion of the file currently being transferred are then continued until they are finished, and are completed with an appropriate message.

☞

An abort should be avoided, because this can easily result in databases with different contents, which in turn may lead to errors during the subsequent data maintenance work or during using the chart. To ensure that the positions of the cells / charts / plans are displayed correctly in the world chart, the table of contents must be generated again after an abort; see page 257.

Here, the activity currently taking place is displayed. From the resulting list, it is possible to see (among other things) which files are transferred.

Here, messages appear if problems occur in the transfer process.

Prints the information contained in the lists

Aborts the transfer. Closes the dialog box after transfer is finished.

Fig. 7-4

7.2.4

Dialog box for displaying the progress and errors/warnings

Deleting the Charts or Cell Files (ARCS) charts and (vector) cells that are not (or no longer) updated must be deleted in the databases, to ensure that the active electronic charts continue to operate reliably. Reasons why cells / charts are not updated (examples): The manufacturer or provider no longer supports the chart / cell. The licences / permits have expired and were not renewed. The charts / cells of a region are no longer needed (e.g. because the sea region is no longer being sailed). The deleting of files is performed at the CHARTPILOT intended for the chart maintenance work on all databases of the system (see page 243). The relevant details are described in Section 7.3: "Data Maintenance of the ENC" on page 259 to 7.8.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

251

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts 7.2 Common Aspects of the Various Chart Types

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

Complete Deletion of a Database If no further work with a chart type is to be done on the system, or if an error occurs in the licence management process and cannot be corrected by means of the operating procedure described, or if it is simply that you have lost the overview of the contents of a database, the entire database of that type can be deleted 1). For the ARCS charts this work can only be carried out at the CHARTPILOT the database of which is being deleted. This is not possible at MULTIPILOTs; in the event of problems, for ARCS chart it is only possible to delete all cell files of the MULTIPILOT (at the CHARTPILOT). NOTICE: After execution of the following procedure, charts / cells of the type can no longer be used on the equipment item. The database can be restored only if the database of the type is OK on another CHARTPILOT or if all current chart CDs/DVDs or USB-Disk(s) and, for licensed charts / cells, the licence / permits Floppy or USB-Disk(s) are available and if there is still enough time available. In the Other Functions menu of the type, press the button Remove Complete Database. A safeguard question then appears. 2) If you then enter the word PRUNE in the input field of that safeguard question and press the OK button, all data of the chart type (chart / cell files, lists, licences/ permits etc.) are deleted on the hard-disk drive of the CHARTPILOT that is being operated.

7.2.5

Deleting the Product List After the installation of the first IHO ENC cell from your new supplier we recommend to delete the Product List from your previous supplier. A new Product list will be installed automaticly with the next IHO ENC cell installation if nessasary (see page 281).

7.2.6

Selecting the Charts or Cell Files

☞

A selection is only required in special cases. If you are still familiarizing yourself with the topic of chart maintenance, you can initially skip this section and return to it later when it becomes necessary.

If not all files but only certain ones are to be transferred or deleted by means of the Transfer function, they must be selected for this purpose. The following steps must be conducted in sequence: selection according to regions, selection according to navigational purposes 3), selection according to agency codes, and selection according to cell / chart number. These selection procedures are basically the same for all chart types, but some of the selection possibilities mentioned will not always be available. Section 7.3: "Data Maintenance of the ENC" on page 259 to 7.8 describe when to use which procedure.

1) 2) 3)

Is not possible with the chart type CM-93/2, but is also not necessary. In this case, it is sufficient to delete the cell files contained in the databases. For the chart types ENC and CM-93/3Pro, a menu is shown beforehand in which, under Destination, the equipment items for which the database is to be deleted must be marked. Exit the menu with OK. Where relevant, it is possible to define for the type ENC whether cells of unlicensed ENC, IHO ENC and/or Jeppesen Marine ENC charts are selected; see page 259.

252

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

7.2.6.1

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts 7.2 Common Aspects of the Various Chart Types

Selection according to Regions

This is used to define a region in the world chart. All (vector) cells or (ARCS) charts and (ARCS) plans that lie completely or partially in this region are selected by this method. This applies to all navigational purposes.

☞ ☞

With the chart type ARCS, the chart and all plans located on it are always treated in the same way. For example, even if only one plan is selected, the chart and the other plans of the same chart number are also selected. If no selection is performed in the working step in which the selection by regions is intended to take place, then a l l cells / charts / plans are selected.

Definition of the Region Three functions are available: Rectangle Function In the Selection menu of the Chart Maintenance display within the Selection Mode frame, the function Rectangle must be selected. In the world chart (zoomed, if necessary), a rectangle is drawn as is also done for zooming of the world chart; see page 246. Contour Function In the case of an intercardinally arranged shipping area (e.g. from Hamburg to the exit from the English Channel), use of the rectangle function also selects the (unneeded) cells (here, cells of the Irish Sea and the English North Sea coast). To prevent this, the contour function can be used: In the Selection menu of the Chart Maintenance display within the Selection Mode frame, select the function Contour. Move the cursor to a vertex of the region, and click on the DO key. By moving the trackball and clicking repeatedly, more vertices can be set. Conclude the process by pressing the INFO key. If necessary, the definition can be cleared by pressing the MORE key, and can be repeated by means of the procedure described. Track Function In the case of a transfer or an update from the CD/DVD, USB-Disk(s) or Floppy, the selection can also be performed in such a way that only the cells needed in connection with existing tracks are transferred. This is done with the Track function: In the world chart, display the relevant tracks - see page 246. In the Selection Mode frame, press the Tracks button. With the Range button that exists there, it is also possible to specify the width of the strip for which cells are selected on either side of the tracks. Displaying Selected Cells / Charts / Plans in the World Chart In the world chart, the positions of the cells / charts / plans selected according to region are shown in green instead of white, if (in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance with the button Transfer) the Transfer menu is opened or (with the Delete button) the Delete menu is opened. See also D i s p l a y i n g t h e P o s i t i o n o f t h e E x i s t i n g C e l l s / C h a r t s / P l a n s on page 245.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

253

CHARTPILOT

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts

Operating Instructions

7.2 Common Aspects of the Various Chart Types

Selecting Only the Cells / Charts / Plans that Lie Completely within the Defined Region If the selection was made according to region, the button Include Touched Cells or Include Touched Charts is provided in the Delete menu (to be opened in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance with the button Delete). By switching off this function, you can limit the selection to the cells / charts / plans that lie completely within the defined region.

7.2.6.2

Selection according to Navigational Purposes

This selection is performed in the Transfer menu or in the Delete menu, which is opened (in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance with the button Transfer or Delete) after the selection according to regions has taken place. There, the number of cells / charts / plans previously selected according to regions is specified in the lower area: After Total the total sum, and above that the figures for the individual navigational purposes 1). By clicking on the navigational purposes, all cells / charts / plans of certain navigational purposes can be excluded from the selection.

(Data source from which transfer takes place) (Chart type which is transferred) (Equipment items to which the cells are transferred) Selection of the navigational purpose by clicking

Number of cells / charts / plans selected according to regions: Raster charts: Sum of the charts and plans Vector charts: Sum of the cells (exception: ENC – during transfer from CD/DVD or USBDisk(s), the sum of the files (base files and update files; see page 277 is shown)

Opens the selection menu with which selection can take place according to file name

Fig. 7-5

7.2.6.3

Selection according to navigational purposes in a Transfer menu

Selection according to Agency Codes and to Cell Names / Chart Numbers

Where this selection possibility is given, a corresponding selection menu appears as soon as the OK button is clicked in the Transfer menu or Delete menu; see Figure 7-6. 2)

1) 2)

With ENC CDs, the update cells are also counted (see page 277), and with ARCS charts also the included plans. This selection possibility is available not only for charts / cells but also, where necessary, for permits / licences.

254

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts 7.2 Common Aspects of the Various Chart Types

If no selection by cells / charts and agency codes is to take place, click on the Add All >> button. Then click on the OK button in the selection menu to begin the transfer or deletion process. If a selection is to be made, the following applies: The left-hand list of the selection menu names the files of all cells / charts 1) that have been selected up to that time. The selection is made by entering the cells / charts to be transferred or deleted into the righthand list. By then clicking the OK button, the transfer or deletion process is initiated. Selection according to agency codes The agency code is the first two places of the cell name. It denotes the manufacturer of the cell. This is generally a national hydrographic organization, so that the agency code corresponds to a certain geographical area in most cases.

☞

In the case of ENC and CM-93/3Pro charts, the button Selection by Agency Codes is located above the right-hand list. Switching on this function calls up the selection menu Agency Codes, which contains all agency codes of the cells that have been selected up to this time. The left-hand list contains the cells whose agency codes are marked in the selection menu Agency Codes. By marking the agency codes, the contents of the left-hand list can therefore be limited as required. If all cells of the marked agency codes shall be transferred or deleted, click on the Add All >> button. Then click on the OK button in the selection menu to begin the transfer or deletion process.

1)

The plans of the ARCS charts are contained in the chart files and therefore do not appear in this list.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

255

CHARTPILOT

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts

Operating Instructions

7.2 Common Aspects of the Various Chart Types

Only available with vector charts: Opens and closes the additional selection menu Agency Codes.

Puts all cells / charts displayed in the lefthand list into the right-hand list. Starts the deleting or transfer process.

Cells / charts to be transferred or deleted when the OK button is clicked

List with all previously selected cells / charts. Only with vector charts: If the selection menu Agency Codes is active, only the cells with the codes marked there remain in this list.

Explains the possibilities of the marking.

Puts the cells / charts marked in the left-hand list into the right-hand list.

Fig. 7-6

These files belong to the same cell.

Removes all cells / charts from the right-hand list.

Removes from the right-hand list all of the cell / charts that are marked there.

Only available with vector charts: selection menu Agency Codes: Contains all agency codes of the cells selected in the previous selection steps.

Mark all the agency codes whose cells are to be included in the left-hand list.

Marks all listed agency codes.

Clears all markings in this selection menu

Selection menus for the selection by cell / chart numbers and agency codes

Selection according to cell names / chart numbers By means of Add >>, only those cells / charts that are marked in the left-hand list are entered into the right-hand list. ☞ In the right-hand list, the entries marked there can be removed by means of Chart Maintenance by pressing Make Table of Contents.

1)

see also Section 3.7: "Using Removable Devices" on page 73

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

257

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts 7.2 Common Aspects of the Various Chart Types

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

If the transfer or deletion of data was terminated (Abort function; see page 251), it may also be necessary to create a new table of contents for the relevant database, e.g. so that the positions of the cells / charts / plans are shown correctly in the world chart. To do this, mark the corresponding equipment item under Source and then press Make Table of Contents.

258

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

7.2.9

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts 7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC

Checking the Available Hard-Disk Capacity In the Utilities > Chart Maintenance menu, the Actual Source State button can be used to open up an information box containing information about the hard disk drives of all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs installed and a List of Removable Media (Floppy, CD/DVD, USB-Disk(s)). The meanings are as follows: Status: On-line = data exchange with the CHARTPILOT or MULTIPILOT is possible. Free Disk/Memory: Free hard disk capacity, including the capacity that is to be kept free for other purposes (Min Free). For the electronic Charts, the difference between Free Disk and Min Free is therefore available. Min Free/available: Capacity to be kept free for other purposes.

7.2.10

Errors Caused by Dirty CDs/DVDs, CD/DVD Drives If problems arise when data are transferred from the CD/DVD, they may be caused by soiling of the CD or the optics of the CD/DVD drive. In such cases, cleaning may possibly solve the problem - see page 399.

7.3

Data Maintenance of the ENC ENC cell files are always produced by the national hydrographic organizations according to the same standards. The distribution, and thus the procurement by the user, takes place in various ways, however. The ENC data of some regions are made available only through one or more providers authorized for this, following procurement of the relevant licences (involving further cost), whereas the ENC data of other regions can be procured without the need for licences. Licensed cells are delivered in an encrypted form. There are several different encryption methods. Most providers use the method corresponding to the S63 standard, which was published by the IHO. ENC cells encrypted in this way are referred to as IHO ENC in the following. The company Jeppesen Marine 1) uses its own method; the ENC cells delivered by Jeppesen Marine are referred to as C-MAP ENC in the following. When importing the ENC cells into the own database, the CHARTPILOT must apply various decryption methods; the required operating sequences may differ to some degree. The CHARTPILOT is capable of using IHO ENC, C-MAP ENC and unlicensed ENC cell files, also simutaneously. 2)

☞ ☞

The CHARTPILOT also supports the use of so-called Large Media. (IHO S63 Edition 1.1). A large media can for example be a DVD or a USB memory stick that contains multiple data exchange sets in a specialized structure. The distinctions between these ENC types only exist with regard to the chart maintenance, not for use of the ENC cells. When different types are utilized at the same time, it is possible to use the Info box at any time to find out which ENC type is currently being displayed.

Use of Licensed Cells If licensed ENC cells are obtained from different providers, the following operations must be performed for each provider.

1) 2)

Jeppesen Marine is the distributor of C-MAP data. Formerly, C-MAP used to be the company´s name. What this means: Various cells may differ in respect of the ENC type, but the same cell cannot be present in different ENC types several times over.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

259

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts 7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

In special cases, however, it may be advisable to use a different procedure; see Section 7.3.7: "Divergent Procedures for Transfer and Update" on page 272. Initial Installation of Licensed Cells: (This procedure should be used to install a choice of data quickly. If there is enough time to install all licensed cells, the Update-Procedure shall be used! See Section 7.3.7: "Divergent Procedures for Transfer and Update" on page 272) 1. Conclude a contract with the provider, obtain the necessary ENC cell permits from him, and then install them on the local database; see Section 7.3.1: "Permits for Licensed ENC cells" on page 261. 2. Using the Transfer function as per Section 7.3.2: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Removable Device to Local Database" on page 266, transfer all the cell files for which permits have already been installed from the provider’s CDs to the local database. 3. Then use the Transfer function to transfer all ENC files as per Section 7.3.3: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Local to Other Databases" on page 267 from the local database to all other ENC databases of the system. Updating of Licensed Cells: Regular update: As soon as a new CD has been received, perform an update on all ENC databases of the system in one working step, using the Update function as per Section 7.3.4: "Update Function: Update of IHO ENC Cells on All Databases" on page 268 or 7.3.6. Online update: If an online update is possible (see page 250), perform it at least once a week, beginning no later than one week after last receiving a regular (Update) CD. To do this, an Online Update CD is produced at the PC, with which the update is performed on all ENC databases of the system in one working step, using the Update function as per Section 7.3.4: "Update Function: Update of IHO ENC Cells on All Databases" on page 268 or 7.3.6; see also page 250. The online update of the Jeppesen Marine ENC begins with the generation of the RTU request as per Section 7.3.5: "Real Time Update (RTU) for C-MAP ENC" on page 270. Installing Subsequently Licensed Cells: 1. Install any ENC cell permits that were procured later to the local database; see Section 7.3.1: "Permits for Licensed ENC cells" on page 261. 2. Using the Update function as per Section 7.3.4: "Update Function: Update of IHO ENC Cells on All Databases" on page 268 or 7.3.6, transfer the cells to all ENC databases of the system in one working step. Use of Unlicensed Cells Unlicensed cells should only be installed if they originate from the same provider or, if the cells of various providers are used, if the updating process can be performed properly; see below. When both licensed and unlicensed ENC cells are being used, the following actions may only be performed for the unlicensed cells. For this, only the function Unlicensed ENC Data may remain switched on in the menu which appears as one of the first selection steps. If unlicensed ENC cells are obtained from several different providers, the following operations must be performed for each provider. 1) In special cases, however, it may be advisable to use a different procedure; see Section 7.3.7: "Divergent Procedures for Transfer and Update" on page 272. Initial Installation of Unlicensed Cells: 1. Using the Transfer function as per Section 7.3.2: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Removable Device to Local Database" on page 266, transfer all the cell files to the local database. 2. Using the Transfer function as per Section 7.3.3: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Local to Other Databases" on page 267, transfer all cell files from there to all other ENC databases of the system.

1)

The case in which different data sets (i.e. supplied on separate CDs/DVDs) are obtained from the same contractual partner (provider) must be treated as if the data sets originated from different providers.

260

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts

Operating Instructions

7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC

Updating of Unlicensed Cells 1. On the local ENC database, delete all cell files of the provider as per Section 7.3.8: "Deleting ENC Cells" on page 275. 2. Using the Transfer function as per Section 7.3.2: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Removable Device to Local Database" on page 266, transfer all the cell files of the provider to the local database. 3. On all other ENC databases, delete all cell files of the provider as per Section 7.3.8: "Deleting ENC Cells" on page 275. 4. Using the Transfer function as per Section 7.3.3: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Local to Other Databases" on page 267, transfer all cell files from the local database to all other ENC databases of the system. If unlicensed files from several providers are used, it must be possible to select the files of each provider out of the unlicensed files of all other providers for the purposes of deleting them. This is practically only possible if they are located in a region in which there are no unlicensed files from other providers 1). This difficulty does not arise if the provider regularly announces which cells are no longer supported. In this case, only these cells must be deleted in step 1. From this follows: CAUTION To keep the ENC database up-to-date with a justifiable amount of effort, unlicensed files should only be used when exclusively files from one provider and no licensed files are used, or when up-to-date information is always available on which files are no longer supported, or when it is easy to select only the files originating from each provider. If the provider regularly announces which cells are no longer supported and which new cells have been issued, the following procedure is advised for the updating of unlicensed cells: 1. Install newly issued cells subsequently on all databases; see page 274. 2. Using the Update function as per page 274, perform the update of the existing cells on all ENC databases of the system in one working step. 3. Delete cells that are no longer supported, as per Section 7.3.8: "Deleting ENC Cells" on page 275.

7.3.1

Permits for Licensed ENC cells

☞ ☞

For general information on this topic, see page 248. All operating actions listed in this section should be performed at the CHARTPILOT that is intended for the chart maintenance work of the system. For the following operating steps, the Type ENC must be set in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance.

Initial Installation of IHO ENC 1.

Before initial installation can take place, a subscription must be taken out with a provider. Here the system identification code is needed, and the ENC cells to be used must be determined. For IHO ENC, the system identification code is called the User Permit Number and is displayed when, in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Licensing, the button View User Permit No. is pressed.

1)

Or if there are only a few files and the user knows the region and file names.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

261

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts 7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

You can obtain the information on the available ENC cells in various ways, e.g. through the provider, or through the internet. If you have an ENC CD from the provider: The product list located on the CD details all the ENC cells available from the publisher of the CD at the time it was made; for the required operating actions, see page 279. If the provider needs other data about the system, further relevant data can be generated as an ECDIS Passport and sent to the provider; see page 265. 2.

You then receive the permit file, in which all ENC cell permits acquired by you are present (per ENC permit Floppy, USB-Disk(s)/media 1) or per e-mail), the current (IHO) ENC Base CDs, if applicable, the current (IHO) ENC Update CD.

3.

Installing ENC cell permits: Put the ENC permits Floppy Disk into the Floppy or the media in the USB-Disk(s), and in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Licensing press the button Install Permits from Device1). A Device Selection dialog box opens. Select the Floppy, CD/DVD drive or the USB-Disk(s), copy the permit file containing the permits from the Floppy, CD/DVD or USB-Disk(s) into the local ENC database. These processes can be observed in a dialog box. The question Transferring permits to all other systems? should be answered with OK. After the corresponding request, close the dialog box with Cancel.

☞ The file needed for the licensing process is called PERMIT.TXT. The procedure described must also be applied if these files were received by e-mail. In this case, you must create the ENC permits Floppy or copy the ENC permits files onto the USB-Disk(s)/media 2) yourself. If the above-mentioned files were transferred as an archive file (e.g. the .ZIP/.TAR/.GZ format), they must be decompressed or unpacked before. Installation as described is only possible if the files with the a.m. names are located on the Floppy or USB-media (if necessary, check this with a PC). The initial installation can now be continued with the transfer of the cell files as per Section 7.3.2: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Removable Device to Local Database" on page 266. Initial Installation of C-MAP ENC 1.

Before initial installation can take place, a subscription must be taken out with a provider. Here the user key file is needed (containing the system identification code among others, and the ENC cells to be used must be determined. When a DOS-formatted Floppy or USB-Disk(s)1) is inserted and the button Generate User Key File is then pressed in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Licensing, the Select Device dialog box opens. Select the wanted device and click on the OK button, the user key file with the name USER.USR is stored on the Floppy or on the USB-Disk(s). Send the file via e-mail or the Floppy to the provider. You can obtain the information on the available ENC cells in various ways, e.g. through the provider, or through the internet. If you have an ENC media from Jeppesen Marine: The table of contents of the CD details all the ENC cells available from the publisher of the CD at the time it was made; for the required operating actions, see page 257.

1) 2)

see also Section 3.7: "Using Removable Devices" on page 73 see footnote 1)

262

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts

Operating Instructions

7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC

Install permits from Device on the ENC databases Check of the permits installed on the local database Data backup of the permits installed on the local database Delete permits on the local database Install the Digital Certificate(s) for IHO ENC data Show the Digital Certificate(s) for IHO ENC data Delete the Digital Certificate(s) for IHO ENC data Display the User Permit Number for IHO ENC data; see page 261 Generate an ECDIS Passport for IHO ENC data; see page 265 Generate the system identification code for Jeppesen Marine ENC data

Fig. 7-8

The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Licensing

2.

You then receive the licence file, in which all ENC cell licences acquired by you are present (per ENC licence Floppy, USB-Disk(s) 1), or per e-mail), the current CM-ENC media.

3.

Installing C_MAP ENC cell licences: Put the ENC licence Floppy Disk into the Floppy or the external media with the ENC licence file(s) in the USB-Disk(s) and the newest CM-ENC CD into the CD/DVD drive or the newest CM-ENC file(s) on USB-media into another USB-Disk(s), and in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Licensing press the button Install Permits from Device. After the Select Device dialog box opened select the Floppy/USB-Disk(s), click the OK button, a file navigation dialog box opens to select the required permits file(s). Usable permits files are marked with (☞) in front of the file name and click OK. For validation now a Select Device dialog box opens to select the CD/DVD or USBDisk(s) with the newest CM-ENC media content to check against for validation. After clicking the OK button the licence information is checked and stored on all ENC databases of the system. These processes can be observed in a dialog box. If the standard CM-ENC CD is in the CD/DVD drive and the required permits Floppy Disk is in the Floppy the validation operation is starting automatically. After the corresponding request, close the dialog box with Cancel.

☞

The file needed for the licensing process is called password.usr. The procedure described must also be applied if this file was received by e-mail. In this case, you must create the ENC licence USB-Disk yourself.

The initial installation can now be continued with the transfer of the cell files as per Section 7.3.2: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Removable Device to Local Database" on page 266.

1)

see also Section 3.7: "Using Removable Devices" on page 73

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

263

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts 7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

Renewing the Cell Permits 1), Procuring New Cell Permits If existing permits are renewed or further permits are procured later, the procedure described above must be repeated. The corresponding cell files can be transferred by means of the Update function as per Section 7.3.4: "Update Function: Update of IHO ENC Cells on All Databases" on page 268 or 7.3.6. An ENC permits Floppy or USB-Disk(s) can also contain new permits which you have not ordered, even if you are not expressly informed about this. This is the case when cells are replaced by other cells. If all cells for which permits have been procured have been installed, you need not concern yourself with this, because the replacement cells are automatically installed by the Update function (see Section 7.3.4: "Update Function: Update of IHO ENC Cells on All Databases" on page 268 or 7.3.6) and the replaced cells are proposed for deletion. However, if you do not install all cells for which permits were procured, the replacement cells must be installed as per Section 7.3.2: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Removable Device to Local Database" on page 266. For this reason, you must determine the additionally installed permits already during the installation of the permits, in order to know which cells you then have to install. For further details, see page 272, N o t A l l C e l l s o f I H O E N C f o r W h i c h P e r m i t s a r e A v a i l a b l e a r e t o b e Installed. Deleting Permits ENC cell permits are generally not deleted automatically. If expired cell permits are not to be extended, these permits must be deleted manually. 1.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set ENC as the Type.

2.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Licensing, press the Delete Permits button. If the corresponding enquiry appears, select the ENC type(s) to be deleted.

3.

In the selection menu which then opens up, transfer those permits that are indicated by the text EXPIRED from the left-hand list to the right-hand list (for the list operating procedure, see also page 254). After pressing of the OK button of the selection menu and appropriate answering of the resulting safeguard question, the expired permits are deleted in the local ENC database.

If a transfer or update of ENC cells is to take place afterwards, these actions need only be performed on the local ENC database.

☞

If ENC cells are transferred (using the Transfer function or the Update function, independently of the source), all ENC permits on the local database are automatically copied to the ENC databases to which the transfer of the cells is taking place. Here permits that are not located on the local database are deleted from the other ENC databases.

USEFUL INFORMATION Checking the Installed Permits If difficulties occur in the display of cells for which a permit exists, the permits installed in the local ENC database can be checked: the check is initiated in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Licensing by pressing the button Verify Installed Permits. A dialog box opens to verify the installed ENC to Check against installed product list or Check against Removable Media. Choose the

1)

permits for IHO ENC cells or licences for C-MAP ENC cells. In the following, “permit” also stands for “licence”.

264

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts

Operating Instructions

7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC

required check. Then click on the OK-button. If the corresponding enquiry appears, select the ENC type(s) to be deleted. In the dialog box which then opens up, information about the check performed is given. ☞ If IHO ENCs from various providers are used, all permits are assembled here. ☞ On the individual equipment items, you can perform in the same way a check of the permits existing in the other ENC databases of the system. Performing Data Backup of the Installed Permits Data backup can be performed for the acquired permits too: put an empty, DOS-formatted Floppy Disk into the Floppy, and in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Licensing press the Permit Backup button. If the corresponding enquiry appears, select the ENC type(s) to be deleted. A Select Removable Media dialog box apears 1). Select the needed media. The permit file is then copied from the local ENC database to the selected media. A dialog box then opens up, containing information about each process that is completed. Installing the Digital Certificate for IHO ENC The public key is used for authentication of the IHO ENC cells. It need, and indeed may, only be changed when the provider requests that this be done. The menu for entering the public key is opened in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Licensing by means of the Install Digital Certificate button. It is possible to install certificates from various providers. A warning will be indicated if an IHO ENC cell is about to be authenticated by a non-IHO certificate from a different provider than IHO. Generating the ECDIS Passport for IHO ENC The system data which may possibly be needed by the provider of IHO ENC are compiled in the ECDIS Passport. When, after a DOS-formatted Floppy Disk has been inserted into the Floppy or a USB-media is inserted in USB-Disk(s)1), the Generate ECDIS Passport button in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Licensing is pressed and the entries which are then requested are performed: 1.

Contact Person

2.

Vessel E-MAIL

3.

Contact phone

4.

Contact fax

5.

Operator Remark

After filling out the requests and confirming with OK, a Select Device dialog box opens to select the device to store, the data is stored as an .xml file on the Floppy or USB-media, together with two other files which may needed for the interpretation of the .xml file.

☞

Parts of the content can be viewed and printed out at the PC.

Expiry of the Cell Permit of IHO ENC In the last month prior to expiry of the permit, you are made aware of this date by means of a message when you select the cell for display. After expiry of the permit, you can still display in the usual way the cells that exist in the ENC database. However, you do not receive any ENC Update CDs, and cells cannot be transferred. Thus, not all cells are up-to-date. When you select a cell for display, your attention is drawn to this fact by means of an appropriate message, the Chart Status field of the navigation data line becomes yellow, and the display Permit warn. appears there.

1)

see also Section 3.7: "Using Removable Devices" on page 73

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

265

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts 7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

End of the Subscription Licence of C-MAP Marine ENC Jeppesen Marine has defined two expiry dates for the end of a subscription licence: Subscription expiry date: This is the day on which the contractual relationship expires. After this date, no more updates are performed and the use of the data (then obsolete) may be dangerous; this is followed two months later by the Licence expiry date: There is now no legal basis for continuing to use the data. One month before the subscription expiry date, a message about the subscription expiry date is shown as soon as a C-MAP ENC cell affected by this date is displayed. From the subscription expiry date until the licence expiry date, a message about the licence expiry date is shown as soon as a C-MAP ENC cell affected by this date is displayed. In addition, the Chart Status field of the navigation data line becomes yellow, and the display Licence appears there. From the licence expiry date, there is a corresponding message as soon as a region affected by this date is shown in the chart display with the C-MAP ENC chart selected. In addition, the Chart Status field of the navigation data line becomes red, and the display Licence appears there. Checking the CM-ENC media If problems occur when accessing the CM-ENC CD, it is possible to check the consistency of the data contained there. This is done by means of the function Validate Data on CD-ROM provided in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Other Functions.

☞

This check can take 30 minutes. During this time, the CHARTPILOT cannot be used for other purposes.

Showing Information about the CM-ENC media The properties of the CM-ENC media can be displayed by means of the function View CD-ROM Version provided in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Other Functions. Showing the System ID for C-MAP ENC The system ID needed for the licensing of C-MAP ENC can be displayed by means of the function View System ID provided on the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Other Functions. It uniquely identifies the system installed on board your ship with regard to the installation of the ENC, and may be needed for servicing purposes.

7.3.2

Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Removable Device to Local Database

☞

For general information on this topic and further necessary steps, see page 249 and 259.

Application: Initial installation of (licensed and unlicensed) ENC cells Update of unlicensed ENC cells With the procedure described: All ENC cells existing on the CDs being used are transferred to the local database and updated there. If they are licensed ENC cells, the transfer is limited to those cells for which permits are installed on the local database.

☞

266

For more details on this topic, see page 282.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts

Operating Instructions

7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC

Preparations: If licensed ENC cells are to be transferred: Install all permits of the provider whose CD is being used to the local database, as per Section 7.3.1: "Permits for Licensed ENC cells" on page 261. If unlicensed ENC cells are to be updated: In all ENC databases, delete all cells of this provider, as per Section 7.3.8: "Deleting ENC Cells" on page 275. 1.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set ENC as the Type.

2.

Put the newest ENC Base CD 1) into the CD drive, and in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance set CD-ROM as the Source. If messages relating to the table of contents appear, answer with OK.

☞

Do not make a selection by regions before performing the next step (e.g. there must be no frame shown in the world chart).

3.

Press the Transfer button. If messages relating to the table of contents appear, answer with OK and press the Transfer button again.

4.

Under Destination, mark only CHARTPILOT (this one).

☞

Under Cells to be Transferred, leave all navigational purposes switched on.

5.

In the Transfer menu, click the OK button and, in the selection menu which then opens, enter all the files into the right-hand column by clicking Add All >> and press the OK button.

6.

When data of the IHO ENC are transferred, the dialog box ENC Cell Transfer then opens. There, define how the program should behave when certain errors occur during the transfer.

☞

This is used to decide whether faulty data are incorporated into the ENC database and whether ENC cells with faulty data are updated. This topic is explained in detail on page 283.

7.

After pressing of the OK button of the dialog box ENC Cell Transfer, transfer and data conversion begin. The dialog box Transferring ENC Cells appears. In its upper part, the process currently taking place is listed, and in the Iower part all errors and warnings occurring in the transfer and conversion process are listed. (What happens during this transfer is described on page 282.)

8.

When the transfer process has finished (you are informed of this in the dialog box Transferring ENC Cells), close the dialog box by means of the Cancel button. If there is an Update CD that is newer than the ENC Base CD being used, then it is probable that not all of the transferred cell files are up-to-date. The necessary updating is performed with step 9:

9.

7.3.3

Remove the ENC Base CD from the CD drive and insert the newest ENC Update CD. Then perform step 3 to step 8 once again.

Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Local to Other Databases

☞

For general information on this topic and further necessary steps, see page 249 and 259.

Application: Initial installation of (licensed and unlicensed) ENC cells Update of unlicensed ENC cells With the procedure described: All ENC cells 2) located in the local database are copied to all other ENC databases of the system. All ENC cell permits located on the local database are copied to all other ENC databases, whereas permits that are not on the local database are deleted from the other ENC databases.

1) 2)

For unlicensed ENC cells: the newest CD. Unlicensed ENC cells are not normally divided into Base CD and Update CD. Including the allocated Manual ENC Update files that are available there.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

267

CHARTPILOT

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts

Operating Instructions

7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC

Preparations: The transfer as per Section 7.3.2: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Removable Device to Local Database" on page 266 must have been carried out. All CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs must be switched on. If it is possible that the other databases could contain ENC cells for which you are not sure that they are up-to-date, delete all ENC cells from these databases as per Section 7.3.8: "Deleting ENC Cells" on page 275. If unlicensed ENC cells are to be updated: If this has not yet been done, delete all cells of this provider from the other ENC databases as per Section 7.3.8: "Deleting ENC Cells" on page 275.

☞

This transfer proceeds faster than the updating or transfer from Removable Device, since the data no longer have to be decrypted, decompressed and converted.

1.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set ENC as the Type.

2.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, as the Source select the equipment item that is currently being operated (this one).

3.

Press the Transfer button. Under Destination, mark all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs.

☞

Under Cells to be Transferred, leave all navigational purposes switched on.

4.

In the Transfer menu, press the OK button and, in the selection menu which then opens, enter all the files into the right-hand column by clicking Add All >>.

5.

After pressing of the OK button of the selection menu, the transfer begins. The dialog box Remote Transfer of ENC Cells appears. In its upper part, the process currently taking place is listed, and in the Iower part all errors and warnings occurring in the transfer process are listed.

6.

When the transfer process has finished (you are informed of this in the dialog box Remote Transfer of ENC Cells), close the dialog box by means of the Cancel button.

7.3.4

Update Function: Update of IHO ENC Cells on All Databases

☞

For general information on this topic, see page 249 and 259.

Application: Update of the IHO ENC cells in all ENC databases of the system after receiving a new ENC (Base or Update) CD or after generating an Online Update CD, USB-Disk(s) or Floppy. Installation of IHO ENC cells for post-procured permits in all ENC databases of the system. With the procedure described 1): All ENC cell permits located on the local database are copied to all other ENC databases, whereas permits that are not located on the local database are deleted from the other ENC databases. On the local database, all ENC cells are updated for which permits are available there. (If new permits were installed in the meantime, the corresponding cells are also transferred and updated.) The updated cells are transferred to all other ENC databases of the system. Outdated cells that are no longer supported are deleted (after a safeguard question).

☞

1)

Please note: The Update function analyses the local database, and only the changes that are necessary for this are also carried out in the other databases. On the other databases, this will only cause no errors if they have the same status (date of issue) as the local database. This is one of the reasons why all databases of the system must generally always have the same status.

For the ENC cells of the provider whose Update CD is being used

268

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts

Operating Instructions

7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC

Preparations: All CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs must be switched on. Permits that were procured after the last update must have been installed in the local database as per Section 7.3.1: "Permits for Licensed ENC cells" on page 261. For an online update: The Online Update CD or USB-media was produced. It must contain all cumulative updates based on the Base CD last used for an update. 1.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set ENC as the Type.

2.

Put the Online Update CD/DVD or the most recent IHO ENC CD/DVD into the CD/DVD drive or the Online Update USB-Disk(s) in the USB-port. ☞ The most recent ENC CD/DVD is usually an Update CD/DVD. If, after the last Update CD/DVD, a Base CD/DVD has appeared, that CD/DVD must be inserted. What is important is that it must be the latest ENC CD/DVD.

3.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set CD/DVD or USB-Disk(s) (if the files of the latest ENC data is copied on a USB-media) as the Source. If a message about the table of contents appears, answer it with OK.

4.

Press the button Utilities > Chart Maintenance > Update. The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > Update opens 1). Under Destination there, mark all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs.

5.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > Update, press the OK button.

6.

As a result, the dialog box Type of Update opens up. If not a standard or base CD or a USB-media with standard file structure is used a Select Directory or File dialog box opens up to select the required files or directories to update.

7.

In the dialog box Type of Update, press the button Update based upon installed permits.

☞

For the function of the button Update based upon installed cells, see page 272.

8.

In the dialog box Type of Update, press the OK button. As a result, the update process is started and the dialog box Updating ENC Chart Database opens up.

9.

If another CD/removable device has to be inserted, a request to do that appears in an additional dialog box.

10. In the selection menu, press the OK button and, in the dialog box ENC Cell Transfer which then opens, define how the program should behave when conversion errors occur during the transfer.

☞

This is used to decide whether faulty data are included in the ENC database or whether ENC cells are not updated in the event of conversion errors. This topic is explained in detail on page 283.

11. The program compares the cells on all other databases with the cells on the local database. If necessary, the respective cells will be transferred to the other database. If the program detects that the local ENC database contains cells that are no longer supported or for which no permits exist, the corresponding message is shown. After confirmation, a selection menu appears in which these cells are listed on the left. It is recommended that these cells be deleted (use Add All >> to enter all cells into the right-hand column and then press OK). The deletion is then carried out in all databases of the system. 12. When a message stating completion of the update appears, you can close the dialog box Updating ENC Chart Database by means of the Cancel button. It is recommended that a check of the installed cells be performed afterwards as per Section 7.3.10: "Check of the ENC Cells Installed" on page 276.

1)

Is not shown when only this CHARTPILOT is installed.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

269

CHARTPILOT

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts

Operating Instructions

7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC

7.3.5

Real Time Update (RTU) for C-MAP ENC

☞ ☞

For general information on this topic and further necessary steps, see page 249 and 259. The procedure can be performed by any subscriber of the Jeppesen Marine ENC data. A special registration is not required. IMPORTANT: This online update does not replace the regular updates. Even if online updates are performed at regular intervals, an update must still be carried out with every new CD received from Jeppesen Marine.

The 1. 2. 3.

Real Time Update is performed in three steps: Generating the RTU request; see below. Producing the Online Update CD 1); see below. Performing the update as per Section 7.3.6: "Update Function: Update of the C-MAP ENC Cells on All Databases" on page 271.

A prerequisite for successful updating by RTU is that an update according to Section 7.3.6: "Update Function: Update of the C-MAP ENC Cells on All Databases" on page 271 must have been performed completely and successfully with the last CD received from Jeppesen Marine. Generating the RTU Request and Producing the Online Update CD 1.

Put a DOS-formatted Floppy Disk into the Floppy or an external media in the USB-Disk(s), and in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Other Functions press the button Generate RTU Request. After selecting the storing device in the Select Device dialog box, has been answered with OK, an RTU request is generated and written to the selected device (Floppy, USB-Disk(s)) as a file with the name ENC_[date]_[UTC].org. This process can be observed in a dialog box.

2.

When this file is sent as the attachment of an e-mail to the Jeppesen Marine RTU server, the server then returns one or more e-mails after a short while, each with one or more files attached.

☞ ☞

The e-mail address must be requested from Jeppesen Marine or, alternatively, it may be obtained from the Jeppesen Marine homepage on the Internet. The entire process is automatic. Any message in the body of the own e-mail is ignored. The file name is used to indicate how many files belong in total to this update: u001x002.ans Number of files belonging to this update Sequential number of this file

3.

Producing the Online Update media: Label a media (CD) (best done by including the chart type and date) and burn all the files received to this media. It is also possible to store the received data on a USB-media.

Use this Online Update media to perform an update as per Section 7.3.6: "Update Function: Update of the C-MAP ENC Cells on All Databases" on page 271.

1)

If the data volume is low, the data can also be transferred to a Floppy and if too large it is possible to use a USB-media or device ( see also Section 3.7: "Using Removable Devices" on page 73). The term “Online Update CD” is then understood to mean this Floppy/USBmedia in the following.

270

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts

Operating Instructions

7.3.6

7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC

Update Function: Update of the C-MAP ENC Cells on All Databases

☞

For general information on this topic, see page 249 and 259.

Application: Update of the C-MAP ENC cells in all ENC databases of the system after receiving a new CM-ENC CD or for a Real Time Update (after generating the Online Update CD/DVD) 1). Installation of C-MAP ENC cells for post-procured licences in all ENC databases of the system. With the procedure described: All C-MAP ENC cell licences located then on the local database are copied to all other ENC databases, whereas licences that are not located on the local database are deleted from the other ENC databases. On all ENC database, all cells are updated for which licences are available there. Outdated cells that are no longer supported are deleted on all ENC databases. Preparations: All CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs must be switched on. Licences that were procured after the last update must have been installed in the local database as per Section 7.7.1: "Licences for CM-93/3Pro Cells" on page 299. For a Real Time Update: The Online Update CD/USB-media was produced in accordance with Section 7.3.5: "Real Time Update (RTU) for C-MAP ENC" on page 270. 1.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set ENC as the Type.

2.

Put the CM-ENC CD, the Online Update CD into the CD drive or the USB-Disk(s) in the USB-port. If a new CM-ENC media has been received with which no update has been performed yet, this CD must always be used. This also applies when its issue date lies before the date of the last online update that was performed. In this case, perform an online update again (with a renewed update request) after carrying out the update with the CM-ENC CD.

3.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set CD/DVD, USB-Disk(s) or Floppy as the Source. If a message about the table of contents appears, answer it with OK.

4.

Press the button Utilities > Chart Maintenance > Update. The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > Update opens 2). Under Destination there, mark all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs.

5.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > Update, press the OK button. By means of the dialog box which then opens up, you are (again) requested to insert the latest CD. If you have not done this in step 2, do it now and press the OK button of the dialog box. When not using a standard CD or having standard file structure on USB-Disk(s) a Select File or Directory dialog box opens to select the required file(s) or directory. As a result, the update process is started and the dialog box Updating ENC Chart Database opens up.

6.

When a message stating completion of the update appears, you can close the dialog box Updating ENC Chart Database by means of the Cancel button.

It is recommended that a check of the installed cells be performed afterwards as per Section 7.3.10: "Check of the ENC Cells Installed" on page 276. If the update was aborted for some reason, then the databases will contain cells from different CD versions. Therefore the update must be initiated again as soon as possible and brought to completion.

1) 2)

see also Section 7.3.5: "Real Time Update (RTU) for C-MAP ENC" on page 270 Is not shown when only this CHARTPILOT is installed.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

271

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts 7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC

7.3.7

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

Divergent Procedures for Transfer and Update In some cases, it is useful to deviate from the procedures described in Section 7.3.2: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Removable Device to Local Database" on page 266 to 7.3.6 for the transfer and update: Initial installation of the Licensed ENC cells using the Update Function The initial installation of the licensed ENC cells should be performed as per Section 7.3.4: "Update Function: Update of IHO ENC Cells on All Databases" on page 268 or 7.3.6, if all permits for the cells to be installed were installed (as per Section 7.3.1: "Permits for Licensed ENC cells" on page 261) on at least the local database beforehand. This approach is will take several hours, but it is the best way to perform a full, system-wide update. If data are to be installed in a hurry and if only a subset of the licenced cells are needed at the moment, the transfer-procedure may be used. Afterwards, all licenced cells must be installed by means of the update function as soon as possible. see Section 7.3.2: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Removable Device to Local Database" on page 266 for details. Changing from CM-ENC to IHO ENC or vice versa In case of a complete change you have to remove the complete database before you install the new type. See Section 7.2.4: "Deleting the Charts or Cell Files" on page 251. Initial installation of the Unlicensed ENC cells on all Databases in one Step The initial installation of unlicensed ENC cells can be performed with the procedure as per Section 7.3.2: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Removable Device to Local Database" on page 266 directly in all databases of the system. The transfer as per Section 7.3.3: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Local to Other Databases" on page 267 is then no longer necessary. With transfer as per Section 7.3.2: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Removable Device to Local Database" on page 266, mark all CHARTPILOTs in step 4 under Destination in such cases. ENC merged from CM- ENC and IHO ENC It is recommended that you do not use different sources of licences for the same area, to be sure that you have a consistent system. Not All Cells of IHO ENC for Which Permits are Available are to be Installed

☞

In this case, the initial installation is not possible by means of the Update function (see above).

With the initial installation as per Section 7.3.2: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Removable Device to Local Database" on page 266, an appropriate selection must be performed; for the selection procedure, see Section 7.2.6: "Selecting the Charts or Cell Files" on page 252. Then perform the transfer as per Section 7.3.3: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Local to Other Databases" on page 267 to all other databases. Such an initial installation with subsequent transfer must also be carried out for new cells for which permits were procured afterwards. With the update as per Section 7.3.4: "Update Function: Update of IHO ENC Cells on All Databases" on page 268, in this case, the function Update based upon installed cells must be selected in step 7.

272

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts 7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC

If cells were replaced by other cells by the provider, the replaced cells are proposed for deletion during the update (and should also be deleted), but the replacement cells are not automatically transferred (because the setting Update based upon installed cells was selected). They must therefore be transferred to the local database before the update as per Section 7.3.2: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Removable Device to Local Database" on page 266. In such a case, you will automatically be sent the required permits per ENC cells permits Floppy 1) or per e-mail by the provider. You will receive the information on which new cells are to be transferred when you install the permits provided on the Floppy or USB-media as per Section 7.3.1: "Permits for Licensed ENC cells" on page 261. All cells to be installed because of new permits are marked with the message Cell (name) : Permit added to permit database. If desired, print out this list. If not all cells have already been installed, it is also advisable to transfer only the replacement cells which belong to the region covered by the installed cells. This is achieved when a regional selection (Section 7.2.6.3: "Selection according to Agency Codes and to Cell Names / Chart Numbers" on page 254) is performed before the selection by cell names (Section 7.2.6.1: "Selection according to Regions" on page 253). Not All the Available Unlicensed ENC Cells of a Provider are to be Installed For the initial installation and for each update: 1.

On the local ENC database, delete all cells of the provider as per Section 7.3.8: "Deleting ENC Cells" on page 275.

2.

During transfer as per Section 7.3.2: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Removable Device to Local Database" on page 266, select the required cells; for the selection procedure, see Section 7.2.6: "Selecting the Charts or Cell Files" on page 252.

3.

On all other ENC databases, delete all cell files of the provider as per Section 7.3.8: "Deleting ENC Cells" on page 275.

4.

Perform the transfer as per Section 7.3.3: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Local to Other Databases" on page 267 to all other databases.

The Number of Unlicensed ENC Cells of a Provider is Small in Relation to the Number of Other Installed ENC Cells For the initial installation and for each update:

1)

1.

On the local ENC database, delete all cells of the provider as per Section 7.3.8: "Deleting ENC Cells" on page 275.

2.

Perform the transfer as per Section 7.3.2: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Removable Device to Local Database" on page 266, if applicable only with selected cells; see above.

3.

On all other ENC databases, delete all cell files of the provider as per Section 7.3.8: "Deleting ENC Cells" on page 275.

4.

During transfer as per Section 7.3.3: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Local to Other Databases" on page 267, select only the cells transferred with step 2; for the selection procedure, see Section 7.2.6: "Selecting the Charts or Cell Files" on page 252.

The permits of such new cells can also be contained on a permits Floppy which you are still expecting (because permits have been renewed or new ones have been ordered).

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

273

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts 7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

Update of the Installed Unlicensed ENC Cells using the Update Function The Update function can also be used to update unlicensed cells. Here only those cells which are contained in the CD/USB-Disk(s)/Floppy being used and which are already installed on the local database will be updated. No cells are proposed for deletion. This approach is therefore only advisable if the provider regularly announces: which cells have been published anew, so that they can be installed subsequently, as described on page 274, and which cells are no longer supported, so that they can be deleted as per Section 7.3.8: "Deleting ENC Cells" on page 275. With the procedure described, the changes made in the local database are also performed in all other ENC databases.

☞

In the other databases, this will only cause no errors if they have the same status (issue date) as the local database. This is one of the reasons why all databases of the system must generally always have the same status.

Preparations: All CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs must be switched on. 1.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set ENC as the Type.

2.

Put the most recent ENC CD into the CD drive or the USB-media in the USB-Disk(s).

3.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set CD/DVD or USB-Disk(s) as the Source. If a message about the table of contents appears, answer it with OK.

4.

Press the button Utilities > Chart Maintenance > Update. The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > Update opens 1). Under Destination there, mark all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs.

5.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > Update, press the OK button. By means of the dialog box which then opens up, you are (again) requested to insert the latest CD. If you have not done this in step 2, do it now and press the OK button of the dialog box. When not using a standard CD or having standard file structure on USB-media a Select File or Directory dialog box opens to select the required file(s) or directory. As a result, the update process is started and the dialog box Updating ENC Chart Database opens up.

6.

In the selection menu, press the OK button and, in the dialog box ENC Cell Transfer which then opens, define how the program should behave when conversion errors occur during the transfer.

☞ 7.

This is used to decide whether faulty data are included in the ENC database or whether ENC cells are not updated in the event of conversion errors. This topic is explained in detail on page 283.

When a message stating completion of the update appears, you can close the dialog box Updating ENC Chart Database by means of the Cancel button.

Subsequent Installation of Single Unlicensed ENC Cells The new cells are transferred to all ENC databases in one working step. This is done with the procedure described in Section 7.3.2: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Removable Device to Local Database" on page 266, with the following deviation: In step 4 under Destination, mark all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs. In step 5, transfer only the files that bear the names of the new cells into the right-hand list of the selection menu (for selection menu, see page 254).

☞

1)

Often, there will be several files for a particular cell on the CD/USB-media (for explanations of this, see page 277).

Is not shown when only this CHARTPILOT is installed.

274

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts

Operating Instructions

7.3.8

7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC

Deleting ENC Cells Application: There are so many reasons why it may be necessary to delete cells from the databases that they cannot be listed here. Reference to the necessity of deleting cells is made at the corresponding points. By means of the following procedures, it is possible to delete any desired selection of ENC cells on each ENC database that exists in the system. The associated Manual ENC Update files, if there are any, are automatically deleted as well. Permits are not deleted in this process. Deleting Selected Cells The listed selection procedures are described in Section 7.2.6: "Selecting the Charts or Cell Files" on page 252. 1.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set ENC as the Type.

2.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, specify under Source the equipment item on which the cells are to be deleted. This unit must be switched on.

3.

If the selection is to be made by regions or according to navigational purposes, open the corresponding frame in the world chart and press the Delete button. The Delete menu then opens.

4.

It is possible to select according to navigational purpose in the Delete menu. With the aid of the button Include Touched Cells, it can be specified there whether only those cells are to be deleted that are situated completely within the frame, or also those cells that are only touched by the frame.

5.

If the ENC database contains cells of different ENC types, a box also appears with a button for each of these types. By pressing the corresponding buttons, a selection can be made here according to these ENC types.

☞

Because the cells selected in the world chart are marked green, it is possible in this way to show where the cells of a particular ENC type are located.

6.

In the Delete menu, press the OK button and then, in the selection menu which opens, perform the selection according to cell names or select all files by clicking on Add All >>.

7.

When the OK button is pressed in the selection menu, the cells listed in the right-hand list are deleted in the database specified by step 2. Alternatively, deletion can be prevented by pressing the Cancel button.

Deleting All ENC Cells of a Database 1.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set ENC as the Type.

2.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, specify under Source the equipment item on which the cells are to be deleted. This unit must be switched on. ☞ Do not make a selection by regions before performing the next step (there must be no frame shown in the world chart).

3.

Press the Delete button and press the OK button in the Delete menu.

4.

In the selection menu which then opens, click on Add All >>. After the OK button is pressed, all ENC cells are deleted in the database specified by step 2. Alternatively, deletion can be prevented by pressing the Cancel button.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

275

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts 7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC

7.3.9

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

Later Update of an Individual Equipment Item If an update was not performed on all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs, the non-updated databases must be updated as soon as possible. To do this, repeat the update-procedure, and make sure that all destinations are selected for the update. After the update procedure is finished, perform a verification on all destinations in the system.

7.3.10

Check of the ENC Cells Installed After an update and whenever there are doubts about the consistency or up-to-dateness of the database, the databases should be checked by means of the following function. The procedure depends on the type of ENC. Check of the IHO ENC Cells 1.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Other Functions, press the button Verify Installed Cells.

2.

Apart from the local database, other databases can also be checked in one working step: Under Destination, mark the relevant databases and click the OK button.

3.

If the ENC database contains cells of different ENC types, in the dialog box which then opens up, select IHO ENC and press OK.

4.

In the dialog box which then opens up, choose the reference against which the check is to be performed: Check against installed product list: Choose this in normal cases (for the contents of this product list: see P r o d u c t L i s t on page 279). Check against Removable Media: For special cases, e.g. if the difference between the contents of the database and the contents of a CD/DVD, Floppy or USB-Media (older or newer) is of interest.

5.

Press the OK button. If Check against Removable Media was chosen, insert the CD/DVD, Floppy or USB-Media now, at the latest, and click the OK button in the box with the corresponding request.

6.

As a result, the check is started and the corresponding dialog box opens up. If no errors are found, the message No errors found is shown in the box. Otherwise, a reports on the errors is provided in the Errors/Warnings part of the dialog box. The following messages may need explanation: -

ERROR: Cell (cell name): No entry found in product list! This message is shown when the data provider has deleted the cell from the product list, e.g. because it is no longer supported. Recommendation: Enquire at the provider

-

WARNING: (cell name): External reference file (file name) is missing! This message is shown when the data provider has indicated in the cell file that an additional file contains supplementary information but this additional file was not found. Recommendation: Enquire at the provider, or delete the cell file and re-install it on all ENC databases.

Check of the C-MAP ENC Cells

276

1.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Other Functions, press the button Verify Installed Cells.

2.

Apart from the local database, other databases can also be checked in one working step: Under Destination, mark the relevant databases and click the OK button.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts

Operating Instructions

7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC

3.

If the ENC database contains cells of different ENC types, in the dialog box which then opens up, select Jeppesen Marine ENC and press OK.

4.

Since there is no product list for Jeppesen Marine ENC cells, it is only possible to check against the CM-ENC CD and against the Online Update CD or against USB-media 1). Now, at the latest, insert the CD/DVD or USB-Disk(s) and click the OK button in the box with the corresponding request.

5.

As a result, the check is started and the corresponding dialog box opens up. If no errors are found, the message No errors found is shown in the box. Otherwise, a reports on the errors is provided in the Errors/Warnings part of the dialog box. The following messages may need explanation:

☞

Because only cell files, but no external reference files are transferred during a Real Time Update, the message WARNING: (cell name): External reference file (file name) is missing! is shown for all cells updated by RTU for which additional files are intended. At the next regular update, the external reference files are transferred and so these messages are no longer shown. If this message still appears after a regular update, it is advisable to ask the provider about the possible cause.

Check of the Unlicensed ENC Cells Unlicensed cells can only be checked for consistency, not for up-to-dateness.

7.3.11

1.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Other Functions, press the button Verify Installed Cells.

2.

Apart from the local database, other databases can also be checked in one working step: Under Destination, mark the relevant databases and click the OK button.

3.

If the ENC database contains cells of different ENC types, in the dialog box which then opens up, select Unlicensed ENC and press OK.

4.

As a result, the check is started and the corresponding dialog box opens up. If no errors are found, the message No errors found is shown in the box. Otherwise, a reports on the errors is provided in the Errors/Warnings part of the dialog box.

Other Useful Information about the Data Maintenance of the IHO ENC Cells

Base Files and Update Files of the Cells on external media; Cell Files in the Databases The ENC files usually supplied on external media are different from the files contained on the hard disk drives in the ENC databases 2). Cell files on the external media: For every cell of the ENC, there is a base file. If changes are necessary, an update file is generated, containing the changes only. If further changes are then necessary, a further update file is generated, containing only the new changes. In this way, for every cell a number of update files can result which all refer to the one base file of the cell and to the update files previously issued for this base file. This sequence is interrupted at some time by the issuing of a base file for a new edition or for a reissue. When the new edition is issued or a re-issue is made, the new base file contains all changes published up until then by means of update files, and often additional changes that were not yet contained in the last update file.

1) 2)

see also Section 3.7: "Using Removable Devices" on page 73 For this, the IHO uses the term SENC (System Electronic Navigational Chart).

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

277

CHARTPILOT

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts

Operating Instructions

7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC

After a new edition has been issued, the edition number is incremented, but after a re-issue the cell retains its old edition number. The update files that had been issued up until then and the old base file thus become invalid. The -

file names consist of the name of the cell and the file extension. The extension 000 indicates the base file. Following a new edition, the update files are given a serial extension-number beginning at 001. After a re-issue, the count of the update files does not begin at 001 but is resumed instead. The file names of different editions do not differ.

DE416050.000 File extension: 000 = base file, > 000 = update file Production number Navigational purpose, see page 81 Agency code, see page 255

Name of the cell

Cell files in the ENC databases: For each cell, there exists in the ENC databases of the equipment items only one file, to which the most recent changes are added during an update. In addition, the cell files of the ENC database differ from those of the CDs/USB-Disk(s) through the data format: In the database, the files are stored in a format that is optimized for the everyday use of the data. Files of the unlicensed ENC cells are stored on the CDs/USB-media in a transfer-specific format defined in the IHO standard S-57. To be able to use the data, they must be converted into the database format. This is done during the transfer or update. Files of the licensed ENC cells are compressed and encrypted by the provider on the basis of the S-57 format. During the transfer or update, these files must therefore be decrypted, decompressed and converted into the database format. ENC Base exchange sets and ENC Update excahnge sets of the IHO ENC 1) The files of the licensed cells are distributed over two different types of data: ENC Base sets: When one or more base sets are issued, They usually contains all cell changes that are necessary at that time. For changed cells for which a new edition is not issued at the same time, the Base CD therefore also contains the update files. ENC Base sets therefore contain the base files of all cells that were issued when the Base set was issued, all update files that were issued for these base files when the Base set was issued, in addition, the product list representing the update status at the time when the Base set was issued; see below. ENC Update set: The next changes in the set of data (new update files, new editions, first editions for new cells) are all contained in an Update set. This Update set therefore refers to the Base set(s) that was issued last. After the issuing of an Update set, further changes are published cumulatively in the same way on the following Update set. Therefore, for an update it is always sufficient to use the current Base CD together with the most recent Update set.

1)

Typically one medium contains one exchange set

278

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts

Operating Instructions

7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC

ENC Update CDs contain only additions to the Base set(s), i.e. all update files issued after appearance of the Base set(s), frequently, base files of new editions, if appropriate, first editions of cell files (base files) in addition, the product list representing the update status at the time when the Update set was issued; see below. This sequence is interrupted at some time by the issuing of new Base set(s) - see above. When it is issued, the old Base sets and all Update sets previously issued become invalid.

Checks the update status of the ENC cells in the local database; see page 276 Deletion of the complete ENC database; see page 252

Displays the list of available IHO ENC cells (product list); see page 279. Transfers the product list from the CD/USB-media into the local ENC database 1). Deletion of an installed product List; see page 281 Displays current information from the provider of IHO ENC cells; see page 286. Shows the replacement info; see page 282 Checks the consistency of the data on the Jeppesen Marine CD; see page 266 Shows the information about the Jeppesen Marine CD; see page 266 Shows the system ID needed for installing Jeppesen Marine ENC cells; see page 266 Generates an RTU request for execution of an online update; see page 270. 1) This also takes place automatically for all ENC databases of the system when the Update function is used - see page 279.

Fig. 7-9

The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Other Functions

Product List

Fig. 7-10

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

The Product List Window

279

CHARTPILOT

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts 7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC

Operating Instructions

Each data exchange set (Update or Base set(s)) of IHO ENC cells contains a product list detailing all available cells, together with the corresponding file status valid at the time of medium manufacture. Meaning of the terms: Name: Name of the cell Sts: Status of licence: P = permit installed Edition: Current edition number Issue Date: Date when the current base file was issued Latest Upd. Issue Date: Issue date of the last update file that was published for the current base file Latest Upd. Number: Number of update files published up to this time for the current base file Base Cell Upd. Number: Last update file that was incorporated into the base file during a re-issue Last Upd. Number for prev. Edition: Total number of update files published up to this time for the previous base file (C)ompress (E)ncrypt: C=1; E=1: File is compressed/encrypted Base Cell Location: The medium on which actual Base Cell is located ☞ If a cell has been replaced, a list of cells as replacement is displayed in the line underneath the data of the appropriate cell For each provider of IHO ENC cells, there is a product list in each ENC database. During a transfer or update, it is automatically replaced by the latest product list of the provider. The program uses this to generate another product list detailing all cells which occur in one of the provider-product lists in the ENC database. For each cell, it enters the most up-to-date status of those it finds in the provider-product lists. This “merged” product list can be viewed and printed out, just like the product list contained on the medium which is currently inserted: Showing the Product List: In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Other Functions, press the button Show Product List. In the dialog box which then opens up, select Product List on CHARTPILOT to display the “merged” product list located in the database or Product List on Removable Device if the product list 1) located on the currently inserted CD/DVD or USB-Disk(s) is to be shown, and then press the OK button. The product list appears and can be printed out by means of the Print button in the dialog box. Deleting one Product List After the installation of the first IHO ENC cell from your new supplier we recommend to delete the Product List from your previous supplier. A new Product list will be installed automaticly with the next IHO ENC cell installation if neccesary .

☞

1)

It is not possible to delete the last File from the Chartpilot! At least one file must remain.

1.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set ENC as the Type.

2.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, press the button ENC Other Functions.

3.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, ENC Other Functions press the button Delete Product List.

If you obtain ENC cells from both Primar Stavanger and IC-ENC, you may notice that their product lists hardly differ. This is because these two providers synchronize their product lists.

280

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts

Operating Instructions

4.

7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC

When the OK button is pressed the selected Product List will be deleted. Deletion can be prevented by pressing the Cancel button.

Deletion of the selectet Product List Fig. 7-11

Closes the window

Open the helptext window

Deletion a Product list

Operating the Product List; Showing Listed Cells in the World Chart The positions of all cells which are included in the product list are shown in the world chart, irrespective of the navigational purposes. Cells for which permits are available are shown in green.

Contents: See text.

Prints of the product list (all pages!) Fig. 7-12

Closes the list

The product list

By clicking in the world chart, the cell located at the clicked position is marked in the list. If several cells are available at the clicked position, this is indicated. Repeated clicking of the position marks all cells in the list in succession. A cell can also be marked by clicking in the list. In the world chart, the marked cell is highlighted in orange.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

281

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts 7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

Internal Process of the Transfer (Transfer Function as per Section 7.3.2: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Removable Device to Local Database" on page 266) For the transfer, the program uses the list which was created in the selection menu on the right-hand side (step 5, see page 267). In the case of licensed cells, this list only includes the files of cells for which permits are available in the local database. For each cell for which a file is listed there, first the base file is transferred and then the update files: A base file is only transferred if the cell located in the local database is based on an older edition or on the same one, and in the case of the same edition only if no update has been incorporated so far. An update file is only transferred if the associated base file and all update files issued until then have already been incorporated into the cell located on the database. Update files are therefore always transferred in a continuously increasing order.

☞

The fact that, for each transfer, unlicensed files are converted and licensed files decrypted, decompressed and converted (see B a s e F i l e s a n d U p d a t e F i l e s o f t h e C e l l s o n e x t e r n a l m e d i a ; C e l l F i l e s i n t h e D a t a b a s e s on page 277) and that the contents of the update files are then incorporated into the cell files located in the database will no longer be mentioned here every time.

The most frequent cases in which error/warning messages about the transfer process appear in the lower list of the box which then opens are: -

Owing to a conversion error, the (base or update) file was not transferred: ERROR: Cell ’file name’: Failed to install cell to database!

-

The cell located on the database already has at least the status which would have been achieved with the selected file: WARNING: ’file name’: ENC Update ’a.b’ is already installed in SENC! (a = edition of the cell; b = update No.)

-

The selected update file cannot be transferred, because not all older update files have already been incorporated into the cell in the database. ERROR: ’file name’: UPDATE SEQUENCE: Can’t Update SENC ’a.b’ to Edition.Update ’a.x’! (a = edition of the cell on which the cell located in the database is based; b = the last update No. incorporated into the database; x = update No. of the file that lead to this message)

-

For the selected update file, there is no cell on the database. ERROR: ’file name’: Can’t update, base cell is not installed!

If it is stated in an update file that the entire associated base file is no longer valid and should be deleted, the program halts and requests confirmation of the deletion in a separate dialog box. In addition, the following message appears in the dialog box: ATTENTION: ’file name’: CANCEL BASE CELL : SENC cells should be deleted! In the case of licensed cells, it is possible that additional error/warning messages of a self-explanatory nature are shown. Information about Replacement Info If the provider(s) of the chart data have noted the replacement information within the product list, the list will be analyzed and checked during the IHO ENC update process. If permits for the update of a cell are missing or some cells are not installed, a protocol will be saved which can be opened using the Show Replacement Info button.

282

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts

Operating Instructions

7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC

Handling of Conversion Errors Unfortunately, faulty ENC files are available on the market, and these lead to errors during the conversion process. It is clear that these data cannot be used to create an ENC database that is both complete and error-free, but a database that is either as complete as possible 1) or one that is free of errors. The program gives the operator the opportunity to decide which of the two objectives should be achieved when conversion errors are encountered. Moreover, thanks to detailed error reports, the program also makes it possible for the operator to decide for each conversion error whether the faulty file should be transferred. This possibility is described under A n a l y s i s o f C o n v e r s i o n E r r o r s on page 284.

☞ ☞

When making the decision on which objective to achieve, one should be aware that most of the conversion errors caused by faulty files are of a formal nature and of little nautical relevance, but that at the same time it cannot be excluded that hazardous nautical errors may possibly arise in this way. The error frequency depends on the region (and hence on the manufacturer of the files). In some regions, the files contain so many errors 2) that only a few ENC cells would be left in an error-free database; for this reason, only the use of a fairly complete database (but one containing errors) is advisable in such cases.

The database should be as complete as possible: This is done by also including cells in the database with which conversion errors have been encountered. Here it is necessary to accept nautically relevant errors in the cell. The cells are not marked as being faulty, and the errors are not detectable as such in the display of the cell. This objective is achieved by activating the function Transfer on Error in the dialog box ENC Cell Transfer before commencing the transfer or update (step 6 on page 267 or step 10 on page 269). During the transfer or update, the files for which conversion errors occurred are listed under Errors/Warnings in the dialog box. If it was not possible to transfer an ENC file (base file or update file) because of the conversion errors, this is also reported there.

☞

Details on the errors that occurred during the last transfer of the base file and that occurred during the transfer of the last update file are displayed in the Info box of the Chart Maintenance subroutine (see page 285) and in the Info box which appears when the cell is used.

Starts the transfer or update

Aborts the transfer or update

If the errors are to be analysed

Fig. 7-13

1) 2)

If the database should be as complete as possible

If the database should be free of errors

The dialog box ENC Cell Transfer

“As complete as possible” because some files also contain errors that make conversion of the file impossible. A large error frequency is the typical result of initial problems with production. It may be assumed that the situation will improve in the short or medium term.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

283

CHARTPILOT

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts

Operating Instructions

7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC

The database should be free of errors: With this approach, the conversion of a file is aborted as soon as the program detects an error. The corresponding cells on the ENC database are therefore not updated. They do not contain any conversion errors but content-related errors that were supposed to have been corrected through the update. To obtain an error-free database, these cells must be deleted. To achieve this objective, the following steps are necessary: 1.

Before commencing the transfer (step 6 on page 267) or update (step 10 on page 269, or step 6 on page 274), activate the function Skip on Error in the dialog box ENC Cell Transfer.

2.

Make a note of the cells for which the following messages have appeared in the lower list of box which opens during the transfer or update (if necessary, print out this list): ERROR: Cell ’file name’: Failed to install cell to database! ERROR: ’file name’: UPDATE SEQUENCE: Can’t Update SENC ’a.b’ to Edition.Update ’a.x’!

3.

On all databases, delete these cells as per Section 7.3.8: "Deleting ENC Cells" on page 275.

It is recommended that a check of the installed cells be performed afterwards as per Section 7.3.10: "Check of the ENC Cells Installed" on page 276. Analysis of Conversion Errors During a transfer or update, details may be shown on the conversion errors which occurred. For each individual conversion error which occurred, you can then decide whether the faulty file should be transferred. Alternatively, the producer should be able to use these data to clarify the nautical relevance of the error and to correct the error in a future edition. 1.

Before commencing the transfer or update (step 6 on page 267, or step 10 on page 269), activate the function Halt on Error in the dialog box ENC Cell Transfer.

2.

As soon as a conversion error occurs during the transfer or update, the program halts and the dialog box ENC Conversion Error opens. With the button Details provided there, another dialog box is opened with details on the conversion error which occurred. If necessary, print out the details and close the box.

Information about the faulty file

This (faulty) file is to be transferred. Fig. 7-14

3.

284

Opens a dialog box with detailed information about the faulty file (for specialists only). The data can also be printed out by means of the Print button which is provided there.

This and all further (faulty) files are to be transferred.

This (faulty) file is not to be transferred.

This and all further (faulty) files are not to be transferred.

The dialog box ENC Conversion Error

After you have decided in the dialog box ENC Cell Transfer whether the file should be transferred despite any errors (by pressing the Transfer button) or not (by pressing the Skip button), the program continues execution.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts

Operating Instructions

7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC

4.

If more conversion errors occur, repeat step 2 and 3. Alternatively, continue by pressing the button Transfer All or Skip All. For the remaining cells, this has the same effect as if the button Transfer on Error or Skip on Error had been pressed at the start instead of Halt on Error; see H a n d l i n g o f C o n v e r s i o n E r r o r s on page 283. Subsequent analysis of the errors contained in the cells of the database (because the function Transfer on Error was used during the transfer or update) is only partially possible 1). To obtain clarity on the error situation in a systematic way, the cells of the database must be deleted and an initial installation as per Section 7.3.2: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Removable Device to Local Database" on page 266 must be carried out with the setting Halt on Error. Displaying Information about the ENC Cells of the Local Database When you click with the INFO key in the world chart on an ENC cell which belongs to the local ENC database (this one) and is displayed in the world chart, a dialog box opens up, containing information about the updating of this cell. With the Expand button, the dialog box can be extended by the addition of detailed information about the ENC cell that is marked in the upper list. With the Details of button, you specify which information is to appear additionally 2): Cell History: For the first issue of the cell file and for all update files that have been added: edition of the files, and transfer date. Last Conversion Errors 3): The conversion errors that have occurred during transfer of the base file. This is the same information as the information displayed in the dialog box ENC Conversion Error by means of the Details button during transfer or update - see page 284. Last Conversion Messages: Information about the contents of the last base file that was transferred. Last Update Errors 3): The conversion errors that occurred during transfer since the last transfer of the base file. This is the same information as the information displayed in the dialog box ENC Conversion Error by means of the Details button during transfer or update - see page 284. Last Update Messages: Information about the contents of the changes produced by the transfer of the last update file. With the Print button, the content of the displayed list can be printed out.

1) 2) 3)

One possibility is: Determine the position of the faulty cell in the world chart by marking it in the product list (see page 281) and displaying information on this cell; see further below: D i s p l a y i n g I n f o r m a t i o n a b o u t t h e E N C C e l l s o f t h e L o c a l D a t a b a s e . Except for the Cell History, this information is available only in the ENC database of the equipment item on which the transfer and conversion from the CD took place. Appears after pressing of Details of if, and only if, relevant messages or errors are present.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

285

CHARTPILOT

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts

Operating Instructions

7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC

Edition of the cell file: Number before the dot: the edition of the base file used during the last update Number after the dot: file extension of the most recent update file used

Date of issue of the most Date of the last transfer from the recent update file used ENC CD to the ENC database

Type of chart

Name of the cell Switches on/off the display of the details. Switches over to the main program (to Planning display mode) and thus switches on the display of the selected electronic chart. This does not cause switch-off of the Chart Maintenance subroutine.

Jumps to the Manual ENC Update editor; the update file of the marked cell then opens up. Printing of the information contained in the list Fig. 7-15

Specifying which information is to appear in the lower list.

Detailed information about the file marked above

Closes the box.

The dialog box with detailed information about an ENC cell file of the ENC database

Displaying Further Information from the Provider of the Licensed ENC Insert the latest ENC (Update or Base) CD into the CD drive. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Other Functions, press the button Show README Text and, in the dialog box which then opens up, select README.TXT on Removable Media and press OK. The provider’s latest information appears and can be printed out by means of the Print button in the dialog box. If, in the dialog box, README.TXT on CHARTPILOT is selected, the information contained in the local ENC database appears. 1)

7.3.12

Other Useful Information about the Data Maintenance of C-MAP ENC Cells

CM-ENC media The ship receives the CM-ENC media at intervals governed by the individual contract with Jeppesen Marine. For it to be permissible to sail without paper charts, the corresponding regulations must be observed with regard to the frequency of these updates. This CM-ENC media contains all ENC cells that are available at the time of publishing. It contains new editions or re-issues of ENC cells, but no update cells. Unlike the cells of the IHO ENC CDs, the ENC cells are available directly in the SENC format and therefore need not be compiled. This increases the speed when installing the cells.

1)

For each application of the Update function, the README text on the ENC CD is transferred to the ENC databases of the system and overwrites the README text previously stored there.

286

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts

Operating Instructions

7.4 Data Maintenance of the Manual ENC Updates

RTU Service In the periods between publishing of the CM-ENC media, Jeppesen Marine provides the RTU service as a way of keeping the data as current as possible. To keep the data quantities to be transferred as low as possible, only updates are provided by the RTU service. New editions, or additional new cells, are not made available. In the same way, the updates do not include the external reference files needed in some cases. These are separate files containing additional textual or graphic information. For the reasons mentioned above, it is absolutely necessary to update the database immediately when a new CM-ENC media is received, because only this source contains all the necessary data! The RTU service therefore represents a useful supplement, but is no substitute for the update with the CM-ENC media! In order to obtain a correct set of update cells for the data installed on the units, it is necessary to generate a new request directly before each planned online update and to send this to the RTU server of Jeppesen Marine. The updates then received always refer to the CM-ENC media installed last. For this reason, all cells updated by RTU are replaced by the version of the cell located on the media whenever a new CM-ENC media is installed, even if their date indicates that they are more up-to-date than the new CM ENC media. For this reason, it is urgently recommended that an online update be performed immediately after the latest CM-ENC media is installed.

7.4

Data Maintenance of the Manual ENC Updates At the end of the editing process, Manual ENC Updates which have been edited according to Section 5.3: "Editing of Manual Updates of the ENC" on page 201 are stored as a file in the local ENC database only. The transfer that is then necessary to the other hard disk drives of the system is performed in the same way as described in Section 7.3.3: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Local to Other Databases" on page 267 for transfer of the ENC cells except that, as the Type, ENC - Man. Updates is selected, and not ENC. If a Manual ENC Update file is to be deleted and the file of the corresponding ENC cell is to remain preserved, deletion is performed as described in Section 7.3.8: "Deleting ENC Cells" on page 275 for the ENC, again with the exception that, as the Type, ENC - Man. Updates is selected, and not ENC.

☞

If ENC cells are transferred between the equipment items, the associated Manual ENC Update files that exist on the equipment item that is set as the source are automatically transferred too. When ENC cells are deleted, the associated Manual ENC Update files that exist in the equipment item are automatically deleted.

USEFUL INFORMATION Displaying Information about the Manual ENC Update Files of the Local Database If ENC - Man. Updates is selected as the Type, and if the INFO key is used to click on a Manual ENC Update cell belonging to the local ENC database and displayed in the world chart, the dialog box which then opens up displays the name of the cell and the date of the last change; see also D i s p l a y i n g I n f o r m a t i o n a b o u t t h e E N C C e l l s o f t h e L o c a l D a t a b a s e on page 285. With the Expand button that exists there, the dialog box can be extended by the addition of a list which, for all editing sessions, shows which objects have been inserted or deleted in the Manual ENC Update File.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

287

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts 7.5 Data Maintenance of Own Charts

7.5

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

Data Maintenance of Own Charts Before the Own Chart cells edited according to Section 5.4: "Editing Cells of Own Chart" on page 205 can be used in the overall system, they must be transferred to the Own Chart databases of the individual units by means of the subroutine Chart Maintenance. This is done by means of the procedure described for the ENC data - see Section 7.3.3: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Local to Other Databases" on page 267. Deletion of the Own Chart cells too is performed in the same way as deletion of the ENC files - see Section 7.3.8: "Deleting ENC Cells" on page 275.

7.6

Data Maintenance of the ARCS Charts ARCS charts are produced exclusively by the Admiralty Raster Chart Service. They can be procured from several different providers. For chart maintenance, a distinction must be made between the following procedures. In special cases, however, it may be advisable to use a different procedure; see Section 7.6.5: "Divergent Procedures for Transfer and Update" on page 295. Initial installation of ARCS charts: 1. Procure an ARCS Navigator Licence from a provider, procure the necessary ARCS chart permits from him, and install these on the local database; see Section 7.6.1: "Licence and Permits for ARCS Charts" on page 288. 2. Using the Transfer function as per Section 7.6.2: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ARCS Charts from CD to Local Database" on page 292, transfer all the chart files for which permits have already been installed from the provider’s CDs to the local database. 3. Using the Transfer function as per Section 7.6.3: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ARCS Charts from Local to Other Databases" on page 293, transfer all ARCS files from the local database to all other ARCS databases of the system. Updating of ARCS charts: Regular update: As soon as a new CD has been received, perform an update on all ARCS databases of the system in one working step, using the Update function as per Section 7.6.4: "Update Function: Update of the ARCS Charts on All Databases" on page 294. Online update: If an online update is possible (see page 250), perform it at least once a week, beginning no later than one week after last receiving a regular (Update) CD. To do this, an Online Update CD or USB-Disk(s) is produced at the PC, with which the update is performed on all ARCS databases of the system in one working step, using the Update function as per Section 7.6.4: "Update Function: Update of the ARCS Charts on All Databases" on page 294; see also page 250. Installation of subsequently licensed charts: 1. Install any ARCS chart permits that were procured later to the local database; see Section 7.6.1: "Licence and Permits for ARCS Charts" on page 288. 2. Using the Update function as per Section 7.6.4: "Update Function: Update of the ARCS Charts on All Databases" on page 294, transfer the charts to all ARCS databases of the system in one working step.

7.6.1

Licence and Permits for ARCS Charts

☞

288

For general information on this topic, see page 248.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts

Operating Instructions

☞

7.6 Data Maintenance of the ARCS Charts

All operating actions listed in this section should be performed at the CHARTPILOT that is intended for the chart maintenance work of the system. For the following operating steps, the Type ARCS must be set in the Utilities > Chart Maintenance menu.

Initial Installation 1.

Before initial installation can take place, a subscription must be taken out with a provider. Here the system identification code and the PIN 1) are needed, and the ARCS charts to be used must be determined. With the chart type ARCS, the system identification code is called the User Permit Number and this is displayed together with the PIN when, in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ARCS Licensing, the button View User Permit No. is pressed. You can obtain the information on the available ARCS charts in various ways, e.g. through the provider, or through the Internet. If the provider needs other data about the system, further relevant data can be generated as an ECDIS Passport and sent to the provider; see page 291.

2.

You then receive the ARCS chart permits floppy (which contains the permit files, in which all permits acquired by you are present), the ARCS Charts CDs of the geographical areas for which you have ordered charts (these CDs contain all charts of the geographical area in the original state, i.e. without update), the current ARCS Update CD (this contains updates for all charts issued, and cumulatively the Notices to Mariners and the Temporary and Preliminary Notices to Mariners published by the UKHO).

Installation of the permits on the ARCS databases For the later acquisition of permits without ARCS chart permits Floppy Check of the permits installed on the local database Data backup of the permits installed on the local database Deletion of permits on the local database Displaying the User Permit Number and the PIN Displaying licensing data. Generating an ECDIS Passport for ARCS data; see page 265

Fig. 7-16

1)

The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ARCS Licensing

This PIN is not a “personal” number, but denotes the type and manufacturer of the system.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

289

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts 7.6 Data Maintenance of the ARCS Charts

3.

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

Installing ARCS chart permits: Put the ARCS chart permits Floppy Disk into the Floppy, and in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ARCS Licensing press the button Install Permits from Device. A Select Device dialog box then appears to select the Floppy or the USB-Disk(s) 1); after you have answered that request with OK, the permit files containing the permits are copied from the media into the local ARCS database. These processes can be observed in a dialog box. The question Transferring permits to all other systems? should be answered with OK. The files needed for the licensing process are called GB.LCN and GB.NCP. The procedure described must also be applied if these files were received by e-mail. In this case, you must create the ARCS permits Floppy/USB-Disk(s) yourself beforehand by transferring the received files to a DOS-formatted Floppy or USB-Disk(s).

☞ If the above-mentioned files were transferred as an archive file (e.g. the .ZIP format), they must be decompressed. Installation as described is only possible if the files with the a.m. names are located on the Floppy/USB-Disk(s) (if necessary, check this with a PC). After the corresponding request, close the dialog box with Cancel.

☞

The licensing data are displayed when, in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ARCS Licensing, the button View Licence Details is pressed. A list of the permits that are now installed is displayed when, in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ARCS Licensing, the button Verify Installed Permits is pressed. Close the dialog boxes by means of Cancel.

The initial installation can now be continued with the transfer of the cell files as per Section 7.6.2: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ARCS Charts from CD to Local Database" on page 292. Renewing the ARCS Chart Permits; Procuring New Permits If existing permits are renewed (extended) or further permits are procured later, the procedure described above must be repeated. The corresponding chart files can then be transferred by means of the Update function as per Section 7.6.4: "Update Function: Update of the ARCS Charts on All Databases" on page 294. If permits are to be ordered later for further charts, and data transfer per ARCS chart permits Floppy is not appropriate or not possible (e.g. because the ship is at sea), the permit code of the charts can also be communicated by e-mail, fax or telephone. For each chart, the appropriate dialog box must be opened in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ARCS Licensing by pressing Install Permit Manually, this permit code must be entered behind Permit, and the OK button must be pressed. Deleting Permits ARCS chart permits are generally not deleted automatically. If expired permits are not to be renewed, these permits must be deleted manually. 1.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set ARCS as the Type.

2.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ARCS Licensing, press the Delete Permits button.

3.

In the selection menu which then opens up, transfer those permits that are indicated by the text EXPIRED from the left-hand list to the right-hand list (for the list operating procedure, see also page 254). After pressing of the OK button of the selection menu and appropriate answering of the resulting safeguard question, the expired permits are deleted in the local ARCS database.

If a transfer or update of ARCS charts takes place subsequently, these actions need only be performed on the local ARCS database.

1)

see also Section 3.7: "Using Removable Devices" on page 73

290

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts

Operating Instructions

☞

7.6 Data Maintenance of the ARCS Charts

If ARCS charts are transferred (using the Transfer function or the Update function, independently of the source), all ARCS chart permits on the local database are automatically copied to the ARCS databases to which the transfer of the charts is taking place. Here permits that are not located on the local database are deleted on the other ARCS databases.

USEFUL INFORMATION Checking the Installed Permits If difficulties occur in the display of charts for which a permit exists, the permits installed in the local ARCS database can be checked: the check is initiated in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ARCS Licensing by pressing the button Verify Installed Permits. In the dialog box which then opens up, information about the check performed is given. ☞ On the individual equipment items, you can perform in the same way a check of the permits existing in the other ARCS databases of the system. Performing Data Backup of the Installed Permits Data backup can be performed for the acquired permits too: put an empty, DOS-formatted Floppy Disk into the Floppy or a USB-media in the USB-Disk(s), and in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ARCS Licensing press the Permit Backup button. A Select Device dialog box opens to select the media to store and click the OK button. 1) The permit file is then copied from the local ARCS database to the Floppy or USB-media. A dialog box then opens up, containing information about each process that is completed. Generating the ECDIS Passport for ARCS Charts The system data which may possibly be needed by the provider of ARCS charts are compiled in the ECDIS Passport,. When, after a DOS-formatted Floppy Disk has been inserted into the Floppy or a USBmedia has been inserted in the USB-Disk(s), the Generate ECDIS Passport button in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ARCS Licensing is pressed a Select Device dialog box opens to select the required media and click OK. The entries which are then requested are performed, the data is stored as an .xml file on the removable media, together with two other files which may needed for the interpretation of the .xml file.

☞

Parts of the content can be viewed and printed out at the PC.

New ARCS Chart Permits Floppy Each permit is valid for two successive issues of the chart. The ARCS chart permits Floppy only contains permits for the existing current edition and for the next future edition of the chart. If a further edition appears, UKHO supplies the most recent chart permits for ARCS via e-mail. Expiry of the ARCS Navigator Licence In the last month prior to expiry of the licence, a message drawing your attention to this deadline appears as soon as a chart is selected for display. In the month after expiry of the licence, the charts that exist on the hard disk can still be displayed in the usual way. However, no ARCS Update CDs are sent, and no charts can be transferred. Therefore, not all charts are completely up-to-date. When a chart is selected for display, a message about this appears, the Chart Status field of the navigation data line becomes yellow, and the display Licence exp. appears there. One month after expiry of the licence, it is no longer possible to display ARCS charts. 1)

see also Section 3.7: "Using Removable Devices" on page 73

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

291

CHARTPILOT

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts

Operating Instructions

7.6 Data Maintenance of the ARCS Charts

7.6.2

Transfer Function: Transferring All ARCS Charts from CD to Local Database

☞

For general information on this topic, see page 249 and 288.

Application: Initial installation of ARCS charts With the procedure described: All ARCS charts 1) for which unexpired ARCS chart permits are present on the local database are transferred to the local database and updated there. All ARCS chart permits located on the local database are copied to all other ARCS databases, whereas permits that are not located on the local database are deleted from the other ARCS databases. The Notices to Mariners and Temporary and Preliminary Notices to Mariners provided on the ARCS Update CD are transferred to the local database. Preparations: Install all permits to the local database as per Section 7.6.1: "Licence and Permits for ARCS Charts" on page 288. 1.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set ARCS as the Type.

2.

Put the most recent ARCS Update CD into the CD drive, and in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance set CD/DVD as the Source. If a message relating to the table of contents appears, answer it with OK.

☞

Do not make a selection by regions before performing the next step (e.g. there must be no frame shown in the world chart).

3.

Press the Transfer button. If messages relating to the table of contents appear, answer with OK and press the Transfer button again.

4.

Under Destination, mark only CHARTPILOT (this one).

☞

Under Charts/Plans to be Transferred, leave all navigational purposes switched on.

5.

In the Transfer menu, press the OK button and, in the selection menu which then opens, enter all the files into the right-hand column by clicking Add All >>.

6.

In the selection menu, press the OK button. The dialog box Transferring ARCS Charts appears.

7.

After the corresponding request, insert the requested CD and resume the transfer with OK.

8.

If the charts that are to be transferred are distributed over several CDs, procedure 7 is repeated accordingly.

9.

On completion of the transfer, start the update of the local database by pressing the OK button after the corresponding request.

10. When the transfer process has finished (you are informed of this in a dialog box), close the dialog box Transferring ARCS Charts by means of the Cancel button.

1)

Together with the included plans

292

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts

Operating Instructions

7.6.3

7.6 Data Maintenance of the ARCS Charts

Transfer Function: Transferring All ARCS Charts from Local to Other Databases

☞

For general information on this topic, see page 249 and 288.

Application: Initial installation of ARCS charts With the procedure described: All ARCS charts 1) located on the local database are copied to all other ARCS databases of the system; All ARCS chart permits located on the local database are copied to all other ARCS databases, whereas permits that are not located on the local database are deleted from the other ARCS databases. The Notices to Mariners and Temporary and Preliminary Notices to Mariners located on the local database are transferred to all other ARCS databases. Preparations: The transfer as per Section 7.6.2: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ARCS Charts from CD to Local Database" on page 292 must have been carried out. All CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs must be switched on. 1.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set ARCS as the Type.

2.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, as the Source select the CHARTPILOT that is currently being operated (this one).

3.

In the world chart, pull open the largest possible frame (up to the margin) and press the Transfer button.

4.

Under Destination, mark all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs.

☞

1)

Under Charts/Plans to be Transferred, leave all navigational purposes switched on.

5.

In the Transfer menu, press the OK button and, in the selection menu which then opens, enter all the files into the right-hand column by clicking Add All >>.

6.

After pressing of the OK button of the selection menu, the transfer begins. The dialog box Remote Transfer of ARCS Charts appears. In its upper part, the process currently taking place is listed, and in the lower part all errors and warnings occurring in the transfer process are listed.

7.

When the transfer process has finished, press the Cancel button after the corresponding request.

Together with the included plans

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

293

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts 7.6 Data Maintenance of the ARCS Charts

7.6.4

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

Update Function: Update of the ARCS Charts on All Databases

☞

For general information on this topic, see page 249 and 288.

Application: Update of ARCS charts in all ARCS databases of the system after receiving a new ARCS Update CD or after generating an Online Update CD/USB-Disk(s). Installation of ARCS charts for subsequently procured permits on all ARCS databases of the system. With the procedure described, the following actions are carried out on all ARCS databases: All charts are updated for which there are unexpired permits on the local database. 1) (If new permits were installed there in the meantime, the corresponding charts are also transferred and updated.) All ARCS charts for which there are no permits, or only expired permits, on the local database are deleted (after a safeguard question). All obsolete ARCS charts that are no longer supported are deleted (after a safeguard question). All ARCS chart permits located on the local database are copied to all other ARCS databases, whereas permits that are not located on the local database are deleted from the other ARCS databases. The Notices to Mariners and Temporary and Preliminary Notices to Mariners located on the ARCS Update CD are transferred to all other ARCS databases. Preparations: All CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs must be switched on. Permits that were procured after the last update must have been installed in the local database as per Section 7.6.1: "Licence and Permits for ARCS Charts" on page 288. Expired permits that are not to be renewed must have been deleted in the local database; see page 290. For an online update: The Online Update CD or USB-Media was produced. It must cover all charts that are to be updated. 1.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set ARCS as the Type.

2.

Put the Online Update CD or the most recent ARCS Update CD into the CD drive or the USBDisk(s) in the USB-port.

3.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set CD/DVD or USB-Disk(s) as the Source. If a message about the table of contents appears, answer it with OK.

4.

Press the button Utilities > Chart Maintenance > Update. The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > Update opens 2). Under Destination there, mark all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs.

5.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > Update, press the OK button. By means of the dialog box which then opens up, you are (again) requested to insert the latest ARCS update CD. If you have not done this in step 2, do it now and press the OK button of the dialog box. As a result, the dialog box Type of Update opens up.

6.

In the dialog box Type of Update, press the button Update based upon installed permits.

☞

1) 2) 3)

For the function of the button Update based upon installed charts, see page 296.

7.

In the dialog box Type of Update, press the OK button. As a result, the update process is started and the dialog box Updating ARCS Chart Database opens up.

8.

If another CD/USB-Disk(s) has to be inserted, a request to do that appears. If the correct medium is not found Select Device dialog box appears and an other Removable Medium can be selected. 3)

When using the Online Update CD, this applies only for the charts downloaded when generating the Online Update CD. Is not shown when only this CHARTPILOT is installed. see also Section 3.7: "Using Removable Devices" on page 73

294

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

9.

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts 7.6 Data Maintenance of the ARCS Charts

If the program detects that the local ARCS database contains charts that are no longer supported, or for which the permit has expired, or for which no permit exists, an appropriate message is shown. After confirmation, a selection menu appears in which these charts are listed on the left. It is recommended that these charts be deleted (use Add All >> to enter all charts into the right-hand column and then press OK). The deletion is then carried out in all databases of the system.

10. When a message stating completion of the update appears, you can close the dialog box Updating ARCS Chart Database by means of the Cancel button. 11. With an additional check, you can make sure that the update on the local database was successful: In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ARCS Other Functions, press the button Verify Installed Charts. A selection menu appears in which all charts installed on the local database are listed on the left. If all charts are to be checked use Add All >> to enter all charts into the right-hand column and then press OK. In the dialog box which then opens, the message No errors found must be shown, to indicate a successful update. USEFUL INFORMATION Data Existing on an ARCS Update CD Each ARCS Update CD contains the following data which are up-to-date at the time of issuing of the CD: The complete catalog of the charts issued by UKHO. It contains, among other things, the information indicating which CD contains which chart. The areas (or tiles, according to ARCS terminology) of all ARCS charts issued that have changed relative to the files contained in the most recent ARCS Charts CDs. All charts which have been completely changed or issued anew after the issuing of the most recent ARCS Charts CDs. The most recent Notices to Mariners and Temporary and Preliminary Notices to Mariners. Further data which are necessary for proper execution of the update.

7.6.5

Divergent Procedures for Transfer and Update In some cases, it is useful to deviate from the procedures described in Section 7.6.2: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ARCS Charts from CD to Local Database" on page 292 to 7.6.4 for the transfer and update: Initial Installation of the ARCS charts using the Update Function The initial installation of the ARCS charts can also be performed as per Section 7.6.4: "Update Function: Update of the ARCS Charts on All Databases" on page 294, if all permits for the charts to be installed were installed (as per Section 7.6.1: "Licence and Permits for ARCS Charts" on page 288) on at least the local database beforehand. This approach is particularly advantageous when no MULTIPILOT is installed or when only a few charts are to be installed. If MULTIPILOTs are available and more than just a few charts are to be installed, it is advisable to mark in step 4 under Destination only CHARTPILOT (this one) and then to perform the transfer to all other databases as per Section 7.6.3: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ARCS Charts from Local to Other Databases" on page 293. No MULTIPILOT is Installed in the System The initial installation of ARCS charts is most easily performed with the Update function; see above.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

295

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts 7.6 Data Maintenance of the ARCS Charts

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

Not All Charts for Which Permits are Available are to be Installed

☞

In this case, the initial installation is not possible by means of the Update function (see above).

With the initial installation as per Section 7.6.2: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ARCS Charts from CD to Local Database" on page 292, an appropriate selection must be performed; for the selection procedure, see Section 7.2.6: "Selecting the Charts or Cell Files" on page 252. Then perform the transfer as per Section 7.6.3: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ARCS Charts from Local to Other Databases" on page 293 to all other databases. Such an initial installation with subsequent transfer must also be carried out for new charts for which permits were received later. With the update as per Section 7.6.4: "Update Function: Update of the ARCS Charts on All Databases" on page 294, the function Update based upon installed charts must in this case be selected in step 6. If charts were replaced by other charts through UKHO, the replaced charts are proposed for deletion during the update (and should also be deleted), but the replacement charts are not automatically transferred (because the setting “Update based upon installed charts” was selected). They must therefore be transferred to the local database before the update as per Section 7.6.2: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ARCS Charts from CD to Local Database" on page 292. In such a case, you will automatically be sent an ARCS chart permits Floppy 1) by UKHO. The information about which new charts must be transferred is given on the info sheet supplied with the Floppy. If not all charts have already been installed, it is also advisable to transfer only the replacement charts which belong to the region covered by the installed charts. This is achieved when a regional selection (Section 7.2.6.3: "Selection according to Agency Codes and to Cell Names / Chart Numbers" on page 254) is performed before the selection by chart names (Section 7.2.6.1: "Selection according to Regions" on page 253).

7.6.6

Deleting ARCS Charts Application: There are so many reasons why it may be necessary to delete ARCS charts from the databases that they cannot be listed here. Reference to the necessity of deleting ARCS charts is made at the corresponding points. By means of the following procedure, it is possible to delete any desired selection of ARCS charts on each ARCS database that exists in the system. Permits are not deleted in this process. Deleting Selected Charts The listed selection procedures are described in Section 7.2.6: "Selecting the Charts or Cell Files" on page 252.

1)

1.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set ARCS as the Type.

2.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, specify under Source the equipment item on which the charts are to be deleted. This unit must be switched on.

3.

If the selection is to be made by regions or according to navigational purposes, open the corresponding frame in the world chart and press the Delete button. The Delete menu then opens.

4.

If no frame was drawn in step 3, the number of charts and plans on the database are shown in the Delete menu, grouped according to navigational purpose. If a frame was drawn, it is possible to select according to navigational purpose in the Delete menu. With the aid of the button Include

The permits of such new charts can also be contained on a permits Floppy or a USB-media which you are still expecting (because permits have been renewed or new ones have been ordered).

296

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts

Operating Instructions

7.6 Data Maintenance of the ARCS Charts

Touched Charts/Plans, it can be specified there whether only those charts and plans are to be deleted that are situated completely within the frame, or also those charts and plans that are only touched by the frame.

☞

Because the plans located on a chart are stored in the file of the chart, the chart and the plans it contains are always processed together. If a plan is selected for deletion, then the chart on which the plan is situated and all other plans contained in the chart are also selected for deletion, even if they lie outside of the defined region. To prevent charts / plans outside the defined region from being deleted, the selected charts / plans are displayed in the world chart (in succession for each navigational purpose). In the case of charts / plans that lie outside the defined region and should therefore not be deleted, click on them with the INFO key to determine the chart number and then remove this chart from the right-hand list of the selection menu after performing step 5.

5.

In the Delete menu, press the OK button and then, in the selection menu which opens, perform the selection according to chart names or select all files by clicking on Add All >>.

6.

When the OK button is pressed in the selection menu, the charts listed in the right-hand list are deleted in the database specified by step 2. Alternatively, deletion can be prevented by pressing the Cancel button.

Deleting All ARCS Charts of a Database 1.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set ARCS as the Type.

2.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, specify under Source the equipment item on which the charts are to be deleted. This unit must be switched on. ☞ Do not make a selection by regions before performing the next step (there must be no frame shown in the world chart).

3.

Press the Delete button and press the OK button in the Delete menu.

4.

In the selection menu which then opens, click on Add All >>. After the OK button is pressed, all ARCS charts are deleted in the database specified by step 2. Alternatively, deletion can be prevented by pressing the Cancel button.

USEFUL INFORMATION Meaning of the Status Display in the Selection Menu No entry: EXPIRED: NO PERM:

OBSOLETE:

7.6.7

The permit is installed and valid, i.e. the chart is available for display. The permit has expired; it is not certain that the chart is completely up-to-date. The chart is installed, but a valid permit no longer exists. It is not certain that the chart is completely up-to-date. Presumably, the permit has been deleted and can be installed again. The chart has been removed from the ARCS catalog. It is no longer being supported by UKHO with the aid of updates, and should be deleted.

Later Update of an Individual Equipment Item If an update was not performed on all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs, the non-updated databases must be updated as soon as possible. The simplest approach is to perform an update as per Section 7.6.4: "Update Function: Update of the ARCS Charts on All Databases" on page 294 from a CHARTPILOT with an ARCS database that has already been updated to the ARCS database that has not yet been updated. Here only the non-updated CHARTPILOT / MULTIPILOT should be marked in step 4.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

297

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts 7.7 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/3Pro Chart

7.7

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

Data Maintenance of the CM-93/3Pro Chart The CM-93/3Pro chart is exclusively published by the company Jeppesen Marine. Chart maintenance for the CM-93/3Pro chart comprises the following operations: Initial Installation of the CM-93/3Pro Chart 1. If there are no CM-93/3Pro licences, procure these for the desired zones or areas from SAM Electronics. Then install the licences you receive on the local database. See Section 7.7.1: "Licences for CM-93/3Pro Cells" on page 299. 2. Transfer all the CM-93/3Pro cell files for which the licences apply from the provider’s CDs 1)to the local database, as per Section 7.7.2: "Transfer Function: Transferring All CM-93/3Pro Cells from Medium to Local Database" on page 306. 3. Now transfer all CM-93/3Pro cell files from the local database to all other CM-93/3Pro databases of the system, as per Section 7.7.3: "Transfer Function: Transferring All CM-93/3Pro Cells from Local to Other Databases" on page 307. If large volumes of data are to be transferred, this process may take a very long time: The entire CM-93/3Pro chart consists of approx. 15,000 cells, and the transfer to several CHARTPILOTs and/ or MULTIPILOTs can take many hours. If this period of time is not available, it is advisable to transfer only the cells of the region that is to be sailed first (for the procedure, see page 310). By the first regular update, at the latest, all cells should have been transferred in this way. The reason: when the CM-93/3Pro CD is used, the Update function always transfers all those licensed cells that are not yet contained in the databases. If large numbers of cells are missing from the databases, the update will take correspondingly longer. Updating the CM-93/3Pro Cells: Regular update: As soon as a new CD has been received, perform an update on all CM-93/3Pro databases of the system in one working step, using the Update function as per Section 7.7.5: "Update Function: Update of the CM-93/3Pro Cells on All Databases" on page 309. Online update: If an online update is possible (see page 250), perform it at least once a week, beginning no later than one week after last receiving a CM-93/3Pro CD. To do this, an Online Update CD is produced at the PC or copy the required files on a USB-media/device, with which the update is performed on all CM-93/3Pro databases of the system in one working step, using the Update function as per Section 7.7.5: "Update Function: Update of the CM-93/3Pro Cells on All Databases" on page 309; see also page 250. The online update of the CM-93/3Pro cells begins with the generation of the RTU request as per Section 7.7.4: "Real Time Update (RTU) for Jeppesen Marine ENC" on page 308.

1)

The data media to which the CM-93/3Pro cells are transferred are in fact DVDs. Because this distinction is irrelevant for the actual handling, the term “CD” is used both in the user interface of the CHARTPILOT (e.g. Source: CD/DVD) and in these Operating Instructions. Therefore, only CHARTPILOTs equipped with a DVD drive are able to handle CM-93/3Pro charts. CM-93/3Pro DVDs that are suitable for use at the CHARTPILOT are marked as Only readable in SAM Electronics systems. There are older CHARTPILOT versions, where unpredictable errors may occur if other DVDs are used. There are older CHARTPILOT versions with a CM-93/3Pro database, on which CM-93/3Pro charts can hence be displayed but which cannot access the CM-93/3Pro CD. Such a CHARTPILOT is therefore not suitable for this work; it must be supplied with these data by means of step 3.

298

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts 7.7 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/3Pro Chart

Installing Subsequently Licensed Cells: 1. Using the Update function as per Section 7.7.5: "Update Function: Update of the CM-93/3Pro Cells on All Databases" on page 309, perform an update on all CM-93/3Pro databases of the system in one working step. 2. Install any CM-93/3Pro licences that were procured later to the local database; see Section 7.7.1: "Licences for CM-93/3Pro Cells" on page 299. 3. If only a few cells were licensed subsequently: Using the Update function as per Section 7.7.5: "Update Function: Update of the CM-93/3Pro Cells on All Databases" on page 309, transfer the cells to all CM-93/3Pro databases of the system in one working step. If many cells were licensed subsequently: Use the Transfer function as per Section 7.7.2: "Transfer Function: Transferring All CM-93/3Pro Cells from Medium to Local Database" on page 306 and Section 7.7.3: "Transfer Function: Transferring All CM-93/3Pro Cells from Local to Other Databases" on page 307 as for the initial installation, step 2 and 3. 7.7.1

Licences for CM-93/3Pro Cells

☞ ☞

For general information on this topic, see page 248. All operating actions listed in this section should be performed at the CHARTPILOT that is intended for the chart maintenance work of the system. For the following operating steps, the Type CM-93/ 3Pro must be set in the Utilities > Chart Maintenance menu.

The CM-93/3Pro chart is divided into ten zones, and has divided up each zone into a different number of areas. Each cell of the CM-93/3Pro chart is assigned to an area. For this chart type, two different licence types are available: Subscription licences: These utilization rights are limited in time, and also include the supply of updates during the period of use. Purchase licences: These are time-unlimited rights to use the cells of a certain edition. Before deciding on a Purchase Licence, it is essential to consider the following: -

Within a particular system, only one of the licence types can be used for the CM-93/3Pro Chart.

-

All purchase licences refer to the editions of the cells located on a certain CD. If a purchase licence is obtained subsequently for another region, this licence also refers to the editions of the cells located on the CD supplied for the first purchase licence. However, these cells may already be obsolete by this time.

-

If a change is made later from purchase licences to subscription licences, none of the purchase licences procured previously can be used after that (not even on other systems).

-

Cells used on the basis of a purchase licence can only be updated by using a new purchase licence.

Licences Provided with Hardware (Test Licence) For some of the CHARTPILOTs installed after introduction of the chart type CM-93/3Pro, a subscription licence for all available cells (Zone 0) is included in the scope of supply. This test licence has a validity of 6 months, beginning at its activation. For these systems, a CM-93/3Pro CD 1) is already provided and the corresponding licence is already installed. So it is possible to start the initial installation, see page 298. If you intend to continue using the CM-93/3Pro chart after expiry of this licence, the desired licences can be procured as described in Section 7.7.1.1: "First Procurement of Subscription Licences" on page 300.

1)

If the CD provided is no longer up-to-date when the system is delivered, please contact SAM Electronics to request the current version of the CD.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

299

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts 7.7 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/3Pro Chart

7.7.1.1

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

First Procurement of Subscription Licences

Procurement of the licences is supported by the subroutine Chart Maintenance. If you do not wish to use the assistance of SAM Electronics, please proceed as follows: Procurement of the CM-93/3Pro CD 1.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, press the button CM-93/3Pro Licensing.

2.

A Select Device dialog box opens to select CD/DVD or USB-Disk(s) 1).

3.

Acknowledge the request to insert a CD with OK.

4.

Answer the question posed in the subsequent dialog box (i.e. whether a CD is to be delivered) with OK.

5.

Then a 2nd Select Device dialog box appears with the request to insert a Floppy or USB-Disk(s) 2). Now, at the latest, insert a DOS-formatted Floppy Disk into the Floppy or a USB-Disk into the USBDisk(s) and press the OK button.

6.

As a result, the file USER.USR is generated; this contains the system ID (this is the system identification code described in Section 7.2.2: "Procuring the Subscription, Permits and Licences" on page 248). A box appears to report this process. After the corresponding request, close it with Cancel.

7.

Send the Floppy or the file USER.USR to SAM Electronics 3). You will then receive the CM-93/3Pro CD.

☞

If you already know which zones and/or areas you need, you can order the licences at the same time, by specifying the desired zones and/or areas and the licence type when you send the USER.USR file. You will then receive the codes of the requested licences together with the CM93/3Pro CD and can dispense with the steps described below.

Selecting the Zones and Areas and Procuring the Subscription Licences 1.

After receiving the CD, press the button CM-93/3Pro Licensing in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance.

2.

Now, at the latest, insert the CM-93/3Pro CD into the drive and confirm the request to do so with OK. Acknowledge the message that the boundaries of the zones and areas have been read in.

3.

In the CM-93/3Pro Licensing menu, press the Subscription Licence button.

4.

In the Subscription Licence menu which then opens, select the regions by choosing the corresponding zone or area in the frames Zone Selection and Area Selection and entering it into the list Selected Regions, and then repeating the procedure for all desired regions. Details:

1) 2) 3)

-

When opening the menu, Zone 0 is selected. Zone 0 denotes the entire surface of the earth; it therefore contains the zones 1 to 9, with the boundaries indicated.

-

To be able to select an area within the frame Area Selection, the corresponding zone (1 to 9) must have been selected in the frame Zone Selection.

-

The zone or area selected last is displayed as a hatched region in the world chart.

-

The buttons Next and Prev. can be used to select each zone or area in sequence.

see also Section 3.7: "Using Removable Devices" on page 73 see footnote 1) address see page 2.

300

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts

Operating Instructions

7.7 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/3Pro Chart

-

The Add/Remove button is then used to enter the selected zone or area into the list Selected Regions. Repeated pressing deletes the entry.

-

The entries in the list can also be deleted by marking them and then pressing the button Remove from List.

-

The boundaries of the zones and areas entered in the list are displayed in the world chart, with their water areas appearing dark-blue.

-

If licences are already installed on the CHARTPILOT, the corresponding zones and areas are also shown. In the list, the corresponding expiry date of the subscription licence (yyyy-mm-dd) is also displayed, whereas for purchase licences the indication (purchased) is shown.

5.

In the Subscription Licence menu, press the Write Licence Request button.

6.

Now, at the latest, insert a DOS-formatted Floppy Disk 1) into the Floppy or a USB-Disk(s) in the USB-port 2) and confirm the request to do so with OK.

7.

As a result, the file USER.USR (containing the system ID) is generated, together with the file AREA.REQ, which contains the licence type and the data of the selected regions. These activities are indicated in a dialog box. Acknowledge the completion message with OK, and close the box with Cancel.

8.

Send the Floppy or the two files by e-mail to SAM Electronics 3), and apply for the licences.

Selection of the zones

Number of the currently selected zone This marks the next or previous zone by means of hatching. Enters the currently hatched zone into the list Selected Regions, or deletes this list entry Selects the area (with operating analogous to zone selection) The list contains: - the selected zones and areas (without the date) - the zones and areas for which licences have already been installed (with the date on which the licence expires) Deletes the entries marked in the list

Generates the files for procuring the licences

Fig. 7-17

1) 2) 3)

The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/3Pro Licensing > Subscription Licence

or the Floppy used for requesting the CM-93/3Pro CD see also Section 3.7: "Using Removable Devices" on page 73 address see page 2.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

301

CHARTPILOT

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts

Operating Instructions

7.7 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/3Pro Chart

Procurement of Subscription licences Procurement of Purchase licences Installation of the existing licences on the inserted Floppy or USB-media – see page 302 Installation of licences through manual entry of the licence codes - see page 303 Check of the licences installed on the local database - see page 306 Deletion of CM-93/3Pro licences on the local database - see page 304

Fig. 7-18

7.7.1.2

☞

The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/3Pro Licensing

First Procurement of Purchase Licences Purchase licences cannot be installed if subscription licences are already installed; see page 300.

Purchase licences are procured in the same way as subscription licences, with the sole distinction that the Purchase Licence menu is used instead of the Subscription Licence menu (press Purchase Licence in step 3).

7.7.1.3

Subsequent Procurement of Further Licences

The subsequent procurement of licenses is carried out in the same way as the first procurement described above. Here the following must be observed: If you intend to continue using the licences applied thus far, the licences to be procured subsequently must be of the same type. If purchase licences are procured subsequently, these must refer to the same CD to which the existing licences already refer. To exclude misunderstandings, it is advisable to mention in your request for subsequent Purchase Licenses that purchase licences are already in use, with indication of the issue date of the CD to which they refer.

7.7.1.4

Installing the Licences

This section applies independently of the licence type and irrespective of whether the licences were procured for the first time, whether subscription licences were extended, and whether the licences were provided or procured additionally. Depending on what was agreed, you will receive the licences as the file PASSWORD.USR on Floppy or by e-mail, or in the form of the licence code by e-mail or by telephone. The entry procedures to be applied are therefore different. Refer to A) how to read in the licences by Floppy or USB-media. Refer to B) for manual entry of the 16 character licence code. A) Installing the Licences Contained on the Floppy With this procedure, all existing licences are always installed.

302

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts

Operating Instructions

7.7 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/3Pro Chart

This procedure must also be applied if the file PASSWORD.USR was received by e-mail. In this case, you must create the CM-93/3Pro licence Floppy or copy the file onto a USB-Disk yourself beforehand, by transferring the received file to a DOS-formatted Floppy or the USB-Disk.

☞

If the above-mentioned file was transferred as an archive file (e.g. the .ZIP format), it must first be decompressed. Installation as described is only possible if the file with the a.m. name is located on the licence Floppy (if necessary, check this with a PC).

1.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, press the button CM-93/3Pro Licensing.

2.

Now, at the latest, insert the CM-93/3Pro CD you received last into the drive or the USB-Disk into the USB-port. A Select Device dialog box opens to select the device, where the required files are stored and confirm the request to do so with OK. Acknowledge the message that the boundaries of the zones and areas have been read in.

☞

If a subsequently procured purchase licence is to be installed, the CD to which the earlier purchase licences refer must be inserted.

3.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/3Pro Licensing, press the button Install Licences from....

4.

Now, at the latest, insert the CM-93/3Pro licence Floppy Disk into the Floppy or the USB-Disk into the USB-port. A Select Device dialog box apears, confirm the corresponding request with OK.

5.

The activities are shown in the dialog box which then opens. Successful installation of the licences is reported in another box. Confirm this. Acknowledge the box with the completion message, and use Cancel to close the dialog box that opened first.

B) Installing the Licences through Manual Entry of the Licence Codes 1.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, press the button CM-93/3Pro Licensing.

2.

Now, at the latest, insert the CM-93/3Pro CD you received last into the drive and confirm the request to do so with OK. Acknowledge the message that the boundaries of the zones and areas have been read in.

☞

If a subsequently procured purchase licence is to be installed, the CD to which the earlier purchase licences refer must be inserted.

3.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/3Pro Licensing, press the button Install Licences Manually.

4.

In the menu Install Licences Manually which then opens, select the zone or area for which a licence code is available and insert it under Licence Code for:. This is done the aid of the button provided in the frames Zone Selection and Area Selection; see page 300.

5.

Under Enter Licence Code, type in the 16-digit licence code and press the Apply button. A dialog box will then report that the licence has been installed. Acknowledge the completion message with OK, and close the box with Cancel.

6.

If more licences are to be installed, repeat step 4 and 5.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

303

CHARTPILOT

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts

Operating Instructions

7.7 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/3Pro Chart

Specifies the region for which the licence is to be installed For operating sequences, see page 300

Region for which the licence is to be installed Here you enter the licence code received for the region. Installs the entered licences List contains the zones and areas for which licences have already been installed: - Subscription licences with indication of the licence expiry date - Purchase licences with the remark (Purchased)

Fig. 7-19

7.7.1.5

The menu ... > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/3Pro Licensing > Install Licences Manually

Useful Information about Licensing

Deleting of Licences 1.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, press the button CM-93/3Pro Licensing.

2.

Now, at the latest, insert the CM-93/3Pro CD you received last into the drive and confirm the request to do so with OK. Acknowledge the message that the boundaries of the zones and areas have been read in.

3.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/3Pro Licensing, press the button Delete Licences.

4.

In the Delete Licences menu, mark the licences to be deleted and then press the button Delete Licence(s).

5.

Confirm the safeguard question. A dialog box will then show that the marked licences have been deleted on all CM-93/3Pro databases. Acknowledge the completion message with OK, and close the box with Cancel.

If a transfer or update of CM-93/3Pro cells takes place subsequently, these actions need only be performed on the local CM-93/3Pro database.

☞

304

If CM-93/3Pro cells are transferred (using the Transfer function or the Update function, independently of the source), all CM-93/3Pro licences on the local database are automatically copied to the CM-93/3Pro databases to which the transfer of the charts is taking place. Here licences that are not located on the local database are deleted on the other CM-93/3Pro databases.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts

Operating Instructions

7.7 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/3Pro Chart

End of the Subscription Licence Jeppesen Marine has defined two expiry dates for the end of a subscription licence: Subscription expiry date: After this date, no more updates are performed, and two month later Licence expiry date: After this date, the cells are no longer displayed. One month before the subscription expiry date, a message about the subscription expiry date is shown as soon as a CM-93/3Pro cell affected by this date is displayed. From the subscription expiry date until the licence expiry date, a message about the licence expiry date is shown as soon as a CM-93/3Pro cell affected by this date is displayed. In addition, the Chart Status field of the navigation data line becomes yellow, and the display Licence appears there.

☞

This behaviour also applies for any 6-month test licence which may have been supplied with the hardware, see page 299. With this licence, the first message about the subscription expiry date already appears 3 months after the start of the licence period, but the CM-93/Pro chart can be used for a total duration of 6 months.

From the licence expiry date, there is a corresponding message as soon as a region affected by this date is shown in the chart display with the CM-93/3Pro chart selected. In addition, the Chart Status field of the navigation data line becomes red, and the display Licence appears there. Checking the CM93/3Pro Medium If problems occur when accessing the CM-93/3Pro Medium, it is possible to check the consistency of the data contained there. This is done by means of the function Validate Data on Medium provided in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/3Pro Other Functions.

☞

This check can take 30 minutes. During this time, the CHARTPILOT cannot be used for other purposes.

Showing Information about the Medium The properties of the CD can be displayed by means of the function View Version of the Medium provided in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/3Pro Other Functions.

Checks the consistency of the data on the Medium Shows the information about the Medium Shows the system ID Checking the installed cells; see page 311 Deletion of the complete ENC database; see page 252

Fig. 7-20

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/3Pro Other Functions

305

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts 7.7 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/3Pro Chart

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

Checking the Installed Licences If difficulties occur in the display of cells for which a licence exists, the licences installed in the local CM93/3Pro database can be checked: the check is initiated in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM93/3Pro Licensing by pressing the button Verify Installed Licences. A Select Device dialog box opens to select the required media, then click the OK button. In the dialog box which then opens in the background, information about the check performed is given. ☞ On the individual equipment items, you can perform in the same way a check of the licences existing in the other CM-93/3Pro databases of the system. Showing the System ID The system ID can be displayed by means of the function View System ID provided on the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/3Pro Other Functions. It uniquely identifies the system installed on board your ship with regard to the installation of the CM-93/3Pro chart, and may be needed for servicing purposes.

7.7.2

Transfer Function: Transferring All CM-93/3Pro Cells from Medium to Local Database

☞ ☞

☞

For general information on this topic and further necessary steps, see page 249 and 259. It is not permissible to have cells from different versions of the CM-93/3Pro Medium installed on the same system. For this reason, the following important condition applies for the transfer function: If the database into which new cells are to be transferred already contains cells, both these and the new cells must originate from the same Version of media. Jeppesen Marine normally delivers the CM-93/3Pro Medium as a DVD, but it is also possible to copy the files onto USB-Disk(s).

Application: Initial installation of CM-93/3Pro cells With the procedure described: All CM-93/3Pro cells existing on the media being used are transferred to the local database and updated there. Preparations: Install all CM-93/3Pro licences to the local database, as per Section 7.7.1: "Licences for CM-93/3Pro Cells" on page 299. 1.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set CM-93/3Pro as the Type.

2.

Put the CM-93/3Pro CD into the CD drive or the USB-Disk(s) into the USB-port, and in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance set CD/DVD or USB-Disk(s) as the Source. If the Source media has not the standard file structure, a Select Data File or Directory as Data Source dialog box opens to select the desired file(s) or directory and click the OK button . If messages relating to the table of contents appear, answer with OK.

☞ 3.

Press the Transfer button. If messages relating to the table of contents appear, answer with OK and press the Transfer button again.

4.

Under Destination, mark only CHARTPILOT (this one).

☞ 5.

306

Do not make a selection by regions before performing the next step (e.g. there must be no frame shown in the world chart).

Under Cell Files to be Transferred, leave all navigational purposes switched on.

In the Transfer menu, click the OK button and, in the selection menu which then opens, enter all the files into the right-hand column by clicking Add All >>.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts

Operating Instructions

7.7 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/3Pro Chart

6.

After pressing of the OK button of the selection menu, transfer and data conversion begin. The dialog box Transferring CM-93/3Pro Cells appears. In its upper part, the process currently taking place is listed, and in the Iower part all errors and warnings occurring in the transfer and conversion process are listed.

7.

When the transfer process has finished (you are informed of this in the dialog box Transferring CM93/3Pro Cells), close the dialog box by means of the Cancel button.

It is recommended that a check of the installed cells be performed afterwards as per Section 7.7.8: "Check of the CM-93/3Pro Cells Installed" on page 311.

7.7.3

Transfer Function: Transferring All CM-93/3Pro Cells from Local to Other Databases

☞ ☞

For general information on this topic and further necessary steps, see page 249 and 259. It is not permissible to have cells from different versions of the CM-93/3Pro CD installed on the same system. For this reason, the following important condition applies for the transfer function: If the database into which new cells are to be transferred already contains cells, both these and the new cells must originate from the same CD.

Application: Initial installation of CM-93/3Pro cells With the procedure described: All CM-93/3Pro cells located in the local database are copied to all other CM-93/3Pro databases of the system. All CM-93/3Pro licences located on the local database are copied to all other CM-93/3Pro databases, whereas licences that are not on the local database are deleted from the other CM-93/3Pro databases. Preparations: The transfer as per Section 7.7.2: "Transfer Function: Transferring All CM-93/3Pro Cells from Medium to Local Database" on page 306 must have been carried out. All CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs must be switched on. 1.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set CM-93/3Pro as the Type.

2.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, as the Source select the equipment item that is currently being operated (this one).

3.

Press the Transfer button. Under Destination, mark all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs.

☞

Under Cell Files to be Transferred, leave all navigational purposes switched on.

4.

In the Transfer menu, press the OK button. The transfer begins. The dialog box Remote Transfer of CM-93/3Pro Cells appears. In its upper part, the process currently taking place is listed, and in the Iower part all errors and warnings occurring in the transfer process are listed.

5.

When the transfer process has finished (you are informed of this in the dialog box Remote Transfer of CM-93/3Pro Cells), close the dialog box by means of the Cancel button.

It is recommended that a check of the installed cells be performed afterwards as per Section 7.7.8: "Check of the CM-93/3Pro Cells Installed" on page 311.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

307

CHARTPILOT

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts

Operating Instructions

7.7 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/3Pro Chart

7.7.4

Real Time Update (RTU) for Jeppesen Marine ENC

☞ ☞

For general information on this topic and further necessary steps, see page 249 and 259. The procedure can be performed by any owner of a subscription licence. A special registration is not required. IMPORTANT: This online update does not replace the regular updates. Even if online updates are performed at regular intervals, an update must still be carried out with every new CD/DVD received from Jeppesen Marine.

The 1. 2. 3.

Real Time Update is performed in three steps: Generating the RTU request; see below. Producing the Online Update medium 1); see below. Performing the update as per Section 7.7.5: "Update Function: Update of the CM-93/3Pro Cells on All Databases" on page 309.

A prerequisite for successful updating by RTU is that an update according to Section 7.7.5: "Update Function: Update of the CM-93/3Pro Cells on All Databases" on page 309 must have been performed completely and successfully with the last CD received from Jeppesen Marine. Generating the RTU Request and Producing the Online Update medium 1.

Put a DOS-formatted Floppy Disk into the Floppy or a USB-media into the USB-Disk(s), and in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/3Pro Other Functions press the button Generate RTU Request. A Select Device dialog box opens to select the needed media, 2) confirmed with OK. After the request to insert the Floppy/USB-media has been answered with OK, an RTU request is generated and written to the Floppy/USB-media as a file with the name CM93-3_[date]_[UTC].org. This process can be observed in a dialog box.

2.

When this file is sent as the attachment of an e-mail to the Jeppesen Marine RTU server, the server then returns one or more e-mails after a short while, each with one or more files attached.

☞ ☞

The e-mail address must be requested from Jeppesen Marine or, alternatively, it may be obtained from the Jeppesen Marine homepage on the Internet. The entire process is automatic. Any message in the body of the own e-mail is ignored. The file name is used to indicate how many files belong in total to this update: u001x002.ans Number of files belonging to this update Sequential number of this file

3.

Producing the Online Update Media: Label a CD/DVD, USB-media (best done by including the chart type and date) and copy all the files received to this media.

Use this Online Update CD to perform an update as per Section 7.7.5: "Update Function: Update of the CM-93/3Pro Cells on All Databases" on page 309.

1) 2)

If the data volume is low, the data can also be transferred to a Floppy/USB-Disk(s)/media. The term “Online Update CD” is then understood to mean this Floppy or USB-media/device in the following. see also Section 3.7: "Using Removable Devices" on page 73

308

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

7.7.5

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts 7.7 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/3Pro Chart

Update Function: Update of the CM-93/3Pro Cells on All Databases

☞

For general information on this topic, see page 249 and 259.

Application: Update of all CM-93/3Pro databases of the system after receiving a new CM-93/3Pro medium or for a Real Time Update (after generating the Online Update medium or USB-Disk(s)). Installation of CM-93/3Pro cells for post-procured licences in all CM-93/3Pro databases of the system. After an initial installation has been performed step by step (see page 310), check to ensure that all licensed cells have been transferred. With the procedure described: Expired licences are deleted in the local database. All CM-93/3Pro licences located then on the local database are copied to all other CM-93/3Pro databases, whereas licences that are not located on the local database are deleted from the other CM93/3Pro databases. On all CM-93/3Pro database, all cells are updated for which licences are available there. Outdated cells that are no longer supported are deleted on all CM-93/3Pro databases. Preparations: All CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs must be switched on. Licences that were procured after the last update must have been installed in the local database as per Section 7.7.1: "Licences for CM-93/3Pro Cells" on page 299. For a Real Time Update: The Online Update medium was produced in accordance with Section 7.7.4: "Real Time Update (RTU) for Jeppesen Marine ENC" on page 308. 1.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set CM-93/3Pro as the Type.

2.

Put the most recent CM-93/3Pro CD or the Online Update CD/DVD into the CD/DVD drive or the USB-Disk(s) into the USB-port. If a new CM-93/3Pro CD/DVD has been received with which no update has been performed yet, this CD/DVD must always be used. This also applies when its issue date lies before the date of the last online update that was performed. In this case, perform an online update again (with a renewed update request) after carrying out the update with the CM-93/3Pro CD/DVD.

3.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set CD/DVD or USB-Disk(s) as the Source. If a message about the table of contents appears, answer it with OK.

4.

Press the button Utilities > Chart Maintenance > Update. The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > Update opens 1). Under Destination there, mark all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs.

5.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > Update, press the OK button. If the operating media has not the standard file structure, a Select Data File or Directory as Data Source dialog box opens up to select the wanted file(s) or directory, confirm with OK. By means of the dialog box which then opens up, you are (again) requested to insert the latest media. If you have not done this in step 2, do it now and press the OK button of the dialog box. As a result, the update process is started and the dialog box Updating CM-93/3Pro Chart Database opens up.

6.

When a message stating completion of the update appears, you can close the dialog box Updating CM-93/3Pro Chart Database by means of the Cancel button.

It is recommended that a check of the installed cells be performed afterwards as per Section 7.7.8: "Check of the CM-93/3Pro Cells Installed" on page 311. If the update was aborted for some reason, then the databases will contain cells from different CD/DVD versions. Therefore the update must be initiated again as soon as possible and brought to completion. 1)

Is not shown when only this CHARTPILOT is installed.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

309

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts 7.7 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/3Pro Chart

7.7.6

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

Divergent Procedures for Transfer and Update In some cases, it is useful to deviate from the procedures described in Section 7.7.2: "Transfer Function: Transferring All CM-93/3Pro Cells from Medium to Local Database" on page 306 to 7.7.5 for the transfer and update: The required time is not available for the initial installation If, before the first use of the CM-93/3Pro chart, there is not enough time for a complete initial installation, it is possible to use the Transfer function to transfer only the cells of the region which will be sailed next. With the initial installation as per Section 7.7.2: "Transfer Function: Transferring All CM-93/3Pro Cells from Medium to Local Database" on page 306, an appropriate selection can be performed; for the selection procedure, see Section 7.2.6: "Selecting the Charts or Cell Files" on page 252. Then perform the transfer as per Section 7.7.3: "Transfer Function: Transferring All CM-93/3Pro Cells from Local to Other Databases" on page 307 to all other databases. As soon as there is sufficient time, the other licensed regions should be installed in the same manner, but at the latest when the first regular update is due; see the note on page 298. The cells that were not included by the consecutive selections are installed during the next update as per Section 7.7.5: "Update Function: Update of the CM-93/3Pro Cells on All Databases" on page 309. If you do not wish to wait for the next scheduled update, the CD/DVD received most recently can be used for this purpose.

7.7.7

Deleting CM-93/3Pro Cells Application: By means of the following procedures, it is possible to delete any desired selection of CM-93/3Pro cells on each CM-93/3Pro database that exists in the system. Deleting Selected Cells The listed selection procedures are described in Section 7.2.6: "Selecting the Charts or Cell Files" on page 252.

310

1.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set CM-93/3Pro as the Type.

2.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, specify under Source the equipment item on which the cells are to be deleted. This unit must be switched on.

3.

If the selection is to be made by regions or according to navigational purposes, open the corresponding frame in the world chart and press the Delete button. The Delete menu then opens.

4.

It is possible to select according to navigational purpose in the Delete menu. With the aid of the button Include Touched Cells, it can be specified there whether only those cells are to be deleted that are situated completely within the frame, or also those cells that are only touched by the frame.

5.

In the Delete menu, press the OK button and then, in the selection menu which opens, perform the selection according to cell names or select all files by clicking on Add All >>.

6.

When the OK button is pressed in the selection menu, the cells listed in the right-hand list are deleted in the database specified by step 2. Alternatively, deletion can be prevented by pressing the Cancel button.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts

Operating Instructions

7.7 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/3Pro Chart

Deleting All CM-93/3Pro Cells of a Database 1.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set CM-93/3Pro as the Type.

2.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, specify under Source the equipment item on which the cells are to be deleted. This unit must be switched on. ☞ Do not make a selection by regions before performing the next step (there must be no frame shown in the world chart).

3.

Press the Delete button and press the OK button in the Delete menu.

4.

In the selection menu which then opens, click on Add All >>. After the OK button is pressed, all CM93/3Pro cells are deleted in the database specified by step 2. Alternatively, deletion can be prevented by pressing the Cancel button.

7.7.8

Check of the CM-93/3Pro Cells Installed After an update and whenever there are doubts about the consistency or up-to-dateness of the database, the databases should be checked by means of the following function. 1.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/3Pro Other Functions, press the button Verify Installed Cells.

2.

A Select media for varification dialog box opens to select CD/DVD or USB-Disk(s)/media, confirm with OK. If the media has not the standard file structure, a Select File or Directory dialog box opens to select the required file(s) or directory, confirm with OK.

3.

Apart from the local database, other databases can also be checked in one working step: Under Destination, mark the relevant databases and click the OK button.

4.

At the latest, insert the media and click the OK button in the box with the corresponding request.

5.

As a result, the check is started and the corresponding dialog box opens up. If no errors are found, the message No errors found is shown in the box. Otherwise, a report on the errors is provided in the Errors/Warnings part of the dialog box.

☞

7.7.9

Because only cell files, but no external reference files are transferred during a Real Time Update, the message WARNING: (cell name): External reference file (file name) is missing! is shown for all cells updated by RTU for which additional files are intended. At the next regular update, the external reference files are transferred and so these messages are no longer shown. If this message still appears after a regular update, it is advisable to ask the provider about the possible cause.

Other Useful Information about the Data Maintenance of Jeppesen Marine CM-93/3Pro Cells

CM-93/3Pro CD The ship receives the CM-93/3Pro CD/DVD at intervals governed by the individual contract with Jeppesen Marine. This CM-93/3Pro CD/DVD contains all CM-93/3Pro cells that are available at the time of publishing. It contains new editions or re-issues of CM-93/3Pro cells, but no update cells. RTU Service In the periods between publishing of the CM-93/3Pro CDs, Jeppesen Marine provides the RTU service as a way of keeping the data as current as possible.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

311

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts 7.8 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/2 Chart

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

To keep the data quantities to be transferred as low as possible, only updates are provided by the RTU service. New editions, or additional new cells, are not made available. In the same way, the updates do not include the external reference files needed in some cases. These are separate files containing additional textual or graphic information. For the reasons mentioned above, it is absolutely necessary to update the database immediately when a new CM-93/3Pro CD/DVD is received, because only this source contains all the necessary data! The RTU service therefore represents a useful supplement, but is no substitute for the update with the CM-93/3Pro CD/DVD! In order to obtain a correct set of update cells for the data installed on the units, it is necessary to generate a new request directly before each planned online update and to send this to the RTU server of Jeppesen Marine. The updates then received always refer to the CM-93/3Pro CD/DVD installed last. For this reason, all cells updated by RTU are replaced by the version of the cell located on the CD/DVD whenever a new CM-93/3Pro CD/DVD is installed, even if their date indicates that they are more up-to-date than the new CM-93/3Pro CD/DVD. For this reason, it is urgently recommended that an online update be performed immediately after the latest CM-93/3Pro CD/DVD is installed.

7.8

Data Maintenance of the CM-93/2 Chart The CM-93/2 chart is exclusively published by the company Jeppesen Marine. Note: It is not possible to restore or load data for Transfer or Update operations from a USB-device. This older chart system is not supported by USB-operations. Chart maintenance for the CM-93/2 chart comprises the following operations: Initial Installation of the CM-93/2 Chart 1. Take out a subscription for the desired zones or areas from SAM Electronics and then install the CM-93/2 Authorization Code you receive on the local database; see Section 7.8.1: "Taking Out a Subscription for CM-93/2 Cells" on page 313. 2. Transfer all the CM-93/2 cell files for which the Authorization Code applies from the provider’s CDs/ DVDs to the local database, as per Section 7.8.2: "Transferring Cells of the CM-93/2 Chart from CD to Local Database" on page 315. 3. Now transfer all CM-93/2 cell files from the local database to all other CM-93/2 databases of the system, as per Section 7.8.3: "Transferring All CM-93/2 Cells from Local to Other Databases" on page 316. Updating of the CM-93/2 Chart 1. On the local database, delete all CM-93/2 cell files as per Section 7.8.5: "Deleting Cells of the CM93/2 Chart" on page 317 1).

1)

2.

Transfer all the CM-93/2 cell files for which the Authorization Code applies from the newest CDs to the local database, as per Section 7.8.2: "Transferring Cells of the CM-93/2 Chart from CD to Local Database" on page 315.

3.

On all other databases, delete all CM-93/2 cell files as per Section 7.8.5: "Deleting Cells of the CM93/2 Chart" on page 317 1).

See page 317: S a v i n g T i m e w i t h t h e U p d a t e

312

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

4.

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts 7.8 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/2 Chart

Now transfer all CM-93/2 cell files from the local database to all other CM-93/2 databases of the system, as per Section 7.8.3: "Transferring All CM-93/2 Cells from Local to Other Databases" on page 316.

Purchasing and Installing Subsequently Licensed Cells: As for I n i t i a l I n s t a l l a t i o n o f t h e C M - 9 3 / 2 C h a r t

7.8.1

Taking Out a Subscription for CM-93/2 Cells

☞ ☞

For general information on this topic, see page 248. All operating actions listed in this section should be performed at the CHARTPILOT that is intended for the chart maintenance work of the system. For the following operating steps, the Type CM-93/2 must be set in the Utilities > Chart Maintenance menu.

Before initial installation can take place, a subscription must be arranged with SAM Electronics to cover one or more particular geographical areas. With this chart type, the system identification code (see Section 7.2.2: "Procuring the Subscription, Permits and Licences" on page 248) and geographical areas are combined to form the CM-93/2 User Code. This code must be generated at one of the CHARTPILOTs of the system on which the CM-93/2 chart is to be used; see below. You will be sent the CM-93/2 CDs when the subscription has been taken out. When you send the CM-93/2 User Code to your contractual partner, you will be given the CM-93/2 Authorization Code, with which you can then activate the subscription in the system; see below. The CM-93/2 chart is divided into nine zones, and has divided up each zone into a different number of areas. Each cell of the CM-93/2 chart is assigned to an area. If you wish to obtain cells of the CM-93/2 chart, you can take out a subscription for all zones, for one or more zones, or for one or more areas. Generating CM-93/2 User Code 1.

Put one of the CM-93/2 CDs into the CD/DVD drive.

2.

Call up the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/2 Subscription. In the world chart which then appears, Zone 1 is displayed as a hatched region. If an existing subscription has already been activated, the corresponding regions are marked dark blue.

3.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/2 Subscription, indicate under Selection by whether you have taken out a subscription for zones or for areas.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

313

CHARTPILOT

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts

Operating Instructions

7.8 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/2 Chart

Time at which the subscription was last activated Specifies whether only zones or only areas are selected. Number of the currently selected zone Number of the currently selected area within the currently selected zone This marks the next or previous zone or area by means of hatching. Enters the currently hatched zone or area into the list of regions that are to be covered by the subscription, or deletes this list entry (the regions entered in the list are displayed dark blue in the world chart). CM-93/2 User Code From the list of regions to be covered by the subscription, and from other data, this generates the CM-93/2 User Code. Input field for the CM-93/2 password Activates the subscription. Cancels the subscription. Fig. 7-21

4.

The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/2 Subscription

With the buttons ☞ and –, mark under Selection all subscribed zones or areas by means of hatching, and in each case press Add/Remove until all subscribed-for zones or areas are marked dark blue on the world chart. When doing this, note the numbers of the marked zones or areas. By pressing Add/Remove again, marking can be cancelled.

5.

Press the Generate User Code button. The 18-place CM-93/2 User Code is then displayed to you above this button.

☞ 6.

The menu can be exited by clicking on the Chart Maintenance button, which is situated above the menu.

To obtain the CM-93/2 Authorization Code, send this CM-93/2 User Code to the department from which the subscription was obtained, IMPORTANT: Note not only the User Code but also - and without fail - all numbers of the zones or areas covered by your subscription. You will need these numbers so that you can activate the subscription.

Entering the Authorization Code; Activating the Subscription After the 16-digit CM-93/2 Authorization Code has been received, the subscription can be activated: 1.

314

Generate the User Code again by marking all zones or areas covered by the subscription - see above. If, in this process, the same zones/areas are marked as in the first-time generation of the User Code, the same User Code must also be displayed. Compare the User Codes!

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts

Operating Instructions

2.

7.8 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/2 Chart

Under Authorization Code, input the Authorization Code received, and press Activate Subscription. The transfer of the files of the zones or areas covered by the subscription is then enabled in the CHARTPILOT. If, previously, the subscription had covered different zones or areas, these can no longer be transferred from the CD.

☞ ☞

Zero or capital O? The User Code and Authorization Code are hexadecimal numbers, and so they do not contain a capital O. The menu can by exited by clicking on the Chart Maintenance button situated above the menu.

You can now transfer the subscribed-for data from the CD to the hard disk drive (see Section 7.8.2: "Transferring Cells of the CM-93/2 Chart from CD to Local Database" on page 315). Deleting the Subscription Data If work with the CM-93/2 chart is no longer to be performed with the system, or if an error in licence management occurs and cannot be corrected by means of the operating procedure described, the subscription can be cancelled. NOTICE: After the following procedure has been performed, cells of the CM-93/2 chart cannot be transferred from the CD into the CM-93/2 databases of the system. Only if it is known which zones or areas were covered by the subscription, and only if the Authorization Code is available, will it be possible to bring the subscription back into existence so that cells of the CM-93/2 chart can again be transferred from the CD. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/2 Subscription, press the Remove Subscription button. A safeguard question then appears. If you then enter the word PRUNE in the input field of that safeguard question and press the OK button, the subscription data will be deleted on the hard disk drive of the CHARTPILOT that is being operated.

☞

7.8.2

In this process, the cells of the CM-93/2 chart remain preserved. If the entire local CM-93/2 database is to be deleted, then in addition the cells of the CM-93/2 chart will have to be deleted in accordance with Section 7.8.5: "Deleting Cells of the CM-93/2 Chart" on page 317.

Transferring Cells of the CM-93/2 Chart from CD to Local Database

☞

For general information on this topic, see page 249 and 312.

Application: Initial installation of CM-93/2 cells Update after receiving the latest CM-93/2 CDs Installation of subsequently licensed CM-93/2 cells With the procedure described: All CM-93/2 cells for which there is a subscription are transferred to the local database.

☞

From the program point of view, no distinction is made between first-time transfer and an update: both on receiving the CM-93/2 CDs for the first time and on receiving the more up-to-date CDs, all desired data must be transferred into the CM-93/2 databases of the system by means of the procedure described here.

Preparations: For the initial installation and for the installation of subsequently licensed cells: Install the Authorization Code on the local database as per Section 7.8.1: "Taking Out a Subscription for CM-93/2 Cells" on page 313. For an update: On the local database, delete all CM-93/2 cell files as per Section 7.8.5: "Deleting Cells of the CM-93/2 Chart" on page 317 1).

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

315

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts 7.8 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/2 Chart

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

1.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set CM-93/2 as the Type.

2.

Put the CD/DVD of the desired zone into the CD/DVD drive and in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set CD/DVD as the Source. If a message appears concerning the table of contents, answer it with OK.

☞

Do not make a selection by regions before performing the next step (e.g. there must be no frame shown in the world chart).

3.

Press the Transfer button. If messages relating to the table of contents appear, answer with OK and press the Transfer button again.

4.

Under Destination, mark only CHARTPILOT (this one).

☞ 5.

7.8.3

Under Cell Files to be Transferred, leave all navigational purposes switched on.

After pressing of the OK button of the Transfer menu, transfer and conversion begin. The only cells that are transferred are the selected cells not yet present in the CM-93/2 database selected under Destination, and the selected cells that are present with a different status. During this process, the progress of the transfer (and of the simultaneous decoding and conversion to the internal format) is displayed. Transfer is finished when the display Percentage copied 100% appears, together with a corresponding message.

Transferring All CM-93/2 Cells from Local to Other Databases

☞

For general information on this topic, see page 249 and 312.

Application: Initial installation of CM-93/2 cells Update after receiving the latest CM-93/2 CDs Installation of subsequently licensed CM-93/2 cells With the procedure described: All CM-93/2 cells located on the local database are copied to all other CM-93/2 databases of the system. Preparations: The transfer as per Section 7.8.2: "Transferring Cells of the CM-93/2 Chart from CD to Local Database" on page 315 must have been carried out. All CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs must be switched on. Only for an update: On all other databases, delete all CM-93/2 cell files as per Section 7.8.5: "Deleting Cells of the CM-93/2 Chart" on page 317 1). 1.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set CM-93/2 as the Type.

2.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, as the Source select the CHARTPILOT that is currently being operated (this one).

3.

In the world chart, pull open the largest possible frame (up to the margin) and press the Transfer button.

4.

Under Destination, mark all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs.

☞ 5.

1) 1)

Under Cell Files to be Transferred, leave all navigational purposes switched on.

After pressing of the OK button of the Transfer menu, the transfer begins. The dialog box Remote Transfer of CM-93/2 Cells appears. In its upper part, the process currently taking place is listed, and in the lower part all errors and warnings occurring in the transfer process are listed.

See page 317: S a v i n g T i m e w i t h t h e U p d a t e See page 317: S a v i n g T i m e w i t h t h e U p d a t e

316

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts

Operating Instructions

6.

7.8.4

7.8 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/2 Chart

When the transfer process has finished, press the Cancel button after the corresponding request.

Divergent Procedures for Transfer and Update In some cases, it is useful to deviate from the procedures described in Section 7.8.2: "Transferring Cells of the CM-93/2 Chart from CD to Local Database" on page 315 to 7.8.5 for the transfer and update: Saving Time with the Update If, during an update, the existing cells on the databases are not deleted before the transfer is performed, the transfer process is much faster, because only the changed (and, if any, the new) cells are transferred. Deleting the cells before the update is only necessary to ensure that no cells remain on the databases that were replaced by one or more other cells and are therefore no longer supported. Because this replacement of existing cells occurs very rarely, it is justifiable not to perform the deletion with every single update. No MULTIPILOT is Installed in the System The initial installation can be performed with the procedure as per Section 7.8.2: "Transferring Cells of the CM-93/2 Chart from CD to Local Database" on page 315 directly on all databases of the system. The transfer as per Section 7.8.3: "Transferring All CM-93/2 Cells from Local to Other Databases" on page 316 is then no longer necessary. With transfer as per Section 7.8.2: "Transferring Cells of the CM-93/2 Chart from CD to Local Database" on page 315, mark all CHARTPILOTs under Destination in step 4. Not All of the Cells of the Subscription are to be Installed With the initial installation as per Section 7.8.2: "Transferring Cells of the CM-93/2 Chart from CD to Local Database" on page 315, an appropriate selection must be performed; for the selection procedure, see Section 7.2.6: "Selecting the Charts or Cell Files" on page 252. Then perform the transfer as per Section 7.8.3: "Transferring All CM-93/2 Cells from Local to Other Databases" on page 316 to all other databases. Such an initial installation with subsequent transfer must also be carried out for new cells for which subscriptions were taken out later.

7.8.5

Deleting Cells of the CM-93/2 Chart

Deleting All CM-93/2 Cells of a Database 1.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set CM-93/2 as the Type.

2.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, specify under Source the equipment item on which the cells are to be deleted. This unit must be switched on. ☞ Do not make a selection by regions before performing the next step (there must be no frame shown in the world chart).

3.

Press the Delete button and press the OK button in the Delete menu. An input field appears. If the word PRUNE is entered there and the OK button is pressed, all cells of the CM-93/2 chart on the CM-93/2 database defined by step 2 are deleted.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

317

7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts 7.8 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/2 Chart

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

Deleting Selected Cells The listed selection procedures are described in Section 7.2.6: "Selecting the Charts or Cell Files" on page 252.

318

1.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set CM-93/2 as the Type.

2.

In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, specify under Source the equipment item on which the cells are to be deleted. This unit must be switched on.

3.

If the selection is to be made by regions or according to navigational purposes, open the corresponding frame in the world chart and press the Delete button. The Delete menu then opens.

4.

If no frame was drawn in step 3, the number of cells in the database are shown in the Delete menu, grouped according to navigational purpose. If a frame was drawn, it is possible to select according to navigational purpose in the Delete menu. With the aid of the button Include Touched Cells, it can be specified there whether only those cells are to be deleted that are situated completely within the frame, or also those cells that are only touched by the frame.

5.

In the Delete menu, press the OK button. When the safeguard question which then appears is answered by pressing of the associated OK button, all cells that are contained in the CM-93/2 database defined by step 2 and have been selected for deletion are deleted. Alternatively, deletion can be prevented by pressing the Cancel button.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e35.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS

Operating Instructions

8.1 Management of the Track, Waypoint, Map and User Chart Objects Files

8

Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS

8.1

Management of the Track, Waypoint, Map and User Chart Objects Files

8.1.1

Maintaining Order in the Catalogs

8.1.1.1

Track, Map 1) and Waypoint Files

When you have generated the first track files or map files 2), you will probably assign them to the catalog that was created by the manufacturer. If you then make more frequent use of the advantages offered to you by the system in conjunction with the tracks, you might wish to distribute the existing files later on to several catalogs. Furthermore, at some time, files will certainly have to be deleted or assigned to a different catalog, or a file will have to be given a different number, or a catalog will have to be renamed, and so on. You can also obtain an overview of the contents of a catalog by having a list printed out indicating the files contained in the catalog. The procedure for executing these measures is described in the following. However, it is assumed that the procedure for handling the files needed for generating the tracks, maps and waypoint files (loading, selecting, storing etc. - see Section 5.1) are known. The description is given using the tracks as an example. waypoint files are always dealt with in the same way, except that the specific menu is called up under Maps > ... or Tracks > Waypoint File > ... and not under Tracks > ... . Generating a New Catalog A catalog is generated when, during storage of a file, a catalog name not yet used is entered under Selected Catalog in the ... > Store menu and the menu is exited by pressing of the OK button. All catalogs are of equal priority; there are no lower-level catalogs. Deletion of Files A track is deleted on the hard disk drive when the catalog containing the tracks to be deleted is marked under Catalogs in the Tracks > Delete menu, the tracks to be deleted are marked under Tracks, and the menu is exited by pressing of the Delete button. NOTICE: Files that are deleted are irretrievably lost. Therefore, make back-up copies on Floppy (see Section 8.1.2) or USB-Disk(s) before making extensive changes to the catalogs and files.

1) 2)

On CHARTPILOTs installed with R1x00 radars, maps are only available on customer´s request and must be activated on service-level. All information about handling of map files in this and the following chapters is only valid for systems with Radar 9xxx or for sytems with Radar 1x00 if the map function of the chartpilot has been enabled on service level.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e39.fm / 12.08.09

319

8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS 8.1 Management of the Track, Waypoint, Map and User Chart Objects Files

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

Deleting a Catalog A catalog can be deleted only if there are no files assigned to it. Therefore, if necessary, all files contained in the catalog must first be deleted or assigned to a different catalog. A catalog is deleted when the catalog does not contain any files, this catalog is marked under Catalogs in one of the ... > Delete menus, and the ... > Delete menu is exited by pressing of the Delete button. Assigning a File to a Different Catalog The -

file must be loaded. A track is assigned to a different catalog as follows: it is selected in the Tracks > Edit > Select menu, in the Tracks > Edit > Store menu, a copy of this track is stored in the other catalog, and then in the Tracks > Delete menu, the track is deleted from the original catalog.

The copy is given a different number or a different name if you change the entries under No. or Name in the ... > Store menu. Giving a New Number to a File The -

file must be loaded. The number of a file is changed as follows: the file is selected in the Tracks > Edit > Select menu, the new number is entered under No. in the Tracks > Edit > Store menu, and the menu is exited by pressing of the OK button.

Giving a New Name to a Catalog A catalog cannot be renamed. However, you can obtain the same effect as renaming if you create a new catalog with the desired name and assign to the new catalog all files contained in the catalog that is to be renamed. Printing Out a List of the Files Contained in the Catalogs It is also possible to print out a list of the files contained in one or more catalogs. Printing takes place if the printer and the printer controller are set (see page 73), the catalogs whose files are to be listed are marked under Catalogs in the Data Transfer From Harddisk menu, the file types that are to be contained in the list are selected under File Type in the Utilities > Backup/Restore menu, the Print Catalog button is pressed there, and the question which then appears is answered by pressing of the Yes button. In the list that is printed out, the track files are preceded by a T, the map files by an M, and the waypoint files by a W.

320

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e39.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS

Operating Instructions

8.1.1.2

8.1 Management of the Track, Waypoint, Map and User Chart Objects Files

Files of the User Chart Objects

Catalog Structure The files of the User Chart Objects are stored in separate catalogs. The program automatically defines both the files and the catalogs. During this process, symbols and lines are not treated in the same way as areas. Files of the Symbols and Lines -

The earth's surface is divided up into areas measuring 3° by 3°. All symbols and lines positioned on such an area are put into one and the same file. During the process of division into files, lines which extend beyond these boundaries are cut at the boundary; when the files are called up for the purpose of display or processing, these lines are joined together again.

-

The earth's surface is divided up into areas measuring 15° by 15°. All User Chart Objects files assigned to such an area are put into a catalog.

For the designation of the files and catalogs, the south-west corner of the area is used in all cases. File of the Areas All areas edited as User Chart Objects, together with the marked events (see Section 4.9) and the entered position-fixes (see Section 4.10), are put into a single file with world-wide coverage. In the Data Transfer menus, this file is called Areas, Events and Fixes. Processing of the Catalog Structure Changes in the files and catalogs, as described in Section 8.1.1.1, cannot be made in the User Chart Objects files. Printing of the files contained is not possible either. Just as a line/symbol file and the catalog are generated automatically as soon as a symbol or line is edited for the defined area, the file and (if applicable) the catalog are also deleted again as soon as there are no longer any symbols and lines (or parts of lines) in the area defined for them.

8.1.2

Data Backup It is strongly recommended that all track, map, waypoint and User Chart Objects files present on the hard disk drive should be copied onto Floppy or USB-Disk(s) (see also Section 3.7: "Using Removable Devices" on page 73), and that these Floppy/USB-Disk(s) should be kept in a safe place. If the hard disk gets damaged or if the files stored on it are accidentally erased, the copies stored can be used to recover the stock of data. Naturally, you can also transfer the files onto Floppy/USB-Disk(s) in order to copy them onto CHARTPILOTs or MULTIPILOTs 1000 and 91xx of other systems. The program also allows the copying of any desired selection of the existing files. However, if you are copying the files for the purpose of data saving, it is advisable to save track, map and waypoint files and all User Chart Objects files in one operation each, or to save one or more catalogs completely per operation, or to proceed according to file types. Only for Floppy (ARCHIVE): During copying, any files that are present on the Floppy are erased.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e39.fm / 12.08.09

321

CHARTPILOT

8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS 8.1 Management of the Track, Waypoint, Map and User Chart Objects Files

Operating Instructions

Performing Data Backup: Copying Files on media 1.

Put a Floppy Disk into the Floppy (with the sliding protective cap leading the way, and with the central hole facing downwards; the write protection must be off, i.e. the hole at bottom left, as seen from above, must be covered) or the USB-Disk(s) into the USB-port.

2.

Switch on Track or User Objects and, by pressing the buttons Track (T), Waypoint (W) or Lines and Symbols and Areas, Events, Fixes, specify which file types are to be copied. All of the following actions refer only to the file types selected in this way.

Select operation to backup or re-

This specifies the type of files that are offered for selection as files to be transferred.

Backup to Device or Restore from Device. Select this button to start operation. Calls up the Select Device dialog box.

Calls up a safeguard question; if this question is answered in the affirmative, printing of the catalog begins - see page 320.

Fig. 8-1

3.

The Utilities > Backup/Restore menu

All files that are to be copied must now be entered under Selected Files in the Data Selection menu (Figure 8-2). For this purpose, the following possibilities exist and can be used one after another: Selecting all files of one or more catalogs: Mark the catalog(s) under Catalogs, and press Add Catalogs >>. Selecting one or more files of a catalog: Under Catalogs, mark the catalog; under Files, mark the file(s) that is (are) to be selected; and press Add Files >>. Withdrawing the selection of one or more catalogs or files: Under Selected Files, mark the catalogs or files that are not to be copied, and press the Remove button. Completely resetting the selection made: Press the button Remove All.

4.

322

In the Utilities > Backup/Restore menu, press the Backup to Device button. The Select Device dialog box opens to select the device to backup (see also Section 3.7: "Using Removable Devices" on page 73), confirm with OK. The Backup dialog box opens, where it is possible to select the wanted destination directory to store, confirm with OK.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e39.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS

Operating Instructions

8.1 Management of the Track, Waypoint, Map and User Chart Objects Files

Note for Track/Map: The catalog will be created as a new folder on the backup medium. The files themselves will be stored there. Note for User Objects: The Areas, Events and fixes file will be stored as a single file on the medium. The Lines and Symbols catalog directories will be stored as folders on the medium.

Mark the catalog(s) which contain files that are to be copied. - In the case of Own Object catalogs, the geographical area too is stated.

Catalogs and files that are to be copied

Inserts all files of the marked catalogs into the Selected Files list. Files of the catalog that was marked (last) under Catalogs - In the case of Own Object catalogs, the geographical area too is stated.

Removes all catalogs and files from the Selected Files list.

Inserts all files marked under Files into the Selected Files list. Fig. 8-2

Removes the catalogs and files marked under Selected Files from the Selected Files list.

The Data Selection menu

Data Entered under Selected Files From left to right, the following items are entered: File type; T = Track, M = Map, W = Waypoint file, Catalog > File number (track number, map number, number of the waypoint file). In the case of line/symbol files of the User Chart Objects: the coordinates of the file content, File name (track name, map name, name of the waypoint file) Instead of the file number and file name, (All) is entered if all files of the catalog of the type shown in the line are selected. USEFUL INFORMATION For Floppy (Archive) only If not all selected files fit on the inserted Floppy If a file that is to be transferred no longer fits on the Floppy, an appropriate message appears. When this occurs, take the inserted Floppy out and put another Floppy in. After pressing of the Continue button, the transfer is continued. On the Floppy, make a note of the sequence in which they were inserted. (During the process of copying back, Floppy used one after another in one and the same operation must be inserted in the same sequence.)

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e39.fm / 12.08.09

323

CHARTPILOT

8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS 8.1 Management of the Track, Waypoint, Map and User Chart Objects Files

Operating Instructions

Copying the Catalog Assignments, Index File On the Floppy, a special file (Index File) is created in which, for every file copied, a note is made stating which catalog this file comes from. As a result, when files are being copied back they can be assigned to the original catalogs again.

8.1.3

Restoring Data This section describes how track, map, waypoint and User Chart Object files that have been copied onto Floppy or USB-Disk(s) as described in Section 8.1.2 1) can be copied back onto the hard disk drive of the CHARTPILOT. If a set of data damaged on the hard disk drive is to be restored by copying, it is usually a good idea to copy all files that exist on the medium. However, the program also permits the copying of just a selection (any desired selection) of the files that exist on the media. Data Restoration: Copying Files from Floppy/USB-Disk(s) onto the Hard Disk Drive 1.

Put the Floppy Disk into the Floppy (with the sliding protective cap leading the way and with the central hole facing downwards) or the USB-Disk in the USB-port.

2.

Switch on Track or User Objects and, by pressing the buttons Track (T), Waypoint (W) or Lines and Symbols and Areas, Events, Fixes, specify which file types are to be copied. All of the following actions refer only to the file types selected in this way.

3.

Press the Restore from Device button, a Select Removable Medium dialog box opens. Select the wanted medium to restore from and confirm with OK. A Select file(s) or directory dialog box opens, file(s) marked with a (+) in front of the file name can be restored 2), confirm with OK. So that a file cannot be accidentally overwritten on the hard disk drive, and thus lost, the program checks during the preparation whether the catalog into which a file is to copied already contains a file of the same type with the same number. If it does, the Overwrite dialog box appears, like in Figure on page 76 (see also Section 3.7: "Using Removable Devices" on page 73).

4.

1) 2)

When the message File(s) successfully restored appears in the Ready menu, all selected files have been copied onto the hard disk.

and may have been modified on another computer with special programs, e.g. tracks with the aid of a weather routing program, files marked with a (-) can not be restored

324

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e39.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS

Operating Instructions

8.1 Management of the Track, Waypoint, Map and User Chart Objects Files

USEFUL INFORMATION For Floppy (Archive) only If files have been copied onto several Floppies in one and the same operation, these Floppy must now be used in the same sequence. Catalogs and files that are to be copied

The catalogs from which there are files present on the Floppy are listed here: Mark the catalog(s) which contain files that are to be copied. This puts all files of the marked catalogs into the Selected Files list.

Files present on the Floppy which are contained in the catalog marked (last) under Catalogs

Puts all files marked under Files into the Selected Files list.

Removes from the Selected Files list those catalogs and files that are marked under Selected Files.

Removes all catalogs and files from the Selected Files list.

The Data Transfer to Data Selection menu

Data Entered under Selected Files From left to right, the following are entered: File type (T = Track, M = Map, W = Waypoint file) Catalog > File number (track number, map number, number of the waypoint file). In the case of line/symbol files of the User Chart Objects: the coordinates of the file content, File name (track name, map name, name of the waypoint file) Instead of the file number and file name, (All) is entered if all files of the catalog of the type shown in the line are selected.

8.1.4

Transfer of Track and Waypoint Files by E-Mail Sending by email 1.

Store the wanted data on the Floppy (MS-DOS)/USB-Disk (see also Section 8.1.2: "Data Backup" on page 321).

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e39.fm / 12.08.09

325

CHARTPILOT

8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS

Operating Instructions

8.1 Management of the Track, Waypoint, Map and User Chart Objects Files

2.

Send the file(s) by email on a PC.

Receiving by email 1.

Store the received data on a removable medium again (see also Section 8.1.3: "Restoring Data" on page 324).

2.

Restore from Removable Medium on the CHARTPILOT.

8.1.5

Reception of Track Files from a Connected Computer The CHARTPILOT can also receive track files from a connected computer, e.g. when used in a surveying system. The data transfer is initiated in the connected system. All tracks received in this way are stored in the ImportExport catalog and can be called up from there when needed for use at the CHARTPILOT and the radar indicators.

8.1.6

Converting Objects of the Map into User Chart Objects Depending on the system configuration, this function is absent on some systems Because the maps can only be used on the radar 9xxx series, but not on the radar 1000 series, in the case of systems with mixed equipment there might be a desire to display the objects of the maps on the radar 1000 series as well. This is made possible by conversion of the maps.In the process of converting a map, the map objects are transformed into corresponding User Chart Objects 1). In this form they are stored in the files of the User Chart Objects on the local hard disk drive and are distributed to all hard disk drives in the system. For details, see Appendix D. To avoid confusion during future editing of the User Chart Objects, the same map objects must not be converted more than once. It is true that the program prevents the same map from being converted more than once on a given unit, but it does not prevent a map from being converted more than once on different units. Important: Conversion should always take place on one and the same unit. If a map is created as a modified copy of another map, only one of the two should be converted. Conversion of Maps

1)

1.

In the Floppy/USB-Disk(s), insert the Floppy/USB-Disk(s) containing the maps that are to be converted.

2.

Select the source: From Hard Disk or From Device. Selecting From Hard Disk. In the Maps on Hard Disk dialog box, it is possible to select the wanted maps for conversion, press the Add Files button, the files appear in the Maps for Conversion frame, confirm with the Read and Convert button. If selecting From Device, press the Read and Convert button, the Select Device dialog box opens to select the wanted device, confirm with OK. The Select file(s) or directory dialog box opens. Selectable file(s) are marked with (+) in front of the file name. Then click the OK button to start the conversion (see also Section 3.7: "Using Removable Devices" on page 73).

3.

If it is not known whether maps have already been converted, and if so, which ones, a list of the maps that have already been converted on this unit can be displayed by means of the button List Converted Maps.

Copies of the objects are converted; the original map remains unchanged.

326

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e39.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS

Operating Instructions

8.1 Management of the Track, Waypoint, Map and User Chart Objects Files

Maps which have already been converted on this unit, and catalogs in which all maps have already been converted on this unit, are marked with a C on the left. 4.

When the message Conversion finished appears in the dialog box, this means that all selected maps have been converted and you can close the dialog box by pressing the OK button.

Delete Converted Objects All User Chart Objects which have got into the map files by conversion of these maps can be deleted from these files. Furthermore, the map is removed from the list of maps that have already been converted on this local machine (see above, step 3). 1.

In the menu Utilities > Backup/Restore > Maps to User Chart Objects, use the button List Converted Maps to call up a selection menu in which all maps that have already been converted on this unit are listed on the left.

2.

In this menu, all maps including converted objects to delete must now be entered under Maps for Deletion (for the operating possibilities, see page 322).

3.

Press the button Delete Converted Objects. The dialog box Conversion/Deletion, which informs you of the on-going activities, then opens up, and the deletion begins.

4.

When the message Deletion finished appears in the dialog box, this means that the conversion of the selected maps has been reversed, and you can close the dialog box by pressing the OK button.

Specifies that conversion of maps is going to take place. -

Maps which are present on the local hard disk drive are converted. Maps which are present on removable media are converted. From Device opens the Select Device dialog box (see also Section 3.7: "Using Removable Devices" on page 73).

Starts the conversion process -

Indicates the maps that have already been converted on this unit. Makes it possible to select the maps whose conversion is to be reversed.

Reverses the conversion of the maps selected for such reversal.

Calls up a safeguard question; after the appropriate answering of that question, the subprogram Backup/Restore is switched off.

Fig. 8-3

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e39.fm / 12.08.09

The menu Utilities > Backup/Restore > Maps to User Chart Objects

327

CHARTPILOT

8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS

Operating Instructions

8.2 Text Pages; Lists and Notes

8.2

Text Pages; Lists and Notes

8.2.1

Generating and Using the Text Pages With the CHARTPILOT, you can also write texts, e.g. address lists of agents, the abandon ship list, or the crew muster roll. Such texts, called Text Pages, can be inspected at any time on the CHARTPILOT, and can be printed out on the connected printer. This function is implemented by means of a subroutine which you can start in the Tree under Utilities in the Conning mode by pressing the Text Pages button. The Utilities > Text Page menu then appears (if the menu function is switched on), and the entire chart area is covered by a menu with which Text Pages can be generated, modified and read. Number of the Text Page: It identifies the Text Page within the catalog; it must be entered. Name of the Text Page: It appears in the menus for calling up the Text Page (entry is not obligatory).

Date of the last modification; it is entered automatically.

The Utilities > Text Page menu; see Figure 8-5 on page 329.

Text Page display: If the Text Page is longer than 25 lines, only part of it is displayed; the rest can be made visible by scrolling. Fig. 8-4

328

The CHARTPILOT Display for the Text Page

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e39.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS

Operating Instructions

8.2 Text Pages; Lists and Notes

Text Pages are generated and handled as individual files in exactly the same way as tracks, for example. Like tracks, Text Pages are provided with a number to identify them, Text Pages must be loaded before any modification, a new or modified Text Page must be stored, and during that process it must be assigned to a catalog, Text Pages that are no longer needed can be deleted. The operating procedure for this is completely equivalent to the corresponding operating procedure for tracks as described in Section 5.1 and Section 8.1.1. In the following, therefore, apart from the general principles only those special features that relate to the handling of Text Pages are explained. Loading a Text Page; Examining a Text Page If a Text Page is to be examined, modified or printed out, it must first be loaded: press Load; under Catalogs, click the correct catalog; under Text Pages, click the correct Text Page; and by pressing the Apply button, trigger the loading process. The first 25 lines of the loaded Text Page then appear in the Text Page display. The remaining lines can be made visible by scrolling. When you have loaded the correct Text Page, you can close the ... > Load menu by pressing the Cancel button. In contrast to the tracks, only one Text Page at a time can be loaded; it is then also displayed in the Text Page display.

Load the existing Text Page in order to display it or modify it; this is done in the same way as loading a track - see page 165. Generating a completely new page. Storing the Text Page displayed; this is done in the same way as storing a track - see page 189. Deleting a loaded Text Page; this is done in the same way as deleting a track - see page 319. Causes printing of the Text Page displayed. Makes it possible to edit a Text Page. Copies all Text Pages from the hard disk drive to the Floppy Disk contained in the Floppy - see page 331. Deletes all Text Pages from the hard disk drive and copies all Text Pages from the Floppy Disk in the Floppy to the hard disk drive - see page 331.

Leaves the menu and stops the current processing. Alternative: Pressing the Tree button likewise causes leaving of the menu; the processing of the Text Page is not stopped, and can be resumed at any time. Fig. 8-5

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e39.fm / 12.08.09

The Utilities > Text Page menu

329

8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS 8.2 Text Pages; Lists and Notes

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

Generating or Modifying a Text Page 1. 2.

If a completely new Text Page is to be generated, press the New button, or if an existing Text Page is to be modified or if a new Text Page is to be generated from an existing one by copying and modifying, load the relevant Text Page.

3.

By pressing the Edit button, switch on the Editing mode. As a result, the Text Page display becomes an input field.

4.

In the Text Page frame, click the No. field and enter a new four-figure number (for specifying of the number, see below).

5.

In the Text Page frame, click the Name field and enter the name which is to be used for the Text Page.

6.

In the editing field, you can now input or modify the desired text.

7.

To complete the editing process, the Text Page must be stored, possibly not until after it has been printed out.

Storing the Text Page With Store, call up the Store Text Page menu, and under Catalogs select the catalog in which the Text Page is to be stored. When you leave the menu by pressing the OK button, storage takes place (this is all equivalent to the storing of a track - see page 189). Printing Out a Text Page In all cases, it is the loaded Text Page that is printed out, so load the Text Page if necessary. Adjust the printer and the printer controller (see page 73). In the Text Page menu, press the Print button. The Text Page is printed out. USEFUL INFORMATION Specifying the Text Page Number When selecting the number, note the following:

8.2.2

-

The Text Page is listed in ascending numerical order in the catalog in which it is stored.

-

It is uniquely identified by the number within the catalog. If a number already present in the catalog is used, the old Text Page with this number is erased when the new Text Page is stored. (However, during the storing process, a safeguard question draws you attention in good time to the double allocation of the number.) You can obtain an overview of the existing numbers after pressing the Load button (then leave the Load menu by pressing Cancel).

Management of the Text Pages Also Text Pages should be saved so that they will not be irretrievably lost if a defect occurs on the hard disk drive. Saving of the Text Pages is done by copying their files onto a data-saving medium. In all cases, all of the Text Pages present on the hard disk drive are saved together. In the CHARTPILOT, the files of the Text Pages are handled fully independently of the track waypoint and User Chart Object files, and therefore so too is their saving process.

330

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e39.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS

Operating Instructions

8.3 Voyage Recording

You perform the saving process by putting the data-saving medium into the drive, pressing the Save Text Pages button in the Utilities > Text Page menu. A Select Device dialog box appears, select the wanted device(s) and confirm with OK. A Select file(s) or directory dialog box opens to navigate through the file structure, select the directory to store and confirm with OK (see also Section 3.7: "Using Removable Devices" on page 73). If the saved files of the Text Pages are to be copied back onto the hard disk drive, put the data-saving medium into the drive, press the Restore Text Pages button, a Select Device dialog box appears, select the wanted device(s) and confirm with OK. A Select file(s) or directory dialog box opens to navigate through the file structure, select the file "textpage.tar" for restore and confirm with OK (see also Section 3.7: "Using Removable Devices" on page 73). All file(s) with a (+) in front of the file name can be selected. Confirm with OK. NOTICE: All Text Page files which already exist in the system are overwritten by this, if Floppy (Archive) was selected. Creating a New Catalog The Main catalog is created in the factory. If you make use of the possibilities offered by the Text Pages for more effective organisation, it might be appropriate to create additional catalogs (e.g. for individual geographical areas). A new catalog is created if, during storage (after pressing of Store), the name is changed in the Selected Catalog field.

8.3

Voyage Recording The CHARTPILOT offers several possibilities of recording important nautical data during the voyage. Basically, a distinction must be drawn between the following: Voyage recording, in which the data are stored on the hard disk drive and which you cannot switch off, and the generation of protocol prints (i.e. record print-outs) which you can initiate and parameterise during the voyage (see Section 8.4).

8.3.1

Performing of Voyage Recording, Management of Recordings As long as the CHARTPILOT is switched on, the present data relating to Navigation, Short Term Navigation, Long Term ARPA Targets AIS Targets Engine and Thruster Azimuth Thruster Environment Weather ECDIS TRACKPILOT SPEEDPILOT are stored cyclically in individual records on the hard disk drive. The records are put into two different files:

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e39.fm / 12.08.09

331

CHARTPILOT

8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS

Operating Instructions

8.3 Voyage Recording

-

In the short-term recording file, all records with the exception of Navigation, Long Term are stored at short intervals (record ECDIS only if the data has been changed). Each individual record remains in the file for 12 1) hours at least, and is then deleted (overwritten). Because the file remains intact even when the CHARTPILOT is switched off, it therefore always contains the data of the past 12 1) hours during which the CHARTPILOT was switched on.

-

In the long-term recording file, only the Navigation, Long Term records are stored; this is done once every 30 minutes. Each individual record remains in this file for 3 month unless the file is deleted before that by means of the Reset function. Details for contents of the recordings and recording intervals see Appendix C.

At any time, both recordings can be stored permanently, their content can be replayed on the screen of the CHARTPILOT (see Section 8.3.2) and can be printed out on the printer. For these purposes, the file concerned must first be loaded. The files can also be backed up on Floppy/USB-Disk(s) and (e.g. for replay or printing out) they can be copied back to the hard disk again from the Floppy/USB-Disk(s). So that the long-term recording file will only contain the data of the present voyage, it must be reset at the beginning of the voyage, i.e. its content must be deleted. The recording of records is done by the main program, and therefore takes place as long as the CHARTPILOT is switched on. However, if you want to operate the voyage recording function you must switch on a special subroutine and must switch it off again at the end of the operating procedure. Switching the Voyage Recording Operating Program On and Off In the Tree, call up the voyage recording operating program by pressing the Voyage Recording button. The Voyage Recording menu then appears (see Figure 8-6). This subroutine is switched off by pressing the Exit button in the Voyage Recording > File menu and by appropriately answering the safeguard question which then appears.

Reset Long-Term Recording... Search Date and Time ... General Information... Replay Monitor... ECDIS Information ... LOP Information Load Newest Load Store... Print... Delete Backup... Restore... Exit...

Fig. 8-6

1)

Short-Term Recording... Long-Term Recording...

See Section 8.3.2.

For functions of the individual buttons, see text.

The Voyage Recording menu and its submenus

Can also be set to 24 hours at service level.

332

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e39.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS

Operating Instructions

8.3 Voyage Recording

Resetting the Long-Term Recording at the Beginning of the Voyage Click the Reset Long-Term Recording button in the Voyage Recording > Options menu. If you give the appropriate answer to the safeguard question which then appears, the content of the long-term recording file will be deleted. If the content of the long-term recording file is to be preserved, you must store the file or copy it onto a Floppy before. The content of the short-term recording file cannot be deleted. Loading the present File By pressing the Short-Term Recording button or the Long-Term Recording button in the Voyage Recording > File > Load Newest menu, select the file type. The current content of the selected file is then loaded into the main memory of the operating program. If there was already a file loaded, it is deleted in the main memory during this process. Loading a File which is Already Stored In the Voyage Recording > File > Load menu, select the file type. A list of the stored files of the selected type then appears in a menu. Click the name of the desired file. It then appears in the Selection field. By pressing of the OK button, this file is loaded into the main memory of the operating program. If there was already a file loaded, it is deleted in the main memory during this process. Storing a File To be able to store a file on the hard disk drive, the file must be in the loaded state. Under Selection in the Voyage Recording > File > Store menu, enter the name under which the loaded file is to appear for further handling in the menus. If the name of a file already stored is to be used and the stored file is to be deleted, the name can be taken over into the Selection field by clicking in the list situated above that. By pressing of the OK button, the file situated in the main memory is stored on the hard disk drive under the file name entered. If the hard disk drive already contains a file with this name, a message about this appears. After appropriate confirmation of this message, the file present on the hard disk drive is deleted when the new file is stored. Depending on the file type, up to five files can be stored. If an attempt is made to store a sixth file, an appropriate message appears. As an alternative to storing, copying onto a Floppy is possible. Data Backup, Copying Files onto a Floppy Data backup of the voyage recording files is done in the same way as data backup of the track files (see page 321). The menu corresponding to the Data Transfer From Harddisk menu (see Figure 8-2 on page 323) is opened in the Voyage Recording > File menu by pressing the Backup button. In the Files on Harddisk frame, all existing short-term recording files and all long-term recording files are listed in one list each. Insert a Floppy Disk in the Floppy 1) or USB-Disk(s) into the USB-port. All files that are to be copied must now be entered under Selected Files. Start the copying process by pressing the Transfer button. For entering the files into the Selected Files list and the further procedure, see P e r f o r m i n g D a t a B a c k u p : C o p y i n g F i l e s o n m e d i a , step 3 on page 322. (see also Section 3.7: "Using Removable Devices" on page 73)

1)

With the sliding protective cover pointing away from you, the central hole facing downwards, and the write protect function switched off, i.e. the hole at bottom left (as seen from above) must be covered.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e39.fm / 12.08.09

333

8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS 8.3 Voyage Recording

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

Copying a File from a Floppy onto the Hard Disk Drive Insert a Floppy Disk in the Floppy or USB-Disk(s) into the USB-port and press the Restore button in the Voyage Recording > File menu. The Select Device dialog box appears to select the wanted media. In the dialog box which then appears, the type and name of the file contained on the Floppy is displayed. After appropriate answering of the safeguard question contained in the dialog box, the file is copied onto the hard disk. If the hard disk contains a file of the same type having the same name, an appropriate message appears (see also Section 3.7: "Using Removable Devices" on page 73) and confirm with OK. Now opens a Select file(s) or directory. Files marked with (+) in front of the file name are ready to restore. Select these files and confirm with OK. If the hard disk already contains five files of the type, a request appears, requesting deletion of one of the files on the hard disk. Deleting a File on the Hard Disk In the Voyage Recording > File > Delete menu, select the file type. A list of the stored files of the selected type then appears in a menu. Mark the file that is to be deleted and press the OK button. After the safeguard question which then appears has been answered appropriately, the marked file is deleted on the hard disk. Printing Out the Content of the Short-Term Recording The content of the short-term recording cannot be printed out directly. However, the content of the short-term recording can be printed out indirectly by switching on the cyclical recording of nautical ownship data and the recording of the selected position and speed sensors according to Section 8.4 while the track is being replayed according to Section 8.3.2. Printing Out the Content of the Long-Term Recording To be able to print out the content of the long-term recording, the long-term recording must be in the loaded state. 1.

Set the printer and the printer controller (see page 73).

2.

Click the Print button in the Voyage Recording > File menu. The Print Voyage box then appears. The Print Complete function is switched on. Under From, the recording instant of the first record is displayed, and under To the recording instant of the last record is displayed.

3.

If you want to print the entire content of the loaded file, you must now press the OK button. or If you only want to print out part of the file, switch on the Print Part function, under From and To input the beginning and end of the recording time-period that is to be printed out, and then press the OK button.

4.

The execution of the printing process is controlled by the operating system. During printing, you can therefore use the voyage recording program for other purposes or else you can switch it off.

8.3.2

Replay of a Voyage Recording During replay of a voyage recording, the program parts which provide the displays and the operating functions use the recorded data (including the recording instant concerned) instead of the data that currently exist.

334

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e39.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS

Operating Instructions

8.3 Voyage Recording

The display used during the recording, the display mode, the track that may have been used, the switched-on menus etc. are not recorded. Therefore, these settings can be operated freely when the voyage recording is being replayed. While the voyage recording is being replayed, the own ship symbol and all own ship data appear on the screen as usual. You can then operate the CHARTPILOT largely as if the ship were currently moving according to the data displayed. If, for example, you then load a track and define it as the System Track, the data in (for example) the Track/Schedule display refer to this track. If, for example, you change the alarm limits, the alarm messages appear in accordance with the set values. If, during replay, you have activated the generation of protocol prints, the recorded own ship data are printed out on the connected printer on the basis of the System Track that is set during the replay. During replay of a voyage recording, only the following differences exist compared to on-line operation: The definition of the System Track affects the CHARTPILOT only; it has no effect on the other components of the system. If a voyage recording is replayed during the voyage, the alarm messages generated by the system in the meantime do not appear on the CHARTPILOT. The time axis is compressed, and the compression can be varied. During replay, a large, flashing

appears in the chart area.

Basically, these remarks apply both to the 12 Hours Recording and to the long-term recording. in the case of the long-term recording, however, it must be borne in mind that, because of the low frequency of recording (one recording every 30 minutes), this recording is equivalent to a series of snapshots. Replay of a Voyage Recording 1.

If a System Track has been defined, it must first be deselected (see page 230).

2.

Switch on the operating program for voyage recording, and load the desired file (see page 333).

3.

With the symbol keys of the Voyage Recording menu, you can now control the timing of the replay in a manner similar to that of a video recorder (see the following illustration). During replay of the short-term recording, a recording instant is reproduced every second or so; during replay of the long-term recording, every 10 seconds or so. In the menu Voyage Recording > Options, you can open the Time Search box by means of the Search Date and Time function. There, the recording (start) instant that is to be displayed can be specified (as often as is desired, including during replay).

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e39.fm / 12.08.09

335

CHARTPILOT

8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS

Operating Instructions

8.4 Protocol Prints

In the menu Voyage Recording > Display, by switching on the function General Information, you can obtain an indication of the number of records contained in the file and of the period of recording time covered by the file, by switching on the function Replay Monitor, you can, during replay, obtain an indication of the numbers and types of the records recorded at the time displayed, by switching on the function ECDIS Information, you can obtain an indication of data of the electronic chart that was being presented at the time displayed, by switching on the function LOP Information, you can obtain information about the actions that have been taken regarding the Lines of Position functionality. Type and name of the file being replayed Recording instant

Paused: Replay is currently not taking place. Running: Replay is taking place. Jump to the end of the file

Jump to the beginning of the file Jump to an earlier recording instant (Pressing for a longer time increases the rewind speed.)

Fig. 8-7

Stops replay.

Starts replay.

Jump to a later recording instant (Pressing for a longer time increases the fast forward speed.)

The Voyage Recording menu (replay functions)

Making a Protocol Print of a Short-Term Recording During replay of the Short-Therm Recording, you can perform all recording processes described in Section 8.4. The recording period which can be set under Period in the Peripheral Devices > Printer > Config. Cyclic Protocol menu refers to the recording instants. If you want to obtain a print-out of all records for a particular section of the voyage, you must therefore set the Time there to 10 seconds.

8.4

Protocol Prints On the (optional) printer, important nautical data and operational data of the system can be recorded continually during operation of the system. Setting of the Recording The Protocol Print (i.e. the print-out of a record) is switched on/off in the menu Peripheral Devices > Printer by means of the button Protocol Print. Under Protocol Type, the data groups to be recorded are specified: System Settings: Changing of important settings of the system System Messages: All alarms and messages that have occurred in the system Cyclic Protocol: Selected nautical data (these are recorded cyclically).

336

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e39.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS

Operating Instructions

8.4 Protocol Prints

------------------------------------------------------------------

Table header These parameters were specified in the ... > Config. Cyclic Protocol menu. In the ... > Config. Cyclic Protocol menu, 60 s was specified under Period, Time. Track No. 1300 is defined as the System Track; waypoint No. 51 was passed at 14:40 hours.

Because System Settings is switched on, the fact is recorded here that, at 14:43 hours, DGPS was selected as the speed sensor. Because System Messages is switched on, the fact is recorded here that, at 14:48 hours, the alarm POSITION STATUS CHANGED occurred.

Fig. 8-8

Time: ZT 14:33 22.11.95 UTC 13:33 22.11.95 Track No: 1300 Track Name: STO-S.ARM-KAS-HKI Waypoint No: 50 Waypoint Remark: SÖDERARM WPB: 70.0 deg WPD: 2.5 NM Track: 69.1 deg -----------------------------------------------------------------Time GPS 1 Position HDG SMG CMG Depth [ZT] WGS84 [deg] [kt] [deg] [m] 14:33 59:46.260 N 019:23.472 E 68.7 16.7 68.7 122.1 14:34 59:46.359 N 019:23.990 E 69.3 16.7 69.3 87.5 14:35 59:46.459 N 019:24.497 E 69.0 16.7 69.0 101.4 14:36 59:46.559 N 019:25.023 E 69.7 16.7 69.7 116.8 14:37 59:46.658 N 019:25.541 E 69.5 16.7 69.5 82.4 14:38 59:46.756 N 019:26.057 E 69.0 16.7 69.0 113.8 14:39 59:46.855 N 019:26.574 E 69.3 16.7 69.3 106.0 -----------------------------------------------------------------Time: ZT 14:40 22.11.95 UTC 13:40 22.11.95 Track No: 1300 Track Name: STO-S.ARM-KAS-HKI Waypoint No: 51 Waypoint Remark: ARMBÅGEN WPB: 119.6 deg WPD: 18.7 NM Track: 120.1 deg -----------------------------------------------------------------Time GPS 1 Position HDG SMG CMG Depth [ZT] WGS84 [deg] [kt] [deg] [m] 14:40 59:46.947 N 019:27.096 E 74.7 16.7 74.6 84.8 14:41 59:46.997 N 019:27.638 E 84.8 16.6 84.6 121.2 14:42 59:46.996 N 019:28.189 E 94.8 16.6 94.8 94.6 14:43 59:46.945 N 019:28.729 E 105.7 16.6 105.6 93.7 < (14:43) Speed Sensor Changed to DGPS > 14:44 59:46.845 N 019:29.241 E 116.5 16.6 116.4 121.5 14:45 59:46.708 N 019:29.720 E 120.8 16.6 120.8 84.9 14:46 59:46.570 N 019:30.194 E 120.3 16.7 120.3 105.7 14:47 59:46.430 N 019:30.674 E 120.0 16.7 120.0 114.7 14:48 59:46.291 N 019:31.152 E 120.2 16.7 120.0 82.3 < (14:48) TP POSITION STATUS CHANGED Accept or change position sensor.> 14:49 59:46.151 N 019:31.630 E 120.3 16.7 120.0 116.5 14:50 59:46.015 N 019:32.110 E 120.3 16.7 120.0 103.3

Example of a Protocol Print

Setting the Cyclical Recording of the Nautical Data For the cyclical recording, the following items can be specified: Whether the cyclical recording is to take place at fixed intervals of time or at fixed intervals of distance travelled, and how large the interval should be, which items of own ship's data are to be recorded. Setting the Recording Cycle and the Period 1.

Under Period in the Peripheral Devices > Printer > Config. Cyclic Protocol menu, specify by clicking Time or Distance whether the recording is to be done at intervals of time or at intervals of distance sailed by the ship.

2.

Behind the clicked button, input the interval (time or distance).

3.

f necessary, you can retrieve the old setting at any time by pressing Reset. If the new setting is to be put into effect, you must press OK.

Selecting the Own Ship Data that are to be Recorded 1.

Select the Peripheral Devices > Printer > Protocol Print > Config. Cyclic Protocol menu. In the Configured Items list, all data selected for recording are listed. In the Available Items list, the other data which can also be recorded are listed.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e39.fm / 12.08.09

337

CHARTPILOT

8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS

Operating Instructions

8.4 Protocol Prints

2.

The sequence in the record line will correspond to the sequence selected in the Configured Items list. Therefore, starting at the top of this list, check firstly the position in the list up to which the selection desired for the protocol print has already been entered correctly, including the sequence. Delete the data entered below this position in the list by marking them and pressing Remove.

3.

In the correct order in the Available Items list, select the data that are to be recorded additionally, and by pressing Add transfer these data to the end of the Configured Items list. When the number of data included under Selected Items is equal to the maximum number of data that can be printed out in a record line, further inclusion is prevented.

4.

If necessary, you can retrieve the old record selection at any time by pressing Reset. If the record is to be made using the new selection of data, you must press OK.

Prints out the existing content of the screen. Switches the Protocol Print on and off. Switching off initiates the printing of data that have already been stored but not yet printed out. Specifies whether the Protocol Print is to contain the change in the selected position and speed sensors and in the operational data of the TRACKPILOT and SPEEDPILOT. Specifies whether the Protocol Print is to contain alarms that occur. Specifies whether the Protocol Print is to contain the nautical data specified under Config. Cyclic Protocol. Settings for the cyclical recording of the nautical data All print-outs generated by this CHARTPILOT are printed out on this printer. Causes premature print-out of the accumulated data that are to be recorded. Aborts the Protocol Print. The data not yet printed out are deleted. With this, printing can be stopped at any time. (The commands already sent to the printer are still executed.) See page 73. Fig. 8-9

The Peripheral Devices > Printer menu

Printing the Recording Data Out Prematurely Basically, printing out is performed page by page. In the case of Protocol Prints, this has the effect that printing takes place at fairly long intervals of time. If the recording data that have accumulated in the meantime are to be printed out prematurely, this can be achieved in the menu Peripheral Devices > Printer by the pressing of Print Now / Form Feed. Aborting the Protocol Print In the menu Peripheral Devices > Printer, the Print Erase/Stop button can be used to abort the protocol print. The data not yet printed out are deleted.

338

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e39.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS 8.4 Protocol Prints

USEFUL INFORMATION Recording of Important Settings of the System If, in the menu Peripheral Devices > Printer, under Protocol Type, the function System Settings is switched on, the following changes are recorded if Protocol Print is in the switched-on state: The newly selected position sensor, the newly selected speed sensor, the fact that the TRACKPILOT has been activated or switched off, the mode to which the TRACKPILOT has been switched, the fact that the SPEEDPILOT has been activated or switched off, the mode to which the SPEEDPILOT has been switched. If the cyclical recording of nautical data is in the switched-on state as well, these changes in the system settings are inserted in that recording in chronological order. Nautical Data which can be Recorded Cyclically The -

following data can be recorded (if the sensors for the data are connected): Air Humidity Relative humidity of the outside air Air Pressure Air pressure (the outside air) Air Temperature Temperature of the outside air CMG (Course Made Good) Observed course over ground Depth Water depth measured with the navigation echosounder Dewpoint Dewpoint of the outside air DMG (Distance Made Good) Distance from the last waypoint ETA (Estim. Time of Arrival) Probable time of arrival at the present waypoint HDG (Heading) Present compass course Position Present position of own ship (the coordinate system that is set for the display of the chart area is used) Sea Water Temperature Sea water temperature SMG (Speed Made Good) Observed speed over ground STW (Speed Through Water) Speed through the water Time (ZT) Zone time TTG (Time To Go) Probable sailing time up to the present waypoint Wind Direction (True) Absolute direction of the wind Wind Speed (True) Absolute speed of the wind WPB (Waypoint Bearing) Bearing of the present waypoint WPD (Waypoint Distance) Distance of the present waypoint XTD (Cross Track Distance) Present cross track distance from the pre-planned track

Recording of the Alarms and Messages If, in the menu Peripheral Devices > Printer, under Protocol Type, the function System Messages is switched on, particular alarms which the CHARTPILOT has reported in the alarm list are recorded if Protocol Print is in the switched-on state. Additional Recording in the Table Header The table which is thus created contains the following items additionally in the table header on each page: Date and time (zone time and UTC) and, if a System Track has been defined, the following also: Number and name of the track Number of the present waypoint and remark about the waypoint Bearing (WPB) and distance (WPD) of the present waypoint Direction (track) of the present track segment.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e39.fm / 12.08.09

339

CHARTPILOT

8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS

Operating Instructions

8.5 Determination and Back-Up of the System Parameterisation

In addition, this table header is inserted in the same form on the page when the ship has passed a waypoint of the System Track and also when another System Track is defined.

Specifies that the cyclical recording is to take place at intervals of time or at intervals of distance travelled. Time period of the cyclical record print-out Distance travelled between the cyclical record print-outs Specifies that the cyclical recording is to take place at intervals of distance travelled. Data that are not recorded but can be recorded Removes the data marked under Available Items and inserts them under Configured Items. Removes the data marked under Configured Items and inserts them under Available Items. Data intended for recording Puts the settings of this menu into effect; the menu is exited. Retrieves the configuration that existed when this menu was called up. Exits the menu without the new settings being put into effect.

Fig. 8-10

8.5

The Peripheral Devices > Printer > Protocol Print > Config. Cyclic Protocol menu

Determination and Back-Up of the System Parameterisation In the setting-to-work process, a large number of settings are made on the CHARTPILOT at service level, with which the CHARTPILOT is adapted to suit the connected items of equipment. The same applies to the other components of the system (TRACKPILOT, Engine Interface, SPEEDPILOT). The configuration files which contain these data of the components mentioned can be backed up on a Floppy or USBDisk(s) when the setting-to-work process has been completed; the Floppy/USB-Disk(s) is/are then kept on board. These data can then be accessed at any time during service work. If you discover that this Floppy/USB-Disk(s) is no longer available, you can perform the data back-up yourself. If a fault occurs during operation, it can be very helpful if, prior to service work, you can inform our Service Department of particular setting values if requested to do so. This may even eliminate the need for service work. For this reason, you can inspect the larger part of these data and can print them out on the system's printer. These functions are implemented by a subroutine which you can start by pressing the System Maintenance button under Utilities in the Tree in the Chart and Conning modes.

340

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e39.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS

Operating Instructions

8.5 Determination and Back-Up of the System Parameterisation

Determining the System Parameterisation In the list contained in the Utilities > System Maintenance > Configuration > View menu, mark the components whose system parameter settings are to be displayed, and press the OK button. These data are then displayed in a scrollable list in the Status Log Page - see Figure 8-13. If you are looking for a particular term in the list, you can press the Find button: a box then appears. Enter the term in that box, and press the Find Next button situated there. Printing Out Displayed System Parameter Settings If you press the Print button in the Status Log Page and answer appropriately the question which then appears, the content of the list contained in the Status Log Page is printed out on the system's printer. Data Back-Up; Copying Configuration Files onto Floppy or USB media 1.

Put a Floppy Disk into the Floppy (with the sliding protective cover pointing away from you, the central hole facing downwards, and the write protect function switched off, i.e. the bottom left-hand hole as seen from above must be covered) or the USB-Disk(s) into the USB-port(s) (see also Section 3.7: "Using Removable Devices" on page 73).

2.

Press the Backup button in the Utilities > System Maintenance > Configuration menu, a Select Configuration Set dialog box appears. Switch the Use Backup Device button on and confirm with OK. A Select Device dialog box appears, select the wanted device(s) and confirm with OK. A Select file(s) or directory dialog box opens to navigate through the file structure of the media, select the directory to store and confirm with OK (see also Section 3.7: "Using Removable Devices" on page 73). When all files have been copied, an appropriate message appears. Floppy: After taking the Floppy Disk out of the drive, switch on the write protect function: to do this, open the bottom left-hand hole (as seen from above) by sliding the small plate. As a result, the Floppy contents cannot be either overwritten or erased. Label the Floppy to indicate its content and the date, and store it in a safe place.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e39.fm / 12.08.09

341

CHARTPILOT

8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS

Operating Instructions

8.5 Determination and Back-Up of the System Parameterisation

Calls up the Configuration menu for the following functions: - Determining the system parameterisation and printing it out. - Data back-up of the configuration files. - Making system settings - see Section 8.7.

Determining the system version - see Section 8.6

Switches off the subroutine System Maintenance and calls up the display of the electronic chart again.

Fig. 8-11

The Utilities > System Maintenance menu

Make system settings (see Section 8.7) Determining the system parameterisation Data back-up of the configuration files Operating at service level (after input of the password). Password input (for service activities only)

Operating at service level (after input of the password)

Fig. 8-12

342

The Utilities > System Maintenance > Configuration menu

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e39.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS

Operating Instructions

8.5 Determination and Back-Up of the System Parameterisation

Status Log list

Clears the display of the data shown in the Status Log list.

Fig. 8-13

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e39.fm / 12.08.09

Searches in the Status Log list to find a text which is to be input.

Selects the component whose system parameterisations are to be displayed

Prints out the content of the Status Log list on the system's printer.

Shows the parameters of the components marked i the list above

The Status Log Page and the ... > System Maintenance > Configuration > View menu

343

CHARTPILOT

8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS

Operating Instructions

8.6 Determining the System Version

8.6

Determining the System Version If a fault occurs during operation, it can be very helpful if you can inform our Service Department of the program version and the versions of the program modules if requested to do so. For this reason, you can inspect these data and can print them out on the system's printer. These functions are implemented by a subroutine which you can start by pressing the System Maintenance button under Utilities in the Tree in the Chart and Conning modes. Determining the System Version and Printing it Out Press the Version button in the Utilities > System Maintenance menu. These data are then listed in the Status Log Page (see Figure 8-13). If you press the Print button in the Status Log Page and give the appropriate answer to the question which then appears, these data will be printed out on the system's printer.

8.7

Making System Settings You can make the following system settings: The transmission ratio between trackball movement and cursor movement The duration for which a key of the A/N keyboard must be pressed so that the button reacts as having been clicked The repetition function of the keys of the A/N keyboard The tone with which alarms are emitted on the CHARTPILOT. These functions are implemented by a subroutine which you can start by pressing the System Maintenance button under Utilities in the Tree in the Chart and Conning modes. Transmission Ratio between Trackball Movement and Cursor Movement Press the Pointer button in the Utilities > System Maintenance > Configuration > Options menu. In the dialog box which then opens, you can set the speed of the cursor by means of the sliding controllers Acceleration and Threshold. With the Default button, you retrieve the basic setting. Changing the Duration for which a Key of the A/N Keyboard must be Pressed to Click it Press the Keyboard button in the Utilities > System Maintenance > Configuration > Options menu. In the dialog box which then opens, you can use the sliding controller Click Volume to set the duration for which a key of the A/N keyboard must be pressed so that the button reacts as having been clicked. With the Default button, you retrieve the basic setting. Switching the Repetition Function of the Keys of the (A/N Keyboard On and Off Press the Keyboard button in the Utilities > System Maintenance > Configuration > Options menu. In the dialog box which then opens, you can use the Auto Repeat function to specify whether or not prolonged pressing of a key causes repetition of the input. Setting the Alarm Tone In the menu Utilities > System Maintenance > Configuration > Options, press the Audio button. In the dialog box which then opens, you can set the frequency with the sliding controller Tone, the duration with Duration, and (in some configurations) the volume of the acoustic signal which can be emitted by the CHARTPILOT with Volume. With the Default button, you retrieve the basic setting.

344

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e39.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

9 Alarm Management

Operating Instructions

9.1 General

9

Alarm Management

9.1

General

If there is a bridge alarm system connected, its alarm messages will be transferred to the CHARTPILOT. In case the CHARTPILOT receives particular 1) messages it generates the BRIDGE ALARM SYSTEM alarm, together with the designation of the received message. Priority levels of the alarm system: Alarm Warning Indication

An alarm is an audible and visible signal that indicates a condition requiring immediate attention and action by the operator to maintain the safe navigation of the ship. A warning is announced visually with optional audible signal for precautionary reasons to make the operator aware of changed conditions which are not immediately hazardous, but may become so if no action is taken. An indication is a message in the alarm list which informs about a condition out of the ordinary consideration of the situation or of given information.

As soon as a new entry occurs in the alarm list, the horn symbol in the top right corner of the screen becomes coloured and the list automatically is displayed. The newest entry will be at the top of the list. Many alarms and warnings are supplemented by an acoustic signal. For warnings, the acoustic signal can be switched off. Behaviour when an Alarm occurs

1)

2)

1.

Switch off the acoustic signal (if there is one) as follows: Press the Acknowledge button in the alarm list. As a result, the acoustic signal emitted by the CHARTPILOT is switched off 2).

2.

You must immediately try to get a clear idea of the causes of the alarm or warning, the system status, and possible system reactions, and, if appropriate, you should immediately take all of the necessary measures to counteract any possible dangers.

3.

Removing the cause of the alarm or warning: If an alarm has occurred due to a cause that can be removed, that cause must be removed as quickly as possible; see also Section 9.2. Many warnings and indications disappear when the cause disappears. Acknowledgement is then unnecessary, but alarms must be acknowledged in any case.

4.

The alarm and many warnings must be acknowledged if the situation allows or requires such acknowledgement: In the alarm list, press the Acknowledge button after having selected the entry. As a result, the entry which is marked is usually acknowledged. If the reason for the alarm or warning stays present, the entry remains in the list, otherwise it is removed. As a result of this, alarms or warnings which have

For each alarm that can be emitted by the bridge alarm system, a setting is made at service level to specify whether the alarm message BRIDGE ALARM SYSTEM or BRIDGE ALARM SYST. is to be triggered on the NACOS components mentioned, and whether this is to occur there together with an acoustic signal. In the case of appropriate installation, the acoustical signal can be switched off by operation of an external operating element too.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e37.fm / 12.08.09

345

9.1 General

If the CHARTPILOT wants to draw the operator's attention to a situation which might require intervention by him, it generates an alarm message. These messages may have the level of an alarm (requiring immediate attention), a warning or an indication. Any of these messages consists of a text message, which in many cases is supplemented by an acoustic signal. The text message is shown in the alarm list together with an alarm or warning symbol. Indications don´t carry a symbol.

9 Alarm Management

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

9.1 General

also been distributed to other items of equipment within the system are acknowledged there too. If some other entry is marked, the entry which is to be acknowledged must be marked beforehand by clicking 1). If alarms are also distributed to other items of equipment within the system, or if the system deviates from the behaviour described above, e.g. if the alarm cannot be acknowledged at all or throughout the entire system, or if acknowledgement causes something to be initiated or enabled, or if an acknowledged alarm is repeated for as long as the cause of the alarm continues to exist, this situation is mentioned in Section 9.2. In all cases, this second pressing of the Acknowledge button switches off on all items of equipment the acoustic signal caused by the alarm. After selection of an entry in the alarm list with the DO-key, the selected alarm or warning can also be acknowledged with the MORE-key of the trackball.

9.1 General

It is advisable to acknowledge the alarms and warnings of the main navigation sensors (gyro, speed and position sensor) at one of the radar indicators; when the TRACKPILOT is in use, only the radar indicator selected as TRACKPILOT Master, is able to execute the final acknowledgement and required sensor selection functions. Generally Switching the Acoustic Signal On and Off for Particular Alarms In the Alarm Settings menu, you can define by means of the Buzzer On function whether the acoustic signal should or should not be sounded on the CHARTPILOT when one of the warnings marked with the symbol in Section 9.2 occurs. Switching off the alarm sound is not advisable when a CHARTPILOT is used for track or chart monitoring purposes, if the operator is not continuously observing the display of the indicator. Switching Off the Display of the Alarm List When the last remaining entry in the alarm list is acknowledged or removed by the system, the display of the alarm list is switched off automatically. By pressing the Cancel button, you can switch off the display of the alarm list without having acknowledged the alarm message. The horn symbol in the navigation data line remains displayed coloured in order to point out that not all alarms have been cancelled. Even if the display of the alarm list has been switched off with the CANCEL button, the alarm list opens automatically as soon as another alarm, warning or indication occurs. Switching On the Display of the Alarm List The display of the alarm list can be switched on at any time simply by clicking the horn symbol.

1)

If the display of the list has been switched off even although an alarm that can be acknowledged has not been acknowledged, that alarm is automatically marked as soon as the list is opened again. Only in this case is it necessary, after opening of the alarm list, to mark the most recent alarm by clicking before acknowledgement. The most recent alarm is inserted at the top of the alarm list.

346

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e37.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

9 Alarm Management

Operating Instructions

9.1 General

USEFUL INFORMATION Contents of the Alarm List All of the alarms, warnings and indications are listed which have occurred so far but have not been acknowledged or removed again by the system.

Opens the Chart Alarm list. Acknowledges the marked message.

Fig. 9-1

9.1 General

Alarm, warning or indication message with appropriate symbol, time and date of its appearance and stating the system component (source) that has triggered the alarm.

Switches off the display of the alarm list.

The alarm list

For each entry in the list, the following items of information are displayed: Symbol Alarm Warning Indication

(blinking: Not yet acknowledged) (blinking: Not yet acknowledged) no symbol

Date, Time The date and time (UTC) at which the alarm was generated or received. Source The system component which has generated the entry in the alarm list. Meanings: AIS AIS electronics unit BAS External alarm system, e.g. Bridge Alarm System BAS40 - see Section 11.4 CP CHARTPILOT computer ECDIS CHARTPILOT computer (ECDIS program) RADAR Electronics of one of the connected radar indicators UPS Uninterruptible power supply NAVTEX NAVTEX receiver Description Here, the message text appears, often followed by other items of information or by a suggestion of how you can react appropriately to the alarm or warning. In Section 9.2, all alarms, warnings and indications which can occur on the CHARTPILOT are listed and explained in alphabetical order. Alarm Outputs In particular situations, the CHARTPILOT outputs an electrical signal via the connected radar system, e.g. for the purpose of driving an external alarm display unit. The faults and alarms which cause the output of such an alarm signal are stated in Appendix B.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e37.fm / 12.08.09

347

CHARTPILOT

9 Alarm Management 9.2 List of Alarms, Warnings and Indications

Operating Instructions

Prevention of Triggering of the Watch Alarm

9.2 List of Alarms, Warnings and Indications

If the installation has been performed appropriately including a connection of the radar system to the watch alarm system, any operating action performed on a CHARTPILOT or on the radar system will have the same effect as the operating of a watch alarm key (i.e. resetting the external watch timer).

9.2

List of Alarms, Warnings and Indications The following entries can appear in the alarm list of the CHARTPILOT (both in Chart mode and in Conning mode). The acoustic signal which then occurs and the alarm priority is indicated by the following symbols:

On the CHARTPILOT, an acoustic signal occurs regardless of whether the Buzzer On/Off function is set in the Alarm Settings menu (see page 346). On the CHARTPILOT, an acoustic signal occurs if the Buzzer On/Off function is set in the Alarm Settings menu (see page 346). Whether an acoustic signal occurs on the CHARTPILOT depends on the factors described. An alarm has occurred and will be indicated. Alarms must be acknowledged in any case. A warning has occurred and will be indicated. Warnings can be acknowledged, but they will stay in the alarm list until their reason is no longer present, regardless if they have been acknowledged or not. For AIS Alarms see chapter 9.2.1 For NAVTEX Alarms see chapter 9.2.2 APPROACHING WAYPOINT [Waypoint] WOP [xx : yy min] The next wheel over point (before the stated waypoint) will probably be reached in xx minutes and yy seconds (see page 105). The time between reaching the wheel-over point and the occurrence of this warning is displayed in the Alarm Settings menu and can be changed there. Special feature: The warning is generated by all those units of the system for which such generation is switched on (CHARTPILOT: in the menu Alarm Settings). On each of these units, an acknowledgement is necessary. BRIDGE ALARM SYSTEM (alarm designation) The bridge alarm system (if installed and connected) has signalled to the NACOS the alarm message stated under alarm designation (see page 381). See footnote on page 345. Special feature: The alarm is distributed over the entire system. By acknowledgement of the alarm on the CHARTPILOT, the connected bridge alarm system too is acknowledged.

348

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e37.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

9 Alarm Management

Operating Instructions

9.2 List of Alarms, Warnings and Indications

The actual course differs by xx.x° from the course defined by the System Track, and thus exceeds the set course limit of yy°. Special feature: The alarm is generated by all those units of the system for which such generation is switched on (CHARTPILOT: in the menu Alarm Settings). On each of these units, an acknowledgement is necessary. For as long as the course limit continues to be exceeded, an acknowledged alarm is not repeated. When the TRACKPILOT is being operated in Track mode, then instead the alarm TP COURSE LIMIT generated by the TRACKPILOT appears on the radar indicator selected as TRACKPILOT Master, in this situation. Remedy: Increase the course limit or wait until the TRACKPILOT has reduced the course error below the limit switch over to another steering mode or manual steering. DANGEROUS TARGET radar indicator n (n=radar indicator number) This radar indicator has detected a dangerous target. The alarm should be acknowledged at the relevant indicator. Special feature: This alarm can only appear if activated on service level. DEAD MAN PRE ALARM Press any key. The watch alarm system will trigger the watch alarm after a short time if, within that time, the DEAD MAN PRE ALARM is not acknowledged and no watch alarm key is pressed. Special feature: Acknowledgement with any key on the CHARTPILOT or with any key on any radar indicator. DEPTH LIMIT EXCEEDED Depth xxx.xm Limit yym, check chart and sounder The water depth below the transducer measured by the navigational echosounder is xxx.x m and is thus less than the set depth alarm value of yy m. Special features: The alarm is generated by all those units of the system for which such generation is not switched off (at the CHARTPILOT: in the Alarm Settings menu). On each of these units, an acknowledgement is necessary. EXITING ANCHOR WATCH AREA The ship is touching the boundary of the anchor watch area. Special feature: This alarm cannot be acknowledged. It disappears when the ship is completly inside the ANCHOR WATCH area again or when the watch alarm function is switched off after the warning OUT OF ANCHOR WATCH AREA has been acknowledged.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e37.fm / 12.08.09

349

9.2 List of Alarms, Warnings and Indications

COURSE LIMIT EXCEEDED Off course xx.x ° Limit yy °

9 Alarm Management 9.2 List of Alarms, Warnings and Indications

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

GYRO FAULT Check gyro compass, switch to back-up gyro. The compass has been switched off, the connection is lost, is faulty, or is reporting invalid data.

9.2 List of Alarms, Warnings and Indications

Special feature: The alarm is distributed over the entire system. Acknowledgement is possible on any indicator. If the navigation sensors cannot be operated from the CHARTPILOT, acknowledgement on the CHARTPILOT does not cause acknowledgement on the other items of equipment. If the GYRO FAULT alarm occurs, the North-Up display mode is automatically switched on and all display objects and operating possibilities for which the heading information is required are no longer shown or are inactive. If the cause is not corrected within 30 seconds, the tracked targets are deleted. Remedy: Check the compass system. GYRO VALID Check/accept gyro value. The compass is again transmitting valid data. Special feature: The alarm is distributed over the entire system. Acknowledgement is possible on any indicator. If the navigation sensors cannot be operated from the CHARTPILOT, acknowledgement on the CHARTPILOT does not cause final acknowledgement on the other items of equipment. When the TRACKPILOT is in the activated state, this alarm can be acknowledged finally only on the radar indicator selected as TRACKPILOT Master. If a compass is installed which sends heading changes only, the heading transfer must be synchronised again. For this purpose, and if the navigation sensors can be operated on the CHARTPILOT, the menu Sensor Settings > Set Gyro appears automatically after switch-off of the acoustic signal; for further information, see page 145. LATITUDE EXCEEDED Check position data. The 85th parallel of latitude has been exceeded. The entire NACOS is no longer processing position data. Functions that need position data, e.g. Track mode and some display functions may no longer be used here. Special feature: The alarm is distributed over the entire system. This indication cannot be acknowledged. It will disappear after the cause has been eliminated. If the navigation sensors cannot be operated from the CHARTPILOT, acknowledgement on the CHARTPILOT does not cause acknowledgement on the other items of equipment. LOG STATUS CHANGED Accept or change speed sensor. The log selected as the speed sensor has changed its status, e.g. from Bottom Track to Water Track. It is sending valid data. WARNING: If the TRACKPILOT is steering the ship in Course mode or Track mode, a course change occurs if the drift component has changed as a result of the switch-over. Special features: The warning is distributed over the entire system. Acknowledgement is possible on any indicator. It is possible to define that this warning can generally be suppressed by the operator at the radar indicators. Remedy: Check what change of status is involved; if necessary, select some other speed sensor.

350

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e37.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

9 Alarm Management

Operating Instructions

9.2 List of Alarms, Warnings and Indications

LOST TARGET radar indicator n (n=radar indicator number)

The alarm should be acknowledged at the relevant indicator. Special feature: This warning can only appear if activated on service level. LOW POSITION QUALITY Check position, change position sensor. The selected position sensor is transmitting position data which vary more than is usual for this type of sensor. Special features: The warning is distributed over the entire system. Acknowledgement is possible on any indicator. This warning can only appear if activated on service level. Remedy: Check the position sensor; select some other position sensor if possible. NAVIGATION SENSOR DATA NOT AVAILABLE Check radar indicator. None of the radar indicators which can operate as a Sensor Master provides navigation data. Therefore, all own ship data are missing on the CHARTPILOT, and so it can no longer be used for nautical surveillance. Special feature: The alarm cannot be acknowledged. It disappears when its cause has been eliminated. Remedy: Check the radar system. Switch off or restart the defective radar indicator. Option: Switch to Local Sensors, if this option is installed in the CHARTPILOT. OBJECT OF INTEREST [supplement] 1) The chart monitoring performed by the CHARTPILOT has revealed that a vector chart object being monitored, i.e. a potentially dangerous chart object, is situated a short distance ahead of own ship, or is already being touched by own ship's contour, or is situated ahead of own ship on the currently relevant part of the System Track. A)

With NEARBY as the supplement (see also page 110): The guard sector or own ship (see page 105) is touching one or more objects belonging to the specified object class, i.e. if the course and speed remain unchanged, these objects might be run over within the time or distance entered under Objects of Interest in the menu Alarm Settings > Chart Alarms.

B)

With ON TRACK as the supplement (see also page 110): The System Track (with the width defined by the pre-planned track limit) is touching one or more of the objects specified in A).

Special features: The CHARTPILOT distributes the warning to all RADARPILOTs and CHARTRADARs; indication on the RADARPILOT and CHARTRADAR: OBJECT OF INTEREST NEARBY or ON TRACK. The warning can be acknowledged on the CHARTPILOT or on the radar indicator. An acknowledged warning is not repeated while the conditions that led to the warning continue to exist. Only when these conditions no longer exist does renewed occurrence of the above-mentioned conditions in the same object class cause a message again.

1)

Additional information about the different currently valid chart alarms is available in the Chart Alarm list. (See 4.4)

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e37.fm / 12.08.09

351

9.2 List of Alarms, Warnings and Indications

This radar indicator has lost a tracked target.

9 Alarm Management 9.2 List of Alarms, Warnings and Indications

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

OUT OF ANCHOR WATCH AREA The ship has left the anchor watch area.

9.2 List of Alarms, Warnings and Indications

Special feature: Through the acknowledgement, the anchor watch function (i.e. the anchor watch alarm) is switched off. POSITION INVALID Select ESTIMATED or another position sensor. The selected position sensor is sending invalid position data. Another position sensor will have to be selected by the operator. During the transition period, the system determines the position by dead reckoning (i.e. is temporarily switched to Estimated Position). Special features: The alarm is distributed over the entire system. Acknowledgement is possible on any indicator. If the navigation sensors cannot be operated from the CHARTPILOT, final acknowledgement on the CHARTPILOT does not cause acknowledgement on the other items of equipment. If the navigation sensors can be operated from the CHARTPILOT, the menu Sensor Settings > Position Sensor, containing the data of a substitute sensor, opens automatically after acknowledgement. This sensor can be confirmed by means of OK, or some other sensor has to be selected. The sensor which is now selected by the operator continues to be treated as a substitute sensor, i.e. as soon as the position sensor which led to the POSITION INVALID alarm is sending valid data again, the POSITION VALID warning appears. POSITION STATUS CHANGED Accept or change position sensor. The selected position sensor has performed an internal change of status (e.g. from DGPS to GPS) or the receiving method has changed (e.g. from DECCA to LORAN). Special features: The alarm is distributed over the entire system. Acknowledgement is possible on any indicator. The acoustic signal does not appear if a change-over from GPS to DGPS takes place and no position offset has been set. It is possible to define that this alarm can generally be suppressed by the operator at the radar indicators. POSITION TIMEOUT Select another position sensor. Data are no longer being received from the selected position sensor. Another position sensor will have to be selected by the operator. During the transition period, the system determines the position by dead reckoning (i.e. is temporarily switched to Estimated Position). Special features: The alarm is distributed over the entire system. Acknowledgement is possible on any indicator. If the navigation sensors cannot be operated from the CHARTPILOT, final acknowledgement on the CHARTPILOT does not cause acknowledgement on the other items of equipment. If the navigation sensors can be operated from the CHARTPILOT, the menu Sensor Settings > Position Sensor, containing the data of a substitute sensor, opens automatically after acknowledgement. This sensor can be confirmed by means of OK, or some other sensor has to be selected. The sensor which is now selected by the operator continues to be treated as a substitute sensor, i.e. as soon as the position sensor which led to the POSITION TIMEOUT alarm is sending valid data again, the POSITION VALID warning appears.

352

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e37.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

9 Alarm Management

Operating Instructions

9.2 List of Alarms, Warnings and Indications

The position sensor which had given the POSITION INVALID or POSITION TIMEOUT alarm is again sending valid data. Special features: The warning is distributed over the entire system. Acknowledgement is possible on any indicator. If the navigation sensors cannot be operated from the CHARTPILOT, final acknowledgement on the CHARTPILOT does not cause acknowledgement on the other items of equipment. If the navigation sensors can be operated from the CHARTPILOT, the menu Sensor Settings > Position Sensor, containing the data of the sensor which had given the POSITION INVALID or POSITION TIMEOUT alarm, opens automatically after acknowledgement. After checking the new sensordata, either confirm this sensor by clicking on the OK button or select some other sensor. ROT LIMIT EXCEEDED Check gyro compass, switch to backup gyro. The rate of turn computed from the change in the received heading signal is greater than is possible on the basis of the ship's dynamics as parameterised in the system. From this, it can be concluded that the compass or the transfer of the heading signal is defective. Special features: The alarm is distributed over the entire system. Acknowledgement is possible on any indicator. This alarm can only appear if activated on service level. Remedy: Check the compass. SAFETY CONTOUR [supplement] 1) The chart monitoring performed by the CHARTPILOT has revealed that the safety contour or some other area that is not deep enough is situated a short distance ahead of own ship, or is already being touched by own ship's contour, or is situated ahead of own ship on the currently relevant part of the System Track. A)

With NEARBY as the supplement (see also page 110): The guard sector (see page 105) is touching the safety contour or the insufficiently deep region specified as the object class, i.e. if the course and speed remain unchanged, these objects might be run over within the time or distance entered under Objects of Interest in the menu Alarm Settings > Chart Alarms.

B)

With ON TRACK as the supplement (see also page 110): The System Track (with the width defined by the pre-planned track limit) is touching the safety contour or the specified insufficiently deep region.

Special features: The CHARTPILOT distributes the alarm to all RADARPILOTs and CHARTRADARs; name on the RADARPILOT and CHARTRADAR: SAFETY CONTOUR NEAR BY or ON TRACK. The alarm can be acknowledged on the CHARTPILOT or on the radar indicator. An acknowledged alarm is not repeated while the conditions that led to the alarm continue to exist. Only when these conditions no longer exist does renewed occurrence of the above-mentioned conditions in the same object class cause an alarm again.

1)

Additional information about the different currently valid chart alarms is available in the Chart Alarm list. (See 4.4)

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e37.fm / 12.08.09

353

9.2 List of Alarms, Warnings and Indications

POSITION VALID Check and accept position sensor.

9 Alarm Management 9.2 List of Alarms, Warnings and Indications

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

SPEED INVALID Select another speed sensor.

9.2 List of Alarms, Warnings and Indications

The speed sensor is sending invalid data. Another speed sensor will have to be selected by the operator. At present, the speed that was last sent as the valid speed is being used. Dashes are shown in the speed area. Special features: The alarm is distributed over the entire system. Acknowledgement is possible on any indicator. If the navigation sensors cannot be operated from the CHARTPILOT, final acknowledgement on the CHARTPILOT does not cause acknowledgement on the other items of equipment. If the navigation sensors can be operated from the CHARTPILOT, the menu Sensor Settings > Speed Sensor, containing the data of a substitute sensor, opens automatically after acknowledgement. This sensor can be confirmed by means of OK, or some other sensor has to be selected. The sensor which is now selected by the operator continues to be treated as a substitute sensor, i.e. as soon as the speed sensor which led to the SPEED INVALID alarm is again sending valid data, the SPEED VALID alarm appears. SPEED TIMEOUT Select another speed sensor. Data are no longer being received from the selected speed sensor. Another speed sensor will have to be selected by the operator. At present, the speed that was last sent as the valid speed is being used. Dashes are shown in the speed area. Special features: The alarm is distributed over the entire system. Acknowledgement is possible on any indicator. If the navigation sensors cannot be operated from the CHARTPILOT, final acknowledgement on the CHARTPILOT does not cause acknowledgement on the other items of equipment. If the navigation sensors can be operated from the CHARTPILOT, the menu Sensor Settings > Speed Sensor, containing the data of a substitute sensor, opens automatically after acknowledgement. This sensor can be confirmed by means of OK, or some other sensor has to be selected. The sensor which is now selected by the operator continues to be treated as a substitute sensor, i.e. as soon as the speed sensor which led to the SPEED TIMEOUT alarm is again sending valid data, the SPEED VALID alarm appears. Until valid speed data are received, the alarm is repeated at intervals of one minute. SPEED VALID Check and accept speed sensor. The speed sensor which had given the SPEED INVALID or SPEED TIMEOUT alarm is again sending valid data. Special features: The warning is distributed over the entire system. Acknowledgement is possible on any indicator. If the navigation sensors cannot be operated from the CHARTPILOT, final acknowledgement on the CHARTPILOT does not cause acknowledgement on the other items of equipment. If the navigation sensors can be operated from the CHARTPILOT, the menu Sensor Settings > Speed Sensor, containing the data of the sensor which had given the SPEED INVALID or SPEED TIMEOUT alarm, opens automatically after acknowledgement. After checking the new sensor data, either confirm this sensor by clicking on the OK button or select some other sensor. TARGET IN ACQUISITION ZONE radar indicator n 1) (n=radar indicator number) This radar indicator reports to the CHARTPILOT that a target which is not yet being tracked has been acquired automatically in the acquisition/guard zone. The warning should be acknowledged at the relevant indicator. 1)

On the RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR, move the mousepointer above the text. A box with additional information ("balloon text") appears. For example, the number of the CHARTPILOT reporting the warning is displayed. Numbers 1 to 5 are possible.

354

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e37.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

9 Alarm Management

Operating Instructions

9.2 List of Alarms, Warnings and Indications

TARGET IN GUARD ZONE radar indicator n (n=radar indicator number) This radar indicator reports that a target which is already being tracked has entered the acquisition/ guard zone at the indicated range and bearing. The warning should be acknowledged at the relevant indicator. Special feature: This warning can only appear if activated on service level. TRACK LIMIT EXCEEDED XTD xxx m Limit yyy m, navigate with care. The cross track distance is xxx m and thus exceeds the set track limit of yyy m. Special features: The alarm is generated by all those units of the system for which such generation is switched on (CHARTPILOT: in the menu Alarm Settings). On each of these units, an acknowledgement is necessary. For as long as the track limit continues to be exceeded, an acknowledged alarm is not repeated. When the TRACKPILOT is being operated in Track mode, then instead the warning TP TRACK LIMIT generated by the TRACKPILOT appears on the radar indicator selected as TRACKPILOT Master, in this situation. Remedy: Increase the track limit (if the nautical situation allows this) or deactivate the track alarms on the CHARTPILOT. UNEXPECTED END OF [Program name] select TREE, EXIT to restart A serious fault on the CHARTPILOT has occurred. The program must be aborted: Click on the TREE button, then the EXIT button. The CHARTPILOT must be restarted; see page 27. If this is not successful, it might be possible to correct the fault by switching the equipment off completely with the POWER DOWN button; see page 25. Special feature: Acknowledgement is not possible. USER CHART OBJECT [supplement] 1) The chart monitoring performed by the CHARTPILOT has revealed that a User Chart Object of the class "own safety line" or "danger highlight", i.e. a potentially dangerous object, or a User Chart Object of the class "own MARPOL line" is situated in a short distance ahead of own ship, or is already being touched by own ship's contour, or is situated ahead of own ship on the currently relevant part of the System Track. A)

With NEARBY, supplement (see also page 110): The guard sector or own ship (see page 105) is touching one or more own safety lines or danger highlights or MARPOL lines, i.e. if the course and speed remain unchanged, these objects might be run over within the time or distance entered in the menu Alarm Settings > Chart Alarms.

B)

With ON TRACK as the supplement (see also page 110): The System Track (with the width defined by the pre-planned track limit) is touching one or more own safety lines or danger highlights.

1)

Additional information about the different currently valid chart alarms is available in the Chart Alarm list. (See 4.4)

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e37.fm / 12.08.09

355

9.2 List of Alarms, Warnings and Indications

Special feature: This warning can only appear if activated on service level.

9 Alarm Management 9.2 List of Alarms, Warnings and Indications

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

9.2 List of Alarms, Warnings and Indications

Special features: The CHARTPILOT distributes the warning to all RADARPILOTs and CHARTRADARs. The warning can be acknowledged on the CHARTPILOT or on one of the radar indicators.

9.2.1

AIS Alarms

DANGEROUS TARGET [n] yy.yNM zzz° (yy.y=range, zzz=true bearing) An AIS target has become a dangerous target. The CPA and TCPA have become less than the set limits. The bearing and range of this target are stated. AIS INTERROGATION The AIS has received a long-range interrogation. The Reply mode (see page 124) AUTO has been selected. The reply was given automatically. AIS INTERROGATION Reply required The AIS has received a long-range interrogation. The Reply mode (see page 124) MANUAL has been selected. The reply is sent when, in the menu Radar/AIS > Interrogation, the button Reply is pressed. LOST TARGET [n] An AIS target being tracked has been lost. AIS OFF, POSITION LOST Check position sensor All information about AIS targets including their displays has been deleted because determination of own position has been taking place by dead reckoning for the past 10 minutes. Special feature: The warning cannot be acknowledged. It disappears when its cause has been eliminated. Remedy: Select some other position sensor. AIS OFFLINE Data are no longer being received from the AIS system. Special feature: The warning cannot be acknowledged. It disappears when its cause has been eliminated. Remedy: Check the AIS system. It might be possible to eliminate the fault by switching the voltage supply to the AIS electronics unit off and then on again at the ship's mains. FAULT xx AIS: (Description) This alarm indicates that there is a technical fault which is impairing, or could impair, the functioning of the AIS system (xx = number of the fault). If such an alarm is occurring frequently or if it persists for some time, the service organisation should be informed of this. Remedy: Check for information in the AIS manual.

356

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e37.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

9 Alarm Management

Operating Instructions

9.2 List of Alarms, Warnings and Indications

NEW SAFETY MESSAGE

The content of the safety message can be accessed by the menu Radar/AIS > Read Message. NO AIS DANGEROUS TARGET ACQUISITION SOG Lost, Check sensors Because of missing data, the own speed vector over ground cannot be determined. For all AIS targets, the collision avoidance computation and therefore the automatic acquisition and the DANGEROUS AIS TARGET alarm do not take place. Special feature: The warning cannot be acknowledged. It disappears when its cause has been eliminated. Remedy: Check speed sensor, check position sensor. SAFETY MESSAGE OVERFLOW Because the AIS safety message that was received last has caused the number of messages to exceed the number that can be stored, the oldest safety message is deleted. Remedy: Delete any safety messages that are no longer needed. SAFETY MESSAGE TRANSMISSION FAILED The AIS system has recognised that the safety message might not have been transmitted successfully. The cause of this can be that an incorrect MMSI number has been entered and that, as a result, no confirmation of reception has been received from the addressee.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e37.fm / 12.08.09

357

9.2 List of Alarms, Warnings and Indications

The AIS has received a safety message.

9 Alarm Management 9.2 List of Alarms, Warnings and Indications

9.2.2

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

NAVTEX Alarms

9.2 List of Alarms, Warnings and Indications

NAVTEX OFFLINE The NAVTEX receiver is not online, i.e. the receiver has been switched off, has failed or the communication to the receiver´s INS-port is interrupted.

The following warnings and alarms are only available if a NAVTEX receiver is connected to the radar system and the alarm function is activated on this CHARTPILOT. NAVTEX NEW MESSAGE (n) The NAVTEX receiver has reported a new message which has been stored on the CHARTPILOT. The number (n) indicates how many new (unread) messages are available. Even if the NAVTEX Alarm function is not activated on the CHARTPILOT, the new received message will be stored and can be read and printed by the operator. NAVTEX MESSAGE OVERFLOW The maximum number of messages that can be stored on the CHARTPILOT has been reached. New incoming messages will overwrite the oldest messages automatically. NAVTEX NAVIGATIONAL WARNING The NAVTEX has received a new navigational warning message. NAVTEX METEOROLOGICAL WARNING The NAVTEX has received a new meteorological warning message. NAVTEX SAR INFOORMATION MESSAGE The NAVTEX has received a new search and rescue information. NAVTEX RX MALFUNCTION The NAVTEX receiver has detected an internal malfunction. NAVTEX BIST FAILURE The receiver has reported a fault in its built-in self test system (BIST). NAVTEX GENERAL FAILURE The NAVTEX has stopped receiving and is no longer reporting messages. NAVTEX FAULT (n) The NAVTEX receiver has detected an internal error code (n). Refer to the Navtex manual for details.

358

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e37.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

Part III CHARTPILOT as Conning Display

In this part, those functions are described which the CHARTPILOT, when used in NACOS, offers in Conning mode.

In the following instructions for the operating procedure of these functions, it is assumed that the CHARTPILOT is switched to Conning mode.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e4.fm / 12.08.09

359

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

360

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e4.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

10 General

Operating Instructions

10

General In the case of use without a TRACKPILOT, the Conning mode described in this part is not applicable. In this case, in addition to the functions described in Part II, the functions marked with # in the following are available on the CHARTPILOT in Chart mode. When the CHARTPILOT is switched to Conning mode, it displays a conning display grouped around a diagram of the ship and consisting of a summary of the most important ship-handling data. The composition of the data displayed can be adapted to suit the given situation by switching over between the Navigation Page for sailing on the open sea and in coastal approaches the Docking Page # for docking the Keel Clearance Page # for sailing in shallow water. As -

the data display, the following can be displayed, whichever is selected: the Track/Schedule display 1) or the Track/Control display 1), the NACOS Status display or an External Alarm display 2).

Furthermore, in Conning mode the following functions are available: Performing nautical calculations # Generating the pilot card # Generation, display and management of lists and notes (Text Pages) Determination and saving of system parameterisations 1) Determining the system version 1) Making system settings 1)

1)

In parts, Conning mode has the same man-machine interface as Chart mode. Therefore, all of Section 3 is applicable, except that the chart area is replaced by different displays. 3) The basic setting of Conning mode is the Navigation Page. It appears after switch-over to this mode has taken place for the first time. Because all of the above-mentioned functions are implemented by means of individual subroutines, function selection is performed via the Tree. The most important functions can be additionally called up in the basic menu line by means of buttons. The Tree of Conning mode is shown in Figure 10-1. The alarm management function described in Section 9 for Chart mode is fully applicable to Conning mode as well.

1) 2) 3)

The same function is also available in Chart mode Only if there is an external alarm system connected which provides the necessary signals. At service level, the display can be changed in such a way that the menus and the data displays appear on the left-hand side. With this setting, the individual displays of the Navigation Page appear on the right-hand side.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e41.fm / 12.08.09

361

CHARTPILOT

10 General

Operating Instructions

Prepares the switch-off (at the mains) of the CHARTPILOT; see page 26.

Switches the tree off without a functional switch-over taking place.

Stops all programs that are running, and after presentation of the Log-On display it independently starts the main program of the CHARTPILOT (see page 27). Fig. 10-1

362

The Tree in Conning mode

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e41.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

11 The Displays of the Conning Display and their Settings

Operating Instructions

11.1 The Navigation Page

11

The Displays of the Conning Display and their Settings

11.1

The Navigation Page On the Navigation Page, a set of data needed for sailing in coastal approaches and on the open sea can be displayed as numerical values and as graphics. You can parameterise some parts of this display yourself. The Navigation Page is divided into the middle part and individual displays which can be displayed on the left-hand side of the screen. Depending on the type of propulsion, the display of the engines in the middle part is set during settingto-work to conventional propulsion - see Figure 11-2 and Figure 11-3 propulsion by means of azimuth thrusters - see Figure 11-4 and Figure 11-5 - or the individual combination of the existing propulsion types; for an example, see Figure 11-6. Switching On the Navigation Page In the Tree, press the Navigation button. The Navigation Page appears, and also the Navigation menu if the menu display is switched on. Because the Navigation Page is part of the subroutine which makes the Conning mode possible, the Navigation Page appears automatically when the switch-over to Conning mode takes place and also when, in Conning mode, a subroutine that was started there is switched off (with the Exit button). Parameterisation of the Navigation Page Parameterisation is performed in the Navigation menu. -

Parameterisation of the Middle Part In the Display Mode frame, you can choose between Open Sea; in the ship symbol, this provides a graphic display of the course deviation, the track deviation and (in the case of conventional propulsion) the longitudinal speed, among other things, (Figure 11-2 and 11-4) Harbour; in the ship symbol, (in the case of conventional propulsion) this displays the power of the thrusters, among other things (Figure 11-3).

-

Selection of the Individual Displays In the Display Options frame, by means of the buttons Display 1 to Display 3 it is possible to specify which of the individual displays shown in Figure 11-9 and 11-10 is to be presented at each of the three places provided for this purpose on the left-hand side of the screen. Display 1 defines the top place, and Display 3 defines the bottom place. If the button is set to Empty, no individual display is presented at the place.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e42.fm / 12.08.09

363

11 The Displays of the Conning Display and their Settings

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

11.1 The Navigation Page

If data are not displayed even although you have switched on the display of these data, the reason is probably that these data or the values needed for their computation are not available to the CHARTPILOT. In the middle part, the course deviation, track deviation and (in the case of conventional propulsion) longitudinal speed (among other things) are displayed graphically. In the middle part, the powers of the thrusters (among other things) are displayed graphically (in the case of conventional propulsion). On ships with azimuth thrusters situated on center line, the button Manoeuvre appears here in addition. By means of this button, in the middle part, data of these azimuth thrusters (among other things) are displayed graphically. Rotating the entire middle part by 180 °. Selection of the individual display for the place at top left. Selection of the individual display for the place at centre left. Selection of the individual display for the place at bottom left.

Display indicating that, with the Recording display switched on, the history of gyro heading is displayed. In addition to the gyro heading, the history of the rudder angle is displayed when the Recording display is switched on. In addition to the gyro heading, the history of the Rate of Turn is displayed when the Recording display is switched on.

After a safeguard question has been answered appropriately, this switches off the Conning subroutine and switches over to Chart mode.

Fig. 11-1

364

The Navigation Menu

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e42.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

11 The Displays of the Conning Display and their Settings

Operating Instructions

11.1 The Navigation Page

Next course: preplanned course which is used 2) as the set course by the TRACKPILOT after pressing of the EXECUTE key 3). Radius of the turning circle currently being performed, computed from the measured speed and the ROT. If the radius of the turning circle is greater than 5 NM, the radius is not displayed.

Rate of Turn, computed from the change in the gyro heading values supplied by the compass Bar to the right: Ship is turning to starboard. Triangle at the end of the scale: Exceeding of the scale range.

Set radius with which the TRACKPILOT is performing a course change. If the next manoeuvre cannot be performed with the set radius, and Track mode is in the switched-on state, the value flashes.

Next radius: Preplanned set radius which is defined as the set radius by pressing of the EXECUTE 3) key

Gyro heading Yellow triangle: The set course, specified by the TRACKPILOT: 1) 2) Actual course 1) = Gyro heading + drift angle (+ course correction 7)) Set course, specified by the TRACKPILOT: 1) 2) Mode of the TRACKPILOT Drift angle computed from the longitudinal and transverse speeds supplied by the selected speed sensor (from BT values, if available) Course deviation (Set course minus actual course) 4) 5) Bar to the right: The actual value lies to starboard of the set value. Red lines: The set course limit Bar is red: The course limit is exceeded. Track deviation: 4) Bar to the right or R: The ship is situated to the right of the track. Red lines: The set track limit Bar is red: The track limit is exceeded. XTD: Deviation from the System Track 6) R = the ship is situated to the right of the track Red background: Deviation from the System Track exceeds the set track limit. Rudder angle, from the rudder angle sensor Yellow triangle: The set rudder angle, specified by the TRACKPILOT Red lines: The rudder limit that is set on the TRACKPILOT

1) Course over ground if the selected speed sensor is working in Bottom Track mode Course through the water if the selected speed sensor is working in Water Track mode 2) In Course and Track mode of the TRACKPILOT, this is displayed beside Course to make it clear that the values are no Heading values. 3) Additionally in Track mode if, and only if, the WOP has been reached and after an appropriate alarm. 4) Relative to the track used by the TRACKPILOT, computed by the TRACKPILOT. In Heading mode and Course mode, this is the deviation from a track which has been specified by the input of the set course (designation: Off Track). In Track mode, this is the deviation from the System Track (designation XTD). 5) In Anchor Control mode: Heading deviation, red line = set heading limit, etc 6) Computed by the CHARTPILOT main program. The display is absent if the ship is sailing in Track mode, because then XTD is displayed in the track deviation bar. 7) In the Track mode only.

Fig. 11-2

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e42.fm / 12.08.09

Longitudinal speed measured by the selected speed sensor: Bar grey: Speed over ground Bar blue: Speed through the water

Displays not explained here: See Figure 11-3

Navigation Page, conventional propulsion, middle part, Open Sea Display Mode

365

CHARTPILOT

11 The Displays of the Conning Display and their Settings

Operating Instructions

11.1 The Navigation Page

Power of the bow and stern thrusters: Length of bar corresponds to power reported by thruster (100% = half the width of the ship). Bar is displayed in direction of ship's acceleration caused by the transverse thrust.

Transverse speed at the bow, computed by the system 1)

Speed over ground or speed through the water1)

Set speed specified by the SPEEDPILOT 1)

Mode of the SPEEDPILOT

Propeller shaft revolution rate 2) Pitch of variable-pitch propeller2) Shaft Power 2) Longitudinal speed measured by the selected speed sensor 1) Clutches 2) Yellow area: Engine coupled Transverse speed at the stern, computed by the system 1)

Displays not explained here: See Figure 11-2

In the case of ships with two propeller shafts, the data of the starboard shaft are displayed here.

Next speed: Preplanned speed which is specified as the set speed to the SPEEDPILOTfor the next leg of the pre-planned track. 3) Actual set lever value

1) Speed over ground if the selected speed sensor is working in Bottom Track mode, speed through the water if the selected speed sensor is working in Water Track mode 2) Data from the engines 3) Additionally with activated TRACKPILOT if, the WOP of the system track has been passed. Fig. 11-3

366

Navigation Page, conventional propulsion, middle part in Harbour Display Mode

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e42.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

11 The Displays of the Conning Display and their Settings

Operating Instructions

11.1 The Navigation Page

Next course: Preplanned course which is used 2) as the set course by the TRACKPILOT after pressing of the EXECUTE key 3). Radius of the turning circle currently being performed, computed from the measured speed and the ROT. If the radius of the turning circle is greater than 5 NM, the radius is not displayed.

Rate of Turn, computed from the change in the gyro heading values supplied by the compass Bar to the right: Ship is turning to starboard. Triangle at the end of the scale: Exceeding of the scale range.

Set radius with which the TRACKPILOT is performing a course change. If the next manoeuvre cannot be performed with the set radius, and Track mode is in the switched-on state, the value flashes.

Next radius: Preplanned set radius which is defined as the set radius by pressing of the EXECUTE 3) key

Gyro heading Yellow triangle: The set course, specified by the TRACKPILOT: 1) 2) Actual course 1) = Gyro heading + drift angle (+ course correction 7)) Set course, specified by the TRACKPILOT: 1) 2) Mode of the TRACKPILOT Drift angle computed from the longitudinal and transverse speeds supplied by the selected speed sensor (from BT values, if available)

Course deviation (Set course minus actual course) 4) 5) Bar to the right: The actual value lies to starboard of the set value. Red lines: The set course limit Bar is red: The course limit is exceeded. Track deviation: 4) Bar to the right or R: The ship is situated to the right of the track. Red lines: The set track limit Bar is red: The track limit is exceeded. XTD: Deviation from the System Track 6) R = the ship is situated to the right of the track Red background: Deviation from the System Track exceeds the set track limit.

1) Course over ground if the selected speed sensor is working in Bottom Track mode Course through the water if the selected speed sensor is working in Water Track mode 2) In Course and Track mode of the TRACKPILOT, this is displayed beside Course to make it clear that the values are no Heading values. 3) Additionally in Track mode if, and only if, the WOP has been reached and after an appropriate alarm. 4) Relative to the track used by the TRACKPILOT, computed by the TRACKPILOT. In Heading mode and Course mode, this is the deviation from a track which has been specified by the input of the set course (designation: Off Track). In Track mode, this is the deviation from the System Track (designation XTD). 5) In Anchor Control mode: Heading deviation, red line = set heading limit, etc 6) Computed by the CHARTPILOT main program. The display is absent if the ship is sailing in Track mode, because then XTD is displayed in the track deviation bar. 7) In the Track mode only.

Fig. 11-4

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e42.fm / 12.08.09

Displays not explained here: See Figure 11-5

Navigation Page, Azimuth Thruster, middle part in Open Sea Display Mode

367

CHARTPILOT

11 The Displays of the Conning Display and their Settings

Operating Instructions

11.1 The Navigation Page

Data of the azimuth thruster: Length of the yellow bar and lower numerical value: Revolution rate of the thruster (actual value) Bar is yellow: Normal direction of rotation of the propeller. (Ship is propelled in the ahead direction of the thruster). Bar is red: Propeller is rotating in reverse. (Ship is propelled in the direction opposite to the ahead direction of the thruster.). Yellow triangle on the outside: Thruster direction set by the TRACKPILOT Red scale sector: Rudder limit set for the TRACKPILOT Yellow triangles on the bar: Thruster revolution rate set by the SPEEDPILOT Black triangle and upper left numerical value: Heading direction of the thruster At service level, it is possible to specify that the numerical field becomes green or red when the ship is not being propelled in ahead. Whether the colour indicates the direction of the force exerted by the thruster or, alternatively, the direction in which the ship is moved can also be specified at service level. Propeller symbol indicates whether the propeller is situated at the front or back of the thruster. Circular area is red: Thruster is out of service. Right numerical value: Power of the thruster, if available

Transverse speed at the bow, computed by the system 1)

Positions of the azimuth thruster displays: Ships with normal bridge configuration: At the top, the fore thrusters; at the bottom, the aft thrusters Ferries with bridges fore and aft: At the top, the thrusters situated in front of the person looking at the screen; at the bottom, the thrusters behind the person looking at the screen.

Mode of the SPEEDPILOT Set speed specified by the SPEEDPILOT 1)

Speed over ground or speed through the water1) Transverse speed at the stern, computed by the system 1) Displays not explained here: See Figure 11-4

Longitudinal speed measured by the selected speed sensor: Bar grey: Speed over ground Bar blue: Speed through the water Next speed: preplanned speed which is specified as the set speed to the SPEEDPILOT after pressing of the EXECUTE key 2) Actual set lever value

1) Speed over ground if the selected speed sensor is working in Bottom Track mode, speed through the water if the selected speed sensor is working in Water Track mode 2) Additionally in Track mode of the TRACKPILOT if, and only if, the WOP has been reached and after an appropriate alarm.

Fig. 11-5

368

Navigation Page, Azimuth Thruster, middle part in Harbour Display Mode

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e42.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

11 The Displays of the Conning Display and their Settings

Operating Instructions

11.1 The Navigation Page

This example shows the middle part of the Navigation Page in Harbour display mode for a ship with diesel electric propulsion and azimuth thrusters. Navigation data according to Figure 11-2

Data of the bow azimuth thruster (or pump jet) according to Figure 11-5

Navigation data according to Figure 11-3

Data of the stern thrusters according to Figure 11-3

Data of the diesel electric propulsion analogous to Figure 11-3

Data of the rudder according to Figure 11-2

Fig. 11-6

Navigation Page, example of a different propulsion combination

If an echosounder with several transducers is installed, the selected transducer is noticed here. Water depth under the keel measured by the navigation echosounder at the location of the selected transducer including the depth history of the past 10 minutes Red line: The set depth alarm value By means of a context-sensitive menu, the depth range displayed can be set to a different fixed value or to automatic range-adaptation.

Depth Fig. 11-7

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e42.fm / 12.08.09

Navigation Page, individual displays, Figure 1

369

CHARTPILOT

11 The Displays of the Conning Display and their Settings

Operating Instructions

11.1 The Navigation Page

Wind display (Switch-over by means of context-sensitive menu) Rel: relative wind; measured by the wind sensor True: true wind; computed by the system Wind speed (Switch-over of the unit of measurement by means of context-sensitive menu) Wind direction Ship symbol represents the present gyro heading Yellow arrow pointing inwards: Wind direction Blue arrow pointing outwards: Direction of the current Red line: Actual course = Gyro heading + drift angle

Wind + Set Direction and speed of the current, computed from the difference between Bottom Track data and Water Track data If the selected speed sensor supplies both Bottom Track data and Water Track data, the set and drift are computed from these. If the selected speed sensor supplies only Bottom Track data or only Water Track data, the system also uses data from other connected sensors. If a transverse component is absent, the displayed values do not indicate the drift vector correctly. This is the case, for example, if the longitudinal speed from the EM log is supplemented by the speed over ground (from the GPS receiver). If data entered manually are taken into account in the computation of set and drift, the fields have a yellow background.

Air temperature, outside, transferred from the weather station Relative humidity of the outside air, transferred from the weather station Dew point of the outside air, computed from air temperature and relative humidity Barometric pressure transferred from the weather station, including its variation during the past 8 hours Sea water temperature, transferred from the temperature sensor or from the weather station

Weather

Black triangle: Permanent helm Recording of the past 10 minutes: Blue: Gyro heading Yellow: Rudder angle (mean value in the case of twin rudders) or ROT. Selection of the recorded parameters in the Recording Options frame in the Navigation menu - see page 364.

Recording

Fig. 11-8

370

Gyro heading is always displayed when the Recording display is in the switched-on state. In the case of twin rudder systems, the mean value of the two rudder systems is displayed. In Conning mode, the values from the past 10 minutes are continuously stored for all three parameters which can be displayed here, so that the history will be displayed immediately when switch-on of the Recording display and switch-over between Rudder angle and ROT take place.

Navigation Page, individual displays, Figure 2

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e42.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

11 The Displays of the Conning Display and their Settings

Operating Instructions

11.1 The Navigation Page

Environmental data supplied by external item of equipment

Ship's attitude data provided by external equipment - see also Keel Clearance Page, page 375

Environment

(selectable only if the appropriate sensors are installed) Mode of the main generators Power of the main generators: - Top edge of the green bar: Total power available at present - Green area: Spare power at present - Yellow bar: Power output or used power Total power available at present Spare power at present Power output or used power

Generated Power

For Generated Power, there are other displays with a different selection and layout of the data described.

(Can be selected only in the case of ships with electromotive propulsion and special interface.)

Data of the selected speed sensor

Measured speed through the water The availability of transverse speed is dependent on the type of speed sensor

Speed

Speed WT Fig. 11-9

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e42.fm / 12.08.09

Navigation Page, individual displays, Figure 3

371

11 The Displays of the Conning Display and their Settings

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

11.2 The Docking Page

Overall estimated effect of the thrusters: Green arrow: Present effect (estimated direction of the ship’s movement caused by the thrust) Yellow arrow: The set value (estimated sum of propulsion orders) Both arrows represent the vector sum of the available azimuth thrusters calculated from the data input. The maximum length of the arrows represents 100% thrust on all available thrusters.Use RPM: Values are based on the signalled rotational speed of the azimuth propeller Use Power: Values are based are the measured output Use Pitch: Values are based on the signalled propeller pitch data Use Power**2/3: Values are based are the measured output, taking into account a nonlinear relationship between measured output and thrust.

Manoeuvre (Can be selected only in the case of ships with azimuth thrusters and special interface) Fig. 11-10

11.2

Note: The rotational forces, generated by the thrusters cannot be derived from the Manoeuvre display. Mode of the azimuth thruster control system (only available with special interface)

Navigation Page, individual displays, Figure 4

The Docking Page On the Docking Page, a set of data needed for docking manoeuvres can be displayed as numerical values and also graphically. You can parameterise this display yourself. Switching On the Docking Page In the Tree, press the Docking button. The Docking Page and (if the menu display is switched on) the Docking menu appear. Parameterisation of the Docking Page Parameterisation is performed in the Docking menu. -

Selection of the Data to be Displayed By pressing of the buttons Rate of Turn to Thruster, as well as History and Prediction, select the data that are to be displayed.

-

Setting the past track When you switch on History, the last 10 positions of the ship are displayed relative to the present position (if, because of low speed, they are situated within the display). The time covered by this display can be set under History by means of the sliding controller. The distance between two displayed positions of the ship is therefore one tenth of the value displayed on the sliding controller.

-

Setting the Display of the Ship's Probable Movement if you switch on Prediction, a prediction takes place to find out where the ship will sail to if it maintains its present state of motion. As in the case of the past track, 10 positions of the ship (at the most) are displayed relative to the present position. Setting is done under Prediction in a manner similar to the setting of the past track.

-

Other Parameterisations: In the lower part of the menu, after clicking of the relevant buttons you can specify whether the ship speeds and the drift are to be displayed in kt or in m/s, the ship symbol is to point upwards, downwards, to the right or to the left. If data are not displayed even although you have switched on the display of these data, the reason is that these data or the values needed for computing them are not available to the CHARTPILOT.

372

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e42.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

11 The Displays of the Conning Display and their Settings

Operating Instructions

11.2 The Docking Page

Trim: Difference between the forward draught and aft draught, computed from the draughts or determined by connected trim sensor (– = bow is down) Heel: Heel determined by the heel sensor List: Draught increase caused by heel; determined by the list sensor or computed from the heel Squat: Draught increase caused by the suction effect occurring between the moving ship and the water bottom; computed from the ship's speed and the water depth, taking account of the factors stored in the ship model Clearance: Least distance between the ship and the water bottom, computed from the least depth measured by the navigation echosounder under the ship minus the list and squat, and minus the trim if the trim is positive

Rate of Turn, computed from the change in the gyro heading values supplied by the compass Bar to the right: The ship is turning to starboard. Red Triangle at end of scale: Exceeding of the scale range.

Gyro heading

Draught forward, manually set (see page 392) or determined by connected sensors

Future positions of the ship, assuming that the longitudinal and transverse forces remain constant; display of the next 10 positions relative to the present position (the time interval can be set under Prediction in the Docking menu).

Draught aft, manually set (see page 392) or computed from the draught forward and the trim or determined by connected sensors

Drift, set: Speed and direction of the current, computed from the difference between Bottom Track and Water Track data Wind, Rel. or Wind, True: Wind speed and wind direction, measured by the wind sensor (Rel.: relative wind, True: true wind; selection of True/Rel and unit of measurement of the wind speed via context menu.

Water depth under the keel measured by the navigation echosounder at the location of the selected transducer including the depth history of the past 10 minutes If an echosounder with several transducers is installed, the selected transducer is noticed next to the depth value. Red line: The set depth alarm value By means of a context-sensitive menu, the depth range displayed can be set to a different fixed value or to automatic range-adaptation. White lines: Speed vectors forward and aft (computed from the displayed speeds of the ship); limited to 2.5 kt Blue arrow: Relative drift vector (= DRIFT and SET); limited to 2.5 kt Yellow flag: Wind direction and speed, relative; 5 m/s corresponds to half a division; measured by the wind sensor Brown bar: Power of the thrusters - Bar length corresponds to power reported by thruster. (100% = half the width of the ship) - Bar is displayed in direction of the ship's acceleration caused by the transverse thrust.

Fig. 11-11

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e42.fm / 12.08.09

Propulsion data as described in Figure 11-3 Alternatively, on ships with azimuth thrusters, their data can be displayed here; for explanation, see page 368. Past positions of ship, display of the last 10 positions relative to the present position (The time interval can be set under History in the Docking menu.)

Rudder angle, measured by the rudder angle sensor

Ship's speed, measured by the selected speed sensor: - Selected sensor - Transverse speed at the bow - Longitudinal speed - Transverse speed at the stern

The Docking Page

373

CHARTPILOT

11 The Displays of the Conning Display and their Settings

Operating Instructions

11.2 The Docking Page

Switching on the parameters that are to be displayed.

Switches on/off the display of the past track. Setting the period of time for which the past track is to be displayed Switches on/off the display of the predicted positions. Setting the period of time for which the predicted positions is to be displayed. Specifying the units of measurement for ship's speed and drift. Specifying the orientation of the ship symbol. Switches off the subroutine for display of the Docking Page. The Navigation Page appears. Fig. 11-12

374

The Docking Menu

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e42.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

11 The Displays of the Conning Display and their Settings

Operating Instructions

11.3

11.3 The Keel Clearance Page

The Keel Clearance Page On the Keel Clearance Page, data which are helpful for sailing in shallow water are displayed as numerical values and graphically. Draught aft, manually set (see page 392) or computed from the draught forward and the trim or determined by connected sensors

Smallest measured depth from the navigation echosounder under the ship

Draught forward, manually set (see page 392) or determined by connected sensors

Present measured depth from the navigation echosounder 1)

Trim: Difference between the forward draught and aft draught, computed from the draughts or determined by connected trim sensor (– = bow is down) Heel: Heel, determined by the heel sensor List: Draught increase caused by heel, determined by the list sensor or computed from the heel Squat: Draught increase caused by the suction effect occurring between the moving ship and the water bottom, computed from the speed from the selected speed sensor and the present depth measured by the navigation echosounder, taking account of the factors stored in the ship model Clearance: Least distance between the ship and the water bottom, computed from the least depth measured by the navigation echosounder under the ship minus the list and squat, and minus the trim if the trim is positive Graphic display of Heel Longitudinal speed, with statement of source Graphic display of Trim

Water depth in meter

Schematic diagram of the depth situation under the ship: - Horizontal line: Largest draught (forward draught plus list and squat, and plus trim if trim is positive) - Lower grey area: The upper edge is the depth history (the most recent measurements made by the navigation echosounder) - Green bar: Position of least measured depth under the ship; bar height corresponds to clearance. Bar goes red: The measured water depth is less than the set depth alarm value - Dashed red line: The set depth alarm value 1) If the ship has an echosounder with several transducers, the displayed data are shown only if the forward transducer is selected. If a different transducer is used, the values of Minimum Depth, Squat and Clearance as well as the diagram of the depth situation under the ship are not shown. The numerical value of Actual Depth is arranged in accordance with the position of the selected transducer. Fig. 11-13

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e42.fm / 12.08.09

Keel Clearance Page

375

CHARTPILOT

11 The Displays of the Conning Display and their Settings

Operating Instructions

11.3 The Keel Clearance Page

Switching On the Keel Clearance Page In the Tree, press the Keel Clearance button. The Keel Clearance Page and (if the menu display is switched on) the Keel Clearance menu appear. Parameterisation of the Keel Clearance Page -

Specifying the Depth Range that is to be Displayed Graphically Under Depth Scale, by means of the two arrow keys, set the depth range which is to be displayed below the ship symbols on the Keel Clearance Page.

-

Specifying the Units of Measurement for the Ship's Speed With the Speed button, choose between kt and m/s.

Specifying the depth range to be displayed graphically. Specifying the units of measurement for the ship's speed.

Switches off the subroutine for the display of the Keel Clearance Page. The Navigation Page appears.

Fig. 11-14

376

The Keel Clearance menu

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e42.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

11 The Displays of the Conning Display and their Settings

Operating Instructions

11.4

11.4 The Data Displays

The Data Displays In Conning mode too, the display is supplemented by the data displays appearing in the right-hand sidestrip. In contrast to Chart mode, the presentation of these data displays cannot be switched off; they can only by concealed by the menu. It is possible to choose between the following types of display: The Track/Schedule display summarises the most important data needed for track-keeping and time schedule planning. All data displayed there relate to the System Track. The display corresponds to the Track/Schedule display which can be selected in Chart mode, but it is supplemented by the addition of status messages of the TRACKPILOT. The Track/Control display likewise contains the most important data needed for track-keeping and time planning, likewise relating to the System Track but with a different set of data. This display corresponds to the Track/Control display which can be selected in Chart mode, but is supplemented by the addition of status messages of the TRACKPILOT. All items of data relating to the System Track which appear in the data displays are determined by the CHARTPILOT main program. As a result, there might be slight deviations relative to the data computed and displayed by the TRACKPILOT (e.g. the track deviation on the Navigation Page). The NACOS Status display indicates which NACOS components and which of the sensors connected to the NACOS are switched on or are functioning. In the External Alarm displays, alarm messages are displayed which are signalled by a connected alarm-system, e.g. a bridge alarm system. 1) When an alarm signal of this kind reaches the NACOS, the NACOS first generates the BRIDGE ALARM SYSTEM alarm (see Section 9). Whether an acoustic signal is emitted as well depends on the alarm message that is signalled. Selection of the Data Display to be Presented The selection between Track/Schedule display, Track/Control display and NACOS Status display is made after clicking of the top button of the data display that is being presented. Switch-on of the External Alarm display takes place in the NACOS Status display after clicking of the button below the top button.

1)

The following features of the External Alarm displays can be configured at service level, and so these displays might differ from the example shown in Figure 11-18: - Title of the displays - Number of possible alarms and thus number of displays - Designation of the alarms - Whether an acoustic signal is emitted by the NACOS, and if so, for which of the alarms.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e42.fm / 12.08.09

377

CHARTPILOT

11 The Displays of the Conning Display and their Settings

Operating Instructions

11.4 The Data Displays

The Track/Schedule Display

Title button; after clicking, a different data display can be switched on. Name and number of the System Track Number, remark about the waypoint, and geographical position of the waypoint that is passed last Number1), remark about the waypoint, and geographical position of the present waypoint Estimated time of arrival at the present waypoint Estimated time to go to the present waypoint

Switching forward to the next set of waypoint data takes place abeam of the present waypoint. If the TRACKPILOT is steering with Pilot Data or in Track mode, the TRACKPILOT makes the decision about switching forward (normally occurs at the wheel over point).

Number and remark about the waypoint of the arrival point (for arrival point, see page 233) Estimated time of arrival at the arrival point Probable time to go to the arrival point Arrival Speed of the present track segment (for Arrival Speed, see page 233) Difference between the estimated time of arrival and the planned time of arrival at the arrival point Arrival Speed of the next track segment Existing status messages of the TRACKPILOT, relative to the System Track - OFF COURSE: The set course limit is exceeded - OFF TRACK: The set track limit is exceeded - REDUCED RADIUS: The next planned manoeuvre cannot be performed with the set radius that is currently set - SHORT RADIUS: The next planned manoeuvre cannot be performed with the maximum rudder angle - Track Status OK: None of the above-mentioned fault messages are present. - LOW SPEED: The ship's speed is lower than the minimum speed that ensures safe manoeuvring by the TRACKPILOT.

1) Number field is yellow: System Track is violated within the next 20 NM by safety contour, object of interest or own safety line. By clicking of the INFO key, the System Track can be checked as far as the last waypoint.

Fig. 11-15

378

The Track/Schedule Display in the Conning Mode

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e42.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

11 The Displays of the Conning Display and their Settings

Operating Instructions

11.4 The Data Displays

The Track/Control-Display Title button; after clicking, a different data display can be switched on. Name and number of the System Track Last waypoint Number and name of the present waypoint Field is yellow: System Track is violated within the next 20 NM by safety contour, object of interest or own safety line By clicking of the INFO key, the System Track can be checked as far as the last waypoint Geogr. position of the present waypoint Left: Sailing mode: GC = Great Circle, RL = Rhumb Line Centre: Track control mode: To WPT = To Waypoint, To TRK = To Track Right: Pilot Data Status: PD on = Pilot Data are switched on for the TRACKPILOT Left: Bearing of the present waypoint Right: WPD: Distance to the present waypoint 1) WOP: Distance to the WOP Left:

In To Track mode: Direction of the present track line In To Waypoint mode: Last computed course of the temporary track to the present waypoint Field is red: The course limit is exceeded. Right: Deviation from the System Track; R: Ship is situated to the right of the System Track Field is red: The track limit is exceeded. TTG: Probable sailing time up to the present waypoint 1) TTG WOP: Probable sailing time up to the WOP TTG or TTG WOP in red: The APPROACHING WAYPOINT alarm is present Planned time schedule: The following data are obtained if the ship sails to the arrival point at the Arrival Speed. Actual time schedule: The following data are obtained if the ship sails to the arrival point at the present speed. Switch-over: After clicking Next leg data: see figure on page 66 Number of the waypoint of the arrival point (for arrival point, see page 233) Estimated time of arrival at the arrival point Planned time of arrival at the arrival point Difference between the estimated time of arrival and the planned time of arrival at the arrival point (Spare: Arriving too early) Probable time to go to the arrival point Remaining distance to go to the arrival point Arrival Speed of the present track segment (for Arrival Speed, see page 233) or with actual time schedule: present speed Arrival Speed of the next track segment Existing status messages of the TRACKPILOT, relative to the System Track (see Track/Schedule display, page 378) 1) At service level, it can be specified that only the distance to go to the WOP is displayed. Fig. 11-16

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e42.fm / 12.08.09

The Track/Control Display

379

CHARTPILOT

11 The Displays of the Conning Display and their Settings

Operating Instructions

11.4 The Data Displays

The NACOS Status Display

After clicking, a different data display can be switched on. Title button; if there is an external alarm system connected which supplies the necessary signals, an External Alarm display can be switched on here after clicking.

Status of the NACOS components The meaning of the display is stated in the table below.

Status of the connected sensors ON, green background: The sensor is supplying valid signals to the NACOS. OFF, red background: The sensor is not supplying valid signals. Special feature in the case of GPS receiver: - If the DGPS only function is selected in the Use of GPS frame in the Sensor Settings > Position Sensor menu, ON appears with a red background if the GPS receiver is not working in Differential mode. - If the DGPS and GPS function is selected in the Use of GPS frame in the Sensor Settings > Position Sensor menu, a red field appears in front of GPS if the GPS receiver is not working in Differential mode.

Fig. 11-17

The NACOS Status Display

The Status Displays of the NACOS Components NACOS component TRACKPILOT

OFF, yellow background

OFF, red background

Ship is being steered with the TRACKPILOT

TRACKPILOT is not activated

Failed or mains power switched off

Engine Interface

Is emitting signals properly

_____

Failed or mains power switched off

SPEEDPILOT

Speed is being controlled with the SPEEDPILOT

SPEEDPILOT is not activated

Failed or mains power switched off

_____

Failed or switched off

Radar Indicator or MULTIPILOT

380

ON, green background

Radar indicator is switched on

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e42.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

11 The Displays of the Conning Display and their Settings

Operating Instructions

11.4 The Data Displays

The External Alarm Displays

After clicking, a different data display can be switched on. Title button; after clicking, the NACOS Status display or a different External Alarm display can be switched on here.

List of possible alarm messages Text with red background: Alarm is present and has not yet been acknowledged. Text with yellow background: Alarm is present and has been acknowledged.

Fig. 11-18

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e42.fm / 12.08.09

Example of an External Alarm Display

381

11 The Displays of the Conning Display and their Settings 11.4 The Data Displays

382

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e42.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

12 Auxiliary Functions, Conning

Operating Instructions

12.1 Performing Nautical Calculations

12

Auxiliary Functions, Conning

12.1

Performing Nautical Calculations This section describes how, with the CHARTPILOT, you can perform position-reckoning calculations calculate the rendezvous point of two ships solve current-sailing problems obtain support in carrying out a measured mile run determine sunrises and sunsets to check the compass accuracy determine the altitude and azimuth of the most important fixed stars. These functions are implemented by means of individual subroutines which you can start in the Tree under Calculator in Conning mode by pressing the appropriate button. In the chart area, the menu of the started program then appears, and on the right (if the menu display is switched on) the Calculator menu appears, from which the other subroutines too can be started.

Position-reckoning calculations; see page 384 Calculating the rendezvous point of two ships; see page 385 Measured mile calculations; see page 387 Determination of sunrises and sunsets; see page 388 Solving current-sailing problems; see page 386 Determining the altitude and azimuth of fixed stars; seepage 390

Leaves the menu and aborts the calculations that are taking place. Alternative: Pressing of Tree also exits the menu, but the calculations continue to run in the background.

Fig. 12-1

The Calculator menu

USEFUL INFORMATION Ending the Calculations If the calculations are to be ended, you must leave the Calculator menu by pressing Exit. As a result, the subroutine concerned is switched off.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e43.fm / 12.08.09

383

CHARTPILOT

12 Auxiliary Functions, Conning

Operating Instructions

12.1 Performing Nautical Calculations

However, it is also possible to leave this menu without stopping the calculations; the values upon which the calculations are based then remain intact. In this case, the calculation data remain preserved and you can briefly inspect and modify the calculations while you are performing the nautical monitoring with the aid of the CHARTPILOT. Coordinate System Used All computations that can be performed via the Calculator menu are based on the chart datum WGS 84.

12.1.1

Performing a Position-Reckoning Calculation After selection of the menu function Calculator > Reckoning, the following menu appears: Own Ship pressed: as the starting data, the current data of own ship are used. Other pressed: the starting data can be input manually; they are not updated. Starting data Sailing data Specifies whether the calculation is performed for Great Circle (orthodrome) or for Rhumb Line (loxodrome).

Destination data

Fig. 12-2

The Calculator > Reckoning menu

On the basis of the starting data, it is possible to determine the destination data by inputting the sailing data or the sailing data by inputting the destination data. 1.

Defining the Starting Data If the data of own ship (position, time) are to be used as the starting data, Own Ship must be in the switched-on state. In this case, the starting data and also the calculated values are continuously updated. If the calculations are to be performed on the basis of fixed starting data, you must press Other and must input or correct the starting data.

384

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e43.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

12 Auxiliary Functions, Conning

Operating Instructions

2.

12.1 Performing Nautical Calculations

Selecting the Sailing Mode This is done by pressing Rhumb Line or Great Circle.

3.

4.

Then either input destination data After the input of the destination position, the course and distance from the starting position to the destination position are displayed under Course and Distance. After input of the destination time, the necessary speed and the travelling time are displayed under Speed and TTG. or input the sailing data After input of the course under Course and of the distance under Distance, the destination position is displayed. After input of the speed under Speed or of the sailing time under TTG, the destination time is displayed.

USEFUL INFORMATION Exceeding of Input Limits If a speed of less than 0.1 kt is input under Speed, this value is not accepted, and dashes appear there. This is also intended to indicate that the destination time displayed is not correct. If, under TTG, the value 0 or a value is displayed which would produce a speed which could no longer be displayed, dashes likewise appear under Speed. If the destination time that has been input would produce a TTG greater than 99 days, dashes appear in the TTG day display.

12.1.2

Calculating the Rendezvous Point of Two Ships After selection of the menu function Calculator > Rendezvous, the following menu appears: Sets the starting data of ship A to the currently existing data of own ship.

Starting data; these have to be input. Speed data: these are calculated when Set is pressed; if Calculated is pressed, they have to be input. The calculated sailing data Data of the rendezvous point Calculated pressed: Rendezvous data are calculated from the starting data and speed data of ship A and ship B; the points lie on a loxodrome. Set pressed: Rendezvous data and the starting data of ship A and ship B are preset. The speed data of ship A and ship B are calculated. Fig. 12-3

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e43.fm / 12.08.09

The Calculator > Rendezvous menu

385

CHARTPILOT

12 Auxiliary Functions, Conning

Operating Instructions

12.1 Performing Nautical Calculations

-

For ships A and B, the rendezvous data of the ships can be determined on the basis of their starting data and speed data; the rendezvous point lies on the straight line (loxodrome) between their starting positions. Or:

-

For ships A and B, the necessary speeds can be calculated on the basis of their starting positions and the preset rendezvous-data.

In both cases, the courses to be sailed, distances to go and times to go are determined as well. 1.

Specifying whether the Rendezvous Data are to be Preset or Calculated Press Calculated if the rendezvous data are to be calculated, or press Set if the rendezvous data are to be preset.

2.

Inputting the Starting Data Under Ship A and Ship B, input the desired values under Lat, Lon, Time and Date. By pressing of Restart, the starting data of ship A are set to the currently existing data of own ship. If Calculated is pressed, Restart also sets the speed of ship A to the currently existing speed of own ship. The speed of ship B has still to be input or corrected. When this has been done, the rendezvous data and sailing data calculated from the input data are displayed. If Set is pressed, the rendezvous data must be input or corrected. The speeds and sailing data calculated from the input data are then displayed.

12.1.3

Solving Current-Sailing Problems After selection of the menu function Calculator > Current Sailing, the following menu appears: Selection of the current-sailing problem

The data wanted; result of the calculation

The given data

Graphic display of the currentsailing problem

Fig. 12-4

The Calculator > Current Sailing menu (problem 1)

The following current-sailing problems can be solved in order to take account of, or to determine, the direction and speed of the current:

386

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e43.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

12 Auxiliary Functions, Conning

Operating Instructions

12.1 Performing Nautical Calculations

Problem 1: Given: the heading (HDG) and speed through the water (STW, and also the direction of the current (set) and speed of the current (drift). Wanted: the course over ground (course made good, CMG) and speed over ground (speed made good, SMG). Problem 2: Given: the course over ground (course made good, CMG) and speed through the water (STW), and also the direction of the current (set) and speed of the current (drift). Wanted: the heading (HDG) and speed over ground (speed made good, SMG). Problem 3: Given: the heading (HDG) and speed through the water (STW), and also the course over ground (course made good, CMG) and speed over ground (speed made good, SMG). Wanted: the direction of the current (set) and speed of the current (drift). 1.

Select the current-sailing problem This is done by pressing Problem 1, Problem 2 or Problem 3.

2.

Input the known values Inputting is done under Own Ship Data. Data that are not to be input are displayed there faintly. The result is displayed numerically under Results and graphically in the compass rose; the colours are used in a consistent manner.

12.1.4

Support for the Measured Mile Run After selection of the menu function Calculator > Measured Mile, the following menu appears:

Here, before the measured mile run is performed, input the distance taken from the chart. When the ship crosses the starting line, press Start or the Enter key. The data that exist at this instant are „frozen“. The time and distance that have elapsed since pressing of Start; the data are „frozen“ when End is pressed. The currently existing data; when the ship crosses the finishing line, press End or the Enter key. The data that exist at this instant are „frozen“.

Speed determined by the log Speed determined from the starting position, end position and Running Time Speed determined from the input Distance and Running Time Fig. 12-5

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e43.fm / 12.08.09

The Calculator > Measured Mile menu

387

12 Auxiliary Functions, Conning 12.1 Performing Nautical Calculations

To -

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

support the measured mile run, the following data are determined: The average speed during the measured mile run, according to the log that is being tested. The speed calculated from the starting position, the end position and the time required. The speed calculated from the distance input and from the time needed.

1.

Sensor Selection On the radar, select the speed sensor whose accuracy is to be checked by the measured mile run, and select the most accurate position-sensor.

2.

Starting the Measured Mile Run Sail into the measured mile at constant speed on a constant course. When the ship crosses the starting line, press the Start button or the Enter key. The data that exist at this instant are recorded under Start. Under Running, the time which has elapsed since pressing of the Start button and the distance of the present position from the starting position are displayed.

3.

Ending the Measured Mile Run When the ship crosses the finishing line, press the End button or the Enter key. The data that exist at this instant are recorded under End. Under Running, the time that has elapsed between the start and the end, and the distance between the starting position and the end position, are displayed.

4.

Determining the Results Under Results, the following items are displayed: Speed by Log: During the measured mile run, the speed value supplied by the selected speed sensor is stored at intervals of one second. The arithmetic mean of these values is displayed here. -

5.

Speed by Time & Position: The speed resulting from the distance between the starting position and end position and from the time between the start and end is displayed. The position data of the selected position sensor are used. Speed by Time and Distance: The speed resulting from the value that was input under Distance and from the time between start and end is displayed.

Repetition of the Measured Mile Run After the results have been documented, a repetition of the measured mile run can be prepared by pressing Start. As a result, all measured data are deleted, and the currently existing data of own ship are displayed again under Start and End.

12.1.5

Determining the Data of Sunrises and Sunsets After selection of the menu function Calculator > Sunrise & Sunset, the following menu appears: The time of day and the true bearing of sunrises and sunsets can be determined for the next sunrise or sunset, calculated for the position which will then be reached if the course and speed remain constant, or for any future or past sunrise or sunset at any position. With this function, the accuracy of the compass can be checked.

388

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e43.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

12 Auxiliary Functions, Conning

Operating Instructions

12.1 Performing Nautical Calculations

Press if the coming sunrise or sunset is to be calculated for the position that will then be reached (event position). If this is pressed again, the calculation is repeated. Eye level must be input. Data on which the calculation of the event position is based Calculated distance to go to the event position Press if an event position is to be preset as a definite value. Event position: the position to which the sunrise and sunset data displayed below refer. Set pressed under Own Ship Data: the event position is calculated from the Own Ship data. Set pressed under Event Position: the event position can be preset as a definite value. With these, it is possible to switch over to the next or previous sunsets or sunrises. Data of the sunrise or sunset, relative to the event position. Fig. 12-6

The Calculator > Sunrise & Sunset menu

Determination of Data of the Next Sunrise or Sunset 1.

Under Eye Level, input the eye height (the observation height above the water surface).

2.

In the Own Ship Data frame, press the Set button. When this is done, the currently existing data of own ship under Own Ship Data are frozen, the position which the ship will have during the sunrise or sunset is calculated, assuming that the course and speed will remain constant (this position is displayed under Event Position), the distance to go to reach that point is displayed under DTG, in the bottom frame, there are displays showing whether the event is a sunrise or a sunset, the time at which it will occur, and - under Azimuth - the true bearing at which it will occur. These displays are automatically updated at intervals of 60 seconds, so that they then correspond to the own ship data which then exist.

Determining Data of a Future or Past Sunrise or Sunset for Any Position 1.

Under Eye Level, input the eye height (the observation height above the water surface).

2.

Press Event Position Set.

3.

Under Event Position, input the position and (if applicable) the date for which the sunrise or sunset data are to be determined. In the bottom frame, there are displays showing whether the event is a sunrise or a sunset, the time at which it occurs, and the true bearing at which it occurs.

4.

With Next Event, the data of the next sunrise or sunset can be called up; with Past Event, the data of the previous sunrise or sunset can be called up.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e43.fm / 12.08.09

389

CHARTPILOT

12 Auxiliary Functions, Conning

Operating Instructions

12.1 Performing Nautical Calculations

12.1.6

Determination of the Data of Fixed Stars After selection of the menu function Calculator > Altitude & Azimuth, the following menu appears:

Run pressed: The star data are calculated for the ship's existing position and for the existing time. Fixed pressed: The reference data can be input under Own Ship Data. Ship's position and time to which the star data refer

Click the desired fixed star; to do this, scroll the list if necessary.

Fixed star data referenced to the data displayed under Own Ship Data

Fig. 12-7

The Calculator > Altitude & Azimuth menu

The altitude and azimuth of the most important fixed stars can be determined referenced to the ship's existing position and the existing time or referenced to any position of the ship and any time. 1.

2. 3.

If the fixed star data are to be displayed for the existing position and existing time, press Run. Under Own Ship Data, the own ship data are displayed and updated or If the data are to be determined for a different position or for a different time, press Fixed, and under Own Ship Data input the desired reference position and the reference time. In the Fixed Star Table list, click the desired fixed star. Under Results, the altitude and azimuth of the selected fixed star are displayed behind Altitude and Azimuth respectively.

USEFUL INFORMATION Contents of the Fixed Star Table In this list, the following items are displayed (from left to right): Serial number of the star in the Nautical Almanac Name of the constellation (Name of the star) Brightness of the star.

390

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e43.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

12 Auxiliary Functions, Conning

Operating Instructions

12.2

12.2 Generating the Pilot Card

Generating the Pilot Card You can at any time generate a pilot card containing the currently existing data. This function is implemented by means of a subroutine which you can start by pressing the Pilot Card button in the Tree in Conning mode. Part of the pilot card then appears in the chart area; the other part can be made visible by scrolling, and the Pilot Card menu appears on the right (if the menu function is switched on).

Triggers the printing of the pilot card.

Makes it possible to update the draught values and the displacement.

Makes it possible to update the data listed under NAUTICAL CHECKLIST on the pilot card; menu see Figure 12-9 on page 392.

Ends the processing of the pilot card.

Fig. 12-8

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e43.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Display for generating the Pilot Card

391

CHARTPILOT

12 Auxiliary Functions, Conning

Operating Instructions

12.2 Generating the Pilot Card

Generating a Pilot Card 1.

Adjust the Printer and the Printer control (see page 73).

2.

Entering the Draught and Displacement Check whether (in the third line from the top) the draught values and the displacement are correct. If draught sensors fore and aft or a forward draught sensor and a trim sensor are connected, then no manual input is possible. If only a forward draught sensor is connected, then the draught aft must be entered, whereas if no draught sensor is available at all, both values must be entered. The manual input can be made at all CHARTPILOT and MULTIPILOT indicators in the system. The values are distributed system-wide for the pilot card and conning displays. The draught values are not taken over into the pilot card if the pilot card is already displayed, but can be accepted by operation the Draught menu. The value sent out by the own AIS system is not changed by this and must be entered correctly in addition; see page 120. A correction of the values is made as follows: By pressing Draughts, call up the menu Draughts, and input the currently existing values under Draught fore and Draught aft. The midship draught calculated from these values is displayed under Draught midship, and the displacement calculated from them is displayed under Displacement. Make the desired corrections. By pressing of the Apply button, the values calculated for Draught midship and Displacement from the draught values that were input are displayed. When all values are correct, press the OK button. Then, in the dialog box which then appears, enter your name. By pressing of the OK button of this dialog box, the Draughts menu is closed and the new values are entered in the pilot card.

3.

Entering Further Nautical Data Check whether the data entered under NAUTICAL CHECKLIST are correct. A correction is made as follows: By pressing Nautical Checklist, the menu Nautical Checklist (see Figure 12-9) is called up. There, all data entered in the pilot card under NAUTICAL CHECKLIST are listed. Make the desired corrections and press the OK button. In the dialog box which then appears, enter your name. By pressing of the OK button of this dialog box, the Nautical Checklist menu is closed and the new values are entered in the pilot card.

4.

Printing Out the Pilot Card The print-out takes place after the Print button has been pressed.

USEFUL INFORMATION

Here, enter values that are to appear under NAUTICAL CHECKLIST in the pilot card.

Takes over the entered values into the pilot card. Leaves the menu without taking account of the altered values. Fig. 12-9

392

The Pilot Card > Nautical Checklist menu

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e43.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

12 Auxiliary Functions, Conning

Operating Instructions

12.2 Generating the Pilot Card

Source of the Pilot Card Data All items of data whose modification possibility is not described above have been input in the process of installing the CHARTPILOT. This also applies to the factors for calculating the displacement from the draught values. The pictures were selected from a number of standard pictures. The parameters listed under NAUTICAL CHECKLIST were entered during the installation process and can, if necessary, be altered at service level, and (within the scope of the space available) additions can be made to them.

These draught values were entered in the Pilot Card > Draughts menu; the displacement was calculated from these values.

All other values and displays were defined during the installation of the CHARTPILOT.

These values were entered in the Pilot Card > Nautical Checklist menu. The name that was entered last upon leaving the ... > Draughts menu or the ... > Nautical Checklist menu appears here.

Fig. 12-10

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e43.fm / 12.08.09

Example of a pilot card generated on the CHARTPILOT

393

12 Auxiliary Functions, Conning 12.2 Generating the Pilot Card

394

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e43.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

Appendices

A

Care and Maintenance

B

Alarm Outputs

C

Data Recorded during Voyage Recording

D

Conversion of the Map Objects into User Chart Objects

E

Displays of the UPS, Model DLP100

F

Displays of the UPS, Model DLP150

H

Keyboard Templates

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e6.fm / 12.08.09

395

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

396

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e6.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

A Care and Maintenance

Operating Instructions

A

A 1 Cleaning/Exchanging the Filter Pads

Care and Maintenance Care of the components of the CHARTPILOT is limited to occasional cleaning of the monitor screens. This should be done by means of a soft cloth moistened with alcohol. The following maintenance work must be done regularly by the on-board personnel: Cleaning or exchanging the filter pads and checking the fans the electronics unit of the CHARTPILOT Check of the monitor performance If necessary, the following work can possibly be performed by on-board personnel: Cleaning the CDs and the optics of the CD drive

A1

Cleaning/Exchanging the Filter Pads This work needs to be done on the electronics unit of the CHARTPILOT only. The activity should be carried out quarter-yearly, but more frequently than that if the equipment is installed in a dusty environment. If the air is particularly dust-free, the interval can be extended. Taking out the filter pad: This is situated under the cover at the top of the electronics unit. It can be gripped at its front left-hand corner and can be pulled out without having to undo the screws. Cleaning the filter pad: Wash the filter pad in lukewarm soapy water and dry it before inserting it again. If the filter pad has to be exchanged: the ordering number is 2175640.

A2

Checking the Fans NOTE: The electronics unit may only be opened by qualified persons. This work needs to be done on the electronics unit of the CHARTPILOT only. The check should be performed quarter-yearly. Performing the check: Undo the screws of the casing cover and take the casing cover off. Check that the casing fan (under the filter pad) and the CPU fan are running and that there are no noises indicating damaged bearings. When screwing the casing cover back on, ensure that the grounding cable is plugged in.

A3

Check of the Monitor Performance To ensure that the symbols and other objects of the electronic chart can be interpreted correctly, it is essential that the colours are being displayed correctly. However, monitors are subject to technical influences which can cause falsification of colour reproduction. Such processes, which are usually due to aging, take place over a period of years or are caused by external influences, e.g. in the case of monitors with cathode ray tubes they are caused by magnetic fields from adjacent units.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e61.fm / 12.08.09

397

CHARTPILOT

A Care and Maintenance

Operating Instructions

A 3 Check of the Monitor Performance

For the use of the ENC charts, a possibility of checking the colour reproduction of the monitor has therefore been stipulated as a requirement. If the checks described in the following are unsuccessful, then in the case of monitors with cathode ray tubes degaussing must be performed (see also page 25) or colour adjustment of the monitor must be carried out by service personnel. In extreme cases it may be necessary to replace the monitor. This check should be performed annually on all monitors, especially if the equipment is approved as an ECDIS. This check was originally prescribed for CRT monitors, which from many years of experience had been known to be subject to ageing, leading to a falsification of their colour reproduction. As long as sufficient experience has not yet been obtained in this regard for the TFT monitors in use today, this check should also be applied to them. All TFT monitors which have originally been delivered and approved by SAM Electronics have a response time (luminance persistance) of more then 1 ms. The test consists of two parts: Test of the Grey Values The test should be performed in daylight. 1.

Display any ENC chart, and set the brightness to Bright Day.

2.

Open the Info box, and in the index card Legend, under ECDIS Chart1 Presentation, click on the line Show Greyscale Test Diagram.

3.

The test bars which then appear must be displayed in graded shades of grey, and must only have very slight colour components or none at all.

Test of the Colour Display The test should be performed with various room brightnesses, and definitely also at night with the colour palette Dark Night.

398

1.

Display any ENC Chart and adjust the colour palette to suit the room brightness.

2.

Open the Info box, and in the index card Legend, under ECDIS Chart1 Presentation, click on the line Show Colour Diff. Diagram.

3.

In all rectangles displayed, there is a diagonal line with a different colour. All lines must be clearly recognisable.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e61.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

A Care and Maintenance

Operating Instructions

A4

A 4 Cleaning the CDs and the Optics of the CD Drive

Cleaning the CDs and the Optics of the CD Drive If problems arise when data are transferred from the CD during chart maintenance activities, they may be caused by soiling of the CD or the optics of the CD drive. In such cases, cleaning may possibly solve the problem. The optics are located on the CD tray (which is extended when the CD drive is opened). Indications that the errors which occurred may be due to a dirty or damaged CD: Soiling: Are there any fingerprints or other signs of dirt on the unprinted side of the CD? Damage: Are there any scratches or other signs of damage on the CD (both sides!)? The errors occur only when a certain CD is used (strong indication). The errors can be reproduced when a certain CD is used, i.e. the same errors occur when repeated attempts are made. However, dirt on the CD can still be the cause, even if the errors are not the same. The same errors occur at different CHARTPILOTs when a certain CD is used (very strong indication). Indications that the errors which occurred may be due to dirty optics of the CD drive: The lens is visibly dirty (this can perhaps only be seen with a magnifying glass). Although there is a CD in the drive, the Chart Maintenance subroutine reports that no CD, or the wrong CD, was inserted. Errors occur only at certain CHARTPILOTs. The errors cannot be reproduced, i.e. the same errors do no occur when repeated attempts are made. Non-reproducible errors can also be caused by dirty CDs. Cleaning the CD: Remove light traces of dirt by using a lint-free cloth (e.g. cleansing tissue for eye glasses) with little pressure. Do not wipe in circles. If this is not successful, clean the unprinted side of the CD with lukewarm water and the a.m. cloth, and then dry it with such a cloth. Cleaning the Optics of the CD Drive: CAUTION Cleaning is an intrusion into a sensitive optical assembly with highprecision parts. It should only be performed by persons who have the necessary capabilities and know-how. Note: The lens has a diameter of approx. 2 mm and a resolution of several thousandths of a millimetre. In many CD drives, it is made of plastic. The smallest scratches and the slightest changes to the surface (e.g. through liquids) can lead to irreversible damage to the optics and hence to the necessity to exchange the CD drive. The cleaning must be performed with a soft brush that is suitable for cleaning optics, a soft lint-free cloth (cleansing tissue for eye glasses) or a cotton bud, all of which must be used with extremely low pressure. The cloth or cotton bud may be moistened slightly with distilled water (without any formation of droplets). If distilled water is used, ensure that the lens is dried properly afterwards using a cotton bud or cloth as specified above. Do not use any other liquids!

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e61.fm / 12.08.09

399

A Care and Maintenance A 4 Cleaning the CDs and the Optics of the CD Drive

400

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e61.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

B Alarm Outputs

Operating Instructions

B

Alarm Outputs The following alarm is given in the form of an electrical signal. If there is a Bridge Alarm System BAS40 installed and if the installation is of the standard kind, then this signal is sent to that system and is processed there in an appropriate manner. Chart Alarm The or if

signal is given when one of the following alarms is generated: APPROACHING WAYPOINT COURSE LIMIT EXCEEDED DEPTH LIMIT EXCEEDED GYRO FAULT, EXITING ANCHOR WATCH AREA OBJECT OF INTEREST OUT OF ANCHOR WATCH AREA POSITION INVALID POSITION TIMEOUT, SAFETY CONTOUR, SPEED INVALID, SPEED TIMEOUT, TRACK LIMIT EXCEEDED USER CHART OBJECT a connected radar indicator detects that the CHARTPILOT has failed.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e62.fm / 12.08.09

401

B Alarm Outputs

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

402

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e62.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

C Data Recorded during Voyage Recording

Operating Instructions

C

Data Recorded during Voyage Recording Recording intervals of the individual records: Recording Intervals Record

1) 2) 3)

Factory setting

Settings possible at service level 2)

Duration of storage 1)

Navigation, Short Term

10 seconds

none

12 hours

ARPA Targets

20 seconds

10, 20, 60 and 300 seconds

12 hours

AIS Targets

20 seconds

10, 20, 60 and 300 seconds

12 hours

Engine and Thruster

60 seconds

10, 20, 60 and 300 seconds

12 hours

Azimuth Thruster

20 seconds

10, 20 and 60 seconds

12 hours

Environment

60 seconds

10, 60 and 300 second

12 hours

Weather

300 seconds

10, 60 and 300 seconds

12 hours

none

12 hours

3)

ECDIS

20 seconds

TRACKPILOT

20 seconds

10, 20 and 60 seconds

12 hours

SPEEDPILOT

20 seconds

10, 20 and 60 seconds

12 hours

Navigation, Long Term

30 minutes

none

3 month

The 12 hours settings can also be set to 24 hours at service level. Recordings with variable recording intervals can also be suppressed Checking-interval; recording is performed only after changes

Contents of the records: Navigation, Short Term Own position with status and selected position sensor Gyro heading with status Rate of turn with status BT speed ahead and across with status WT speed ahead and across with status COG and SOG with status Selected speed sensor Rudder angle port rudder with status Rudder angle starboard rudder with status ARPA Targets For each ARPA target: Position Relative speed (magnitude and direction) Target ID Symbol, status of the target AIS Targets For each AIS target: Position Speed (magnitude and direction) Target ID Symbol, status of the target

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e65.fm / 12.08.09

403

CHARTPILOT

C Data Recorded during Voyage Recording

Operating Instructions

Engine and Thruster Shaft revolution rate and shaft status (for port and starboard shafts if applicable) Shaft power with status (for port and starboard shafts if applicable) Pitch of the variable-pitch propeller with status (for port and starboard shafts if applicable) Power of the thruster with status (for each thruster) Trim with status Heel with status Azimuth Thruster All data needed in the Navigation Page for the azimuth thruster display - see page 368 Environment Rel. wind direction and speed with status Abs. wind direction and speed Wind sensor with status Drift direction and speed of the current with status Water depth with status Weather Weather sensor with identifier and channel-number Rel. humidity with status Abs. humidity with status Dew point with status Atmospheric pressure [mmHg] with status Atmospheric pressure [Bar] with status Air temperature with status Sea water temperature with status ECDIS Chart type File name of the cell displayed at own position (vector charts) or name of the chart displayed at own position (raster charts) If relevant: Edition Number Update Number Latest Issue Date TRACKPILOT All data displayed in the menu Pilot > TRACKPILOT - see page 69 All data displayed in the TRACKPILOT row of the Navigation Page - see page 367 SPEEDPILOT All data displayed in the menu Pilot > SPEEDPILOT - see page 69 All data displayed in the SPEEDPILOT row of the Navigation Page - see page 366 Navigation, Long Term Own position with status and selected position sensor Gyro heading with status COG and SOG with status Selected speed sensor Rel. wind direction and speed with status Abs. wind direction and speed Wind sensor with status Drift direction and speed of the current with status Water depth with status

404

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e65.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

D Conversion of the Map Objects into User Chart Objects

Operating Instructions

D

Conversion of the Map Objects into User Chart Objects Conversion of the Map Symbols All sixteen different map symbols are converted into the User Chart Objects having the same meaning (for conversion, see page 326):

Map Object 1)

User Chart Object 2) Map Symbol

1) 2)

Paper Chart

Simplified

Light vessel

Light vessel (light color white)

Radio reporting point

Radio calling-in point

Pilot station

Pilot boarding place

Anchorage

Anchorage area

Fishing area

Fishing facility

Cylindrical buoy

Buoy, special purpose (shape = can)

Conical buoy

Buoy, special purpose (shape = con)

Cylindrical light buoy

Buoy, special purpose with light

Spar light buoy (SB)

Buoy, lateral starboardhand (shape = spar) with topmark

Spar light buoy (P)

Buoy, lateral porthand (shape = spar) with topmark

Hazard buoy (N)

Buoy, lateral north (shape = pillar) with topmark

Hazard buoy (E)

Buoy, lateral east (shape = pillar) with topmark

Hazard buoy (S)

Buoy, lateral south (shape = pillar) with topmark

Hazard buoy (W)

Buoy, lateral west (shape = pillar) with topmark

Light

Light, color white

Radio station

Radio station

The designation used in the Map editor Data determined by means of the Info box

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e71.fm / 12.08.09

405

CHARTPILOT

D Conversion of the Map Objects into User Chart Objects

Operating Instructions

Conversion of the Map Lines Map lines are converted into feature lines. Feature lines can be converted later into own safety lines by means of the User Chart Object editor - see page 199. 1) The sixteen patterns which it was possible to edit for the RADARPILOT 9xxx are displayed on the CHARTPILOT by means of only eight different map line patterns. These eight patterns are taken over in the conversion process. The various colours which it was possible to edit are not converted. . Map line Pattern Number

1) 2)

1)

Description

Line Pattern of User Chart Object 1)

Edited 2)

Displayed on the CHARTPILOT

01

No display

02

02

Solid, thin

Solid 1

03

03

Solid, thick

Solid 2

04

04

Dashed, thin

Dash 1

05

05

Dashed, thick

Dash 2

06

06

Dotted, thin

Dot 1

07

07

Dotted-and-dashed, thin

DashDot 1

08

08

Dotted-and-dashed, thick

DashDot 2

09

Same as 04

Solid, thin

Solid 1

10

10

Dotted, thick

Dot 2

11

Same as 10

Dotted, thick

Dot 2

12

Same as 10

Dotted, thick

Dot 2

13

Same as 10

Dotted, thick

Dot 2

14

Same as 08

Dotted-and-dashed, thick

DashDot 2

15

Same as 10

Dotted, thick

Dot 2

16

Same as 05

Dashed, thick

Dash 2

(No conversion)

Data determined by means of the Info box The designation used in the Map editor

After this conversion, the safety lines are managed as edited User Chart Objects. One of the results of this is that the converted safety lines continue to exist when the conversion of the map is reversed.

406

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e71.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

E Displays of the UPS, Model DLP100

Operating Instructions

E

Displays of the UPS, Model DLP100 The following description refers to the Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS), model DLP100, from the company RIELLO ELETTRONICA s.r.l., which is used as standard equipment by SAM Electronics. The UPS is continuously in the switched-on state, and therefore does not need any operating actions. This section of the text indicates which displays appear on the UPS during normal operation, and which displays appear in the case of a fault. Normal operation is displayed as follows (LED's from the bottom upwards and from right to left – see also Figure E-1): Load: Depending on the load, one or more of the green LED's are alight. The red LED >100 must not light up except for a short time (e.g. when a connected unit is being switched on). Battery Charge: Normally, one or more LED's are alight. If they flash for a long time, the batteries are being overcharged (a case requiring service). The left-hand LED flashes when the operating system of the CHARTPILOT is being shut down (because, after a long-duration failure of the ship's mains, the battery has lost most of its charge). Mains Present (green): This must be alight as long as failure of the ship's mains does not exist. Battery Operation (green): This may be alight only when the UPS is receiving no power from the ship's mains. Replace Battery (red): The test performed automatically every 40 hours has revealed that the capacity of the internal batteries is too small. The batteries must be exchanged immediately. The batteries require no maintenance. The task of exchanging them is performed by the service personnel. By-pass (green): This must not be alight except for a short time (for example when a connected unit is being switched on). Fault/Stand-by (red): This must not be alight except after a long period of failure of the ship's mains, or in the case of overtemperature or overloading. Acoustic Signal -

-

During a failure of the ship's mains, a beep occurring every 7 seconds indicates that the UPS is not receiving power from the ship's mains. When the operating system of the CHARTPILOT is being shut down, the beep occurs every 2 seconds. This signal can be switched off by pressing of the (lefthand) ON key. Four long tones / a one-second pause: the battery is being overcharged. Continuous tone: The UPS is not delivering any voltage; the monitoring electronics will have to be unlocked.

Unlocking the UPS and Switching it On Again When the Fault/Stand-by LED is alight because the batteries are exhausted due to a long period of failure of the ship's mains, the monitoring electronics must be unlocked so that the connected units are receiving power again. This cannot occur until the voltage of the ship's mains is available again. Unlocking is performed by switching off the UPS by pressing of the OFF key.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e66.fm / 12.08.09

407

CHARTPILOT

E Displays of the UPS, Model DLP100

Operating Instructions

Flashes when the batteries have become discharged to such an extent that the supply of power can be maintained for about 3 minutes only. The operating system of the CHARTPILOT is being shut down.

Mains Present (green): Is alight when the UPS is in the switched-on state and is receiving >180 V from the ship's mains. Flashes if the voltage of the ship's mains lies between 170 V and 180 V or if the output voltage is not yet in synchronism with the voltage of the ship's mains.

Load: The loading of the UPS

Battery Charge: The charging status of the batteries. LED's flashing: the batteries are being overcharged.

Fault/Stand-by (red): - Is alight if the batteries have been discharged to such an extent that the UPS is no longer producing any voltage and the monitoring electronics is locked. So that the connected units will again be receiving voltage, the UPS must be unlocked by pressing of the ON key. If the above-mentioned causes cannot be explained in terms of external circumstances, there is probably a need for service. - Flashes when the UPS is in Stand-By mode, i.e. when it is not delivering any voltage.

Battery Operation (green): Is alight if current is being taken from the batteries of the UPS (voltage of the ship's mains is < 170 V). By-pass (green): Is alight if the connected CHARTPILOT is receiving its power directly from the ship's mains, e.g. because the load is greater than the permissible UPS load or the UPS electronics has failed.

Replace Battery (red): The batteries must be replaced by new ones.

ON key: Switches the UPS on (press at least 5 seconds). Suppresses the acoustic alarm from the UPS while the UPS is running in battery mode. If the key is pressed in the operating mode for longer than five seconds, a battery test is performed. If the batteries do not pass the test, the Replace Battery LED then lights up.

Stand-by key: Switches the UPS to Stand-By mode, i.e. the UPS does not deliver any voltage. This key must not be operated when the connected CHARTPILOT is running!

Normally, the UPS electronics generates the supply voltage for the connected CHARTPILOT. It takes the energy for this directly from the ship's mains or – if the ship's mains has failed – from the internal battery.

Fig. E-1

408

Display elements and operating elements of the UPS (model DLP100)

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e66.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

F Displays of the UPS, Model DLP150

Operating Instructions

F

Displays of the UPS, Model DLP150 The following description refers to the Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS), model DLP150, from the company RIELLO ELETTRONICA s.r.l. The UPS is continuously in the switched-on state, and therefore does not need any operating actions. This section of the text indicates which displays appear on the UPS during normal operation, and which displays appear in the case of a fault. Normal operation is displayed as follows (LED's from the bottom upwards and from right to left – see also Figure F-1): Load: Depending on the load, one or more of the green LED's are alight. The red LED >100 must not light up except for a short time (e.g. when a connected unit is being switched on). Battery Charge: Normally, one or more LED's are alight. If they flash for a long time, the batteries are being overcharged (a case requiring service). Mains Present (green): This must be alight as long as failure of the ship's mains does not exist. UPS ON (green): Must be alight. Normal Operation (green): Must be alight. Fault/Stand-by (red): This must not be alight except after a long period of failure of the ship's mains, or in the case of overtemperature or overloading. (The right-hand LED in the third row has no function) Battery Operation (yellow): This may be alight only when the UPS is receiving no power from the ship's mains. By-pass (green): This must not be alight except for a short time (for example when a connected unit is being switched on). Battery Low (yellow): When no power from the ship's mains is present (Mains Present is not alight): The operating system of the CHARTPILOT is run down (because after a long period of failure of the ship's mains, the battery has lost almost all of its charge). If power from the ship's mains is present (Mains Present is alight): The test performed automatically at intervals of 40 hours has revealed that the capacity of the internal batteries is too low. The batteries must be exchanged immediately. The batteries are maintenance-free. The task of exchanging them is performed by service personnel. Acoustic Signal -

-

During a failure of the ship's mains, a beep occurring every 7 seconds indicates that the UPS is not receiving power from the ship's mains. When the operating system of the CHARTPILOT is being shut down, the beep occurs every 2 seconds. This signal can be switched off by pressing of the (lefthand) ON key. Four long tones / a one-second pause: the battery is being overcharged. Continuous tone: The UPS is not delivering any voltage; the monitoring electronics will have to be unlocked.

Unlocking the UPS and Switching it On Again When the Fault/Stand-by LED is alight because the batteries are exhausted due to a long period of failure of the ship's mains, the monitoring electronics must be unlocked so that the connected units are receiving power again. This cannot occur until the voltage of the ship's mains is available again. Unlocking is performed by switching off the UPS by pressing of the OFF key.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e67.fm / 12.08.09

409

CHARTPILOT

F Displays of the UPS, Model DLP150

Operating Instructions

Load: The loading of the UPS

UPS ON (green): Is alight when the UPS is in the switched-on state and the UPS electronics is generating voltage.

Battery Charge: The charging status of the batteries. LED's flashing: the batteries are being overcharged.

Mains Present (green): Is alight when the UPS is in the switched-on state and is receiving > 170 V from the ship's mains. Flashes if the output voltage is not yet in synchronism with the voltage of the ship's mains.

Fault/Stand-by (red): - Is alight if the batteries have been discharged to such an extent that the UPS is no longer producing any voltage and the monitoring electronics is locked. So that the connected units will again be receiving voltage, the UPS must be unlocked by pressing of the ON key. If the above-mentioned causes cannot be explained in terms of external circumstances, there is probably a need for service. - Flashes when the UPS is in Stand-By mode, i.e. when it is not delivering any voltage.

This has no function here.

Normal Operation (green): Is alight when the connected CHARTPILOT is receiving its power from the UPS electronics.

Battery Operation (yellow): Is alight if current is being taken from the batteries of the UPS (voltage of the ship's mains is < 170 V).

By-pass (green): Is alight if the connected CHARTPILOT is receiving its power directly from the ship's mains, e.g. because the load is greater than the permissible UPS load or the UPS electronics has failed.

ON key: Switches the UPS on. Suppresses the acoustic alarm from the UPS while the UPS is running in battery mode. If the key is pressed in the operating mode for longer than five seconds, a battery test is performed. If the batteries do not pass the test, the Replace Battery LED then lights up.

Battery Low (yellow): - If Mains Present is alight: The batteries have become discharged to such an extent that the supply of power can be maintained for about 3 minutes only. The operating system of the CHARTPILOT is being shut down - If Mains Present is not alight: The batteries must be replaced by new ones. Stand-by key: Switches the UPS to Stand-By mode, i.e. the UPS does not deliver any voltage. This key must not be operated when the connected CHARTPILOT is running!

Normally, the UPS electronics generates the supply voltage for the connected CHARTPILOT. It takes the energy for this directly from the ship's mains or – if the ship's mains has failed – from the internal battery.

Fig. F-1

410

Display elements and operating elements of the UPS (model DLP150)

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e67.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

G Displays of the UPS, Model Series DLG

Operating Instructions

G

Displays of the UPS, Model Series DLG The following description refers to the uninterruptible power supply (UPS) of the DLG series from the company RIELLO ELETTRONICA s.r.l., which was used up until the end of 1999. The UPS is switched on continually and therefore does not require any operating actions. From this section of the text, you can see which displays appear on the UPS when it is running properly, and which displays appear when there is a malfunction. Proper operation is indicated as follows (see also Figure ): -

LOAD

Depending on the load, one or more of the green LED's is alight. The red LED >100 may only be alight for a short time (e.g. while a connected unit is being switched on).

-

BATTERY

Normally, one or more LED's are alight. If they flash for a long time, the batteries are being overcharged (service case).

-

On

The LED in the button indicates that the connected units are being supplied with voltage.

-

TIMER

This function is not used.

-

LINE

This must be alight as long as there is no failure of the ship's mains.

-

EMERGENCY

This may only be alight while the UPS is not being supplied with power from the ship's mains.

-

BATTERY LOW

This may only be alight after lengthy failure of the ship's mains

-

REPLACE BATTERY The test which is performed automatically every 40 hours has found that the capacity of the internal batteries is too low. The batteries must be exchanged immediately. The batteries need no maintenance. The task of exchanging them is done by service engineers.

-

BYPASS

This may only be alight for a short time (e.g. when a connected unit is being switched on).

-

STANDBY/FAULT

This may only be alight after lengthy failure of the ship's mains. Unlocking the UPS and switching it on again are required - see below.

-

Acoustic signal

During a failure of the ship's mains, a beep every 7 seconds indicates that the UPS is not being supplied with power from the ship's mains. If BATTERY LOW is alight, the beep occurs every 2 seconds. A continuous tone indicates that there is overtemperature in the UPS or that the UPS is overloaded (LED >100 alight)

Unlocking the UPS and Switching it On Again If the STANDBY/FAULT LED is alight because the batteries are exhausted due to excessively long failure of the ship's mains, the monitoring electronics must be unlocked so that the connected units will be supplied with voltage again. This cannot take place until the voltage of the ship's mains is available again. Unlocking is done by switching off the UPS by pressing the Off button. After switching it on again by pressing the On button, the connected units should again be receiving voltage. If this is not the case, the STANDBY/FAULT LED has lit up not because of exhausted batteries but because of overtemperature or overloading.

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e64.fm / 12.08.09

411

CHARTPILOT

G Displays of the UPS, Model Series DLG

Operating Instructions

%

LOAD

>100 100

Load of the UPS

75 50 25

BATTERY

% 100

Charge state of the batteries LED's flashing: Batteries are being overcharged.

80 60 40 20

g o l Dia

Switches the UPS on. The LED in the button indicates that the connected units are being supplied with voltage. Switches the UPS off. This button must not be pressed when the connected CHARTPILOT is running. Suppresses the acoustic alarm generated by the UPS while the UPS is running in battery mode. Not relevant

On

Is alight when the UPS is being supplied with ship's mains voltage > 170 V.

Off

Is alight when current is being taken from the batteries of the UPS.

TIMER

Lights up if the batteries are discharged to such an extent that the power supply can be maintained for only 2 minutes or so. The operating system of the CHARTPILOT is shut down.

LINE

The batteries must be renewed.

EMERGENCY

Is alight when the connected CHARTPILOT is receiving energy directly from the ship's mains, e.g. because the load is greater than the permissible UPS load or the UPS electronics has failed.

BATTERY LOW REPLACE BATTERY BYPASS STANDBY/FAULT

Fig. G-1

412

Is alight if a) the batteries are discharged to such an extent that the UPS is no longer supplying voltage, b) there is overtemperature in the UPS, or c) the UPS is overloaded. The UPS must be unlocked so that the connected units will be supplied with voltage again. If the above-mentioned causes cannot be explained on the basis of external circumstances, there is probably a need for service.

Displays and controls of the UPS (model series DLG)

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e64.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

H Keyboard Templates

Operating Instructions

Menu

F12 F11

Menu

F11

Menu

F11

You can cut out one of the keyboard templates printed here and fix it above the function keys.

F12

Keyboard Templates F12

H

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e63.fm / 12.08.09

Tree Brightness

F10 F9

Range Event

F8

Std Disp

F7

Set Center

F6

F2

CONNING

F2

F1

CHART

F1

F3

F4

Range Event

F5

Tree Brightness

F10 F9 F8

Std Disp

F7

Set Center

F6

CONNING CHART

F3

F4

F5

Tree Brightness Range Event

F8

Std Disp

F7 F6 F2 F1

F3

F4

F5

Set Center

F9

F10

The right-hand template is intended for use in systems without a TRACKPILOT.

413

H Keyboard Templates

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

414

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_e63.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

13

13 Index

Index

B

Numerics 2nd Position Sensor (menu)

139

A

Backup (menu) Bad Scale (display) base station basic menu line bearing

A/N keyboard setting the necessary click duration switching the repetition function on and off

acoustic signal suppressing for particular alarms

address-lists Aids-to-Navigation

330 330 331 332 314 61 70

data display

AIS targets collision course display data displaying/printing information about A. term

alarm list switching the display on and off

alarm outputs alarms

331 325 182

recording the a.

Anchor watch Apply button ARCS charts see also raster chart chart type data maintenance deleting charts deleting the database marking changed regions permits transferring charts update

area (CM-93/2 chart) area (CM-93/3 chart) ARPA targets

38

78 273 281 239 88 274 277, 278, 301 279 298

collision course display data displaying/printing information about A. switching the display on and off term

arrival attribute arrival point defining of

Arrival Speed arrival time Authorization Code (CM-93/2 charts)

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_eix.fm / 12.08.09

57 70 68 55 333 332 399

284 57 70 68 55 55 171, 221 221 228 172, 221 223 298

308, 313 85 61 44 111 110

determination of b. between objects determination of b. of objects

bearing line, see EBL bearing scale bridge alarm system alarm message from b.

52 399 334, 346, 375

brightness 81 81

setting b. of screen

British Admiralty Charts button clicking

buzzer on/off

33 33 334, 345

C Cancel button Cancel key of the membrane keyboard care Cassini catalog

38 32 395 158

for files of the User Chart Objects for text pages for track and waypoint files for track, map, waypoint files generation of listing/printing the content renaming of

307 317 177 214, 305 177, 305 306 306

ARCS Charts ARCS Update CD CM-93/Pro dirty CD ENC Base CD ENC Update CD

274 274 283 245 248, 264 248, 264 24 245 78

CD

CD drive dirty CD drive

cells centered display chart calibrating on the digitizer preparation reference points

CHART (button in the Tree) chart area division

89, 90 154 157 155, 157 26 47

415

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

13 Index

empty and grey switching individual displays on and off

chart editor chart excerpt chart mode chart range, see range chart status field chart types CHARTPILOT functions in chart mode functions in conning mode reducing computer workload switching off switching on switch-over the mode

84 47 78 156

clicking CM-93/2 chart see also vector chart chart type code of the navigational purpose data maintenance deleting the database geographical structure subscription transferring cells update

46

31 359 75 26 25 26 27 33

78 79 297 239 79 298 300, 301 300

CM-93/3Pro chart see also vector chart cells chart type code of the navigational purpose data maintenance deleting the database geographical structure licences transferring cells update

416

course and speed vectors of radar targets 57 57, 90 57

display relative and true display switching the display on and off

course change see radius

course limit 103 173 135

ECDIS monitoring programming

course transfer course up RM 89, 91 course vector, see course and speed vector current-sailing problems, solving of 384 cursor 33 32 33 47

control form

cursor display cylindrical equal spaced

158

D danger highlight

182

see also User Chart Object ECDIS Monitoring editing

107 187

data backup 79 78 79 283 239 79 284 291, 292 257, 294 77

collision avoidance colour 211 colour faults on screen 26 colour information in this document 82 colour reproduction of the monitors 103, 395, 396 compass 135 configuration file 327 CONNING (button in the Tree) 26 conning data display 65 conning mode 359 coordinate system 94, 155, 161, 167, 204, 382 conversion of c. (raster charts)

switching the display on and off

83

CHARTPILOT program aborting and restarting of

course and speed vector of own ship

31

77

151 53 53

in the editing of tracks

160

ARCS permits 276 ENC permits 251 system parameters 326 text pages 317 track-, map-, waypoint-, User Chart Object- data 307 track-, waypoint-, User Chart Object- data 307 voyage recording 319

data displays switching the display on and off

data input database

48, 62, 375 62 43

deleting complete d.

date/time (menu) Datum mism. (display) datum, see coordinate system dead reckoning dead reckoning position, correction of deep contour Delete button delete tracks departure time

31, 231 239 142 160 139 140 100 38 305 223

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_eix.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

13 Index

depth contours DGPS receiver dialog box

100

see also vector chart base file cell, information about the c. cells chart type code of the navigational purpose data maintenance deleting cells deleting the database geographical structure marking of changes name of the base file name of the update file objects displayed permits transferring cells update (licensed ENC) update (unlicensed ENC) update file

40 40 40 166, 208 158 154 27, 168 25 51, 156, 167

changing the size shifting

digitizer ending work with d. setting up switching off switching on

digitizer cursor digitizer cursor display digitizer pointer diskette displacement display base display mode Display Mode menu display standard DO key Docking display docking manoeuvre Docking page draught drift, manual input DVD

ENC

139

47, 156 167 310, 312, 320, 327 390 96 88 92 96 32 66

switching off the display

EBL2 display ECDIS ECDIS Chart No.1 ECDIS monitoring connection with the TRACKPILOT System Track against vector chart

displaying/printing information about an e. marking symbol

62 370 390 136 283

E EBL

estimated position estimated time of arrival ETA event

110, 111 113 47 77 69 102 104 108

event marker, deletion of Events (menu) Exit button external alarm displays

editing editing cursor electronic bearing line, see EBL electronic chart cells defining objects to be displayed display groups object classes switching display on/off types (vector chart or raster chart)

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_eix.fm / 12.08.09

34 31, 95 78 96 96 96 77 77

221 68 130 52 52, 132 131 76 379

fans checking

feature area editing

feature line editing

395 182 187 182 187

filter pads exchanging/cleaning

204 42

221

F

edit (menu) tracks

263 270 79 77 79 245 261 239 79 99 264 264 69 248, 249 252, 253 254 247, 260 264 140

fixed star data, determination of focus frame function keys keyboard template overview

395 388 35 411 32

function overview, see tree

G Gauss conformal cylindrical Gauss-Krueger GC, see great circle

158 94, 158

417

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

13 Index

geodetic datum GPS mode graphic elements in chart area great circle grey shade display grid guard sector gyro, see compass

94 139 50 171 82 52, 157 105 135

H hard disk drive 231, 245, 263, 272, 300, 307, 310 head up RM 89, 91 heading line 53 switching the display on and off

53

I ID ideal purpose, see vector chart IHO S-52 IHO S-57 INFO key information displaying/printing i. about an object

input field insensitive display INT 1

166 31 31 32 68 34 33 69

K keel clearance page keyboard see also A/N keyboard using the k. instead of trackball

373 32 35 81

keyboard illumination keyboard template keys

411

overview of functions

32

L licence licence expiry date linepoint deletion of generating with digitizer generation of insertion of shifting of

lists marking lines

local database

236, 245 252, 290 202 207 209 206 206 206 35 36 31, 235

long-term recording

318

M main program, maintenance work manoeuvre display of impossible m.

75 395 59

manual ENC update data maintenance editing

manual ENC update file map administrative data conversion displaying/printing information about m. generation of printing of data in list form storing of

map name map number map symbols

272 189 190 202 202 312 68 203, 204 215 214 214 214

deletion of generating alphanumerically generating with digitizer generation of shifting of symbols used taking over from existing map

mapline cutting a m. generating alphanumerically generating with digitizer generation of pattern taking over from existing map

Maps (menu) MARPOL 73/78 measured mile run measurement line menu calling from tree context-sensitive m. operating a context m. operating a hierarchical m. switching the display on and off

Mercator monitor calibration

monitoring display mode MORE key mouse

202 207 212 208, 209 207 207 212 207 202 207 210 208 206 211 207 203 182 385 111 40 39 39 37 37 94, 157 81 89 32 32

for mouse functions, see trackball throughout the entire

418

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_eix.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

13 Index

document keys

manual input of

32

N

owner

138 166

P

NACOS status display nautical calculations nautical data

378

protocolling the n.

325 45

navigation data line navigation page navigation sensors setting of

navigational purpose NGO north up RM notes Notices to Mariners numbers, input of

381

361 134 78 158 89, 91 314 277, 278, 279 42

paper chart No. parameter point display insertion of

parameter point attribute passage list passage plan see also voyage planning activation defining the arrival point generation of input of planned time of arrival input of planned time of departure printing of printing of data speed limitation

155, 157 59 160 171 227 221 221, 228 228 223 223 223 224 227 223, 228

past plot

O object classes objects of vector charts OK button Own Chart see also vector chart cell chart type data maintenance editing geographical structure

Own MARPOL line MARPOL

105 78 38

80 78 273 193 80 182

own MARPOL line

own safety line see also User Chart Object ECDIS monitoring editing

107 187 182 107 187

own ship vector, see course and speed vector of own ship own ship’s data, recording of 323 own ship’s symbol defining position on screen display switching the display on and off

92 53 53

of maplines

pattern of tracks permits ARCS chart ENC cell

pilot card Pilot Data Pilot menu plan Planned Speed planning display mode

58 58

determination of the longitudinal and transverse speed

138

211 60 236 274 248, 249 389 147 67 81, 86 172, 221

93, 153 defining the centre of the displayed chart-excerpt 93

position data checking the accuracy

139

position fix deleting mark marking

position sensor accuracy recording the selected p. selection

position times

own speed

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_eix.fm / 12.08.09

relative and true display

54 54

pattern

see also own MARPOL line ECDIS monitoring editing

switching the display on and off

past plot of own ship past plots of radar targets

switching the display on and off

position, determination of p. of object

133 132 138 54 325 138 54 54 110

419

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

13 Index

position-reckoning calculation POWER DOWN (button in the Tree) prediction

382 27 54 54 145

display switching the display on and off

pre-planned track see also track

Presentation (menu) printer switching on

Profile Speed Programmed Track projection

51 71 25, 27 172, 221 22 94, 157

see also coordinate system

protocol prints purchase licence

322 284

R radius range

146, 172

automatic switch over (raster charts) determining r. between objects determining r. from objects raster charts vector charts

83 87 112 111 85 83 45, 83

range field range for raster charts, see raster chart: selecting r. to be displayed range rings 51 raster charts see also ARCS charts automatically selection of the chart chart projection displaying of existing r. displaying/printing general data displaying/printing notices and diagrams of r. horizontal datum legal aspects limited functionality name selection of the r. to be displayed setting of the r. to be displayed structure zooming

85 80 233 68 68 80 77 80 86 85 85 80 86 78

RCDS reckoning 382 regions of the ARCS charts 81, 88 remark about the waypoint 170 rendezvous point of two ships, calculation of 383

Reset button

420

38

rhumb line route, see track rudder economy

171

programming

173

safety contour safety depth sailing

100

S 100

361 373 361 sailing mode 171 changing the track by changing the sailing mode 229 SAR aircraft 55 in coastal approaches in shallow water on the open sea

scale bar scale field Scale Minimum screen

52 85 191, 201 71 44

printing the content of the s.

screen division scrolling second position sensor

35

checking of position accuracy display of past plot selection of switching on and off the display of past plot

SENC set gyro shallow contour ship's mains failure slave indicator

139 54 139 54 31 135 100 27 27 25

switching off switching on

slave monitor 27 25 114, 115

switching off switching on

sleeping targets sliding controller 34 SOLAS Regulation V20 77 specifying the centre of the chart excerpt 132, 133

speed sensor recording the selected s. selection of

Speed Sensor (menu) speed vector, see course and speed vector speed, see own speed

136 325 136 137

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_eix.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

13 Index

SPEEDPILOT display 47 SPEEDPILOT, recording the selected mode 325 SRNC 31 standard display, fast switch-over to 50 status displays of the NACOS components 378 stern line 54 switching the display on and off

54

subroutines 75 subscription 236 subscription expiry date 252, 290 subscription licence 284 sunrises and sunsets, determination of 386 system parameters 327 system position 140 System Track checking the S.T. defining of S.T. deselection of present S.T. general

system version, determination of

218 218 218 217 330

track alarms track control mode track file assigning to a different catalog copying onto the hard disk drive data restoration loading management ECDIS monitoring programming setting the T.

target term

55

editing

188

Text Pages generation, changing of management of

314 316

texts editing of

Tiles time labels display switching the display on and off

42 88 54 54

time markers display

time schedule, see voyage planning time zone to track to waypoint track administrative data check against the electronic chart checking

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_eix.fm / 12.08.09

58 141 171 171 145 147 175 173

171 306 310 310 153 305

track limit

T

target vector, see course and speed vectors of radar targets text labels 98 text notes 182

149 146 59 234 68 150 173 149 153 177 152 179 165 177 59 103, 105

data input methods direction of t. display displaying of existing tracks on world chart displaying/printing data of elements of the t. generation, work steps geometrical check input of administrative data loading notes about t. preparation of change printing of data in list form reversing the direction of storing switching the display on and off

103 173 103

track line display of the course to System Track

track name track number track segment Track/Control display Track/Schedule display trackball separate setting the cursor speed

59 219 177 177 145 63, 377 64, 376 32 330

TRACKPILOT recording the selected mode recording the switching on and off

TRACKPILOT display Tracks (menu) tree of Chart mode tree of Conning mode trial manoeuvre true motion true motion reset

325 325 47 149 41 360 127 89, 90

setting the reset area

92 92

UK Hydrographic Office

78

U

421

CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions

13 Index

uninterruptible power supply displays, operating procedures

27 405, 407, 409

update ARCS charts CM-93/2 chart CM-93/3Pro chart ENC (licensed) ENC (unlicensed)

UPS User Chart Object areas displaying/printing data editing files identifying the U. lines saving switching the display on and off symbols

User Code (CM-93/2 Chart) User Permit Number (ENC) UTM

switching off the display

W waypoint

279 300 257, 294 254 260 27 187, 188 68 181 307 102 187 182 102 185 298 248, 274

alphanumeric generation of copying of defining a w. to be approached defining the w. to be approached deletion of enlarged display of approach generation using electronic chart generation with digitizer generation, methods insertion sequence of w. generation shifting symbol in track display taking over from existing track taking over from waypoint file setting the alarm limit

waypoint data editing of sequence of editing of track

V

waypoint file

see also ENC, CM-93/3Pro chart, CM-93/2 chart 83 display of available v. displaying of existing v. 233 displaying/printing data relating objects of 68 displaying/printing general data 68 ideal purpose 83 legal aspects 77 measures for the display 95 objects 78 structure 78

vector, see course and speed vectors Visibility Groups menu

voyage planning see also passage plan at constant speed changing an activated voyage plan on basis of Planned Speed values with constant speed

voyage preparation voyage recording execution printing of content recorded data replay

98 145 223, 228 228 221 222 217

145 161, 163 164 229 218 159, 164 113 159 166 149 159, 164, 167 151 159 59 160, 164 160, 165

waypoint approach

94, 158

variable range marker, see VRM vector chart

113

see also track file generating loading

waypoint list configuring of

104 147 168 151 147 166, 180 180 153 162 161

waypoint name, see remark about the waypoint waypoint notes 172 waypoint number 170 waypoint position 171 waypoint zoom 113 weather routing 310 wheel over point 104, 146 59

display

WOP, see wheel over point world chart

233

Z zone (CM-93/2 chart) zone (CM-93/3Pro chart) zone time

298 284 141

317 320, 322 401 320

voyage time, planning of, see voyage planning VRM 111

422

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_eix.fm / 12.08.09

CHARTPILOT

Notes

Operating Instructions

Notes Space for your notes:

ED 3053 G 622 /01 (2009-06) b_cp_eno.fm / 12.08.09

423